Sketches of the Christian life and public labors of William Miller
Date: 2024-05-29T00:00:00+00:00
Keywords: Miller; William; 1782-1849

The Project Gutenberg eBook of Sketches of the Christian life and public labors of William Miller

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook.

Title: Sketches of the Christian life and public labors of William Miller

Gathered from his memoir by the late Sylvester Bliss, and from other sources

Author: James White

Contributor: Sylvester Bliss

Release date: May 29, 2024 [eBook #73721]

Language: English

Original publication: Battle Creek: Steam Press of the Seventh-day Adventist Publishing Association, 1875

Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/73721

Credits: Brian Wilson and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images generously made available by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)

*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SKETCHES OF THE CHRISTIAN LIFE AND PUBLIC LABORS OF WILLIAM MILLER ***

I remain as ever looking for the Lord Jesus Christ unto eternal life.

Wm. Miller.

LIFE OF WILLIAM MILLER.

SKETCHES
OF
THE CHRISTIAN LIFE
AND
PUBLIC LABORS
OF
WILLIAM MILLER,

GATHERED FROM HIS MEMOIR BY THE LATE SYLVESTER
BLISS, AND FROM OTHER SOURCES.

BY ELDER JAMES WHITE.

STEAM PRESS
OF THE SEVENTH-DAY ADVENTIST PUBLISHING ASSOCIATION,
BATTLE CREEK, MICH.
1875.

INTRODUCTION.

Before us is a plain volume, the title page of which reads, “Memoir of William Miller generally known as a Lecturer on the Prophecies and the Second Coming of Christ, by Sylvester Bliss, author of Analysis of Sacred Chronology, a brief Commentary on the Apocalypse,” etc.

Mr. Bliss was for more than twenty years the local and able conductor of the Advent Herald, which sustained the leading doctrines promulgated by Mr. Miller, published at Boston, Mass. The publisher of this volume, Elder Joshua V. Himes, Mr. Miller’s intimate fellow-laborer and friend, in his preface says:—

“The name of William Miller, of Low Hampton, N. Y., is too well known to require an extended introduction; but while well known, few men have been more diversely regarded than he. Those who have only heard his name associated with all that is hateful in fanaticism, have necessarily formed opinions respecting him anything but complimentary to his intelligence and sanity; but those who knew him better, esteemed him as a man of more than ordinary mental power, a cool, sagacious, and honest reasoner, a humble and devout Christian, a kind and affectionate friend, a man of great moral and social worth.

“However his public labors may be regarded by a majority of the community, it will be seen, by a perusal of his life, that these were by no means unproductive of great good. The revivals of religion which attended his labors are testified to by those who participated in them; and hundreds of souls will ever refer to him as a means, under God, of their awakening and conversion.”

“As the public learn to discriminate between the actual position of Mr. Miller and that which prejudice has conceived that he occupied, his conservativeness, and his disapprobation of every fanatical practice will be admitted, and a much more just estimate will be had of him.”

We hold that the great movement upon the second advent question, which commenced with the writings and public lectures of William Miller, has been, in its leading features, in fulfillment of prophecy. Consistent with this view, we also hold that in the providence of God Mr. Miller was raised up to do a specific work; therefore to us the history of the important events in his Christian life and public labors possess peculiar interest.

It is true that Mr. Miller and his associates and numerous friends were disappointed in the definite time of the second coming of Christ. And as might be expected from the nature of the case, those who have not sufficient interest to investigate the subject, especially those who are opposed to the doctrine of the soon coming of the Redeemer, conclude that the second advent movement has been a fanatical mistake.

But we take a more favorable view of this matter. We hold that Mr. Miller was correct in three of the four fundamental points of Adventism, while on the fourth he was mistaken. But even this one mistake, viewed in the light of Scripture and reason, does not in the least affect his general position.

1. Mr. Miller was correct in his views of the pre-millennial second appearing of Christ. No doctrine is more plainly stated and more fully sustained by the sacred Scriptures than the personal appearing and reign of Jesus Christ. And whatever may be said of the views and labors of Mr. Miller, this fact will not be denied, that very many ministers of the different denominations changed their views upon the millennium, renouncing the popular view of the conversion of the world, and the spiritual coming and reign of Jesus Christ.

2. Mr. Miller was correct in his application of the prophetic symbols of Daniel and John. In this he is sustained by Protestant expositors generally.

3. He was also correct in his exposition and application of the prophetic periods. The dates fixed upon have stood the test of the most rigid criticism. And those Adventists who have changed to other dates have done so simply because of the passing by of the first periods of expectation.

4. But Mr. Miller was mistaken in the event to occur at the close of the prophetic periods, hence his disappointment. In the case of the 2300 days of Dan. 8, which period was the main pillar in his calculations, his error was in supposing the earth to be the sanctuary of that prophecy, and that it was to be cleansed by the fires of the last day.

The primary signification of the word sanctuary is “a sacred place.” Neither the earth, nor any portion of it, has been such a place since the fall of man, and the reign of Satan and of death began. The apostle’s commentary upon the typical system, in his epistle to the Hebrews, points to two sacred places as the sanctuary of Jehovah; first, the typical tabernacle of the Jews; and, second, the greater and more perfect tabernacle of which Christ is now minister in Heaven.[1]

But other great men have made as grave mistakes relative to the event to occur at the close of the great periods of Daniel as Mr. Miller. These, however, are soon forgotten, while that of Mr. Miller is ever fresh in the public mind. The learned late Geo. Bush, Prof. of Hebrew and Oriental Literature in the New York City University, in a letter addressed to Mr. Miller, and published in the Advent Herald for March, 1844, made some very important admissions relative to his calculations of the prophetic times. Mr. Bush says:—

“Neither is it to be objected, as I conceive, to yourself or your friends, that you have devoted much time and attention to the study of the chronology of prophecy, and have labored much to determine the commencing and closing dates of its great periods. If these periods are actually given by the Holy Ghost in the prophetic books, it was doubtless with the design that they should be studied, and probably, in the end, fully understood; and no man is to be charged with presumptuous folly who reverently makes the attempt to do this. On this point, I have myself no charges to bring against you. Nay, I am even ready to go so far as to say that I do not conceive your errors on the subject of chronology to be at all of a serious nature, or, in fact, to be very wide of the truth. In taking a day as the prophetical term for a year, I believe you are sustained by the soundest exegesis, as well as fortified by the high names of Mede, Sir Isaac Newton, Bishop Newton, Kirby, Scott, Keith, and a host of others, who have long since come to substantially your conclusions on this head. They all agree that the leading periods mentioned by Daniel and John do actually expire about this age of the world, and it would be a strange logic that would convict you of heresy for holding in effect the same views which stand forth so prominent in the notices of these eminent divines. Your error, as I apprehend, lies in another direction than your chronology.”

Here Prof. Bush speaks frankly and truthfully, and his words of candor and wisdom sustain the Adventists in that feature of their faith most objectionable to their opponents. But what was the event for which Mr. Bush looked to mark the termination of the 2300 days? Let the following extract from the same letter to Mr. Miller answer:—

“You have entirely mistaken the nature of the events which are to occur when those periods have expired. This is the head and front of your expository offending. You have assumed that the close of the 2300 days of Daniel, for instance, is also the close of the period of human probation, that it is the epoch of the visible and personal second coming of Christ—of the resurrection of the righteous dead, and of the dissolution of the present mundane system. The great event before the world is not its physical conflagration, but its moral regeneration. Although there is doubtless a sense in which Christ may be said to come in connection with the passing away of the fourth empire and of the Ottoman power, and his kingdom to be illustriously established, yet that will be found to be a spiritual coming in the power of his gospel, in the ample outpouring of his Spirit, and the glorious administration of his providence.”

Evidently, Mr. Bush looked for the conversion of the world as the event to mark the termination of the 2300 days. Both Mr. Miller and Mr. Bush were right on the time question, and both were mistaken in the event to occur at the close of the great periods. Mr. Miller held that the world would be regenerated by fire, and Mr. Bush, by the gospel, at the end of the 2300 days. The conversion-of-the-world theory of Mr. Bush has had the terrible test of the last thirty-two years of apostasy, spiritual darkness, and crime. This period has been noted by departures from the faith of the gospel, and apostasies from the Christian religion. Infidelity in various forms, especially in the name of spiritualism, has spread over the Christian world with fearful rapidity, while the dark record of crime has been blackening since Prof. Bush addressed his letter to Wm. Miller. If this be the commencement of the temporal millennium, may the Lord save us from the balance. Both these great men mistook the event to terminate the 2300 days. And why should Mr. Miller be condemned for his mistake, and Mr. Bush be excused for his unscriptural conclusion? In the name of reason and justice we plead that, while the Christian world excuses Prof. Bush for his mistake, professedly pious men and women will not too severely censure Mr. Miller for his.

If it be objected that the second advent movement, as introduced in our country by Mr. Miller, could not have been in harmony with Providence, in fulfillment of prophecy, because those who engaged in it were disappointed, then we suggest that, if God’s people never have been disappointed on the very point of their expectation when prophecy was being fulfilled in their experience and history, then it may be that prophecy has not been fulfilled in the advent movement. But if one instance can be shown in Sacred History where prophecy was fulfilled by those who were entirely incorrect on the vital point of their confident expectation, then, after all, prophecy may have been fulfilled in the great second advent movement of 1840-4. This matter should be fully tested.

The prophet of God had uttered these words about five hundred years before their fulfillment: “Rejoice greatly, O daughter of Zion; shout, O daughter of Jerusalem; behold, thy King cometh unto thee; he is just, and having salvation; lowly, and riding upon an ass.” Zech. 9:9. In fulfillment of this prophecy, while Christ was riding into Jerusalem in the very humble manner expressed by the prophet, the chosen twelve, and the shouting multitude, cried, “Hosanna to the son of David! Blessed is he that cometh in the name of the Lord! Hosanna in the highest!” Matt. 21:9. The people, and even the disciples, did not as yet understand the nature of Christ’s kingdom; and they verily thought that Jesus would on that occasion claim his right to the throne of David, and then, and there, be crowned king of Israel.

And when Jesus was requested to rebuke his disciples, he replied, “I tell you that, if these should hold their peace, the stones would immediately cry out.” Prophecy had gone forth, and must be fulfilled, if the Spirit of God from necessity should call hosannas from the very stones.

But the people did not understand the nature of prophetic fulfillment of their time; and their disappointment was complete. In a few days they witnessed the dying agonies of the Son of God upon the cross, and as Christ died, their hopes in him died also. Nevertheless, prophecy was fulfilled in the ardent hopes and triumphant hosannas of those who were so soon overwhelmed with bitterest disappointment.

In gathering material for this work, we have copied very largely from Mr. Bliss, especially from the correspondence and writings of Mr. Miller which are incorporated into his Memoir. And we have thought best to introduce matter from the pen of Mr. Miller, not found in his Memoir, as his writings, probably, better represent the advent movement and cause than those of any other. And as the best means by which the people may learn the real sentiments, the candor, and the true piety of this humble servant of Jesus Christ, we would let his writings testify.

The introduction into this small volume of so large an amount of matter from Mr. Miller makes it necessary to omit a large portion of his Memoir that is devoted to his earlier life, as we hasten to his deeply interesting Christian experience. But in necessarily omitting portions, we hope not to appear to do Mr. Miller and his biographer injustice, while we content ourself with little more than space for this introduction, and foot notes.

In the preparation of this work, we have been greatly edified and refreshed in spirit, as we have necessarily read very much from the able, candid, and godly pen of Mr. Miller; and we heartily wish the same blessing upon the candid reader.

James White.

Battle Creek, January, 1875.

WILLIAM MILLER.

CHAPTER I.

ANCESTRY AND EARLY LIFE—MARRIAGE—DEISTICAL SENTIMENTS—MILITARY LIFE.

William Miller was born at Pittsfield, Mass., February 15, 1782. He was the eldest of sixteen children, five of whom were sons, and eleven were daughters. His grandfather, William Miller, moved from West Springfield, Mass., about 1747, and settled on the place in Pittsfield, now familiarly known as the Miller farm. His father, William Miller, was born December 15, 1757, and remained on the farm taken up by his father until he moved to Low Hampton, N. Y., in 1786. At the time of this removal the subject of this sketch was four years old. His biographer says:—

“In his early childhood, marks of more than ordinary intellectual strength and activity were manifested. A few years made these marks more and more noticeable to all who fell into his society. But where were the powers of the inner man to find the nutriment to satisfy their cravings, and the field for their exercise? Besides the natural elements of education, the objects, the scenes, and the changes of the natural world, which have ever furnished to all truly great minds their noblest aliment, the inspiring historical recollections associated with well-known localities of the neighboring country, and the society of domestic life, there was nothing within William’s reach but the Bible, the psalter, and prayer-book, till he had resided at Low Hampton several years.”

“In a newly settled country, the public means of education must necessarily be very limited. This was the case, at the time here referred to, in a much greater degree than it usually is with the new settlements of the present day. The school-house was not erected in season to afford the children of Low Hampton but three months’ schooling in winter, during William’s school-boy days. His mother taught him to read, so that he soon mastered the few books belonging to the family; and this prepared him to enter the ‘senior class’ when the district school opened. But if the terms were short, the winter nights were long. Pine knots could be made to supply the want of candles, lamps, and gas. And the spacious fireplace in the log house was ample enough as a substitute for the school-house and lecture-room. But even the enjoyment of these literary advantages subjected the zealous student to a somewhat severe discipline.”

“As soon as William’s age and strength rendered him able to assist his father about the farm, it was feared that his reading by night might interfere with his efficiency in the work of the day. His father insisted, therefore, that he should retire to bed when he retired himself. But the boy could not be kept in bed. When the other members of the family were all asleep, William would leave his bed, then find his way to the pitch-wood, go to the fireplace, cast himself down flat on the hearth, with his book before him, thrust his pitch-wood into the embers till it blazed well, and there spend the hours of midnight in reading. If the blaze grew dim, he would hold the stick in the embers till the heat fried the pitch out of the wood, which renewed the blaze. And when he had read as long as he dared to, or finished his book, he would find his way back to bed again, with as little noise as possible.”

“He possessed a strong physical constitution, an active and naturally well-developed intellect, and an irreproachable moral character. He had appropriated to his use and amusement the small stock of literature afforded by the family, while a child. He had enjoyed the limited advantages of the district school but a few years before it was generally admitted that his attainments exceeded those of the teachers usually employed. He had drunk in the inspiration of the natural world around him, and of the most exciting events in his country’s history. His imagination had been quickened, and his heart warmed, by the adventures and gallantries of fiction, and his intellect enriched by history. And some of his earliest efforts with the pen, as well as the testimony of his associates, show that his mind and heart were ennobled by the lessons, if not by the spirit and power of religion.

“What, now, would have been the effect of what is called a regular course of education? Would it have perverted him, as it has thousands? or would it have made him instrumental of greater good in the cause of God? Would it have performed its appropriate work, that of disciplining, enlarging, and furnishing the mind, leaving unimpaired by the process its natural energies, its sense of self-dependence as to man, and its sense of dependence and accountability as to God? or would it have placed him in the crowded ranks of those who are content to share in the honor of repeating the twaddle, true or false, which passes for truth in the school or sect which has ‘made them what they are’?

“We think it would have been difficult to pervert him; but where so many who have been regarded as highly promising have been marred by the operation, he would have been in great danger. He might have become externally a better subject for the artist; but we doubt if he would have been a better subject to be used as an instrument of Providence. There are those who survive the regular course uninjured. There are those who are benefited by it so far as to be raised to a level with people of ordinary capacity, which they never could attain without special aid. And there is a third class, who are a stereotype representation of what the course makes them; if they raise a fellow-man out of the mire, they never get him nearer to Heaven than the school where they were educated.

“Whatever might have been the result of any established course of education, in the case of William Miller, such a course was beyond his reach; he was deprived of the benefit, he has escaped the perversion. Let us be satisfied. But still we must record the fact that it would have been extremely gratifying if something of the kind could have been placed at his command. He desired it. He longed for it with an intensity of feeling that approached to agony. He pondered the question over and over, whether it was possible to accomplish what appeared to him to be not only a desirable gratification and honor, but almost essential to his existence.

“It should be noticed, however, that his circumstances became somewhat relieved as he advanced in years. The log house had given place to a comfortable frame house; and, in this, William had a room he was permitted to call his own. He had means to provide himself with a new book, occasionally, and with candles to read at night, so that he could enjoy his chosen luxury, during his leisure hours, in comparative comfort.

“It was on one of these times of leisure that an incident occurred which marked a new era in his history, though it did not introduce fully such an era as he desired. There was a medical gentleman in the vicinity of his residence, by the name of Smith, who possessed an ample fortune, and was known to be very liberal. In the plans which had passed through the mind of William, to secure the means of maturing his education, he had thought of Dr. Smith. At any rate it could do no harm to apply to him. The plan was carried so far as to write a letter, setting forth to that gentleman his intense desires, his want of means to gratify them, his hopes and his prospects, if successful.

“The letter was nearly ready to be sent to its destination, when William’s father entered the room, which we may properly call his son’s study. Perhaps it had not occurred to the son to consult his father in the matter; and to have it come to his notice in so unexpected a manner somewhat disturbed him for the moment. But there was the letter in his father’s presence. He took it, and read it. It affected him deeply. For the first time, he seemed to feel his worldly condition to be uncomfortable, on his son’s account. He wanted to be rich then, for the gratification of his son, more than for any other human being.

“There were the irrepressible yearnings of his first-born, which he had treated in their childish development as an annoyance, now spread out in manly but impassioned pleadings to a comparative stranger to afford him help! There were plans and hopes for the future, marked by an exhibition of judgment and honor that could not fail of commanding attention! All that was tender in that father’s heart, all that was generous in the soldier, and all that could make him ambitious of a worthy successor, was moved by that letter. The tears fell, and words of sympathy were spoken; but the plan was impossible.

“The letter of William’s was never sent. It had the effect, however, of changing his father’s course toward him, so that he was rather encouraged than hindered in his favorite pursuits. By this time, the natural genius and attainments of young William Miller had distinguished him among his associates. To the young folks, he became a sort of scribbler-general. If any one wanted ‘verses made,’ a letter to send, some ornamental and symbolic design to be interpreted by ‘the tender passion,’ or anything which required extra taste and fancy in the use of the pen, it was pretty sure to be planned, if not executed, by him. Some of these first-fruits of his genius are still in existence; and, although it requires no critic to discover that he had never received lessons of any of the ‘great masters,’ still these productions would compare very favorably with similar efforts by those whose advantages have been far superior to his.

“The facts connected with the early life of Mr. Miller, and the incidents in his personal history, now spread before the readers of this work, will enable them to see, in the boy, a type of the future man. The most embarrassing circumstances of his condition could not master his perseverance. And if he could not accomplish all he desired to, the success which attended his efforts, in spite of great discouragements, was truly surprising. The position he had won opened to him a fairer prospect, though still surrounded with serious dangers.”

William Miller was happily married in 1803, and settled in Poultney, Vt. His biographer continues:—

“One of the first objects of his interest, after he had become settled, was the village library. His constant use of its volumes brought him into the society of a superior class of men. His wife took a deep interest in his improvement and promotion; and made it her pleasure and business to relieve him as much as possible from all the family cares which might call him away from his books. She felt very sure that it would not be lost time on his part, or lost labor on her own part. Still, the time he could devote to books, on the best possible arrangement, was not so much as he desired; for he had been trained to the farming business, and he made that his employment, for some years, in Poultney.

“One effort of genius, though trifling in itself, which attracted toward him the public attention of the village and its vicinity, was a poetic effusion, the inspiration of his patriotic ardor. Preparations were going on, at the time, for the public celebration of the anniversary of our national independence; and the inspiration of that memorable day seized Mr. Miller while he was hoeing corn in the field. He had written poetry before; and so, after the labor of the field was done, he put his thoughts into a written form, to be adapted to the familiar old tune, called ‘Delight.’

“The appointed marshal, or manager, of the services of the day, was Esquire Ashley, who was then a neighbor of Mr. Miller, and afterward became an intimate friend. But the poet of the day, as he became, was too reserved to offer his tribute, though there is reason to believe it would have been thankfully accepted; for the business of the manager hardly afforded him time to write poetry for the occasion, if he had the ability, or even to select it. Mr. Miller was willing to have his piece seen and used if it was thought to be suitable, but he could not announce himself as its author. So he took the manuscript and walked as usual to Esquire Ashley’s house. He seated himself leisurely below the chamber window, where that gentleman was making his preparations for the great celebration. Then, taking an opportunity to place it near where Mrs. Ashley was at work, he shortly after withdrew. As soon as Mrs. Ashley discovered the paper, she took it to her husband, supposing it was one of his papers which had fallen from the window. He took it and read the hymn; it struck him as being just what was wanted; but he knew nothing of its origin. It was carried to several others, who were thought of as its author, but no author or owner of it could be found. ‘Perhaps an angel from Heaven had sent it.’ So they talked at any rate.

“However, the hymn was copied with the pen, and the sheets multiplied to supply all who wished for one. The day came, and the hymn was sung with the greatest enthusiasm to the favorite old tune, ‘Delight’! But among those who distributed the copies, there was a worthy Baptist minister, by the name of Kendrick, who had taken a warm interest in Mr. Miller. His suspicions had pointed him to the author of the piece; and when Mr. Miller came, with others, to get a copy, his appearance and manner confirmed Elder Kendrick’s suspicions. Further inquiry brought forth a confession of authorship. To use the phrase of the old folks, ‘it was a great feather in his cap.’ He had touched the right chord in the right way. The pious and patriotic emotions of the aged were revived; the ardent responses of the young to these patriotic emotions found expression in the new hymn; and nothing more was needed to make its author the popular favorite.

“It is not known that an entire copy of the hymn is now in existence. A sister of its author has repeated to us a few of the stanzas, which we give, more for the purpose of exhibiting his religious and patriotic sentiments than from an expectation that our readers will be affected as were those who first heard it. Its style and meter were strictly in accordance with the standard contained in the hymn book used on Sundays, doubtless the only standard the writer of it was familiar with; and the effect arose from the natural force and simplicity of the versified thoughts, and the perfect ease of the musical execution. But to the fragments of the hymn:—

...

“‘Our Independence dear,
Bought with the price of blood,
Let us receive with care,
And trust our Maker, God.
For he’s the tower
To which we fly;
His grace is nigh
In every hour!

“‘Nor shall Columbia’s sons
Forget the price it cost,
As long as water runs,
Or leaves are nipped by frost.
Freedom is thine;
Let millions rise,
Defend the prize
Through rolling time!

...

“‘There was a Washington,
A man of noble fame,
Who led Columbia’s sons
To battle on the plain;
With skill they fought;
The British host,
With all their boast,
Soon came to nought!

...

“‘Let traitors hide their heads,
And party quarrels cease;
Our foes are struck with dread,
When we declare for peace.
Firm let us be,
And rally round
The glorious sound
Of liberty!’

“The reader will see that the piece was designed for home consumption. It was exactly suited to the occasion; and was marked throughout, in spirit, style, and thought, with the elements of his education. And this production, with others in prose and poetry, made him at once a notable in the community; secured to him a wide circle of friends, and opened the way for his promotion to office and honor. The old men were all ready to give him a lift, almost without distinction of ‘party.’ The young folks made his house a place of common resort, to which they gathered to spend their leisure hours; while himself and wife became the central unit which drew them together and kept all in motion.”

“In his political sentiments, he was decidedly democratic. But he had intelligence enough to see that the practical patriotism of men did not depend so much on the party name they took as on their common sense and integrity. He knew that there were bad men enough in either party to ruin the country, if they had the power to do it; and good men enough in the same parties to promote the public prosperity to the best of their ability. His position, therefore, was taken in view of the tendency of different political principles and public measures, in their ultimate bearing on the established institutions of the country. He enjoyed, in a remarkable degree, the confidence of both the political parties of the day.”

“In the case of most men of the world, with the avenues to honor, wealth, and domestic happiness wide open before them, it is not often that a public station so commanding would be voluntarily left for the hardships, privations, and dangers, of the camp. What strong impulses could have turned him off in that direction? Already the business of his office had placed him in easy circumstances. Such was the amount of his business that he kept two horses, one of which he drove, while the other was kept up to rest, week by week, alternately. He enjoyed the respect and unbounded confidence of the public; and he only needed to make himself still as worthy of public favor as he had been hitherto, and then with life and health, all that this world could afford was within his reach. His preference for the army, so far as we know, sprang from these two motives: First, he desired to participate in the glory which rested on the memory of those he held the most dear, in the history of his country and of his family. Second, he hoped to enjoy a more inviting exhibition of human nature in the scenes of military life than experience or books had afforded in civil life.

“His desire for something noble in character was greater than that for wealth or unsubstantial fame. He was satisfied with the trial of what was around him, and wished to try a new field. This is stated by himself in his published memoir: ‘In the meantime, I continued my studies, storing my mind with historical knowledge. The more I read, the more dreadfully corrupt did the character of man appear. I could discern no bright spot in the history of the past. Those conquerors of the world, and heroes of history, were apparently but demons in human form. All the sorrow, suffering, and misery in the world, seemed to be increased in proportion to the power they obtained over their fellows. I began to feel very distrustful of all men. In this state of mind, I entered the service of my country. I fondly cherished the idea that I should find one bright spot at least in the human character, as a star of hope—a love of country—Patriotism.’

“Happy, indeed, should we consider ourselves if there were no drawback to this apparent prosperity to be noted. Rarely is it the case that the honor of God and the honor of man are coincident. If Mr. Miller was not puffed up by the latter, he had lost much of his regard for the former. In his worldly advancement, there was a serious and dangerous departure from the Christian sentiments which were instilled into his mind during his early life. Still there was no defect in his character which the most rigid worldly standard of external morality could detect. He was perfectly upright and honorable in all his dealings. He was generous, almost to a fault, with his friends, compassionate and liberal to the poor, and he held in the highest contempt every act that could tarnish a man’s personal and private honor. He was not profane, even to the extent that too many are who pass for gentlemen. He was not intemperate, although he was very much exposed to this ruinous habit from the example of those into whose company his business called him—a habit which had broken down some of his predecessors in office, by rendering them incapable of attending to their business. He escaped from it without the least stain.

“It could be shown, from sentiments embodied in some of his essays, in addresses delivered before societies existing at the time, and in his poetic effusions, that his moral and religious views were of a type that would pass with the world as philosophical, pure, and sublime. But the men with whom he associated from the time of his removal to Poultney, and to whom he was considerably indebted for his worldly favors, were deeply affected with skeptical principles and deistical theories. They were not immoral men; but, as a class, were good citizens, and generally of serious deportment, humane and benevolent. However, they rejected the Bible as the standard of religious truth, and endeavored to make its rejection plausible by such aid as could be obtained from the writings of Voltaire, Hume, Volney, Paine, Ethan Allen, and others. Mr. Miller studied these works closely, and at length avowed himself a deist. As he has stated the period of his deistical life to have been twelve years, that period must have begun in 1804; for he embraced or returned to the Christian faith in 1816. It may fairly be doubted, however, notwithstanding his known thoroughness and consistency, whether Mr. Miller ever was fully settled in that form of deism which reduces man to a level with the brutes, as to the supposed duration of their existence. And the question is worthy of a little inquiry, To what extent was he a deist?

“Robert Hall, with his usual comprehensiveness and truth, has remarked that ‘infidelity is the offspring of corrupt Christianity.’ It is much more successful in the discovery of supposed arguments against the existence of the Deity of the Scriptures, in the perversion of that which is divine, than in its institution and appointed use. Voltaire chose the ruins of human nature, in their most perverted and blighted condition, and Volney chose the ‘ruins’ of human habitations, for the theater on which to display their mighty but evil genius. And they conjured forth the same evil spirit which had instigated or caused the ruin, in each case, to utter a false testimony, in reference both to ruined man and his ruined habitations. These men became the oracles of that falsehood to the world! But it was never the intention of God, that man, or the world fitted up for his habitation, should be in this ruined condition; it is the work of rebellion and sin!—of sin against the greatest displays of love and goodness that were possible, and against the purest and most reasonable law that could be given; of rebellion that was marked by contempt of the universal Sovereign, and of authority enforced by the lightest test of submission. And God has spoken to us, to inform us that he has made provision for the restoration of all men, and that it is his purpose to restore all who become interested in that provision, with the world now in ruins, to a condition which no history but the Bible has made known.

“Paine could rail and belie the supernaturalism of the Bible, like an incarnate demon, and then indorse all the supernaturalism of the most stupid pagan mythology, in his patriotic and poetic productions, which he published to the world. And that mind must be strangely out of balance naturally, or wretchedly perverted, which could bow to the authority of Volney’s ‘specter,’ or Paine’s paganism,—the pure creations of fictions and superstition,—and then reject the Bible because it demands faith in that which is not familiar to the senses.

“It is generally true that those who become decided skeptics take that most hopeless position, because they have become so depraved or perverted that they feel the want of an infidel theory to afford them a license and quiet, in their chosen course. It was not so with Mr. Miller. In the days of his greatest devotion to deistical sentiments, he desired something better. He had his difficulties with the Bible under its current interpretations, and he tells us what these difficulties were. But a man like him could never be made to believe it consistent or safe to abandon the Bible, unless something more worthy of his trust were first put in its place. And such a condition must secure to that matchless book a certain and permanent supremacy. This was Mr. Miller’s safety.

“But if the poison which had infused its taint into the system did not appear as a loathsome blotch upon the surface, its victim was not only kept away from the sole remedy, but that remedy was treated by him with an afflicting and dangerous levity. This was now the painful feature of his case. Once it was not so. When he was a mere boy—‘between the years of seven and ten’—as he tells us, a sense of the plague of his heart and of his lost condition caused the deepest concern in reference to his future prospects. He spent much time in trying to invent some plan whereby he might find acceptance with God. He tried the common and most natural course, in such a state of mind, that of being ‘very good.’ ‘I will do nothing wrong, tell no lies, and obey my parents,’ he thought. But his mind was still unsettled and unhappy.

“Good works are very proper, but they can never be accepted as the price of pardon and redemption. He thought, too, as all do in the same state of feeling, that something might be effected by sacrifice. ‘I will give up the most cherished objects I possess.’ But this also failed. There is only ‘one offering’ that can avail. In that, every sinner must rest his hope and plea, or remain without peace with God. The experience of Mr. Miller’s childhood made him thoughtful and serious, if it did not result in the attainment of this inward sense of peace. Under his inward conflicts and apprehensions of worldly sorrow, when a young man (in 1803), he poured out his soul to ‘religion’ in this touching strain:—

“‘Come, blest religion, with thy angel’s face,

Dispel this gloom, and brighten all the place;

Drive this destructive passion from my breast;

Compose my sorrows, and restore my rest;

Show me the path that Christian heroes trod,

Wean me from earth, and raise my soul to God!’

“‘Two things,’ says D’Aubigne, ‘are essential to sound Christian experience. The first is a knowledge of our condition as sinners; the second is a knowledge of the grace of God, in its manifestations to the soul.’ Mr. Miller, like most if not all others, had learned the first in his early life; but he had evidently not then attained the second of these elements of a true religious life. And, by not attaining that important position in the process of deliverance from our fallen condition, he became wearied of a sense of his need, if he did not lose it entirely. In the chosen employment of his intellect, with a more ample supply of books at command; in the midst of an admiring and merry social circle; in receiving the honors of the world from the hand of his superiors, and in reaping an honorable portion of the treasures of the world, why should he desire any other source of enjoyment—and one altogether unknown, unappreciated and unpopular, in the circle where he moved? What use had he for that religion he had seen verified and felt the need of, in the less cultivated family circle at Low Hampton?

“If those who never become acquainted with the lessons of truth may be satisfied without the consolation of which its lessons speak, with those who are made familiar with these lessons, it is generally very different. They can seldom feel satisfied with themselves without making a hearty surrender of life, and all God has given them, to his service. As they know this is their reasonable service, anything short of this, they know, must be unreasonable. But how few take this narrow path! How many turn away to join the multitude! The talent, however, is in their hands. They must dispose of that, if they will not submit themselves to the disposal of its Giver. Some make it the reason for entertaining and venting a more malignant and blasphemous form of hatred against everything which bears the name of God. This quiets all fear of being reproached as religious, and it is the awful snare into which many are led by the fear of man. Another class of these unfaithful recipients of the talent of truth try to get along with a popular external expression of respect for its claims; and thus they escape the dreaded reproach.

“A third class, naturally too frank even to appear to venerate what they do not heartily respect, and too deeply impressed with the goodness of the Deity to become blasphemers, but still too fearful of man to encounter his frown, seek to save themselves from it by making the defects of the humble but unpopular representatives of truth a subject of merriment. This course was taken by Mr. Miller. This is the class to which he then belonged. He banished from his memory the impressions of his early life, and must silence all fear of reproach on account of them; so he gave to his skeptical associates an assurance that he had mastered his superstition, as they deemed it, by performing, for their sport, the devotions of the worship to which he had been accustomed, and especially by mimicking the devotional peculiarities of some of his own family relatives.

“Among these pious relatives there were two, in particular, whose presence or names were calculated to remind him of his repudiated obligations, and whose influence over him he labored to repel, by making them the theme of his mirth. One of these was his grandfather Phelps, pastor of the Baptist church at Orwell; the other was his uncle, Elihu Miller, who was settled as the pastor of the Baptist church at Low Hampton, in 1812. These were men of unpolished exterior, but of decided character, strong voice, and ardent devotion. Men whose features were so strongly marked would make fine subjects for striking portraits; and if all their traits could be brought out, there would be found a large bestowment of the treasure of heavenly wisdom and virtue in the earthen vessels. It was the excellence of the heavenly traits, and the roughness of the earthly, which made them so desirable and so ready subjects of caricature.

“These humble ambassadors of Christ, and other pious relatives, often visited Mr. Miller’s house at Poultney; and, although he received them with affection and respect, and entertained them in the most generous manner, he was in the habit of imitating, with the most ludicrous gravity, their words, tones of voice, gestures, fervency, and even the grief they might manifest for such as himself, to afford a kind of entertainment for his skeptical associates, which they seemed to enjoy with peculiar relish.

“Little did he then think that he was measuring to these faithful men what was to be measured to him again, pressed down, shaken together, and running over. And probably it was not known to him that these praying men had already expressed the hope—almost a prophecy—that their prayers would be answered, and that he would some day be engaged in perpetuating the work they were endeavoring to advance.

“There was more than one heart that was almost inconsolably afflicted by this conduct of Mr. Miller. His mother knew of it, and it was as the bitterness of death to her. Some of his pious sisters witnessed, with tears, his improprieties. And when his mother spoke of the affliction to her father Phelps, he would console her by saying, ‘Don’t afflict yourself too deeply about William. There is something for him to do yet in the cause of God!’

“Although Mr. Miller avowed himself a deist, and was recognized as such by deists, this offense against all propriety, in trifling with what his dearest relatives regarded as most sacred, this thoughtless trifling with the humble messengers of the gospel was the darkest feature in his character. To him it was the most natural course which the circumstances of his position could suggest, and, undoubtedly, appeared to be the least violation of former convictions and educational proprieties which would allow him to stand as he did, in the favor and confidence of his unbelieving associates. He had not then become acquainted with the Source of strength by which he might have been sustained before the enemies of the Christian faith; he was unprepared to take the Christian position, and he became what the influence around him naturally determined. To give the true state of the case, the darker shades must appear with the lighter. He took the position of an unbeliever. But that he was not a deist of a rank type will appear more fully from his own statements.

“We have thus stated Mr. Miller’s social and public position, his worldly prospects, and his religious state. The longsuffering of God was still to be exercised toward him. He was to become satisfied with the insufficiency of the world. Then the light which had become darkness was to be revived within him; the breath of life from God would disclose the all-sufficient portion, and he would go forth to build again the faith he had destroyed.

“Many were the prayers that ascended in his behalf; and some of those who were the most deeply interested for him would pass away before their prayers would be answered. But the great lessons of longsuffering, of faithfulness, and of the power to deliver out of the most artful snare of the adversary, would be the more magnified, on the part of God; the praying, who were yet alive, would hail the answer with greater joy, and the delivered one would be the better prepared to take others, in the same fearful condition, by the hand, and lead them to Him who came to seek and save the lost!”

William Miller received a captain’s commission and entered the army in 1812. His biographer gives more than thirty pages relative to his military life, in which those whose hearts are fired by reading of victories gained by the use of carnal weapons can see much to admire in him as a patriotic soldier. But as our principal object is to bring him before the public as an intelligent Bible Christian, a bold soldier of Jesus Christ, and an able and sound expositor of the word of life, we pass over his military career, giving only one incident, which will be of interest to the Christian reader.

“A few reflections on this period of Mr. Miller’s life and the mention of an incident or two of some interest, must close this chapter. Everybody is familiar with the fact that the army is a bad school of morality. Intemperance, licentiousness, gambling, fighting, stealing, profanity, and Sabbath-breaking, are the common vices of army life. It was the constant practice of these vices by those around him which sickened Mr. Miller of their society. And that he should escape entirely from the contamination would be too much to expect. However, it is both a matter of surprise, and highly creditable to him, that his moral integrity and habits were not affected to a hopeless extent. There were, however, some redeeming traits to the too generally dark moral picture of army life. There were a few men in the 30th regiment of infantry who were known as men of prayer and undoubted piety. And an incident in their history, which Mr. Miller has often spoken of with great interest, should be mentioned. One of these praying men, if memory has not failed in the case, was Sergeant Willey.

“His tent was occasionally used for the purpose of holding a prayer-meeting. On one of these occasions, when Mr. Miller was ‘the officer for the day,’ he saw a light in this tent, and, wishing to know what was going on, as his duty required, he drew near, and heard the voice of prayer. He said nothing at the time; but, the next day, on recollecting it, he thought it was a good opportunity to try the sergeant’s piety, and indulge his own relish for a joke, by calling Sergeant Willey to account for having his tent occupied by a gambling party the night before. When the sergeant appeared, Captain Miller affected great seriousness, and spoke in a tone bordering on severity, as follows: ‘You know, Sergeant Willey, that it is contrary to the army regulations to have any gambling in the tents at night. And I was very sorry to see your tent lit up for that purpose last night. We cannot have any gambling at such times. You must put a stop to it at once. I hope I shall not have to speak to you again about it!’

“The poor sergeant stood thunderstruck, for a moment, to hear such an imputation cast on him and his associates. And then, hardly daring to look up, he replied, with the most touching simplicity, and in a manner which showed that he was alike unwilling to suffer the scandal of entertaining gamblers, or to make a parade of his devotions, ‘We were not gambling, sir!’ Captain Miller was touched with his appearance. But, still affecting greater severity than at first, being determined to press him to a confession, he said to the sergeant, ‘Yes, you were gambling! And it won’t do! What else could you have your tent lighted up for, all the evening, if you were not gambling?’

“Sergeant Willey now felt himself under the necessity of being a little more explicit, and answered, in a manner deeply expressive of his grief and innocence, ‘We were praying, sir.’ Captain Miller, by this time, was almost in tears; and indicating, by a motion of his hand, that he was satisfied, and that the praying sergeant might withdraw, he continued alone for some time, sensibly affected by the courage manifested by these Christians in that ungodly camp, by the becoming deportment of their representative under such a serious scandal, and by the doubtful course he had taken in reference to them.”

“One fact must be mentioned, which will speak more than volumes in behalf of his commanding integrity, as it shows the place he occupied in the respect and confidence of the soldiers. After the war, two members of his company, who lived as neighbors in the extreme northern part of Vermont, had some business difficulties, which grew to be so serious that they could hardly live together as neighbors on speaking terms, to say the least. This was a great affliction to themselves, as brother soldiers, to their families, and to the whole neighborhood. These men had often thought of their former captain, though they were much older than he was, and wished the difficulties could be submitted to his examination and decision. But it was a long way to his residence, and the time and cost of the journey seemed too much to admit of such an arrangement. However, the matter became a source of so much trouble that the proposition was made by one, and gladly accepted by the other, to visit Captain Miller; to submit the case to him, by telling each his own story, and to abide by his decision. The long journey was performed by these old soldiers separately, as duelists go to the place of single combat. They arrived at Captain Miller’s nearly at the same time. Arrangements were made for a hearing. Each told his story. The decision was made known, after all the facts of the case had been duly considered. It was received in good faith by the parties. They took each other cordially by the hand, spent a little time with their captain, and returned to their homes in company, as friends and brothers.

“Paradoxical as it may appear, some of the most distinguished and honorable soldiers have been the most successful bloodless peace-makers, while, on the other hand, some of the most contemptible cowards, with peaceable pretensions always on their lips, have distinguished themselves by very little besides their successful contrivances to keep all engaged in war with whom they have had to do. Without claiming any special distinction for Mr. Miller on the score of what are styled brilliant achievements in the field of danger, the character of a great lover of peace belonged to him as a distinguishing personal trait. He delighted in peace, naturally; it is not known that he ever intentionally provoked a quarrel; and a considerable number of cases could be cited, in which he has been called to perform the office of a peace-maker, and in the duties of which he has been remarkably successful. But enough. More must be left unwritten than it would be practicable or necessary to write.

“The watchful Providence which guarded him in the hour of deadly peril; the longsuffering which spared him while neglecting the talents bestowed, or misusing them in rebellion against the Giver; and that wisdom and grace which overruled all the dangers experienced, and the derelictions practiced, as in many other persons of distinguished usefulness, demand our hearty adoration. The close of Mr. Miller’s military life was to be the commencement of a new era in his history. The circumstances which preceded that change, the means and instrumentalities employed in its accomplishment, and the practical results which immediately followed in the circle of his acquaintance, must be left to another chapter.”

The following, relative to Mr. Miller’s connection with the army, we take from his “Apology and Defense,” published in 1845:—

“In 1813, I received a captain’s commission in the U. S. service, and continued in the army until peace was declared. While there, many occurrences served to weaken my confidence in the correctness of deistical principles. I was led frequently to compare this country to that of the children of Israel, before whom God drove out the inhabitants of their land. It seemed to me that the Supreme Being must have watched over the interests of this country in an especial manner, and delivered us from the hands of our enemies.

“I was particularly impressed with this view when I was in the battle of Plattsburg, when with 1,500 regulars, and about 4,000 volunteers, we defeated the British, who were 15,000 strong; we being also successful at the same time in an engagement with the British fleet on the lake. At the commencement of the battle, we looked upon our own defeat as almost certain, and yet we were victorious. So surprising a result against such odds did seem to me like the work of a mightier power than man.”

CHAPTER II.

REMOVAL TO LOW HAMPTON—HIS CONVERSION—STUDY OF THE BIBLE—RULES OF INTERPRETATION, ETC.

“On the retirement of Mr. Miller from the army, he removed his family from Poultney, Vt., to Low Hampton, N. Y., to begin there the occupation of farming. His father had died there, in the year 1812, leaving the homestead encumbered with a mortgage. That was cancelled by Mr. Miller, who permitted his mother to live there with his brother Solomon, while he purchased for himself another farm, in the neighborhood, about half a mile to the west. This lay mostly above the general level of the valley of the Poultney river, and comprised about two hundred acres of land, with a surface somewhat uneven, and with soil similar to that usually found in sections geologically marked by black slate and limestone. Two miles to the east was the village of Fairhaven, Vt., near the Poultney river; and eight miles to the west, on the southern extremity of Lake Champlain, at the foot of bold, precipitous hills, was the village of Whitehall, N. Y.

“On this spot, in 1815, Mr. Miller erected a convenient farm-house, similar to those built throughout the interior of New England at that epoch. It was of wood, two stories high, with an ell projecting in the rear. The front and ends were painted white, with green blinds, and the back side was red. It fronts to the north. A small yard, inclosed by a picket fence, and ornamented by lilacs, raspberry and rose-bushes, separates it from the public road leading to Fairhaven, which is one of the interesting objects in the foreground of the extended view to the east, as seen from the window of the ‘east room,’ so full of tender and holy recollections to all visitors.

“To the west of the house, a few rods distant, is a beautiful grove, where, in later times, he often prayed and wept. This spot was selected by the political party to which Mr. Miller belonged, for the place of a public celebration of the national independence, on its anniversary, July 4, 1816. Mr. Miller was selected as the marshal of the day; but, not fancying a party celebration, he used his influence so that all persons, irrespective of party, were invited to partake of its festivities. In those days of party excitement this was considered a wonderful stretch of charity.

“Mr. Miller’s grandfather Phelps was in the practice of preaching at the house of Mr. M.’s father, when he made his occasional visits. There was no church at the time in that section of the town. Through his labors Mr. Miller’s mother was converted; and a little church was there organized, as a branch of the Baptist church in Orwell, Vt.

“In 1812, Elisha Miller, an uncle of the subject of this memoir, was settled over the church in Low Hampton, and a small meeting-house was afterward erected. On Mr. Miller’s removal to Low Hampton, he became a constant attendant, except in the absence of the preacher, at that place of worship, and contributed liberally to its support. His relation to the pastor, and the proximity of his house, caused it to become the head-quarters of the denomination on extra as well as on ordinary occasions. There the preachers from a distance found food and shelter; and, though fond of bantering them on their faith, and making their opinions a subject of mirth with his infidel friends, they always found a home beneath his roof.

“In the absence of the pastor, public worship was conducted by the deacons, who, as a substitute for the sermon, read a printed discourse, usually from ‘Proud-foot’s Practical Sermons.’ Mr. Miller’s mother noticed that, on such occasions, he was not in his seat, and she remonstrated with him. He excused his absence on the ground that he was not edified by the manner in which the deacons read; and intimated that if he could do the reading, he should always be present. This being suggested to those grave officials, they were pleased with the idea; and, after that, they selected the sermon as before, but Mr. Miller did the reading, although still entertaining deistical sentiments.

“The time had now come when God, by his providence and grace, was about to interpose to enlist the patriotic soldier in another kind of warfare; when, to his mind, so fond of those departments of truth which appealed only to reason and sense, was to be opened a more inspiring field; when the persevering and delighted student of history was to see and appreciate the connection between the most stirring scenes and mightiest revolutions in this world’s affairs and God’s great plan of redemption, to which all the events of time are made subordinate.

“Detecting himself in an irreverent use of the name of God, as before related, he was convicted of its sinfulness, and retired to his beautiful grove, and there, in meditation on the works of nature and Providence, he endeavored to penetrate the mystery of the connection between the present and a future state of existence.

“As a farmer, he had had more leisure for reading; and he was at an age when the future of man’s existence will demand a portion of his thoughts. He found that his former views gave him no assurance of happiness beyond the present life. Beyond the grave, all was dark and gloomy. To use his own words: “Annihilation was a cold and chilling thought, and accountability was sure destruction to all. The heavens were as brass over my head, and the earth as iron under my feet. Eternity!—what was it? And death—why was it? The more I reasoned, the further I was from demonstration. The more I thought, the more scattered were my conclusions. I tried to stop thinking, but my thoughts would not be controlled. I was truly wretched, but did not understand the cause. I murmured and complained, but knew not of whom. I knew that there was a wrong, but knew not how or where to find the right. I mourned, but without hope.” He continued in this state of mind for some months, feeling that eternal consequences might hang on the nature and object of his belief.

“The anniversary of the battle of Plattsburg—September 11—was celebrated in all that region, for some years, with much enthusiasm. In 1816, arrangements had been made for its observance, by a ball, at Fairhaven. The stirring scenes of the late campaign being thus recalled, Captain Miller entered into the preparations for the expected festivities with all the ardor of the soldier. In the midst of these, it was announced that Dr. B. would preach on the evening previous to the ball. In the general gathering to that meeting, Captain Miller and his help attended, more from curiosity than from other actuating cause.

“They left Captain Miller’s house in high glee. The discourse was from Zech. 2:4: ‘Run! speak to this young man!’ It was a word in season. On their return, Mrs. M., who had remained at home, observed a wonderful change in their deportment. Their glee was gone, and all were deeply thoughtful, and not disposed to converse in reply to her questions respecting the meeting, the ball, &c. They were entirely incapacitated for any part in the festive arrangements. Other managers of the ball were equally unfitted for it; and the result was that it was indefinitely postponed. The seriousness extended from family to family, and in the several neighborhoods in that vicinity meetings for prayer and praise took the place of mirth and the dance.

“On the Lord’s day following, it devolved on Captain Miller, as usual in the minister’s absence, to read a discourse of the deacons’ selection. They had chosen one on the Importance of Parental Duties. Soon after commencing, he was overpowered by the inward struggle of emotion, with which the entire congregation deeply sympathized, and took his seat. His deistical principles seemed an almost insurmountable difficulty with him. Soon after, ‘suddenly,’ he says, ‘the character of a Saviour was vividly impressed upon my mind. It seemed that there might be a Being so good and compassionate as to himself atone for our transgressions, and thereby save us from suffering the penalty of sin. I immediately felt how lovely such a Being must be; and imagined that I could cast myself into the arms of, and trust in the mercy of, such an One. But the question arose, How can it be proved that such a Being does exist? Aside from the Bible, I found that I could get no evidence of the existence of such a Saviour, or even of a future state. I felt that to believe in such a Saviour without evidence would be visionary in the extreme.

“‘I saw that the Bible did bring to view just such a Saviour as I needed; and I was perplexed to find how an uninspired book should develop principles so perfectly adapted to the wants of a fallen world. I was constrained to admit that the Scriptures must be a revelation from God. They became my delight; and in Jesus I found a friend. The Saviour became to me the chiefest among ten thousand; and the Scriptures, which before were dark and contradictory, now became the lamp to my feet and light to my path. My mind became settled and satisfied. I found the Lord God to be a Rock in the midst of the ocean of life. The Bible now became my chief study, and I can truly say, I searched it with great delight. I found the half was never told me. I wondered why I had not seen its beauty and glory before, and marveled that I could have ever rejected it. I found everything revealed that my heart could desire, and a remedy for every disease of the soul. I lost all taste for other reading, and applied my heart to get wisdom from God.’

“Mr. Miller immediately erected the family altar; publicly professed his faith in that religion which had been food for his mirth, by connecting himself with the little church that he had despised; opened his house for meetings of prayer; and become an ornament and pillar in the church, and an aid to both pastor and people. The die was cast, and he had taken his stand for life as a soldier of the cross, as all who knew him felt assured; and henceforth the badge of discipleship, in the church or world, in his family or closet, indicated whose he was and whom he served.

“His pious relations had witnessed with pain his former irreligious opinions; how great were their rejoicings now! The church, favored with his liberality, and edified by his reading, but pained by his attacks on their faith, could now rejoice with the rejoicing. His infidel friends regarded his departure from them as the loss of a standard-bearer. And the new convert felt that henceforth, wherever he was, he must deport himself as a Christian, and perform his whole duty. His subsequent history must show how well this was done.

“To the church, his devotion of himself to his Master’s service was as welcome as his labors were efficient. The opposite party, especially the more gifted of them, regarded him as a powerful, and, therefore, a desirable, antagonist. He knew the strength of both parties. That of the former he had often tested, when, in his attacks, though they might have been silenced, he had felt that he had a bad cause; and the weakness of the latter had been forcibly impressed on him in his fruitless efforts to assure himself that they were right. He knew all their weak points, and where their weapons could be turned against them. They were not disposed to yield the ground without a struggle, and began their attack on him by using the weapons and assailing the points which characterized his own former attacks on Christianity; and to this fact, under God, is probably owing his subsequent worldwide notoriety.

“He had taunted his friends with entertaining ‘a blind faith’ in the Bible, containing, as it did, many things which they confessed their inability to explain. He had enjoyed putting perplexing questions to clergymen and others—triumphing in their unsatisfactory replies. These questions had not been forgotten; and his Christian friends, also, turned his former taunts upon himself.

“Soon after his renunciation of deism, in conversing with a friend respecting the hope of a glorious eternity through the merits and intercessions of Christ, he was asked how he knew there was such a Saviour. He replied, ‘It is revealed in the Bible.’ ‘How do you know the Bible is true?’ was the response, with a reiteration of his former arguments on the contradictions and mysticisms in which he had claimed it was shrouded.

“Mr. Miller felt such taunts in their full force. He was at first perplexed; but, on reflection, he considered that if the Bible is a revelation of God, it must be consistent with itself; all its parts must harmonize, must have been given for man’s instruction, and, consequently, must be adapted to his understanding. He, therefore, said, ‘Give me time, and I will harmonize all these apparent contradictions to my own satisfaction, or I will be a deist still.’

“He then devoted himself to the prayerful reading of the word. He laid aside all commentaries, and used the marginal references and his concordance as his only helps. He saw that he must distinguish between the Bible and all the peculiar and partisan interpretations of it. The Bible was older than them all, must be above them all; and he placed it there. He saw that it must correct all interpretations; and in correcting them, its own pure light would shine without the mists which traditionary belief had involved it in. He resolved to lay aside all preconceived opinions, and to receive, with child-like simplicity, the natural and obvious meaning of Scripture.

“He pursued the study of the Bible with the most intense interest—whole nights, as well as days, being devoted to that object. At times, delighted with truth which shone forth from the sacred volume, making clear to his understanding the great plan of God for the redemption of fallen man; and at times puzzled and almost distracted by seemingly inexplicable or contradictory passages, he persevered, until the application of his great principle of interpretation was triumphant. He became puzzled only to be delighted, and delighted only to persevere the more in penetrating its beauties and mysteries. His manner of studying the Bible is thus described by himself:—

“‘I determined to lay aside all my prepossessions, to thoroughly compare scripture with scripture, and to pursue its study in a regular and methodical manner. I commenced with Genesis, and read verse by verse, proceeding no faster than the meaning of the several passages should be so unfolded as to leave me free from embarrassment respecting any mysticisms or contradictions. Whenever I found anything obscure, my practice was to compare it with all collateral passages; and, by the help of Cruden, I examined all the texts of Scripture in which were found any of the prominent words contained in any obscure portion. Then, by letting every word have its proper bearing on the subject of the text, if my view of it harmonized with every collateral passage in the Bible, it ceased to be a difficulty.

“‘In this way I pursued the study of the Bible, in my first perusal of it, for about two years, and was fully satisfied that it is its own interpreter. I found that, by a comparison of Scripture with history, all the prophecies, as far as they had been fulfilled, had been fulfilled literally; that all the various figures, metaphors, parables, similitudes, &c., of the Bible, were either explained in their immediate connection, or the terms in which they were expressed were defined in other portions of the word; and, when thus explained, are to be literally understood in accordance with such explanation. I was thus satisfied that the Bible is a system of revealed truths, so clearly and simply given that the ‘wayfaring man, though a fool, need not err therein.’

“In thus continuing the study, he adopted the following

“RULES OF INTERPRETATION.

“1. Every word must have its proper bearing on the subject presented in the Bible. Proof, Matt. 5:18.

“2. All Scripture is necessary, and may be understood by a diligent application and study. Proof, 2 Tim. 3:15-17.

“3. Nothing revealed in Scripture can or will be hid from those who ask in faith, not wavering. Proof, Deut. 29:29; Matt. 10:26, 27; 1 Cor. 2:10; Phil. 3:15; Isa. 45:11; Matt. 21:22; John 14:13, 14; 15:7; James 1:5, 6; 1 John 5:13-15.

“4. To understand doctrine, bring all the Scriptures together on the subject you wish to know; then let every word have its proper influence; and, if you can form your theory without a contradiction, you cannot be in error. Proof, Isa. 28:7-29; 35:8; Prov. 19:27; Luke 24:27, 44, 45; Rom. 16:26; James 5:19; 2 Pet. 1:19, 20.

“5. Scripture must be its own expositor, since it is a rule of itself. If I depend on a teacher to expound to me, and he should guess at its meaning, or desire to have it so on account of his sectarian creed, or to be thought wise, then his guessing, desire, creed, or wisdom, is my rule, and not the Bible. Proof, Ps. 19:7-11; 119:97-105; Matt. 23:8-10; 1 Cor. 2:12-16; Eze. 34:18, 19; Luke 11:52; Matt. 2:7, 8.

“6. God has revealed things to come, by visions, in figures and parables; and in this way the same things are oftentimes revealed again and again, by different visions, or in different figures and parables. If you wish to understand them, you must combine them all in one. Proof, Ps. 89:19; Hos. 12:10; Hab. 2:2; Acts 2:17; 1 Cor. 10:6; Heb. 9:9, 24; Ps. 78:2; Matt. 13:13, 34; Gen. 41:1-32; Dan. 2d, 7th & 8th; Acts 10:9-16.

“7. Visions are always mentioned as such. 2 Cor. 12:1.

“8. Figures always have a figurative meaning, and are used much in prophecy to represent future things, times and events—such as mountains, meaning governments; Dan. 2:35, 44; beasts, meaning kingdoms; Dan. 7:8, 17; waters, meaning people; Rev. 17:1, 15; day, meaning year, &c. Eze. 4:6.

“9. Parables are used as comparisons to illustrate subjects, and must be explained in the same way as figures, by the subject and Bible. Mark 4:13.

“10. Figures sometimes have two or more different significations, as day is used in a figurative sense to represent three different periods of time, namely, first, indefinite; Eccl. 7:14; second, definite, a day for a year; Eze. 4:6; and third, a day for a thousand years. 2 Pet. 3:8. The right construction will harmonize with the Bible, and make good sense; other constructions will not.

“11. If a word makes good sense as it stands, and does no violence to the simple laws of nature, it is to be understood literally; if not, figuratively. Rev. 12:1, 2; 17:3-7.

“12. To learn the meaning of a figure, trace the word through your Bible, and when you find it explained, substitute the explanation for the word used; and, if it make good sense, you need not look further; if not, look again.

“13. To know whether we have the true historical event for the fulfillment of a prophecy: If you find every word of the prophecy (after the figures are understood) is literally fulfilled, then you may know that your history is the true event; but if one word lacks a fulfillment, then you must look for another event, or wait its future development; for God takes care that history and prophecy shall agree, so that the true believing children of God may never be ashamed. Ps. 22:5; Isa. 45:17-19; 1 Pet. 2:6; Rev. 17:17; Acts 3:18.

“14. The most important rule of all is, that you must have faith. It must be a faith that requires a sacrifice, and, if tried, would give up the dearest object on earth, the world and all its desires—character, living, occupation, friends, home, comforts and worldly honors. If any of these should hinder our believing any part of God’s word, it would show our faith to be vain. Nor can we ever believe so long as one of these motives lies lurking in our hearts. We must believe that God will never forfeit his word; and we can have confidence that He who takes notice of the sparrow’s fall, and numbers the hairs of our head, will guard the translation of his own word, and throw a barrier around it, and prevent those who sincerely trust in God, and put implicit confidence in his word, from erring far from the truth.

“‘While thus studying the Scriptures,’—continuing the words of his own narrative,—‘I became satisfied, if the prophecies which have been fulfilled in the past are any criterion by which to judge of the manner of the fulfillment of those which are future, that the popular views of the spiritual reign of Christ—a temporal millennium before the end of the world, and the Jews’ return—are not sustained by the word of God; for I found that all the Scriptures on which those favorite theories are based are as clearly expressed as are those that were literally fulfilled at the first advent, or at any other period in the past.

“‘I found it plainly taught in the Scriptures that Jesus Christ will again descend to this earth, coming in the clouds of heaven, in all the glory of his Father:[2] that, at his coming, the kingdom and dominion under the whole heaven will be given unto Him and the saints of the Most High, who will possess it forever, even forever and ever:[3] that, as the old world perished by the deluge, so the earth, that now is, is reserved unto fire, to be melted with fervent heat at Christ’s coming; after which, according to the promise, it is to become the new earth, wherein the righteous will forever dwell:[4] that, at his coming, the bodies of all the righteous dead will be raised, and all the righteous living be changed from a corruptible to an incorruptible, from a mortal to an immortal state; that they will be caught up together to meet the Lord in the air, and will reign with him forever in the regenerated earth.[5]

“‘The controversy with Zion will then be finished, her children be delivered from bondage, and from the power of the tempter, and the saints be all presented to God blameless, without spot or wrinkle, in love;[6] that the bodies of the wicked will then be all destroyed, and their spirits be reserved in prison[7] until their resurrection and damnation;[8] and that, when the earth is thus regenerated, and the righteous raised, and the wicked destroyed, the kingdom of God will have come, when his will will be done on earth as it is in Heaven; that the meek will inherit it, and the kingdom become the saint’s.[9]

“‘I found that the only millennium taught in the word of God is the thousand years which are to intervene between the first resurrection and that of the rest of the dead, as inculcated in the twentieth of Revelation; and that it must necessarily follow the personal coming of Christ and the regeneration of the earth,[10] that, till Christ’s coming, and the end of the world, the righteous and wicked are to continue together on the earth, and that the horn of the papacy is to war against the saints until his appearing and kingdom, when it will be destroyed by the brightness of Christ’s coming; so that there can be no conversion of the world before the advent;[11] and that as the new earth, wherein dwelleth righteousness, is located by Peter after the conflagration, and is declared by him to be the same for which we look, according to the promise of Isa. 65:17.

“‘This is the same that John saw in vision after the passing away of the former heavens and earth; it must necessarily follow that the various portions of Scripture that refer to the millennial state must have their fulfillment after the resurrection of all the saints that sleep in Jesus.[12] I also found that the promises respecting Israel’s restoration are applied by the apostle to all who are Christ’s—the putting on of Christ constituting them Abraham’s seed and heirs according to the promise.[13].

“‘I was then satisfied, as I saw conclusive evidence to prove the advent personal and pre-millennial, that all the events for which the church look to be fulfilled [in the millennium] before the advent, must be subsequent to it; and that, unless there were other unfulfilled prophecies, the advent of the Lord, instead of being looked for only in the distant future, might be a continually-expected event. In examining the prophecies on that point, I found that only four universal monarchies are anywhere predicted, in the Bible, to precede the setting up of God’s everlasting kingdom; that three of those had passed away—Babylon, Medo-Persia, and Grecia—and that the fourth—Rome—had already passed into its last state, the state in which it is to be when the stone cut out of the mountain without hands shall smite the image on the feet, and break to pieces all the kingdoms of this world.

“‘I was unable to find any prediction of events which presented any clear evidence of their fulfillment before the scenes that usher in the advent. And finding all the signs of the times, and the present condition of the world, to compare harmoniously with the prophetic descriptions of the last days, I was compelled to believe that this world had about reached the limits of the period allotted for its continuance. As I regarded the evidence, I could arrive at no other conclusion.

“‘Another kind of evidence that vitally affected my mind was the chronology of the Scriptures. I found, on pursuing the study of the Bible, various chronological periods extending, according to my understanding of them, to the coming of the Saviour. I found that predicted events, which had been fulfilled in the past, often occurred within a given time. The one hundred and twenty years to the flood; Gen. 6:3; the seven days that were to precede it, with forty days of predicted rain; Gen. 7:4; the four hundred years of sojourn of Abraham’s seed; Gen. 15:13; the three days of the butler’s and baker’s dreams; Gen. 40:12-20; the seven years of Pharaoh’s; Gen. 41:28-54; the forty years in the wilderness; Num. 14:34; the three and a half years of famine: 1 Kings 17:1; the sixty-five years to the breaking of Ephraim; Isa. 7:8; the seventy years’ captivity; Jer. 25:11; Nebuchadnezzar’s seven times; Dan. 4:13-16; and the seven weeks, three-score and two weeks, and the one week, making seventy weeks, determined upon the Jews; Dan. 9:24-27; the events limited by these times were all once only a matter of prophecy, and were fulfilled in accordance with the predictions.

“‘When, therefore, I found the 2300 prophetic days, which were to mark the length of the vision from the Persian to the end of the fourth kingdom, the seven times’ continuance of the dispersion of God’s people, and the 1335 prophetic days to the standing of Daniel in his lot, all evidently extending to the advent,[14] with other prophetical periods, I could but regard them as ‘the times before appointed,’ which God had revealed ‘unto his servants the prophets.’ As I was fully convinced that ‘all Scripture given by inspiration of God is profitable,’—that it came not at any time by the will of man, but was written as holy men were moved by the Holy Ghost, and was written for our learning, that we, through patience and comfort of the Scriptures, might have hope,—I could but regard the chronological portions of the Bible as being as much a portion of the word of God, and as much entitled to our serious consideration, as any other portion of the Scriptures.

“‘I, therefore, felt that, in endeavoring to comprehend what God had in his mercy seen fit to reveal to us, I had no right to pass over the prophetic periods. I saw that, as the events predicted to be fulfilled in prophetic days had been extended over about as many literal years; as God, in Num. 14:34, and Eze. 4:4-6, had appointed each day for a year; as the seventy weeks to the Messiah were fulfilled in 490 years, and the 1260 prophetic days of the papal supremacy in 1260 years; and as these prophetical days extending to the advent were given in connection with symbolic prophecy, I could only regard the time as symbolical, and as standing each day for a year, in accordance with the opinions of all the standard Protestant commentators. If, then, we could obtain any clue to the time of their commencement, I conceived we should be guided to the probable time of their termination, and, as God would not bestow upon us a useless revelation, I regarded them as conducting us to the time when we might confidently look for the coming of the Chiefest of ten thousand, One altogether lovely.

“‘From a further study of the Scriptures, I concluded that the seven times of Gentile supremacy must commence when the Jews ceased to be an independent nation, at the captivity of Manasseh, which the best chronologers assigned to B. C. 677; that the 2300 days commenced with the seventy weeks, which the best chronologers dated from B. C. 457; and that the 1335 days, commencing with the taking away of the daily, and the setting up of the abomination that maketh desolate, Dan. 12:11, were to be dated from the setting up of the papal supremacy, after the taking away of pagan abominations, and which, according to the best historians I could consult, should be dated from about A. D. 508. Reckoning all these prophetic periods from the several dates assigned by the best chronologers for the events from which they should evidently be reckoned, they would all terminate together, about A. D. 1843.

“‘I was thus brought, in 1818, at the close of my two years’ study of the Scriptures, to the solemn conclusion that in about twenty-five years from that time all the affairs of our present state would be wound up; that all its pride and power, pomp and vanity, wickedness and oppression, would come to an end; and that, in the place of the kingdoms of this world, the peaceful and long-desired kingdom of the Messiah would be established under the whole heaven; that, in about twenty-five years, the glory of the Lord would be revealed, and all flesh see it together—the desert bud and blossom as the rose, the fir-tree come up instead of the thorn, and, instead of the briar, the myrtle-tree—the curse be removed from off the earth, death be destroyed, reward be given to the servants of God, the prophets and saints, and them who fear his name, and those be destroyed that destroy the earth.

“‘I need not speak of the joy that filled my heart in view of the delightful prospect, nor of the ardent longings of my soul for a participation in the joys of the redeemed. The Bible was now to me a new book. It was indeed a feast of reason; all that was dark, mystical or obscure, to me, in its teachings, had been dissipated from my mind before the clear light that now dawned from its sacred pages; and oh, how bright and glorious the truth appeared!

“‘All the contradictions and inconsistencies I had before found in the word were gone; and, although there were many portions of which I was not satisfied I had a full understanding, yet so much light had emanated from it to the illumination of my before darkened mind, that I felt a delight in studying the Scriptures which I had not before supposed could be derived from its teachings. I commenced their study with no expectation of finding the time of the Saviour’s coming, and I could at first hardly believe the result to which I had arrived; but the evidence struck me with such force that I could not resist my convictions. I became nearly settled in my conclusions, and began to wait, and watch, and pray for my Saviour’s coming.

“The above are the conclusions to which he arrived on the general subject of prophecy; but his views on other scriptural topics may not be uninteresting in this connection. His general theological opinions may be inferred from his connecting himself with a Calvinistic Baptist church, as the one most congenial to his faith. But he has left, among his papers, an unfinished compendium of his belief, which bears date, and is appended to the annexed certificate, as follows:—

“‘Low Hampton, Sept. 5, 1822.

“‘I hereby acknowledge that I have long believed it my duty ... to leave, for the inspection of my brethren, friends and children, a brief statement of my faith (and which ought to be my practice); and I pray God to forgive me where I go astray. I made it a subject of prayer and meditation, and, therefore, leave the following as my faith,—reserving the privilege of correction.

“‘(Signed,) Wm. Miller.

“‘Article One.

“‘I believe the Bible is given by God to man, as a rule for our practice, and a guide to our faith—that it is a revelation of God to man.

“‘Article Two.

“‘I believe in one living and true God, and that there are three persons in the Godhead—as there is in man, the body, soul, and spirit. And if any one will tell me how these exist, I will tell him how the three persons of the Triune God are connected.

“‘Article Three.

“‘I believe that God, by his Son, created man in the image of the Triune God, with a body, soul, and spirit; and that he was created a moral agent, capable of living, of obeying, or transgressing the laws of his Maker.

“‘Article Four.

“‘I believe that man, being tempted by the enemy of all good, did transgress, and became polluted; from which act, sin entered into the world, and all mankind became naturally sinners, thrust out from the presence of God, and exposed to his just wrath forever.

“‘Article Five.

“‘I believe that God, knowing from eternity the use that man would make of his [free] agency, did, in his council of eternity, ordain that his Son should die; and that through his death salvation should be given to fallen man, through such means as God should appoint.

“‘Article Six.

“‘I believe that, through the agency of the Holy Spirit, sinners are made the recipients of mercy, in conformity to the divine plan, founded on the wisdom and knowledge of God; the fruits of which are manifested in the recipient by works of repentance and faith; and without which no man, coming to years of discretion, and able to choose between good and evil, can have an interest in the blood and righteousness of Christ.

“‘Article Seven.

“‘I believe that Jesus Christ is an offering of God to sinners for their redemption from sin, and that those who believe in his name may take him by faith, go to God, and find mercy; and that such will in nowise be rejected.

“‘Article Eight.

“‘I believe that Jesus Christ was the sacrifice for sin which justice demanded; and that all those who confess their sins on the head of this victim may expect forgiveness of sin through the blood of the atonement, which is in Jesus Christ, the great High Priest in the holy of holies.

“‘Article Nine.

“‘I believe the atonement to be made by the intercession of Jesus Christ, and the sprinkling of his blood in the holy of holies, and upon the mercy-seat and people; by which means the offended is reconciled to the offender, the offender is brought into subjection to the will of God; and the effect is, forgiveness of sin, union to the divine person, and to the household of faith.

“‘Article Ten.

“‘I believe all those for whom Christ intercedes, who are united to God by a living faith, and have received the forgiveness of sin through the sprinkling of the blood of Christ, can never perish; but are kept by the mighty power of God through faith unto salvation.

“‘Article Eleven.

“‘I believe that all the promises of God are and will be accomplished in Christ Jesus; and that none of the human family are or can be entitled to the promises of grace, but those who are born of the Spirit in Christ Jesus, any more than the antediluvians could have been saved from the deluge without entering the ark.

“‘Article Twelve.

“‘I believe that Christ will eventually take away the sin of the world, and cleanse the earth from all pollution, so that this earth will become the abode of the saints forever, by means which he has appointed; all believers being regenerated, sanctified, justified, and glorified.

“‘Article Thirteen.

“‘I believe that all final impenitents will be destroyed from the earth, and sent away into a place prepared for the devil and his angels.

“‘Article Fourteen.

“‘I believe Jesus Christ will come again in his glory and person to our earth, where he will accomplish his divine purposes in the saving of his people, destroying the wicked from the earth, and taking away the sin of the world.

“‘Article Fifteen.

“‘I believe that the second coming of Jesus Christ is near, even at the door, even within twenty-one years,—on or before 1843.

“‘Article Sixteen.

“‘I believe that before Christ comes in his glory, all sectarian principles will be shaken, and the votaries of the several sects scattered to the four winds; and that none will be able to stand but those who are built on the word of God.

“‘Article Seventeen.

“‘I believe in the resurrection, both of the just and of the unjust—the just, or believers, at Christ’s second coming, and the unjust one thousand years afterwards—when the judgment of each will take place in their order, at their several resurrections; when the just will receive everlasting life, and the unjust eternal condemnation.

“‘Article Eighteen.

“‘I believe in the doctrine of election, founded on the will, purpose, and fore-knowledge of God; and that all the elect will be saved in the kingdom of God, through the sanctification of the Spirit and the belief of the truth.

“‘Article Nineteen.

“‘I believe in the ordinance of baptism by immersion, as a representation of Christ’s burial and resurrection—also of our death to sin and life to holiness.

“‘Article Twenty.

“‘I believe in the ordinance of the Lord’s supper, to be’⸺

“The last article was left thus incomplete, and the series of articles was not extended, as it was evidently designed to have been, so as to give an expression of his faith on subjects not included in the foregoing. It is not known that his views, as above expressed, ever underwent any change—excepting as his belief in the date of the second advent was afterwards shown, by the passing of time, to be incorrect.”

CHAPTER III.

INTERVAL BETWEEN HIS CONVERSION AND HIS PUBLIC LABORS—CORRESPONDENCE—DIALOGUE WITH A PHYSICIAN.

All truly great and good men who have been the honored instruments in the hands of God of accomplishing good, and of leading his people in the way of truth, have had wrought in them a deep experience in the things of the Spirit of God. This being the case with William Miller, we are happy to give in this chapter some of the important facts in his experience. His biographer says:—

“From the time that Mr. Miller became established in his religious faith, till he commenced his public labors—a period of twelve or fourteen years—there were few prominent incidents in his life to distinguish him from other men. He was a good citizen, a kind neighbor, an affectionate husband and parent, and a devoted Christian; good to the poor, and benevolent, as objects of charity were presented; in the Sunday-school, was teacher and superintendent; in the church he performed important service as a reader and exhorter, and, in the support of religious worship, no other member, perhaps, did as much as he.

“He was very exemplary in his life and conversation, endeavored at all times to perform the duties, whether public or private, which devolved on him, and whatever he did was done cheerfully, as for the glory of God. His leisure hours were devoted to reading and meditation; he kept himself well informed respecting the current events of the time; occasionally communicated his thoughts through the press, and often, for his own private amusement, or for the entertainment of friends, indulged in various poetical effusions, which, for unstudied productions, are possessed of some merit; but his principal enjoyment was derived from the study of the Bible. His state of mind at this time can be better given in his own language.

“‘With the solemn conviction,’ writes Mr. Miller, ‘that such momentous events were predicted in the Scriptures, to be fulfilled in so short a space of time, the question came home to me with mighty power regarding my duty to the world, in view of the evidence that had affected my own mind. If the end was so near, it was important that the world should know it. I supposed that it would call forth the opposition of the ungodly; but it never came into my mind that any Christian would oppose it. I supposed that all such would be so rejoiced, in view of the glorious prospect, that it would only be necessary to present it, for them to receive it. My great fear was that in their joy at the hope of a glorious inheritance so soon to be revealed, they would receive the doctrine without sufficiently examining the Scriptures in demonstration of its truth. I therefore feared to present it, lest, by some possibility, I should be in error, and be the means of misleading any.

“‘Various difficulties and objections would arise in my mind from time to time; certain texts would occur to me which seemed to weigh against my conclusions; and I would not present a view to others, while any difficulty appeared to militate against it. I therefore continued the study of the Bible, to see if I could sustain any of these objections. My object was not merely to remove them, but I wished to see if they were valid.

“‘Sometimes, when at work, a text would arise like this: “Of that day and hour knoweth no man,” &c.; and how, then, could the Bible reveal the time of the advent? I would then immediately examine the context in which it was found, and I saw at once that, in the same connection, we are informed how we may know when it is nigh, even at the doors; consequently, that text could not teach that we could know nothing of the time of that event. Other texts, which are advanced in support of the doctrine of a temporal millennium, would arise; but on examining their context, I invariably found that they were applicable only to the eternal state, or were so illustrative of the spread of the gospel here as to be entirely irrelevant to the position they were adduced to support.

“‘Thus all those passages that speak of the will of God being done on earth as in Heaven, of the earth being full of the knowledge of the glory of God, &c., could not be applicable to a time when the man of sin was prevailing against the saints, or when the righteous and wicked were dwelling together, which is to be the case until the end of the world. Those who speak of the gospel being preached in all the world, teach that, as soon as it should be thus preached, the end was to come; so that it could not be delayed a thousand years from that time, nor long enough for the world’s conversion after the preaching of the gospel as a witness.

“‘The question of the resurrection and judgment was, for a time, an obstacle in the way. Being instructed that all the dead would be raised at the same time, I supposed it must be so taught in the Bible; but I soon saw it was one of the traditions of the elders.

“‘So, also, with the return of the Jews. That question I saw could only be sustained by denying the positive declarations of the New Testament, which assert: “There is no difference between the Jew and the Greek;” that the promise that he shall be the heir of the world was not to Abraham and his seed through the law, but through the righteousness of faith; that “there is neither Jew nor Greek, bond nor free, male nor female;” but that “if ye are Christ’s then are ye Abraham’s seed, and heirs according to the promise.” I was, therefore, obliged to discard an objection which asserts there is a difference between the Jew and Greek; that the children of the flesh are accounted for the seed, &c.

“‘In this way I was occupied for five years—from 1818 to 1823—in weighing the various objections which were being presented to my mind. During that time, more objections arose in my mind than have been advanced by my opponents since; and I know of no objection that has been since advanced which did not then occur to me. But, however strong they at first appeared, after examining them in the light of the divine word, I could only compare them to straws, laid down singly as obstacles on a well-beaten road; the car of truth rolled over them, unimpeded in its progress.

“‘I was then fully settled in the conclusions which seven years previously had begun to bear with such impressive force upon my mind; and the duty of presenting the evidence of the nearness of the advent to others—which I had managed to evade while I could find the shadow of an objection remaining against its truth—again came home to me with great force. I had, previously, only thrown out occasional hints of my views. I then began to speak more clearly my opinions to my neighbors, to ministers, and others. To my astonishment, I found very few who listened with any interest. Occasionally, one would see the force of the evidence; but the great majority passed it by as an idle tale. I was, therefore, disappointed in finding any who would declare this doctrine, as I felt it should be, for the comfort of saints, and as a warning to sinners.’

“His correspondence during this period shows ardent longings for the salvation of his relatives and friends. In a letter to a sister, dated June 25, 1825, after writing on various subjects of family interest, he says:—

“‘Dear Brother and Sister:—All the news that we had to tell having been told above, I will now add a few lines; and oh! may they be directed by Infinite Wisdom? What are your prospects for eternity? Is there a land of eternal rest, beyond the confines of this world, in prospect? Do you believe that the blood of the everlasting covenant can and will cleanse you from all sin? Are you satisfied with your present evidence of an interest in that blood? That we shall die, is certain; and due preparation for a better world is wisdom; and we ought as rational beings to make ourselves familiar with the road and acquainted with the inhabitants of said country. O my soul! go thou to the mansions of the dead, and learn there the end of all living.

“‘That we ought to be cleansed from all sin, in order to be happy, is certain; for sin constitutes all misery; and a person living in the enjoyment (falsely so called) of sin cannot enter into rest. How necessary, then, is the work of regeneration and sanctification! And may we obtain that evidence which will enable us, with Thomas, to say, “My Lord and my God!” Redemption is the work of God. How proper, then, that Jesus should be called the Redeemer, the Holy One of Israel! Redemption is from sin. How improper, then, that we should live any longer therein! We ought as much to strive to attain to perfection as if it was attainable here below.

“Lord, I believe thy heavenly word;

Fain would I have my soul renewed.

I mourn for sin, and trust the Lord

To have it pardoned and subdued.

“My King, my Saviour, and my God,
Let grace my sinful soul renew;
Wash my offenses with thy blood,
And make my heart sincere and true.

“Oh! may thy grace its power display!

Let guilt and death no longer reign;

Save me in thine appointed way,

Nor let my humble faith be vain.

“Ye favored lands, who have his word,
Ye saints, who feel its saving power,
Unite your tongues to praise the Lord,
And his distinguished grace adore.”

“‘P. S. June 30.—I have this day been to Whitehall, to see the celebrated Marquis de Lafayette, that made such a conspicuous figure, half a century ago, in our Revolution. He is a pleasant-looking old man, a friend to freemen, a terror to tyrants, and one that has spent his treasures, his blood, and the best part of his life, in the cause of freedom and the rights of man. He has suffered much; yet he retains a good constitution. He goes a little lame, occasioned by wounds he received in the Revolution. He deserves the thanks of Americans, and he has received a general burst of gratitude from Maine to the Mississippi. He has visited every State in the Union and almost every important town. I had the pleasure of dining with him; and after dinner he took a passage for New York.

“‘Yours, &c.,

Wm. Miller.’

“That Mr. M. was one of the men prominent in his section of the country, is shown by his mingling with them, as above, on the various public occasions.

“He derived such pleasure from the study of the Bible that it was almost his constant companion; and a portion of each day was devoted to its private perusal. He loved to meditate on its teachings and to talk about its promises.

“In the winter of 1828, the church in Low Hampton, of which Mr. Miller was a member, was refreshed by an outpouring of the Holy Spirit. In a letter, dated March 12, written to Elder Hendryx, to whom reference has before been made, Mr. Miller says: ‘One young man came to my house last night after nine o’clock, to request prayers. He said he had been eight years under conviction, and appeared to be almost in despair. I thought I could say to him, as did John the Baptist to his disciples: “Behold the Lamb of God, that taketh away the sin of the world!” Twelve or fourteen requested prayers last Sunday evening. It is really the work of the Lord. I never lived in a reformation so general, so solemn, and with so little noise. Surely, we have reason to rejoice and be glad. The Lord has remembered the low state of his people, and hath come down to deliver. Two of my children, William and Bellona, as I have a good degree of hope, are subjects of grace. Pray for us.’

“In the same letter he makes mention of trials, as well as blessings. He says: ‘On Saturday, the first day of March, our meeting-house was consumed by fire. We should have almost despaired of ever building again, had not the Lord visited us by his grace, and likewise opened the hearts of our Christian friends from abroad. $400 have been subscribed from the adjoining towns. There is now some prospect that we shall build. You know we are weak in numbers. We are really so in resources. I must bend my whole force to gain the above-mentioned object.’

“Mr. Miller succeeded in the accomplishment of his wishes, according to his ability and known liberality.

“He continued to make the Bible his daily study, and became more and more convinced that he had a personal duty to perform respecting what he conceived the Bible to teach of the nearness of the advent. These impressions he thus describes:—

“‘When I was about my business, it was continually ringing in my ears, Go and tell the world of their danger. This text was constantly occurring to me: “When I say unto the wicked, O wicked man, thou shalt surely die; if thou dost not speak to warn the wicked from his way, that wicked man shall die in his iniquity; but his blood will I require at thy hand. Nevertheless, if thou warn the wicked of his way to turn from it; if he do not turn from his way, he shall die in his iniquity; but thou hast delivered thy soul.” Eze. 33:8, 9. I felt that, if the wicked could be effectually warned, multitudes of them would repent; and that, if they were not warned, their blood might be required at my hand.

“‘I did all I could to avoid the conviction that anything was required of me; and I thought that by freely speaking of it to all, I should perform my duty, and that God would raise up the necessary instrumentality for the accomplishment of the work. I prayed that some minister might see the truth, and devote himself to its promulgation; but still it was impressed upon me, Go and tell it to the world; their blood will I require at thy hand. The more I presented it in conversation, the more dissatisfied I felt with myself for withholding it from the public. I tried to excuse myself to the Lord for not going out and proclaiming it to the world. I told the Lord that I was not used to public speaking; that I had not the necessary qualifications to gain the attention of an audience; that I was very diffident, and feared to go before the world; that they would “not believe me nor hearken to my voice;” that I was “slow of speech, and of a slow tongue.” But I could get no relief.’

“In this way he struggled on for nine years longer, pursuing the study of the Bible, doing all he could to present the nearness of Christ’s coming to those whom circumstances threw in his way; but resisting his impressions of duty to go out as a public teacher. He was then fifty years old, and it seemed impossible for him to surmount the obstacles which lay in his path, to successfully present it in a public manner.

“His freedom to converse on the subject, and the ability with which he was able to defend his own views, and oppose those differing from him, had given him no little celebrity in his denomination in all that region; and some were rather shy in approaching him. Elder T. Hendryx, a Baptist clergyman, now in the State of Pennsylvania, who has kindly furnished the biographer with many original letters from Mr. Miller, thus speaks of his first acquaintance with him:—

“‘My first acquaintance with Bro. Miller was in the summer of 1831. I had been requested to visit the Baptist church in Hampton, and concluded to go. When about to start, I was informed by a brother in the church of which I was a member, in Salem, N. Y., that there was a brother in the Hampton church, possessing considerable influence, who had many curious notions on doctrinal points, and on the prophecies—particularly on the latter; and also (to use the brother’s language) that he was “hard on ministers who differed with him.” Having recently commenced preaching, without much confidence in my own ability, and not having made any engagement to the church, I at first almost concluded not to go. On further reflection, I decided to go, and put my trust in Him who had said, “Lo, I am with you alway.” On my way I endeavored, by prayer and meditation, to divest myself of all prejudice against his peculiar notions, whatever they might be (for as yet I was ignorant of them), and at the same time to fortify myself against being led into error by him.

“‘I arrived at Bro. Miller’s on the 6th of July, 1831. You may well suppose that my situation was not very enviable. I moved tremblingly and with the utmost caution. In spite of me, I could not act like myself; and it was not till I had been there nearly a week, and preached several discourses, that I could feel at home, or enjoy my wonted freedom in preaching the word. Several other ministering brethren visited at Bro. M.’s during my stay there, and I found that I was not altogether alone in those feelings. But how perfectly groundless those fears! Instead of pouncing upon my errors like the tiger, no brother ever dealt with me more tenderly, or exhibited a better spirit in presenting his views.

“‘After being with Bro. M. some time, he asked me my views on the millennium. Having thrown off all reserve, I readily gave them. I had embraced the old view—the world’s conversion a thousand years before the advent; and answered him accordingly. His reply was: “Well, Bro. H., prove it! You know I want the Bible for all that I receive.” “Well,” said I; and, taking my Bible, I turned to the 20th of Revelation, and was about to read, when I thought I would examine it again, and with very close attention. I was in a deep study. Bro. M. was waiting, and watching me closely. He began to smile. “Why don’t you read, Bro. H.?” said he. I was astonished; for I could not make it out. At last I said: “I go home next Monday. I will draw the passages off, and hand them to you when I return.” I took some four days for it, and gave him a long list of passages. He read them, and said: “Bro. H., what has become of your old theory? This is mine.” “Well,” said I, “it is mine, too.” In my examination, my theory had been overturned, and I came out where I now stand.

“‘One thing I observed in Bro. M.’s character; If he ever dealt harshly with a brother for holding an error, it was because he saw, or thought he saw, a spirit of self-importance in him.’

“The labors of Elder Hendryx were attended with a blessing, as appears from a letter of Mr. Miller’s to him, dated August 9, 1831. In it he says:—

“‘The Lord is pouring out his Spirit among us, but not in so powerful a manner as I could wish. Baptism has been administered every Sabbath but one since you were here. Two or three have obtained hope every week.’

“As Mr. Miller’s opinions respecting the nearness and nature of the millennium became known, they naturally elicited a good deal of comment among his friends and neighbors, and also among those at a distance. Some of their remarks, not the most complimentary to his sanity, would occasionally be repeated to him.

“Having heard that a physician in his neighborhood had said ‘Esquire Miller,’ as he was familiarly called, ‘was a fine man and a good neighbor, but was a monomaniac on the subject of the advent,’ Mr. M. was humorously inclined to let him prescribe for his case.

“One of his children being sick one day, he sent for the doctor, who, after prescribing for the child, noticed that Mr. Miller was very mute in one corner, and asked what ailed him.

“‘Well, I hardly know, doctor. I want you to see what does, and prescribe for me.’

“The doctor felt of his pulse, &c., and could not decide respecting his malady; and inquired what he supposed was his complaint.

“‘Well,’ said Mr. Miller, ‘I don’t know but I am a monomaniac; and I want you to examine me, and see if I am; and if so, cure me. Can you tell when a man is a monomaniac?’

“The doctor blushed, and said he thought he could.

“Mr. Miller wished to know how.

“‘Why,’ said the doctor, ‘a monomaniac is rational on all subjects but one; and when you touch that particular subject, he will become raving.’

“‘Well,’ said Mr. Miller, ‘I insist upon it that you see whether I am in reality a monomaniac; and if I am, you shall prescribe for and cure me. You shall, therefore, sit down with me two hours, while I present the subject of the advent to you, and, if I am a monomaniac, by that time you will discover it.’

“The doctor was somewhat disconcerted; but Mr. Miller insisted, and told him, as it was to present the state of his mind, he might charge for his time as in regular practice.

“The doctor finally consented; and, at Mr. Miller’s request, opened the Bible and read from the 8th of Daniel. As he read along, Mr. Miller inquired what the ram denoted, with the other symbols presented. The doctor had read Newton, and applied them to Persia, Greece, and Rome, as Mr. Miller did.

“Mr. Miller then inquired how long the vision of those empires was to be.

“‘2300 days.’

“‘What!’ said Mr. Miller, ‘could those great empires cover only 2300 literal days?’

“‘Why,’ said the doctor, ‘those days are years, according to all commentators; and those kingdoms are to continue 2300 years.’

“Mr. M. then asked him to turn to the 2d of Daniel, and to the 7th; all of which he explained the same as Mr. Miller. He was then asked if he knew when the 2300 days would end. He did not know, as he could not tell when they commenced.

“Mr. Miller told him to read the 9th of Daniel. He read down till he came to the 21st verse, when Daniel saw ‘the man Gabriel,’ whom he had ‘seen in the vision.’

“‘In what vision?’ Mr. Miller inquired.

“‘Why,’ said the doctor, ‘in the vision of the 8th of Daniel.’

“‘Wherefore, understand the matter and consider the vision.’ He had now come, then, to make him understand that vision, had he?”

“‘Yes,’ said the doctor.

“‘Well, seventy weeks are determined; what are these seventy weeks a part of?’

“‘Of the 2300 days.’

“‘Then do they begin with the 2300 days?’

“‘Yes,’ said the doctor.

“‘When did they end?’

“‘In A. D. 33.’

“‘Then how far would the 2300 extend after 33?”

“The doctor subtracted 490 from 2300, and replied, 1810. ‘Why,’ said he, ‘that is past.’

“‘But,’ said Mr. Miller, ‘there were 1810 from 33; in what year would that come?’

“The doctor saw at once that the 33 should be added, and set down 33 and 1810, and, adding them, replied, 1843.

“At this unexpected result the doctor settled back in his chair and colored; but immediately took his hat and left the house in a rage.

“The next day he again called on Mr. Miller, and looked as though he had been in the greatest mental agony.

“‘Why, Mr. Miller,’ said he, ‘I am going to hell. I have not slept a wink since I was here yesterday. I have looked at the question in every light, and the vision must terminate about A. D. 1843; and I am unprepared, and must go to hell.’

“Mr. Miller calmed him, and pointed him to the ark of safety; and in about a week, calling each day on Mr. M., he found peace to his soul, and went on his way rejoicing, as great a monomaniac as Mr. Miller. He afterward acknowledged that, till he made the figures 1843, he had no idea of the result to which he was coming.

CHAPTER IV.

COMMENCEMENT OF PUBLIC LABORS—PUBLISHES HIS VIEWS IN PAMPHLET—INTERVIEW ON THE HUDSON RIVER BOAT—HIS REGARD FOR THE BIBLE—CORRESPONDENCE—BECOMES A LICENSED PREACHER—LETTER ON UNIVERSALISM—RECORD OF HIS LABORS.

“The public labors of Mr. Miller, according to the best evidence to be obtained, date from the autumn of 1831. He had continued to be much distressed respecting his duty to ‘go and tell it to the world,’ which was constantly impressed on his mind. One Saturday, after breakfast, he sat down at his desk to examine some point, and, as he arose to go out to work, it came home to him with more force than ever, ‘Go and tell it to the world.’ He thus writes:—

“‘The impression was so sudden, and came with such force, that I settled down into my chair, saying, I can’t go, Lord. Why not? seemed to be the response; and then all my excuses came up—my want of ability, &c.; but my distress became so great, I entered into a solemn covenant with God, that if he would open the way, I would go and perform my duty to the world. What do you mean by opening the way? seemed to come to me. Why, said I, if I should have an invitation to speak publicly in any place I will go and tell them what I find in the Bible about the Lord’s coming. Instantly, all my burden was gone, and I rejoiced that I should not probably be thus called upon; for I had never had such an invitation. My trials were not known, and I had but little expectation of being invited to any field of labor.

“‘In about half an hour from this time, before I had left the room, a son of Mr. Guilford, of Dresden, about sixteen miles from my residence, came in, and said that his father had sent for me, and wished me to go home with him. Supposing that he wished to see me on some business, I asked him what he wanted. He replied that there was to be no preaching in their church the next day, and his father wished to have me come and talk to the people on the subject of the Lord’s coming. I was immediately angry with myself for having made the covenant I had; I rebelled at once against the Lord, and determined not to go. I left the boy, without giving him any answer, and retired in great distress to a grove near by. There I struggled with the Lord about an hour, endeavoring to release myself from the covenant I had made with him; but I could get no relief. It was impressed upon my conscience, Will you make a covenant with God, and break it so soon? and the exceeding sinfulness of thus doing overwhelmed me. I finally submitted, and promised the Lord that, if he would sustain me, I would go, trusting in him to give me grace and ability to perform all he should require of me. I returned to the house, and found the boy still waiting. He remained till after dinner, and I returned with him to Dresden.

“‘The next day, which, as nearly as I can remember, was about the first Sabbath in August, 1831, I delivered my first public lecture on the second advent. The house was well filled with an attentive audience. As soon as I commenced speaking, all my diffidence and embarrassment were gone, and I felt impressed only with the greatness of the subject, which, by the providence of God, I was enabled to present. At the close of the services on the Sabbath, I was requested to remain and lecture during the week, with which request I complied. They flocked in from the neighboring towns; a revival commenced, and it was said that in thirteen families all but two persons were hopefully converted.

“‘On the Monday following, I returned home, and found a letter from Eld. Fuller, of Poultney, Vt., requesting me to go and lecture there on the same subject. They had not heard of my going to Dresden. I went to Poultney, and lectured there with similar effect.

“‘From thence I went by invitation to Pawlet, and other towns in that vicinity. The churches of Congregationalists, Baptists, and Methodists, were thrown open. In almost every place I visited, my labors resulted in the reclaiming of backsliders, and the conversion of sinners. I was usually invited to fields of labor by the ministers of the several congregations whom I visited, who gave me their countenance; and I have never labored in any place to which I was not previously invited. The most pressing invitations from the ministry and the leading members of the churches poured in continually from that time, during the whole period of my public labors, and with more than one-half of which I was unable to comply. Churches were thrown open everywhere, and I lectured, to crowded houses, through the western part of Vermont, the northern part of New York, and in Canada East; and powerful reformations were the result of my labor.’

“Soon after he began to lecture on the subject, Mr. Miller began to be importuned to write out and publish his view. In a letter to Elder Hendryx, dated January 25, 1832, he says:—

“‘I have written a few numbers on the coming of Christ and the final destruction of the beast, when his body shall be given to the burning flame. They may appear in the Vermont Telegraph; if not, in pamphlet form. They are written in letters to Elder Smith of, Poultney, and he has liberty to publish.’

“On the same occasion, he adds: ‘I am more and more astonished at the harmony and strength of the word of God; and the more I read, the more I see of the folly of the infidel in rejecting this word.’

“The articles referred to were sent as anonymous to the editor of the Telegraph, who declined their publication unless informed of the name of the writer. This being communicated to him, they appeared, in a series of sixteen articles, over the initials of W. M. The first article was published in the paper of May 15, 1832, and they caused much conversation and discussion.

“Soon after this, he addressed another letter to Elder Hendryx, which is so quaintly written, contains so much of general interest, and is so illustrative of his habits of thought and modes of expression, that it is here given:—

“‘Hampton, March 26, 1832.

“‘Dear Bro. Hendryx:—I received your favor of the 19th inst. day before yesterday, and should have begun to answer it then, but, on coming home, I found Bro. D. at my house, a licentiate from Hamilton, who came on purpose to learn these strange notions of “crazy Miller,” or at least to save Bro. Miller, if possible, from going down to the grave with such an error. He was a stranger to me; but, after he introduced himself, we went to work, night and day, and he has just left me,—Monday, 3 o’clock P. M. He has got his load, and, as he says, he never was so loaded before.

“‘You may say this is boasting. No, no, Bro. Hendryx, you know better. I only made him read the Bible, and I held the concordance. No praise to me; give God the glory. At any rate, he will find it hard to resist the truth. He wants me to let him come and board with me, two or three months, to study the Bible. He is a young man, of brilliant talents; he preached two sermons here yesterday, and they were very well done. I have somebody to labor with almost daily. I have been into Poultney, and some other places, to lecture on the coming of Christ; and, in every instance, I have had large assemblies. There is increasing anxiety on the subject in this quarter; but they will see greater signs of these times soon, so that Christians will believe in his coming and kingdom. The harvest is about closing up, and the wrath of God is about to be poured upon our world. Pestilence, sword, and famine, will succeed each other in swift succession, and the kingdoms of this world will soon be destroyed by the “stone cut out of the mountain without hands.” Yes, brother, it will soon be over when sinners can be converted. I would, therefore, advise you to lead your hearers by slow and sure steps to Jesus Christ.

“‘I say slow, because I expect all are not strong enough to run yet; and sure, because the Bible is a sure word; and where your hearers are not well indoctrinated, you must preach Bible; you must prove all things by Bible; you must talk Bible; you must exhort Bible; you must pray Bible; and love Bible; and do all in your power to make others love Bible, too. One great means to do good is to make your parishioners sensible that you are in earnest, and fully and solemnly believe what you preach. If you wish your people to feel, feel yourself. If you wish them to believe as you do, show them, by your constant assiduity in teaching, that you sincerely wish it. You can do more good by the fireside, and in your conference circles, than in the pulpit. Pulpit preaching is, and has long been, considered as no more than a trade. “Why, he is hired to preach!—he must, of course, tell a good story,” &c., &c. And the very reason why there is more good done in conference meetings and protracted meetings is simply this: The god of this world is shut out. They will say, He expects nothing for this; surely our salvation is his anxious desire. Reflections of this sort make strong impressions of conviction on the mind. If this man of God will make so much sacrifice, surely I ought to think, at least, how much my brother has my benefit in view in his preaching....

“‘May 20, 1832. It is now almost two months since I began this letter, and I ought to make some apology for my long neglect. But I hate apologies; for we never tell the whole truth. You have, undoubtedly, seen, or will see, two numbers in the Telegraph before you receive this letter. A number more will soon follow. I expect it will start some queries, if nothing more. There is much opposition expressed by some who ought to have taught the same things. But people will think and reflect; and truth will in the end prevail. Do come, on the 13th and 14th of June, to our Association. I expect Bro. Sawyer will be ordained then. Do come. I have much to say to you; but I cannot write as I wish....

“‘I have just come from a prayer-meeting this morning, at our school-house, at sunrise. We are praying for the second coming of our dear Redeemer, when the “sanctuary will be cleansed.” Pray with us, my brother. I am more and more satisfied that the end of the world is at hand. The evidence flows in from every quarter. “The earth is reeling to and fro, like a drunkard.” One short year ago, and Zion was rejoicing with her multiplied converts; now she is down “by the cold streams of Babylon.” One year since, and we were enjoying a plentiful harvest; now we are sleeping in the cold, and the staff of life is neglected. Is the harvest over and past? If so, soon, very soon, God will arise in his anger, and the vine of the earth will be reaped. See, see!—the angel with his sharp sickle is about to take the field! See yonder trembling victim fall before his pestilential breath! High and low, rich and poor, trembling and falling before the appalling grave, the dreadful cholera.

“‘Hark!—hear those dreadful bellowings of the angry nations! It is the presage of horrid and terrific war. Look!—look again! See crowns, and kings, and kingdoms tumbling to the dust! See lords and nobles, captains and mighty men, all arming for the bloody, demon fight! See the carnivorous fowls fly screaming through the air! See—see these signs! Behold, the heavens grow black with clouds; the sun has veiled himself; the moon, pale and forsaken, hangs in middle air; the hail descends; the seven thunders utter loud their voices; the lightnings send their vivid gleams of sulphurous flame abroad; and the great city of the nations falls to rise no more forever and forever! At this dread moment, look! look!—O, look and see! What means that ray of light? The clouds have burst asunder; the heavens appear; the great white throne is in sight! Amazement fills the universe with awe! He comes!—he comes! Behold, the Saviour comes! Lift up your heads, ye saints,—he comes!—he comes!—he comes!

“‘Wm. Miller.’

“A letter written about the same time with the above, to a sister of Mr. Miller’s whose husband was a Universalist, is particularly severe on those sentiments. Beginning with subjects of mere family interest, he proceeds to those of a religious; and, in speaking of the nearness of the advent, he says:—

“‘I now tell you that I am more and more convinced of its truth. I have lectured on it, in a number of places this winter, and many people believe that the calculation is right. Some are afraid of it, and others will not believe; but among them all it makes a great deal of talk. Some say Esq. Miller is crazy; others, that he is a fool—and neither of them are wide from the truth. But Bro. J. and sister A. will say, “We wish Bro. William would let that subject alone. We do not want to hear so much about Christ’s second coming, the end of the world, the judgment-day, and the destruction of the wicked. He knows no more about it than the man in the moon.” So say I. But the Bible tells us; and that will never fail. You will see, within a few weeks, some numbers in the Vermont Telegraph, signed W. M. Read, and then judge. If it is not printed in the paper, I will send it to you in pamphlet form. I think it will be printed, at any rate.

“‘I want to know if J⸺ is a Universalist yet; and, if so, whether he can tell me who are the partakers of the second death, and what the second death is? You will find the description of them in Rev. 20th chapter, and 21:8. Be sure you are not deceived, Bro. J.; for the time is shortly coming that will try every man’s work, whether it be good or evil; and if you love the Lord Jesus, show your love by believing his word, and being reconciled to his word and will. How little love to Christ do we show when we are unreconciled to his justice, his word, or the righteous judgment of God on the finally impenitent! Yes, brother; it is not contrary to the carnal mind of man to be happy, if we can be happy in our own way. Neither should we be very angry with God, if he made all others so, if we thought that was the only hope for us. But if the Universalists could contrive any plan that would be plausible, to save themselves and condemn the Calvinists, or those who preach endless misery, their actions show that they would do it quickly; or why do they rail at those who preach as Christ did? “Except a man is born again he cannot see the kingdom of God.” “And these shall go away into everlasting punishment.” Why do they oppose those meetings where souls are brought to cry out, as in the days of the apostles, “Men and brethren, what shall we do to be saved?” Did you ever hear such a cry in a Universalist meeting—where brethren and sisters were all together in prayer, with one accord praying and agonizing for the souls of their brethren according to the flesh? No!

“‘Do you think they are fools, brother William? You know they do not believe in damnation. They preach all men will be saved.’ ‘Ah, ha! What fools the apostles were! If they had preached thus they would have saved many a bitter cry; and Father Paul might have saved himself many a bitter groan in endeavoring to save his kinsmen according to the flesh, and not have wished himself accursed from Christ for their sakes. I really wish—if it is true that all men will be saved—that Paul had known it before he made that expression, that he might save “some,” when he might have said that he had the promise of God that “all” would be saved. Paul must have been as crazy as Bro. William. Oh, how many long arguments it would have saved, how many twistings of texts, and windings and turnings, if Paul, Peter, John, Matthew, Mark, Luke, Jude, and even Christ, had not said anything about two classes of mankind in a future state, and nothing about punishment being everlasting! But the Universalist is wiser than all these, now-a-days; for they do not preach so now, do they J⸺?

Wm. Miller.

“‘March 27, 1832.’

“During the summer of 1832, Mr. Miller appears to have been much engaged in attending protracted meetings, which were at that time very common in many parts of the country. Under date of ‘Hampton, Oct. 1, 1832,’ he wrote to Elder Hendryx:—

“‘... When your letter arrived, I was attending a protracted meeting in Westport; and the next day after I got home I went to Poultney to attend one there. I went to Keesville to attend one as soon as we left Poultney, and only arrived home last Saturday.... I have spent a great share of my time in attending protracted meetings this summer and fall.’

“In the same letter he thus exhibits his fondness for the Bible, and points out the great doctrines which he believed it inculcated:—

“‘I want to see you more than ever, and when we have less company. The light is continually breaking in; and I am more and more confirmed in those things of which I told you, namely, redemption by grace; the efficacy of Christ’s blood; justification by his righteousness imputed to us; sanctification through the operation of the divine Spirit; and the glorification by our gathering together unto him at his appearing. I also believe those things to be founded upon election, particular, personal, and certain; governed by the mind, will, and plan of God, which was, is, and will be eternal; and which is revealed to us so far as to give us confidence, hope, and full assurance that nothing in the divine plan, either of the means or end, can or will fail of their accomplishment.’

“The church in Low Hampton being destitute of a pastor, in a letter to the same, dated Nov. 17, 1832, Mr. Miller describes the kind of minister they wished for:—

“‘We do not want one who thinks much of his own gifts, and is lifted up with pride; neither do we want a novice—I mean, a fool; one who knows nothing about the gospel of Christ. We want one who will stir up our minds, will visit, is good to learn, apt to teach, modest, unassuming, pious, devotional, and faithful to his calling. If his natural talents are brilliant, with those qualifications, they would not hurt him. If they are only moderate, they may do well enough for us. Some of our people want “a quick gab.” But I should prefer a quick understanding.... I set out for Salem to-morrow morning.’

“In a letter to the same, dated Hampton, Feb. 8, 1833, he writes: ‘The Lord is scattering the seed. I can now reckon eight ministers who preach this doctrine, more or less, besides yourself. I know of more than one hundred private brethren who say that they have adopted my views. Be that as it may, “truth is mighty and will prevail.” If I should get my views printed, how many can you dispose of, in pamphlet form?... Our people are about giving me a license to lecture. I hardly know what to do. I am too old, too wicked, and too proud. I want your advice. Be plain, and tell me the whole truth.’

“Shortly after, he published his views, in a pamphlet of sixty-four pages, entitled: ‘Evidences from Scripture and History of the Second Coming of Christ, about the year 1843; and of his Personal Reign of One Thousand Years. By William Miller. “Prove all things; hold fast that which is good.” 1 Thess. 5:21. Brandon, Vermont, Telegraph Office, 1833.’

“Soon after the publication of this pamphlet, he had occasion to visit the city of New York. As he was passing down the Hudson, in a steamboat, a company of men standing near him were conversing respecting the wonderful improvements of the day. One of them remarked that it was impossible for things to progress for thirty years to come in the same ratio as they had done; ‘for,’ said he, ‘man will attain to something more than human.’ Mr. Miller replied to him that it reminded him of Dan. 12:4, ‘Many shall run to and fro, and knowledge shall be increased.’ A pause ensuing, Mr. M. continued, and observed that the improvements of the present day were just what we should expect at this time in the fulfillment of Daniel’s prophecy. He then commenced with the 11th chapter of Daniel, and, comparing the prophecy with the history, showed its fulfillment, all listening with close attention.

“He then remarked, that he had not intended trespassing so long on their patience, and, leaving them, walked to the other end of the boat. The entire company followed, and wished to hear more on the subject. He then took up the 2d, 7th, 8th, and 9th, chapters of Daniel. His hearers wished to know if he had ever written on the subject. He told them that he had published the above pamphlet, and distributed among them what copies he had with him.

“This was one of his first audiences, and some gentlemen of high standing listened to his remarks. He scattered the most of his pamphlets gratuitously, sending them as a response to letters of inquiry respecting his views, and to places which he could not visit. Under date of April 10, 1833, in writing to Elder Hendryx, and speaking of the evil of resorting to excommunication from the church for slight causes, in view of a particular case, he says:—

“‘Is the remedy better than the disease? Should we cut off a man’s leg because he has a thorn in his toe? I think not. Should we set a wheat field on fire and burn the whole crop, because of a few tares in the field? No; let both grow until the harvest. Oh, how much injury is done in church discipline! The hypocrite uses it as a tool to make others think that he is very pious. The envious use it as a weapon to bring down those they imagine are getting above them. The bigot uses it to bring others to his faith; and the sectarian, to bring others to his creed, &c. But, my dear brother, how many difficulties do you think we have in our churches where the spirit of Christ is manifested through the whole trial, or where it began with “Father, forgive them, for they know not what they do”? Therefore, I can frankly and honestly say that the remedy which has been applied to cure this moral disease is worse, a thousand times worse, than the original cause.’

“In the same letter, he says: ‘We have no preacher, as yet, except the old man [Mr. M.] with his concordance. Last Sunday I tried to hold forth the truth from Isa. 65:25; the Sabbath before, from the same chapter, verses 17-19. I wish I had the tongue of an Apollos, and the mental power of a Paul; what a field might I not explore; and what powerful arguments might be brought to prove the authenticity of the Scriptures! But I want one thing more than either—the Spirit of Christ and of God; for he is able to take worms and thresh mountains. O my brother, let us pray for each other, especially on the Sabbath, each that the Lord would bestow this gift of the Holy Spirit upon the other. Peradventure the Lord will answer.’

“In the same letter he thus expresses his regard for the word of God: ‘O may the Bible be to us a rock, a pillar, a compass, a chart, a statute, a directory, a polar star, a traveler’s guide, a pilgrim’s companion, a shield of faith, a ground of hope, a history, a chronology, an armory, a store-house, a mirror, a toilet, a closet, a prayer-book, an epistle, a love letter, a friend, a foe, a revenue, a treasury, a bank, a fountain, a cistern, a garden, a lodge, a field, a haven, a sun, a moon, a star, a door, a window, a light, a lamp, a luminary, a morning, a noon, an evening, an hour-glass, a daysman, a servant.

“‘It is meat, food, drink, raiment, shelter, warmth, heat, a feast, fruit, apples, pictures, wine, milk, honey, bread, butter, oil, refreshment, rest, strength, stability, wisdom, life, eyes, ears, hands, feet, breath; it is a help to hearing, seeing, feeling, tasting, smelling, understanding, forgiving, loving, hoping, enjoying, adoring, and saving; it teaches salvation, justification, sanctification, redemption, and glorification; it declares condemnation, destruction and desolation; it tells us what we were, are, and shall be; begins with the beginning, carries us through the intermediate, and ends only with the end; it is past, present, and to come; it discovers the first great cause, the cause of all effects, and the effects of all causes; it speaks of life, death, and judgment, body, soul, and spirit, Heaven, earth, and hell; it makes use of all nature as figures, to sum up the value of the gospel; and declares itself to be the Word of God. And your friend and brother believes it.

“‘William Miller.

“‘Hampton, April 10, 1833.’

“In the autumn of this year, Mr. Miller received a license to preach, from the church of which he was a member, as follows:—

“‘Let brotherly love continue: the Baptist church of Christ, in Hampton and Whitehall, do certify that Bro. William Miller is a member in regular standing in this church. Bro. Miller has been improving his gifts with us in expounding the words of divine truth in public, for some time past, to the approbation and edification of the church. We are satisfied that Bro. Miller has a gift to improve in public, and are willing he should improve the same wherever his lot may be cast among the Zion of God, that the name of the Lord may be glorified, and his followers edified. Done in church meeting, Saturday, Sept. 14, 1833. By order of the church.

“‘(Signed) Byron S. Harlow,
“‘Clerk, pro tem.’

“In a letter to his sister, before referred to, written two days subsequent to the date of the above, and dated, ‘Low Hampton, Sept. 16, 1833,’ he speaks of the above license, and of his labors, as follows:—

“‘I have just returned from Dresden, where I have been to spend a Sabbath, and to preach to them the word of life. My texts, yesterday, were Hosea 13:1; Isa. 61:7; and Ps. 102:16.... I do feel anxious to come and see you; and, if the Lord will, and your people should not object, to try to speak to them of the things of the kingdom. My brethren have given me a license—unworthy and old, and disobedient as I am. Oh, to grace how great a debtor!’

“He then proceeds with matters of mere family interests, and closes with the following exhortation to his brother-in-law, respecting the doctrine of Universalism:—

“‘Just as sure as the word of God is true, depend upon it, universal salvation is not true. Was this what David saw when he saw the end of the wicked? Enter into the sanctuary of your own conscience, my brother, and you will find, “no,” responded with appalling force. Enter into the sanctuary of God’s word, and, in every page, you will have to meet this little word, “NO,” or declarations as plain. “Strive to enter in at the strait gate; for many shall seek to enter in, and shall not be able.”

“‘Look at Dan. 12:9, 10; here we have the end described. What does conscience say? Be careful, my brother; remember that eternal consequences hang on your decision; and what is the answer? “Many [not all] shall be purified, and made white, and tried; but the wicked shall do wickedly; and none of the wicked shall understand.” See Mal. 4:1-3. Where are the wicked, the proud, and all that do wickedly? Do they enjoy the healing beams of the Sun of Righteousness? No. Again, in Matt. 13:49, 50. Are the wicked permitted to dwell with the just? Is Heaven and happiness their abode? Enter into the sanctuary, and what do you hear? No! No!

“‘Again, in Matt. 25:12, 30, and 46. Do the foolish virgins enter in to the marriage supper? or are they ever married to the Lamb? No! Is the unprofitable servant “in light and glory”? No! No! And are the goats enjoying the same communion with the sheep? or are they going “into life eternal”? No! No! NO! Read, again, Rom. 1:18, to the fifth verse of the second chapter. Would it be unjust for God to condemn the characters there described? Your judgment tells you, No! Your conscience responds the same answer, No! Your tongue must one day answer, NO! For every tongue must and will confess to the glory of God. O my brother, enter into the sanctuary and knock while the door may be opened; seek while you may find; look while you may live; and you will most assuredly learn “their end.” All the plausible reasoning of all the Universalists under the whole canopy of heaven cannot save one soul. “Except a man is born of the Spirit he cannot enter the kingdom of God.”’

“During the fall of 1833, and the ensuing winter, Mr. Miller seems to have been constantly occupied in lecturing in Dresden and other towns in New York and Vermont. The very modest estimate which he had of his own abilities and qualifications as a preacher, is apparent in all his correspondence, where any reference is made to his public labors. In writing to Eld. Hendryx, under date of Low Hampton, Feb. 25, 1834, he says:—

“‘You have undoubtedly heard that I have been trying to preach (as some call it) about in this vicinity. I have been laboring, it is true, in my weak manner, in Dresden, two or three months; and the Lord has seen fit to bless us with a little reformation. I have likewise preached in Putnam, Wrentham, Poultney, and in this place. You laugh, Bro. Hendryx, to think old Bro. Miller is preaching! But laugh on; you are not the only one that laughs; and it is all right—I deserve it. If I could preach the truth, it is all I could ask.’

“Being now recognized as a regularly licensed preacher his brother Hendryx naturally addressed him as the ‘Rev. William Miller.’ To a letter thus directed, Mr. Miller, under date of ‘Hampton, March 22, 1834,’ thus replied:—

“‘Dear Bro. Hendryx:—I wish you would look into your Bible and see if you can find the word Rev. applied to a sinful mortal like myself; and govern yourself accordingly.... Let us be determined to live and die on the Bible. God is about to rise and punish the inhabitants of the world. The proud, the high, the lofty, must be brought low; and the humble, the meek, and the contrite, will be exalted. Then, what care I for what the world calls great or honorable? Give me Jesus, and a knowledge of his word, faith in his name, hope in his grace, interest in his love, and let me be clothed in his righteousness, and the world may enjoy all the high-sounding titles, the riches it can boast, the vanities it is heir to, and all the pleasures of sin; and they will be no more than a drop in the ocean.

“‘Yes, let me have Jesus Christ, and then vanish all earthly toys. What glory has God revealed in the face of Jesus Christ! In him all power centers. In him all power dwells. He is the evidence of all truth, the fountain of all mercy, the giver of all grace, the object of all adoration, and the source of all light; and I hope to enjoy him to all eternity. What! such a sinful wretch as I enjoy Christ? How can this be? Yes, yes; through the electing love of God, the sprinkling of the blood of the covenant, and the work of regeneration, such a sinner as I may be cleansed from sin, purified, and made white, and glorified in the New Jerusalem, together with him, and with all who love our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ, and who love his appearing.

“‘Bro. H., shall you and I appear together in that general assembly and church of the first-born? If God will, I hope we shall there meet, to part no more. How can I realize the glory that will there be manifested? And how could I bear the thought to be banished from the face of Jesus, and from the glory of his power? Forbid it, O my Redeemer! Forbid! and let grace reign through righteousness unto eternal life, by Jesus Christ our Lord.’

“The same devotional feelings are manifest in all his epistles, and also evince that he experienced nearness of access to God, and great religious enjoyment.

“Mr. Miller kept no journal, nor any record of the places he visited, till October, 1834. Beginning at a place called ‘The Forks,’ supposed to be ‘Moore’s Forks’ in Clinton County, N. Y., the names of places where, the dates when, and the texts from which, he preached, are given in two small memorandum-books as follows:—

“PLACE. | TIME. | TEXT. | TEXT.
Forks, N. Y., | Oct. 1. | Luke 15:18. | Rev. 8:13.
Keesville, N. Y., | ” 5. | Rev. 1:20. | Job 23:24.
Beekmantown, | ” 6. | Dan. 8:13, 14. | ”10:14.
Plattsburgh, | ” 8. | Dan. 8:13, 14. | Rev. 20:6.
Keesville, | ” 11. | 1 Cor. 3:11. |
” | ” 12. | Rom. 8:6, 7. | Luke 15:18.
Westport, | ” 14. | Dan. 8:13, 14. | ” 10:14.
” | ” 15. | Rev. 20:6. |

“After visiting the above places, he returned home to Low Hampton, and soon after wrote to Eld. Hendryx, as follows:—

“‘North Hampton, Oct. 23, 1834.

“‘My Dear Brother Hendryx:—Your favor of Sept. 17 came to hand while I was absent on a tour into Clinton County, of about six weeks. I gave thirty-six lectures on the second coming of Christ, was at two covenant meetings, attended two protracted meetings in said time, saw a number of new-born babes in Christ; and now, being at home, I shall write to Bro. H. and rest myself a little.

“‘I am every day more convinced that the whole word of God is given for our instruction, reproof, and correction; and that the prophecies contain the strongest evidences of the divinity and truth of the Bible; and present to saint and sinner the strongest motives for a holy life, and repentance and faith toward God, that can be produced. When John preached repentance, he prophesied that the kingdom of Heaven was at hand, as a principal motive. The apostles prophesied that God had appointed a day, in which he would judge the world in righteousness, by that man, Jesus Christ; and your unworthy brother in Christ proclaims that the day is at hand, when “he that is filthy will be filthy still, and he that is holy will be holy still;” and that Christ is now standing at the door and knocking for the last time. And, my dear brother, I can truly say that “the testimony of Jesus is the spirit of prophecy.” And yet how many professed ministers of Christ, at the present day, treat that part of the word with total neglect, and even laugh and jeer at those who would warn the people of their approaching danger. But God has supported me beyond my most sanguine expectation. And although they say much before they hear, yet when they do hear they seem confounded.

“‘The evidence is so clear, the testimony is so strong, that we live on the eve of the present dispensation, toward the dawn of the glorious day, that I wonder why ministers and people do not wake up and trim their lamps. Yes, my brother, almost two years since you heard the news, “Behold, the bridegroom cometh!”—and yet you cry, A little more sleep, a little more slumber. Blame not your people if they go to sleep under your preaching. You have done the same. Bear with me, my brother. In every letter you have written me, you have promised to study this all-important subject, and in every letter you confess your negligence. The day draws near. More than one-sixth of the time is gone since my brother Hendryx promised, and yet asleep! O God, forgive him! Are you waiting for all the world to wake up before you dare get up? Where has your courage fled? Awake! awake! O sluggard! Defend your own castle, or take sides with the word of God; destroy or build. You must not, you cannot, you shall not be neutral. Awake! awake! Tell Deacon Smith to help wake you. Tell him, for me, to shake you, and not give out shaking, until Bro. H. will put on the whole armor of light.

“‘In every church where I have lectured on this important subject, many, very many, seem to awake, rub open their eyes, and then fall back to sleep again. But the enemy is waking up. In one town (North Beekmantown) I received a letter, the day after my first lecture, from some bullies and blackguards, that if I did not clear out of the State, they would put me where the dogs could never find me. The letter was signed by ten of them. I stayed, and, blessed be God! he poured out his Spirit, and began a work which gainsayers could not resist.

“‘Some ministers try to persuade their people not to hear me; but the people will go, and every additional lecture will bring an additional multitude, until their meeting-houses cannot hold them. Depend upon it, my brother, God is in this thing; and he will be glorified; and blessed be his holy name! Do pray for me, my brother, that I may have grace equal to my need, and that I may always see my need, feel my weakness, and be kept humble, and that I may always declare the truth. Do pray!

“‘I think, if the Lord will, I shall be in your section of country next spring or summer. Do give me a list of some brethren between here and your place, if you can.

“‘I remain yours in Christ,

“‘William Miller.’

“Two days subsequent to the date of the above, Mr. M. was again in the field; and, according to his memorandum-book, gave lectures as follows: Oct. 25 and 26, at Paulet, Vt.; Nov. 6, 8, and 9, at Orwell, Vt.; 10 and 12, Cornwall, Vt.; and Nov. 16, in Hampton, N. Y. His success in the above places is indicated in the following extract from a letter which he wrote Elder Hendryx from Low Hampton, on the 28th of Nov., 1834:—

“‘I have had good success since I wrote you before. The Lord has been with me. I have been into a number of towns in Vermont. Some old, hardened rebels have been brought to plead for mercy, even before my course of lectures was finished. Blessed be the holy name of God! He has given me more than I should have dared to ask. How good, my brother, it is to preach, having God for paymaster! He pays down. He pays in souls. He paid the Shepherd thus, and he was satisfied; will he not pay his servants too? Yes, yes. Bless his name, O my soul, for all his benefits!

“‘I find that studious Christians are the best hearers: and the reason is obvious. The more we know of mankind, the less room there is for bigotry, superstition, and prejudice. Those are evils always attending ignorance.’

CHAPTER V.

NEW DOORS OPEN—HIS LABORS COUNTENANCED BY MINISTERS OF HIS DENOMINATION—HIS FIRST DONATION OF TWO HALF-DOLLARS—DEATH OF HIS MOTHER—INCIDENT AT SHAFTSBURY—RESULTS OF HIS LABORS—TESTIMONY OF A CONVERT FROM INFIDELITY—LETTER OF REV. C. FITCH—URGENT APPEALS TO VISIT VARIOUS TOWNS, ETC.

“After the commencement of the new year (1835) Mr. Miller lectured, during the first week of January, in Addison, Vt., and the second, in Cornwall, Vt. He then returned home, where he remained till the 12th of February, writing on the 11th to Elder Hendryx as follows:—

“‘The Lord opens doors faster than I can fill them. To-morrow I have an appointment in Whiting, which will occupy a week. The next week I shall be in Shoreham; the last week in this month, at Bridgeport; the first week in March, in Middletown; the second, in Hoosac. I have calls from Schroon, Ticonderoga, Moriah, Essex, Chazy, Champaign, Plattsburgh, Peru, Mooretown, Canton, Pottsdam, Hopkinton, Stockholm, Parishville, and other places too numerous to mention. The Lord has blessed me thus far; in almost every place where I have lectured, the Spirit has given fruit. Where I went forth expecting trials and persecution, I have found God a present help. Pray for me, that my faith fail not, and that I may ever feel my weakness, and that my dependence may be on Israel’s God. Pray that I may do my duty in the fear of God, and in the love of the truth; and then, whatever may become of me, God will be glorified and souls saved.’

“After filling the two former of those appointments, he returned home till the 8th of March, when he lectured in Bridgeport, Vt., three days, and gave six lectures. He lectured in Granville on the following Sabbath, March 15, and again returned home.

“It seems to have been his intention, when he left home on the 7th of March, to return to Whiting, he having received an invitation to that effect. A powerful work of grace had followed his lectures there, and several infidels had acknowledged the authenticity of the Scriptures as demonstrated by the fulfillment of prophecy, and were under deep conviction, and wished to see him. Whether he went there or not, does not appear. But, on the 21st of March, he writes, ‘I have been very sick with a cold, for a day or two past, and I am only able to sit up for a short time.’

“On the 19th of April, he again visited Granville, where he also lectured on the 20th and 21st. On the 26th, he lectured at Middletown, N. Y. On the 28th, he again wrote from Low Hampton:—

“‘I have been laid up with a severe cold, and have been only to two or three places since I wrote last (March 21). But I have now recovered my health again, so that I have been the last two weeks at Granville and Middletown. Next Sunday (May 3), I am to be at Fort Ann village, N. Y., if the Lord will; and when I shall get through lecturing in this region, I cannot tell. Doors open faster than I can fill them. I have calls from Wells, Bishop’s Corner, and Tinouth.’

“These lectures and sermons of Mr. Miller met the approval of a large number of the ministers of his denomination, with whose approbation, from this time, he went forth, as a public laborer, indorsed and sanctioned by the following certificate:—

“March 19, 1835.

“This may certify, to whom it may concern, that we, whose names are hereunto affixed—being ministers in the denomination of regular Baptists—are personally acquainted with Bro. William Miller, the bearer of this certificate; that he is a member, and a licentiate in good regular standing, in the particular Baptist church, in Hampton, N. Y.; that we have heard his lectures on the subject of the Second Coming and Reign of our Lord Jesus Christ; and that we believe his views on that particular subject, as well as others pertaining to the gospel, are worthy to be known and read of all men. As such an one, we commend him to God, and the affectionate acceptance of our brethren in the precious Saviour.

J. Sawyer, Jr., South Reading.
E. Halping, Hampton.
Amos Stearns, Fort Ann.
Emerson Andrews, Lansingburg.

“After visiting Fort Ann, N. Y., on the 3d of May, he lectured in Whitehall, N. Y., on the 10th and 17th of the same month; in West Haven, on the 7th of June, and in Middlebury, Vt., on the 14th. From that place he went into the province of Lower Canada, and lectured, on the 21st and 23d, at Bolton; the 25th, at Hutting; the 28th, 29th, and July 1, at Derby; July 2, at Georgeville; the 5th and 6th, at Bolton, again; the 7th, at Outlet; and the 8th and 9th, at Stanstead Plain. On the 12th, he lectured at Derby, Vt.; the 13th, at Troy, Vt.; the 14th, at Lowell, Vt.; the 15th, at Eden, Vt.; the 16th, at Cambridge, Vt.; the 17th, at Jericho, Vt.; and the 19th, at Orwell, Vt.

“During this tour, while in Canada, a woman placed two half-dollars in his hand, which was all the assistance he received previous to 1836. His expenses for travel, &c., were paid from his own funds.

“On his way home from Canada, he was much depressed in his spirits. To use his own words, he was overwhelmed with a dark cloud, for which he could not account. He felt impelled to hasten home, with a presentiment that there was trouble there. Leaving Jericho, Vt., instead of filling several appointments, he took the nearest route, and hastened home with all speed. Calling at Orwell, by the urgent request of his Uncle Phelps, he stopped to speak to the church on the Sabbath, leaving immediately after service for home, where he arrived late at night. His family were astonished to see him return so soon, and he was delighted to find them all well.

“At an early hour on Monday he went to visit his mother, to take to her a present from her daughter in Canada. His mother lived about half a mile from Mr. Miller’s, with her son, Solomon. He found her in the enjoyment of good health, and he spent the day with her, returning home unusually interested with his visit. His mother did not receive his views, but always told him to preach the whole truth, as he believed it, and do his duty. Soon after Mr. Miller had left his mother, she was seized with the palsy. Mr. M. was sent for. She was unable to converse any; but, by the pressure of the hand, signified that she knew him, and before the close of the week, expired. Had not Mr. Miller been impressed with a sense of ‘trouble at home,’ he would have taken a more circuitous route, and filled several appointments, according to previous arrangements. By thus changing his original purpose, he enjoyed the opportunity of a day’s conversation with his mother, which he would otherwise have been deprived of. He often recurred to this as a signal instance of God’s favor.

“On the 2d of August, he lectured at South Bay, N. Y.; on the 9th, at Dresden, N. Y., and, on the 23d, at South Bay, again. On the 28th, he again writes from Low Hampton, to Eld. Hendryx, as follows:—

“‘I am yet engaged in warning the inhabitants to be prepared for the great day of God Almighty, and am endeavoring to prove by the Scriptures that it is near, even at the doors.... I always present this as an inducement for men to repent. I call on them in the name of my dear Master to turn, repent, believe, and obey him. I beseech them, for the value of their souls, to believe in Christ. I implore them to lay up treasures in Heaven. I importune them, again and again, to read, reflect, examine, and see if the word of God is not true. I show them its complete fulfillment thus far, and then I pray God to direct the arrow to the heart. I ask God, through Jesus Christ, to nerve the arm that pulls the bow, and to sharpen the arrow that twangs from it. I then put all my confidence in God and in his promise, “Lo, I am with you even to the end of the world.” ...

“‘I have this moment received a letter from Bro. Wescott [the Baptist clergyman], to be in Stillwater next Sabbath [August 30]; and I shall be under the necessity of leaving in a few minutes. I shall be absent until about the 1st of October.

“‘My good old mother Miller is dead. She died about four weeks since. The rest of us are all in good health.

“‘Yours in gospel bonds,

“‘Wm. Miller.’

“He visited Stillwater, N. Y., according to invitation, and continued there one week, lecturing each day. On the 13th, he was at Bristol. On the 1st of November, he visited Middletown, N. Y., and gave a course of eight lectures. He then lectured again, five days, at Bristol, commencing on the 15th of November; and, beginning on the 29th, he labored five days longer at Middletown—usually giving two lectures each day. On the 6th of December, he was at Whitehall, N. Y.; on the 20th, at Poultney, Vt.; and on the 27th, at Westhaven. This terminated his labors for the year 1835.

“On the 3d of January, 1836, he lectured at a Brother Aborn’s; on the 24th, at Dresden, N. Y.; on the 7th of February, at Fort Ann village, N. Y.; on the 13th of March, at Orwell, Vt.; and on the 15th, at Shoreham, Vt. His public lectures during these winter months were interrupted by the preparation of his course of sixteen lectures for the press, which were published in Troy, N. Y., in the spring of this year, by Eld. Wescott. All the copies of that edition supplied to Mr. Miller, he purchased at the regular prices.

“On the 24th of April, he again visited Stillwater, N. Y.; and, on the 15th of May, New Haven, Vt. On the 16th he commenced a course of lectures at Weybridge, Vt., which closed on the 20th. On the day following, he began his labors at Monkton, N. Y., which continued eight days.

“On the 19th of June, he visited Lansingburg, N. Y., and continued till the 26th. To pay his stage-fare, he received, on this occasion, four dollars, which, with the two half-dollars received in Canada, was all the remuneration he had thus far received for his expenses. Subsequent to that time, as he says in his ‘Apology and Defense,’ he never received enough to meet his expenses of travel to the places where he was invited; so that his public labors were never of any pecuniary advantage to him, as has been currently reported and believed; but, on the contrary, they were a heavy tax on his property, which gradually decreased during that period of his life.

“On the 21st of July, he writes, from Low Hampton, to Eld. Hendryx: ‘I have been confined at home, for three weeks past, by a bilious complaint. I was taken unwell while lecturing at Lansingburg, N. Y.; but I finished my course of lectures, and returned home, and have not been well since. My lectures were well received in that place, and excited attention. The house was filled to overflowing for eight days in succession. I feel that God was there, and believe that in his glorified kingdom I shall see the fruits.... Infidels, deists, Universalists, and sectarians, were all chained to their seats, in perfect silence, for hours—yes, days—to hear the old stammering man talk about the second coming of Christ, and show the manner, object, time, and signs, of his coming. O my brother! it makes me feel like a worm—a poor, feeble creature; for it is God only who could produce such an effect on such audiences. Yet it gives me confidence; for I solemnly believe it is truth; and God will support his word, and will be present where it is preached, however feeble the instrument; for “Lo, I am with you alway, even unto the end of the world.” Therefore, if I were preaching before all the kings of the earth, why should I fear? for the King of kings is with me. If all the lords were there, yet he is Lord of lords, and of the great men of the earth.’

“Mr. Miller again lectured in Dresden, N. Y., on the 7th of August; in Orwell, Vt., on the 11th of September; and in Keesville, N. Y., on the 18th. He then gave courses of lectures, beginning at Lawrence, N. Y., on the 22d; Stockholm, on the 29th; Parishville, on the 7th of October; Massena, N. Y., on the 14th. He gave ten lectures at Fort Covington, N. Y., beginning on the 20th, and was at Chataugay, N. Y., on the 27th. This terminated his labors for the year 1836. In allusion to these last visits, he wrote on the 23d of December:—

“‘I have not visited a place where the Lord has not given me one or two souls for my hire. I have spent eight weeks in St. Lawrence County, and delivered eighty-two lectures this fall. Next week I am going to Shaftsbury and vicinity.’

“He visited Shaftsbury, Vt., the 23d of January, 1837, and gave his full course of sixteen lectures. At the close of one lecture, a Baptist clergyman arose, and stated that he had come there for the purpose of exposing the folly of Mr. M., but had to confess that he was confounded, convicted, and converted. He acknowledged that he had applied various unhandsome appellations to Mr. Miller, calling him ‘the end of the world man,’ ‘the old visionary,’ ‘dreamer,’ ‘fanatic,’ and for which he felt covered with shame and confusion. That confession, evidently so honest, was like a thunderbolt on the audience.

“Very few particulars of interest have been gathered respecting his labors during the year 1837. According to his memorandum-book, he lectured in Wells, Vt., on the 3d of February; in Shrewsbury, Vt., on the 3d of March; in Andover, Vt., from the 5th to the 12th of March; in Weston, Vt., four days, beginning with the 13th; in Mt. Holly, Vt., on the 17th; in Orwell, Vt., on the 23d of April and 7th of May; in Danby, Vt., the 14th of May; in Poultney, Vt., eight days, beginning with the 21st of May; in Orwell, again, on the 4th of June; in North Springfield, Vt., from the 11th to the 17th; in Ludlow, Vt., from the 19th to the 21st; in Mt. Holly, Vt., from the 25th of June to the 2d of July;[15] in Orwell, Vt., on the 9th of July; at Fairhaven, Vt., from the 11th to the 20th; in Whiting, Vt., on the 23d; in Fairhaven, Vt., on the 13th of Aug.; in Moriah, Vt., from the 14th to the 22d of October; in Ludlow, Vt., from the 29th to the 6th of November, and at Stillwater, N. Y., on the 31st of December.

“With the 1st of January, 1838, he commenced a second course of lectures at Lansingburg, N. Y., in compliance with the urgent request of the Baptist church in that place, and of E. B. Crandall, their pastor. The lectures continued nine days, and were listened to by crowded and attentive audiences. The result also was most heart-cheering. Infidelity had several strongholds in that neighborhood, and many of that class attended his lectures, and were greatly affected by them. In a letter dated on the 25th of that month, two weeks after the close of the lectures, a gentleman of that place writes to Mr. Miller:—

“‘I have never witnessed so powerful an effect in any place as in this, on all who heard. I am of the opinion that not less than one hundred persons, who held infidel sentiments, are brought to believe the Bible. Infidelity is dumb in this place, as if frightened, and converts are many.’

“The following testimony of one who was converted from infidelity during these lectures, is copied from the Boston Investigator (an infidel paper) of January, 1845:—

“‘Mr. Editor:—I was a warm supporter of the views of Abner Kneeland, attended his lectures and protracted dances, disbelieved in divine revelation and a future existence, and fully accorded with Mr. Kneeland’s views of religion. Having read every work of note that I could obtain, and having heard many lectures opposed to God and the Bible, I considered myself prepared to overthrow the Christian faith, and feared no argument that could be brought from the Bible. With these feelings, I attended a full course of Mr. Miller’s lectures. He gave his rules of interpretation, and pledged himself to prove his position. I approved of his rules—to which I refer you—and the result was, he established the fact that the Bible is what it purports to be—the word of God—to my mind, beyond a doubt; and I have taken it as the man of my counsel.

“‘I notice your doubts of the truth of the statement in relation to hundreds of infidels being converted under the preaching of Mr. Miller. This may possibly be owing to your never having given Mr. Miller a candid and thorough hearing. He is a man mighty in the Scriptures, and has done terrible execution in the ranks of the “King’s enemies,” with the sword of the Spirit, which is the word of God.

“‘I am personally acquainted with nearly one hundred, who held to similar views with Abner Kneeland, who were converted under the preaching of Mr. Miller; and we did not yield the point without a struggle, nor without due consideration. Each and every prop and refuge of infidelity and unbelief were taken away from us, and our sandy foundation was swept by the truth of the Almighty as chaff is driven by the wind. Yet we parted with them much as a man parts with a diseased tooth. We tried to cure and keep it there, and when made to know that the root and foundation was rotten, it was painful to part with; but we rejoiced and felt better after the separation; for there is balm in Gilead—there is a Physician there.

“‘Lansingburg, N. Y., Jan., 1845.’

“On the 14th of January, Mr. Miller lectured at Westhaven, N. Y., and two weeks from that day, at Low Hampton, N. Y. On the 4th of February, he commenced a course of lectures at Panton, Vt., which he continued eight days. He then returned to West Haven, N. Y., and lectured seven days, beginning February 18.

“On returning to Low Hampton, he found the following letter from Rev. Charles Fitch, pastor at the Marlboro’ Chapel, Boston. It was the beginning of an acquaintance between those dear brethren in Christ, and as such, will be read with interest by all:—

“‘Boston, March 5, 1838.

“‘My Dear Brother:—I am a stranger to you, but I trust that, through the free sovereign grace of God, I am not altogether a stranger to Jesus Christ, whom you serve. I am the pastor of an orthodox Congregational church in this city. A few weeks since, your Lectures on the Second Coming of Christ were put into my hands. I sat down to read the work, knowing nothing of the views which it contained. I have studied it with an overwhelming interest, such as I never felt in any other book except the Bible. I have compared it with Scripture and history, and I find nothing on which to rest a single doubt respecting the correctness of your views. Though a miserable, guilty sinner, I trust that, through the Lord’s abounding grace, I shall be among those that love his appearing. I preached to my people two discourses yesterday on the coming of our Lord, and I believe a deep and permanent interest will be awakened thereby in God’s testimonies. My object in writing you, my dear sir, is twofold.

“‘1st. Will you have the kindness to inform me, by letter, in what history you find the fact stated that the last of the ten kings was baptized A. D. 508, and also that the decree of Justinian, giving the Bishop of Rome power to suppress the reading of the Scriptures, was issued in 538? All the other data which you have given, I have found correct, and I know of no reason to doubt your correctness in these. But, as I have not yet been able to find a statement of those facts, you will do me a great favor by just informing me where I may find them; and I shall then feel prepared to defend the truth, and to point others to the right source of information.

“‘There is a meeting of our Ministerial Association to-morrow, and, as I am appointed to read an essay, I design to bring up this whole subject for discussion, and trust that I may thereby do something to spread the truth.

“‘2d. My second object in writing was to ask if you would put me in the way to obtain a dozen copies of your lectures. I know of none to be obtained here. I know of several individuals who are very desirous to obtain the work, and if you can tell me of any place where it can be obtained in this city, or in New York, you will greatly oblige me. If you can give me any information of importance on the subject, not contained in your book, I should greatly rejoice, because, as I stand a watchman on the walls, I wish to “give the trumpet a certain sound,” and to make that sound as full, and explicit, and convincing, as possible.

“‘Yours in the faith of Jesus Christ,

“‘Charles Fitch.’

“On the 12th of March, Mr. M. commenced a course of lectures, and continued eight days, at Benson, Vt. Previous to this, he had received urgent requests from the Rev. Mr. Hill, of the First Church in Troy, N. Y., and Rev. Mr. Parke, of the church in West Troy, uniting with their respective churches, for a course of lectures in each place; and they were expected, in West Troy, to have been commenced previous to those in Benson, Vt. Their disappointment, and the great anxiety of ministers and people, at that period, to secure his services, may be judged of by the following letter from the pastor of the church in that place:—

“‘West Troy, March 12, 1838.

“‘William S. Miller, Esq.:[16] Dear Sir, I received a line from you, dated March 1, and was glad to hear that Father Miller had concluded to visit West Troy on Saturday last. With much anxiety, all looked forward to that day, expecting the privilege of hearing something upon the subject of Christ’s Second Coming. But alas! we are disappointed. Dear Sir, I write these few lines, letting you know something of the state of feeling in this place upon the subject of Mr. Miller’s lectures. In the street, in the house, in short, wherever (almost) you meet an individual, the first thing is, Has Mr. Miller come yet? When is Mr. Miller going to be here? What is the reason he does not come? &c. If the old gentleman can possibly come down to West Troy, I wish him to come as soon as possible. I hope he will not delay. I think we have a little claim upon him, if our wishes may be brought into account. Dear Sir, upon the reception of this, please write me the reason of the disappointment; also, when he will come, if at all, that I may give an answer to them that ask.

“‘Yours in haste,

“‘Frederic S. Parke.’

“At the same date, Mr. Miller’s son received a letter from Troy, N. Y., stating that ‘Rev. Mr. Hill is at present very anxious, and most of his church, for your father to come to East Troy first, and he has undertaken a negotiation with Eld. Parke, for your father to visit them half of the time.’

“In compliance with these urgent requests, he commenced a course of lectures at West Troy, N. Y., on the 8th of March, and continued till the 15th, when he began in East Troy, where he continued till the 25th. These were attended with happy results. In the March of the next year, the Rev. Mr. Parke wrote Mr. Miller as follows:—

“‘It is my privilege to say that God in mercy is doing a great work in West Troy. Old and young and middle-aged are alike made the happy recipients of grace. The Dutch Reformed church are enjoying an interesting state of things. The Methodists are full of the Spirit, and the Baptists are pressing on in the good cause. Praise the Lord! A number date their awakening to your lectures on the Second Coming of Christ.... You have great reason to rejoice that God is pleased to make you the honored instrument of awakening poor sinners.’

“Previous to these lectures, he had received the following urgent request from Rev. Emerson Andrews, of the Baptist church in Rome, N. Y.:—

“‘Rome, N. Y., March 20, 1838.

“‘Dear Brother Miller:— ... We have heard something of you and yours, and want to see you in person, and hear your whole course of lectures. I feel as if the time had arrived for you to preach the gospel at Rome also. There is more attention to religion now than formerly, and some anxiety. The desire to hear from you is very great. We want you to come immediately, the first Sunday, if possible. Don’t, I beg of you, make any delay, or excuse, but come right off.... I want you to be here before the time if possible.’

“Engagements at Troy made it necessary to defer compliance with the above till they were attended to. After a few days’ rest, he visited Rome, N. Y., began his lectures there on the 6th of May, and continued till the 16th. In the absence of any journal, or of any reference to these lectures in any of the letters preserved by him, their results cannot be here recorded.

“In June following, he again visited his friends in Canada East, and lectured at Outlet on the 10th and 11th, and Bolton from the 12th to the 14th, returning home before the end of the month. After this, he gave courses of lectures, commencing on the 26th of August, at Braintree, Vt.; on the 16th of September, at White Creek, Vt.; on the 3d of October, at Pittsfield, Vt.; on the 7th, at Randolph, Vt.; on the 16th, at Brookfield, Vt.

“This last course was given at the urgent request of Rev. Jehiel Claflin and the Baptist church in that place. As early as the 26th of June, Mr. C. wrote him: ‘There are a great many people in this and the adjoining towns, who are very anxious to hear you lecture on the subject of the millennium.’ And, on the 16th of July, he wrote: ‘I received your favor of the 30th ult., and read the same with much delight, to find that you could gratify the wish of so many friends in this, and adjacent towns. I read your letter in meeting, yesterday, to my congregation; and, some being present from abroad, I consulted them according to your request, and found an increasing anxiety in their minds that you should come and lecture in this vicinity, or near by.’

“On the 7th of November, he commenced a course of lectures at Montpelier, Vt., which he continued there and in the neighborhood till the 23d. On the 17th, he writes from that place to his son:—

“‘There is a great excitement on the subject in this place. Last night, we had a solemn and interesting meeting. There was a great breaking down, and much weeping. Some souls have been born again. I can hardly get away from this people. They want me to stay another week; but I shall go to the next village on Monday. Mr. Kellogg, the Congregational minister here, is a good man, and his church are living Christians. Montpelier is quite a considerable village, and contains some very intelligent people, who appear to listen with much interest. This afternoon, I meet the citizens, and am to give them an opportunity to ask questions and state objections.... May God help me to give his truth! I know my own weakness, and I know that I have neither power of body nor mind to do what the Lord is doing by me. It is the Lord’s doings and marvelous in our eyes. The world do not know how weak I am. They think much more of the old man than I think of him.’

“A gentleman in this place, on the 20th of February following, wrote to Mr. M. as follows: ‘I am happy to inform you that your labors with us have been blessed, and twenty have united with our church (the Baptist) since you left Montpelier, and twenty or thirty more will soon join, all of whom date their awakening at the time you lectured here. Bro. Kellogg (the Congregationalist minister) is strong in the faith, and his views are with Bro. Miller on the second coming of Christ.’

“On the 24th of November, he commenced a series of lectures in Jericho, Vt., which continued till the 2d of December. On the 28th of this month, he went to Stockbridge, Vt., and on the 30th, to Rochester, where he continued till the 6th of January, 1839.

“On the 7th of January, 1839, he wrote to his son from Bethel, Vt., that he had lectured in those places to large audiences, and was on his way to Woodstock. He arrived at that place on the 7th, and commenced a second course of lectures, which continued to the 14th. From that date to the 20th, he lectured at Pomfret, Vt.; from the 21st to the 27th, at Bethel, Vt.; and from the 28th to the 31st, at Gaysville, Vt.; from which place he returned home. On the 28th, he wrote from Gaysville to his son:—

“‘There has been a reformation in every place that I have lectured in since I left home, and the work is progressing in every place rapidly. The meeting-houses are crowded to overflowing. Much excitement prevails among the people. Many say they believe; some scoff; others are sober and thinking. Give my love to all—mother and the children.

I remain yours, etc.

“‘Wm. Miller.’

“On the 10th of March, he commenced in Essex, Vt., and lectured till the 17th. From the 18th to the 25th, he was at Williston, Vt.; and on the 26th, he commenced another course of lectures at Waterbury, Vt., which closed on the 1st of April. Having projected a tour into Massachusetts about this time, he was obliged to disappoint a large number who had solicited visits from him. As evidence of the great desire to hear him, he then had on file urgent requests from Frederick Daley, ‘Preacher in charge,’ Northfield, Vt.,—with fifteen signatures from Strafford, Vt.,—expressing ‘a great anxiety on the part of the public to hear a course of lectures;’ from Joseph Chase, Middlesex, announcing that the meeting-house had been opened for him without a dissenting vote, and urging him to come by all means; Wm. D. Leavett, Grantham, N. H.; urging his presence there, ‘at an early day as possible;’ Z. Delano, Hartford, Vt., wishing him to come as early ‘as practicable;’ Jonathan Woods, Dover, Vt., ‘many people being desirous to hear;’ Hiram Freeman, pastor of the Congregationalist church in Middlesex, Vt., stating that ‘the church would gladly see him, and were generally anxious for him to come,’ etc., etc.; none of which appear to have been complied with.

CHAPTER VI.

VISITS MASSACHUSETTS—INVITATION TO LOWELL—EXTRACT FROM THE LYNN RECORD—IS INVITED TO BOSTON—CONVERSATION WITH ELDER HIMES—PUBLICATION OF HIS LECTURES BY MR. MUSSEY—LABORS IN PORTSMOUTH—INTERVIEW WITH ELDER ROBINSON, ETC.

“In compliance with an invitation from Mr. Seth Mann, of Randolph, Mass., dated January 15, 1839, informing him that ‘I, myself, and many of our Baptist and Pedo-Baptist friends here, wish you to come and preach to us,’ Mr. Miller visited Massachusetts, and arrived for the first time in Boston on the evening of April 18. The next day he wrote as follows:—

“‘Boston, April 19, 10 o’clock A. M., 1839.

“‘Dear Son:—I am now in this place, hearty and well. Start at half-past twelve for Randolph, where I expect to be next week. Roads were very bad. Snow-storm night before last in Keene, N. H.; pleasant yesterday and to-day. I have been running about this morning; visited India wharf, the new Market, Faneuil Hall, etc., etc. Busy time in Boston. I have no news as yet. Will write as often as you will wish to hear. I stopped at the Pemberton House, No. 9 Howard street.

Yours, etc.

Wm. Miller.’

“He reached Randolph, and commenced his first course of lectures in Massachusetts on the 21st of April of that year. He closed his lectures there on the 28th; commenced in Stoughton, Mass., on the 29th, and continued to the 6th of May; lectured at Braintree, Mass., on the 7th and 8th, and from the 9th to the 13th in East Randolph, Mass. His lectures in these places were attended by powerful revivals. On the 27th of May Mr. Mann wrote him from Randolph, saying:—

“‘The Lord, we trust, is doing a gracious work in this place. There have been twelve or fourteen already converted, and at the close of the last meeting about twenty arose for prayers. Our last conference meeting was so crowded that we had to adjourn to the meeting-house.... There appears to be a great solemnity on the minds of nearly all in Mr. M’Leish’s society. A powerful work is going on in East Randolph.’

“In July following, Rev. Charles Peabody transmitted to Mr. M. the unanimous vote of the church for him to repeat his lectures in Randolph; but he does not appear to have done so.

“Previous to Mr. Miller’s visit to Massachusetts, Elder T. Cole, of Lowell, had heard of the results attending his labors in Vermont, and had written for him to visit that city. The dress of Mr. Miller was very plain and ordinary, much more befitting his profession of a farmer than of a preacher. Elder Cole, from the reports of his great success, expected him to appear like some distinguished doctor of divinity. When Mr. M. came to Randolph, Elder C. obtained a promise of his services in Lowell, to commence on the 14th of May, and was requested to meet him at the cars. He had heard that Mr. Miller wore a camlet cloak and white hat, but expected to see a fashionably-dressed gentleman. On the arrival of the cars, he went to the depot to meet him. He watched closely the appearance of all the passengers as they left the cars, but saw no one who corresponded with his expectations of Mr. M. Soon he saw an old man, shaking with the palsy, with a white hat and camlet cloak, alight from the cars. Fearing that this one might prove to be the man, and, if so, regretting that he had invited him to lecture in his church, he stepped up to him, and whispered in his ear:—

“‘Is your name Miller?’

“Mr. M. nodded assent.

“‘Well,’ said he, ‘follow me.’

“He led the way, walking on ahead, and Mr. M. keeping as near as he could, till he reached his house. He was much chagrined that he had written for a man of Mr. M.’s appearance, who, he concluded, could know nothing respecting the Bible, but would confine his discourse to visions and fancies of his own.

“After tea, he told Mr. M. he supposed it was about time to attend church; and again led the way, Mr. Miller bringing up the rear. He showed Mr. M. into the desk, but took a seat himself among the congregation. Mr. M. read a hymn; after it was sung, he prayed, and read another hymn, which was also sung. He felt unpleasant at being left in the pulpit alone, but took for his text: ‘Looking for that blessed hope, and the glorious appearing of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ.’ This he sustained and illustrated by apposite quotations of Scripture, proving a second personal and glorious appearing of Christ. Elder C. listened for about fifteen minutes, when, seeing that he presented nothing but the word of God, and that he opened the Scriptures in a manner that did honor to the occasion, like a workman who needeth not to be ashamed, he walked up into the pulpit, and took his seat. Mr. M. lectured there from the 14th to the 22d of May, and again from the 29th to the 4th of June. A glorious revival followed, and elder C. embraced his views in full, continuing for six years a devoted advocate of them. On the 25th of July, elder C. wrote Mr. M. that, since the lectures, he ‘had baptized about forty, sixty in all having joined the church; and there are yet some who are seeking the Lord.’ Mr. Miller says of his visit:—

“‘At Lowell I also became acquainted with my Bro. J. Litch, who had previously embraced my views, and who has since so aided their extension by his faithful lectures and writings, and energetic and consistent course.’

“From the 24th to the 28th of May, Mr. M. lectured in Groton, Mass., and from the 3d to the 9th of June, in Lynn, Mass. In connection with his visit to this place, he made the following entry in his memorandum-book: ‘Thus ends my tour into Massachusetts, making eight hundred lectures from October 1, 1834, to June 9, 1839—four years, six months, nine days.’ The editor of the Lynn Record gave the following notice of Mr. Miller, and his visit to that place:—

“‘MILLER AND THE PROPHECIES.

“‘We took a prejudice against this good man when he first came among us, on account of what we supposed a glaring error in interpreting the Scripture prophecies so that the world would come to an end in 1843. We are still inclined to believe this an error or miscalculation. At the same time we have overcome our prejudice against him by attending his lectures, and learning more of the excellent character of the man, and of the great good he has done and is doing. Mr. Miller is a plain farmer, and pretends to nothing except that he has made the Scripture prophecies an intense study for many years, understands some of them differently from most other people, and wishes, for the good of others, to spread his views before the public. No one can hear him five minutes without being convinced of his sincerity, and instructed by his reasoning and information. All acknowledge his lectures to be replete with useful and interesting matter. His knowledge of Scripture is very extensive and minute; that of the prophecies, especially, surprisingly familiar. His application of the prophecies to the great events which have taken place in the natural and moral world is such, generally, as to produce conviction of their truth, and gain the ready assent of his hearers. We have reason to believe that the preaching or lecturing of Mr. Miller, has been productive of great and extensive good. Revivals have followed in his train. He has been heard with attention, wherever he has been....

“‘There is nothing very peculiar in the manner or appearance of Mr. Miller. Both are at least equal to the style and appearance of ministers in general. His gestures are easy and expressive, and his personal appearance every way decorous. His Scripture explanations and illustrations are strikingly simple, natural, and forcible; and the great eagerness of the people to hear him has been manifested wherever he has preached.’

“On his way home he lectured at the following places:—Commencing on the 16th of June at Westford, Vt.; the 23d, at Cambridge, Vt., and on the 30th at Colchester, Vt. As a result of his labors in Colchester, twenty-three were added to the Baptist church between that time and the 2d of December following.

“The letters addressed to him and his son at this period show that a report was in circulation that he was dead; and, that as soon as that was successfully contradicted, another was current that, on re-examining his calculations, he had discovered a mistake of one hundred years. Both of these rumors were several times subsequently revived, and had to be as often contradicted.

“On the 15th of September, in compliance with ‘the wish of many in Rutland, Vt.,’ who were ‘very anxious to hear’ his ‘course of lectures,’ he visited that place, and lectured each day, to the 22d, when he returned to his family, and made arrangements for a second visit to Massachusetts.

“He commenced his labors at Groton, Mass., on the 13th of October, and lectured ten days. In reference to these lectures and others in neighboring towns, Rev. Silas Hawley, Congregational minister, wrote from Groton, on the 10th of April, 1840, as follows:—

“‘Mr. Miller has lectured in this and adjoining towns with marked success. His lectures have been succeeded by precious revivals of religion in all those places. A class of minds are reached by him not within the influence of other men. His lectures are well adapted, so far as I have learned, for shaking the supremacy of the various forms of error that are rife in the community.’

“Closing his lectures in Groton, Mr. M. gave a third course of lectures in Lowell, continuing from the 23d of October to the 1st of November. These, like the previous lectures in that place, were attended with precious fruits.

“From the 2d to the 10th of November, he lectured in Haverhill, Mass., where he made the acquaintance of Elder Henry Plummer, pastor of the Christian church, who embraced his views, and was a steadfast friend till Mr. Miller’s decease.

“On the 11th of November, Mr. M. commenced a course of lectures in Exeter, N. H., which continued till the 19th. On the 12th, a conference of the Christian Connection was in session there, and they called on Mr. Miller in a body. He was a stranger to nearly all of them; and few of them regarded his views with anything more than mere curiosity. Several of them questioned him respecting his faith; but they were speedily silenced by the quotation of appropriate texts of Scripture.

“It was on this occasion that he became acquainted with Elder Joshua V. Himes, then pastor of the Chardon-street church, Boston. Elder H. had written to Mr. M., on the 19th of October, inviting him to give a course of lectures in his chapel. He now renewed his invitation, and got the promise of a course of lectures in December. Before commencing there, Mr. Miller gave a second course of lectures in Stoughton, Mass., from the 24th to the 29th of November, and one in Canton, Mass., from the 1st to the 6th of December. In this last place, he writes to his son, that he ‘lectured three times on the last day, to a house jammed full.’ Pressing invitations for further labors in the surrounding region had to be disregarded, in order to fulfill his engagement in the metropolis of New England.

“He arrived in Boston on the 7th of December, and from the 8th to the 16th lectured in the Chardon-street chapel,—his first course of lectures in that city.

“On the 12th of December, Mr. Miller writes from Boston to his son:—‘I am now in this place lecturing, twice a day, to large audiences. Many, very many, go away unable to gain admittance. Many, I am informed, are under serious convictions. I hope God will work in this city.’

“At this time he stopped at the house of Elder Himes, who had much conversation with him respecting his views, his plans for the future, and his responsibilities. Elder H. became impressed with the correctness of Mr. M.’s views respecting the nearness and nature of Christ’s coming; but was not fully satisfied respecting the time. He was, however, sufficiently convinced that Mr. Miller was communicating important truths, to feel a great interest in their promulgation.

“‘When Mr. Miller had closed his lectures,’ says Elder H., ‘I found myself in a new position. I could not believe or preach as I had done. Light on this subject was blazing on my conscience day and night. A long conversation with Mr. Miller then took place, on our duties and responsibilities. I said to Bro. Miller, “Do you really believe this doctrine?”

“‘He replied, “Certainly, I do, or I would not preach it.”

“‘What are you doing to spread or diffuse it through the world?’

“‘I have done, and am still doing, all I can.’

“‘Well, the whole thing is kept in a corner yet. There is but little knowledge on the subject, after all you have done. If Christ is to come in a few years, as you believe, no time should be lost in giving the church and world warning, in thunder-tones, to arouse them to prepare.’

“‘I know it, I know it, Bro. Himes,’ said he; ‘but what can an old farmer do? I was never used to public speaking; I stand quite alone; and, though I have labored much, and seen many converted to God and the truth, yet no one, as yet, seems to enter into the object and spirit of my mission, so as to render me much aid. They like to have me preach, and build up their churches; and there it ends with most of the ministers, as yet. I have been looking for help—I want help.’

“‘It was at this time that I laid myself, family, society, reputation, all, upon the altar of God, to help him, to the extent of my power, to the end. I then inquired of him what parts of the country he had visited, and whether he had visited any of our principal cities.

“‘He informed me of his labors,’ as given in the foregoing pages.

“‘But why,’ I said, ‘have you not been into the large cities?’

“‘He replied that his rule was to visit those places where invited, and that he had not been invited into any of the large cities.

“‘Well,’ said I, ‘will you go with me where doors are opened?’

“‘Yes, I am ready to go anywhere, and labor to the extent of my ability to the end.’

“‘I then told him he might prepare for the campaign; for doors should be opened in every city in the Union, and the warning should go to the ends of the earth! Here I began to “help” Father Miller.’

“With this epoch commenced an entire new era in the spread of the doctrine of the advent. B. B. Mussey, Esq., a distinguished Boston publisher, undertook the publication of a revised edition, of five thousand copies, of Mr. Miller’s Lectures, on condition that Mr. Miller would secure the copyright. Mr. M. did so, which subjected himself to some blame, where the reason for the act was not known. Mr. M. gave to Mr. Mussey the entire profits of the edition for two hundred copies of the work, which Mr. Mussey gave him.

“On the 17th of December, Mr. M. lectured in Westford, where he was refused the use of the Congregational church—the first place of worship that was ever closed against him. From the 19th to the 26th of December, he lectured in Littleton, Mass. The result of these lectures is indicated by a letter of Rev. Oliver Ayer (Baptist), who writes, in January:—‘I baptized twelve at our last communion. I shall, probably, baptize from fifteen to twenty next time. There have been from thirty-five to forty hopeful conversions. There is also quite a work in Westford, ten or twelve conversions, and twenty or thirty inquirers. The work is still going on.’

“On the 28th he returned to Boston, and repeated his course of lectures in Mr. Himes’ chapel, closing on the 5th of January, 1840. The day following, by request of the Baptist church under the care of the Rev. Mr. Parker, he visited Cambridgeport, and lectured there each day till the 13th of January. From the 14th to the 20th, he gave a second course of lectures to Elder Plummer’s society, in Haverhill, Mass.

“On the 21st of January, 1840, he visited Portsmouth, N. H., and commenced his first course of lectures in that city. The following article, in reference to them, from the pen of Elder David Millard, pastor of the Christian Society there, appeared in the columns of the Christian Herald a few weeks subsequently:—

“‘On the 21st of January, Bro. William Miller came into town, and commenced, in our chapel, his course of lectures on the Second Coming of Christ. During the nine days that he remained, crowds flocked to hear him. Before he concluded his lectures, a large number of anxious souls came forward for prayers. Our meetings continued every day and evening for a length of time after he left. Such an intense state of feeling as now pervaded our congregation we never witnessed before in any place. Not unfrequently from sixty to eighty would come forward for prayers on an evening. Such an awful spirit of solemnity seemed to settle down on the place that hard must be that sinner’s heart that could withstand it. Yet, during the whole, not an appearance of confusion occurred; all was order and solemnity. Generally, as soon as souls found deliverance, they were ready to proclaim it, and exhort their friends, in the most moving language, to come to the fountain of life. Our meetings thus continued, on evenings, for six weeks; indeed, they have thus continued, with very little intermission, up to the present.

“‘Probably about one hundred and fifty souls have been converted in our meetings; but a part of these were from other congregations, and have returned to their former meetings. Among the converts are a considerable number from the Universalist congregation; these still remain with us. From our meetings this blessed work soon spread into every congregation in town favorable to revivals. In several of them it is at present spreading with power. For weeks together, the ringing of bells for daily meetings rendered our town like a continual Sabbath. Indeed, such a season of revival was never witnessed before in Portsmouth by the oldest inhabitant. It would be difficult, at present, to ascertain the exact number of conversions in town; it is variously estimated at from five hundred to seven hundred. We have received into fellowship eighty-one; nine of these were received on previous profession. We have baptized sixty-seven, and the others stand as candidates for baptism. Never, while we linger on the shores of mortality, do we expect to enjoy more of Heaven than we have in some of our late meetings, and on baptizing occasions. At the waterside, thousands would gather to witness this solemn institution in Zion, and many would return from the place weeping. Our brethren at the old chapel have had some additions, we believe some over twenty.’

“The Rev. Mr. Peabody, of Portsmouth, in a sermon published soon after, spoke of the revival which commenced there in connection with Mr. Miller’s labors, as follows:—

“‘If I am rightly informed, the present season of religious excitement has been, to a great degree, free from what, I confess, has always made me dread such times, I mean those excesses and extravagances which wound religion in the house of its friends, and cause its enemies to blaspheme. I most cheerfully express my opinion that there will be, in the fruits of the present excitement, far less to regret, and much more for the friends of God to rejoice in—much more to be recorded in the book of eternal life—than in any similar series of religious exercises which I have ever had the opportunity of watching.’

“At the time of these lectures, Eld. D. I. Robinson was stationed in Portsmouth, as the pastor of the Methodist church, and attended a part of the course. He writes:—

“‘I heard him all I could the first week, and thought I could stop his wheels and confound him; but, as the revival had commenced in the vast congregation assembled to hear, I would not do it publicly, lest evil should follow. I therefore visited him at his room, with a formidable list of objections. To my surprise, scarcely any of them were new to him, and he could answer them as fast as I could present them. And then he presented objections and questions which confounded me and the commentaries on which I had relied. I went home used up, convicted, humbled, and resolved to examine the question.’

“The result was, that Eld. R. became fully convinced of the nearness of the advent, and has since been a faithful preacher of the kingdom at hand. Eld. Thomas F. Barry, also, at this time embraced Mr. Miller’s views, and continued an able and consistent advocate of the same till his death, at Oswego, N. Y., July 17, 1846.

“On the 30th and 31st of January, Mr. M. again lectured in Exeter, N. H., and from the 2d to the 6th of February in Deerfield, N. H., after which he returned to Boston.

CHAPTER VII.

PUBLICATION OF THE “SIGNS OF THE TIMES”—VISIT TO WATERTOWN, PORTLAND, NEW YORK CITY, AND OTHER PLACES—LETTERS OF ELDERS MEDBURY, FLEMING, AND GREEN—HIS SICKNESS, RESIGNATION, ETC.

“From the 8th to the 29th of February, Mr. M. gave his third course of lectures in Boston, in the Marlboro’ Chapel and other places, as the doors opened. It was during this series of meetings that the publication of a journal, devoted to the doctrine of the advent, was effected. Mr. Miller (in 1845) thus narrates its origin:—

“For a long time previous to this, the papers had been filled with abusive stories respecting my labors, and they had refused to publish anything from me in reply. I had greatly felt the need of some medium of communication to the public. Efforts had been frequently made to commence the publication of a paper which should be devoted to the advocacy of the doctrine, and the communication of information on the fulfillment of prophecy. We had, however, never been able to find a man who was willing to run the risk of his reputation and the pecuniary expense in such a publication.

“On my visit to Boston in the winter of 1840, I mentioned to Bro. Himes my wishes respecting a paper, and the difficulties I had experienced in the establishment of one. He promptly offered to commence a paper which should be devoted to this question, if I thought the cause of truth would be thereby advanced. The next week, without a subscriber or any promise of assistance, he issued the first number of the Signs of the Times, on the 28th of February, 1840—a publication [now, 1875, Messiah’s Herald,] which has been continued to the present time.

“With this commenced an entire new era in the spread of information on the peculiar points of my belief. Mr. Mussey gave up to him the publication of my lectures, and he published them in connection with other works on the prophecies, which, aided by devoted friends, he scattered broadcast everywhere to the extent of his means. I cannot here withhold my testimony to the efficiency and integrity of my Bro. Himes. He has stood by me at all times, periled his reputation, and, by the position in which he has been placed, has been more instrumental in the spread of these views than any other ten men who have embarked in the cause. His course, both in laboring as a lecturer and in the manner that he has managed his publications, meets my full approval.—Apology and Defense, p. 21.

“After the issue of the first number, its printers, Messrs. Dow & Jackson, proposed to Elder Himes to issue the paper semi-monthly for one year, he to furnish the editorial matter gratuitously, and they to have all the proceeds of it. These terms being accepted, they re-issued the first number on the 20th of March, and continued it, as per agreement, for one year, when it reverted to Eld. Himes, its projector, by whom it has been continued to the present time [1853].

“On the 1st of March, 1840, Mr. M. visited Watertown, Mass., and commenced his first course of lectures in that place. These continued nine days, and were attended by a crowded audience. Mr. M. was much pleased with his reception there, and, after leaving, wrote to his son:—

“‘I have never seen so great an effect in any one place as there. I preached last from Gen. 19:17. There were from a thousand to fifteen hundred present, and more than one hundred under conviction. One-half the congregation wept like children when I parted from them. Mr. Medbury, the Baptist minister, a good man, wept as though his heart would break, when he took me by the hand, and, for himself and people, bade me farewell. He and many others fell upon my neck, and wept and kissed me, and sorrowed most of all that they should see my face no more. We could not get away for more than an hour, and finally we had to break away. About twenty were converted while I was there.’

“Rev. R. B. Medbury afterward gave the following account of the result of Mr. Miller’s lectures there, through the Signs of the Times:—

“‘For several months past we have enjoyed, and are still enjoying, a pleasing work of grace among us. This revival, as stated in the account published in the Christian Watchman of the 8th instant, was in progress when Mr. Miller commenced lecturing here. In speaking of the results of his labors, however, it is but just to say that his influence here preceded him. It will be recollected that, some time in January, he lectured at Cambridgeport, about four miles from us. Many, both of our church and congregation, attended one or more of those lectures. The first two subjects of the present work among us, as well as some others, who have since been hopefully converted, regarded those lectures as instrumental of fastening permanent conviction upon their mind. Several Christians, too, were awakened to a new sense of their duty.

“‘There had, however, been rather more feeling than usual in several of our meetings previous to that time. And in the interval which elapsed between this time and the commencement of Mr. Miller’s lectures here, the blessing of God had accompanied the means of grace at home to the hopeful conversion of about twenty. The work evidently received a new impulse while Mr. Miller was here. His lectures were attended by crowds, who listened with profound attention, and, we have reason to believe, in not a few cases with profit. Many persons from neighboring villages shared the benefit of his labors in common with us, and, in several cases, returned to their homes rejoicing. Other means of grace were, however, mingled with his labors, which were, no doubt, in a great degree owned and blessed of God.

“‘Among those who have since united with our church, many have mentioned Mr. Miller’s lectures as the means, under God, of bringing them to repentance. They have generally stated that, for months or years, they had thought more or less on the subject; but that on hearing him they felt it was time to take a stand. The things of eternity assumed to them an unwonted reality. Heaven was brought near, and they felt themselves guilty before God. It was not so much the belief that Christ might come in 1843 as it was the certainty of that event, with the conviction that they were not prepared to hail his coming with joy. Many, however, who listened to his whole course of lectures with a heart unmoved, have since been melted into contrition, and become the hopeful subjects of renewing grace.

“‘Many Christians who attended Mr. Miller’s lectures here have regarded them as the means of quickening them to new spiritual life. I know not that any one has embraced all his peculiar views; but many have been made to feel that time is short, that the coming of Christ is at hand, and that what they do for their fellow-men must be done quickly. They have felt that hitherto the doctrine of the second coming of Christ has had little or no practical effect upon them, and that, while they could suppose at least one thousand years between that event and the present time, its influence must be less than if it were a matter of constant expectation. They think that the contemplation of this subject has awakened feelings which the anticipation of death never kindled in their breasts. Earth has receded, and their attachment to all sublunary objects has been loosened. Eternity has seemed to open near before them, and its scenes have become more distinct objects of vision; while the soul, with all that pertains to its immortal weal or woe, has been felt to eclipse every other object of earth. In a word, they profess to have consecrated themselves unto the service of God, and to labor to be found watching whenever the Master of the house shall come, “whether at even, or at midnight, or at the cock-crowing, or in the morning, lest, coming suddenly, he should find them sleeping.”

“‘Watertown, May 21, 1840.’

“In compliance with the wishes of Elder L. D. Fleming, pastor of the Christian church in Portland, Me., Mr. Miller visited and gave his first course of lectures in that city, from the 11th to the 23d of March. The result of these was thus stated by Elder Fleming, in April following:—

“‘There has probably never been so much religious interest among the inhabitants of this place, generally, as at present; and Mr. Miller must be regarded, directly or indirectly, as the instrument, although many, no doubt, will deny it, as some are very unwilling to admit that a good work of God can follow his labors; and yet we have the most indubitable evidence that this is the work of the Lord. It is worthy of note that in the present interest there has been, comparatively, nothing like mechanical effort. There has been nothing like passionate excitement. If there has been excitement, it has been out of doors, among such as did not attend Bro. Miller’s lectures.

“‘At some of our meetings, since Bro. M. left, as many as two hundred and fifty, it has been estimated, have expressed a desire for religion, by coming forward for prayers; and probably between one and two hundred have professed conversion at our meetings; and now the fire is being kindled through this whole city and all the adjacent country. A number of rumsellers have turned their shops into meeting-rooms, and those places that were once devoted to intemperance and revelry are now devoted to prayer and praise. Others have abandoned the traffic entirely, and are become converted to God. One or two gambling establishments, I am informed, are entirely broken up. Infidels, deists, Universalists, and the most abandoned profligates, have been converted—some who had not been to the house of worship for years. Prayer-meetings have been established in every part of the city, by the different denominations, or by individuals, and at almost every hour. Being down in the business part of our city, on the 4th inst., I was conducted into a room over one of the banks, where I found about thirty or forty men, of different denominations, engaged, with one accord, in prayer, at about eleven o’clock in the day-time! In short, it would be almost impossible to give an adequate idea of the interest now felt in the city. There is nothing like extravagant excitement, but an almost universal solemnity on the minds of all the people. One of the principal book-sellers informed me that he had sold more Bibles in one month, since Mr. Miller came here, than he had in any four months previous.’

“An article in the Maine Wesleyan Journal gave the following account of his person and style of preaching:—

“‘Mr. Miller has been in Portland, lecturing to crowded congregations in Casco-street Church, on his favorite theme, the end of the world, or literal reign of Christ for one thousand years. As faithful chroniclers of passing events, it will be expected of us that we should say something of the man and his peculiar views. Mr. Miller is about sixty years of age, a plain farmer, from Hampton, in the State of New York. He is a member of the Baptist church in that place, from which he brings satisfactory testimonials of good standing, and a license to improve publicly. He has, we understand, numerous testimonials, also, from clergymen of different denominations, favorable to his general character. We should think him a man but of common-school education; evidently possessing strong powers of mind, which, for about fourteen years, have been almost exclusively bent to the investigation of Scripture prophecies. The last eight years of his life have been devoted to lecturing on this favorite subject.

“‘In his public discourse, he is self-possessed and ready; distinct in his utterance, and frequently quaint in his expressions. He succeeds in chaining the attention of his auditory from an hour and a half to two hours; and in the management of his subject discovers much tact, holding frequent colloquies with the objector and inquirer, supplying the questions and answers himself in a very natural manner, and, although grave himself, sometimes producing a smile from a portion of his auditors.

“‘Mr. Miller is a great stickler for literal interpretations; never admitting the figurative, unless absolutely required to make correct sense, or meet the event which is intended to be pointed out. He doubtless believes, most unwaveringly, all he teaches to others. His lectures are interspersed with powerful admonitions to the wicked, and he handles Universalism with gloves of steel.’

“In connection with the foregoing was appended a statement of Mr. M’s opinions, which elicited from him the following comment:—

“‘In all the cities which I have visited, the editors of religious newspapers have almost invariably misstated and ridiculed my views, doctrines, and motives; but in Portland I found, as I honestly believe, an honest editor. He gave a candid, honest, and impartial account.’

“Mr. Miller was strongly urged by ‘the wardens of the First Baptist Society, worshiping in Pleasant street,’ where he lectured a portion of the time, to give them ‘another course of lectures,’ but he was obliged to decline the invitation; and, on the last Tuesday in March, left Portland, and by stage and railroad reached his home in Low Hampton on Friday night following, ‘being absent from home nearly six months, and having delivered three hundred and twenty-seven lectures.’

“On his way home, a young man, dressed in black, who, Mr. M. afterward learned, was a clergyman in a neighboring town, became his companion for a short distance in the stage. The young man was very talkative respecting the ministers of his acquaintance,—remarking what a smooth preacher A was, how learned B was, and how popular C was, &c. When the stage stopped for the passengers to dine, the young man proved to be an acquaintance of the landlord, and they commenced conversation respecting ‘the prophet Miller.’ The landlord inquired of the gentleman in black if he had read Mr. Miller’s lectures, which the former had loaned him a few days previous. ‘No,’ the clergyman said; he read the introduction, and found that Mr. M. was not a learned man, and therefore he had no confidence in the work. This reply struck Mr. M. with much force, as evidence of the manner in which many let those reputed to be learned do their thinking for them.

“From the 5th to the 29th of April, he lectured in Hampton, N. Y., to full houses, and a good work followed. On the 2d of May he commenced a course of lectures in the Baptist church in Benson, Vt., and lectured there and in the church of the Rev. Mr. Francis (orthodox) nine days. On leaving this place, Mr. Miller wrote to his son: ‘The several clergymen in the town met with us. The Lord came down in his power and by his Spirit; a gracious influence was felt, and many a stout heart yielded to the gospel of Christ. About thirty had obtained a hope, and about one hundred more were anxious, when I left.’

“Mr. Miller next visited New York city, and commenced his first course of lectures there, from the 16th to the 29th of May, at the corner of Norfolk and Broome streets, to good assemblies. On the 19th, he wrote: ‘Last night we had a solemn time. An anxious and deep attention was given by the whole congregation.’ Considerable interest was excited by this course, and the ground was prepared for subsequent labors. At the close of these lectures, Mr. Miller returned home, where he remained a few days, and then made another visit to Canada East. He lectured at Hatly on the 21st of June, and at Bolton on the 24th. On the 28th he commenced a course of lectures in Georgeville, which closed on the 5th of July. Writing from this place, on the 29th of June, he speaks of ‘large congregations,’ ‘serious attention,’ and of the prospect ‘that much good would be done there.’ He then returned to Low Hampton, where he lectured on the 12th of July.

“He remained at home about four weeks, when he visited Dresden, N. Y., and lectured from the 9th to the 12th of August. Of that place he writes, under date of August 13: ‘We had a good time; the Lord was there.’ He then adds: ‘I do not know what to say about coming to Massachusetts again. Day after to-morrow I begin a course of lectures at Fort Ann. The next week I go north, where I have three places, which will take three weeks at least. I have more business on hand than any two men like me should perform. I must lecture twice every day. I must converse with many—answer a host of questions—write answers to letters from all parts of the compass, from Canada to Florida, from Maine to Missouri. I must read all the candid arguments (which I confess are not many) which are urged against me. I must read all the slang of the drunken and sober.... The polar star must be kept in view; the chart consulted, the compass watched; the reckoning kept; the sails set; the rudder managed; the ship cleared; the sailors fed; the voyage prosecuted; the port of rest, to which we are destined, understood; and to the watchman call, “Watchman, what of the night?”

“On the 15th of August, 1840, he commenced his anticipated lectures at South Bay, in the town of Fort Ann, N. Y., and continued to the 20th.

“On the 2d, in compliance with a previous invitation, he commenced a second course of lectures in Colchester, Vt., which terminated on the 29th. Of these meetings Elder Columbus Green thus writes:—

“‘The audiences were very large, notwithstanding it was a time of great excitement, and our place of worship was as still as death. His lectures were delivered in the most kind and affectionate manner, convincing every mind that he believed the sentiments he uttered. He made the most powerful exhortations that I ever heard fall from the lips of any one. A deep solemnity pervaded the minds of the community. Young men and maidens, amid the pleasures of early years; men in the meridian of life, hurrying on with locomotive speed in pursuit of the treasures of earth; gray-haired sires, and matrons whose hoary locks gave evidence that many winters had passed over them, all paused and pondered on the things they heard, inquiring, “Am I ready?” Many came to the conclusion that they were unprepared to meet their Saviour, repented of their sins, and, through the merits of Jesus, obtained pardon full and free. For two years after this, there was a constant state of revival in that place; and many were the souls that dated their convictions of sin at that time, when the faithful old man warned them of the world’s approaching doom. No man was more highly esteemed than he was; and it was not uncommon for impenitent men to vindicate his character when his motives were impeached.

“‘Many there regarded him as “a chosen vessel of the Lord,” who had been instrumental in building them up “in the most holy faith;” who had taken them, as it were, to Pisgah’s top, and shown them the promised land, that better country for which patriarchs and prophets sighed. Among the public servants of the Most High, to them most dear, our departed brother held a conspicuous place. Years have passed since I enjoyed those happy seasons with them, and swift-rolling rivers and snow-capped hill-tops now lie between us. But, in whatever light they may now regard the efforts of him who sleeps in death, they then appreciated them. For one, I have never since seen the time when I was not thankful to God that I was counted worthy to see the light, and rejoice in it. And my prayer is that the torch of truth may illume our path through time, and that we may at last have an abundant entrance into the everlasting kingdom of our Lord Jesus Christ.

“‘Montgomery, Vt., March 14, 1850.’

“Mr. Miller next lectured in Burlington, Vt., from the 30th of August to the 5th of September; in Salisbury, Vt., from the 12th to the 20th of September; and from the 26th of the same month to the 1st of October, in Sudbury, Vt., after which he returned to Low Hampton.

“In anticipation of attending the first General Conference of believers in the second coming of Christ, which was to assemble on the 14th of October, 1840, in Boston, Mr. Miller left home on the 8th, and proceeded as far as Fairhaven, Vt., about two miles from home, where he was taken with a severe attack of typhoid fever. In the afternoon of the same day he was carried back to Low Hampton. He was thus deprived of the long-desired privilege of meeting fellow-laborers in the work in which he was engaged. On the 15th of October he was able to dictate a few lines to those assembled in conference, as follows:—

... “‘Why was I deprived of meeting those congenial minds in this good, this glorious, cause of light and truth? Why am I to bear this last affliction, and not enjoy this one pleasure of meeting fellow-laborers in a cause so big with prospects, so glorious in its results, so honoring to God, and so safe to man? Why are the providences of God so mysterious? I have often inquired. Am I never to have my will? No, never, until my will shall harmonize with thine, O Father! Yes, God is right; his providence is right; his ways are just and true; and I am foolish to murmur or complain.

... “‘Oh, I had vainly hoped to see you all, to breathe and feel that sacred flame of love, of heavenly fire; to hear and speak of that dear, blessed Saviour’s near approach!... But here I am, a weak, feeble, toil-worn old man, upon a bed of sickness, with feeble nerves, and, worse than all, a heart, I fear, in part unreconciled to God. But bless the Lord, O my soul! I have great blessings yet, more than I can number. I was not taken sick far from home. I am in the bosom of my family. I have my reason; I can think, believe, and love. I have the Bible—O blessed book! If I cannot read, I have a daughter who loves that book, and she can read for me. How pleasant it is to hear those infant voices read that holy book! How soft the couch of sickness may be made by dutiful children and the book of God! I have a hope,—yes, yes, “a blessed hope,”—founded on that Word that never fails. My hope is in Him who soon will come, and will not tarry. I love the thought; it makes my bed in sickness; I hope it will in death. I wait for him. My soul, wait thou on God. I have the Spirit; O blessed Holy Spirit! He whispers in my heart, “Fear not, I am with thee; be not dismayed, I will sustain thee.” I have a promise from the great I AM: “Though after my skin, worms destroy this body, yet in my flesh shall I see God.” I have many friends, and I am persuaded they will last forever. I am confident that I have daily prayers from many hearts.’...

“When sufficiently restored, he returned to Fort Ann, and lectured from the 26th to the 30th of December, 1840, in compliance with the ‘unanimous invitation’ of the Baptist church there, Rev. J. O. Mason, pastor, who had dispatched a messenger for him. From the 2d to the 8th of January, 1841, he lectured at Ballston Spa, N. Y.; and again, from the 9th to the 12th, at Fort Ann.

CHAPTER VIII.

LECTURES IN BOSTON (4TH, 5TH, AND 6TH COURSES), IN ANDOVER, PROVIDENCE, GALWAY, N. Y., CLAREMONT, N. H., BENSON, VT.,—HIS ILLNESS—INCIDENT AT SANDY HILL, AT WORCESTER—THE PHRENOLOGIST—MEETINGS AT HARTFORD.

“On the 31st of January, 1841, Mr. Miller again visited Boston, and commenced his fourth course of lectures in that city. He continued there till the 19th of February. The first eighteen lectures were given in the Chardon-street Chapel, ‘which was crowded almost to suffocation, and thousands were obliged to retire for want of room.’ Beginning on the 9th, a second course of eighteen lectures was delivered, by invitation of the Baptist church in South Boston, Thomas Driver, pastor.

“In compliance with an invitation from Rev. N. Hervey, pastor of the Baptist church in Andover, Mass., Mr. M. commenced a course of lectures in their house on Sunday, February 21, 1841. The students of the orthodox institution there requested him to lecture only evenings, that they might attend his full course; but he could not consistently comply with their wishes. His labors continued there till March 2, and were attended by a very large and attentive audience. Mr. Hervey, in whose church they were delivered, has given the following sketch of them:—

“‘His exposition of the prophecies, together with his earnest and impressive appeals to Christians and sinners to prepare for the coming of the Lord, was the means of arousing Christians to action, and of the conversion of a number of persons who before were without hope and without God in the world. In the course of the lectures, an incident occurred which shows his familiar acquaintance with the Scriptures and promptness to meet objectors to his views. About the fourth day of his labors he received a letter, signed “Anonymous,” containing a long list of passages from the Old and New Testaments, which were evidently quoted by “Anonymous” from memory, without naming their chapter and verse. These passages were thought by the author of the letter to be directly opposed to Mr. Miller’s view of the near approach and personal reign of Christ on earth. To these texts was affixed a single question. The letter, on being taken from the office, was presented to Mr. Miller, who read it through, and immediately said: “Anonymous” has not quoted a single text right. In the evening, previous to his lecture, he took the letter from his pocket, and inquired if there was a person in the audience by the name of Anonymous. If so, he would like to have him stand up. The house was filled on that evening by a large congregation. Mr. Miller waited some time for the appearance of “Anonymous;” the congregation remained in breathless silence to see the stranger. But no one answered to the call. Mr. Miller then read the letter, and, as he read each passage, also read the same from the Bible. The audience were satisfied that not one text was correctly quoted. Mr. Miller again repeated the call for “Anonymous” to stand up, if he was present. No one arose. Mr. Miller then read the question which closed the letter, namely—“Mr. Miller, how dare you assert your theory with so much confidence without a knowledge of the Hebrew and Greek languages?” To this Mr. Miller promptly replied, “If I am not acquainted with the Hebrew and Greek, I know enough to quote the English texts of the Scriptures rightly.” “Anonymous” never made himself known, and it was the impression of many of the audience that the author of the letter, if he was skilled in the Hebrew and Greek, was exceedingly deficient in his knowledge of the English Scriptures.

“‘During Mr. Miller’s stay in Andover several persons called to converse with him on the topics of his lectures, and he was very ready to devote his time to conversation with persons desirous of receiving information. He entered into the conversation with all his heart, and hundreds will remember with delight and devout gratitude to God the interviews they have enjoyed with him, and the instructions they have received from his lips. He was ever ready to answer all reasonable questions, and could generally distinguish between the caviler and the sincere inquirer after truth. Two young men, who were in the course of study at the Theological Seminary at Andover, called to see Mr. Miller while at the house of the writer, and spent some time in conversation with him upon the advent of Christ. After the conversation, as they were about leaving, one of the young men asked Mr. Miller the following question: “Well, if the Lord is coming so soon, Mr. Miller, what shall we do who are studying for the ministry? We have some time yet to prepare for the pastoral office.”

“‘To this the good man promptly replied: “Young men, if God has called you to study, keep on in your course, and I will aid you all in my power; but if he has called you to preach, study your Bibles, and commence preaching immediately.”

“‘The young men bade their adviser good day.

“‘N. H.’

“From the 3d to the 13th of March, he lectured to crowded audiences at the Marlboro’ Chapel, his fifth course of lectures in Boston. From the 13th to the 19th of the same month, he lectured in Fairhaven, Mass.; from the 20th to the 26th, in New Bedford, Mass.; and from the 27th of March to the 5th of April, to large audiences in Providence, R. I. The Town Hall, a commodious building, was granted by the City Council for that purpose. On Sunday, the 4th, by the invitation of Rev. Mr. Jameson, of the 3d Baptist Church, he lectured there all day to full and solemn congregations. His keeping no journal, makes it impossible to give the particular results of these lectures; but in each of the last three places a large number of intelligent members, in the several churches, embraced his views.

“From the 8th to the 15th of April, 1841, he labored in Lowell, Mass., when, after an absence of three months, he returned home to enjoy a season of rest. At this time he estimated that, since the 1st of October, 1839, he had ‘traveled four thousand five hundred and sixty miles, and preached six hundred and twenty-seven lectures, averaging one and a half hours each, resulting in about five thousand hopeful conversions.’

“On the 23d of May, in compliance with a very urgent request from Addison, Vt., he commenced a course of lectures there, which continued till the 30th, when he was taken sick with a painful inflammation in his left limb. He immediately returned home, when the other limb was similarly affected. This terminated in painful swellings and copious discharges, which began to heal about the 10th of June, but confined him to his room till the last of August; so that he rested from labor during the summer.

“From the 12th to the 20th of September, he lectured in Hartford, N. Y., to crowded houses. On the 26th of September, and onward to October 6, he lectured at Ballston, N. Y.; and on the 10th of October, he commenced a course of lectures at Galway, N. Y., which closed on the 17th. With these lectures a revival commenced, which, according to a letter from Rev. Wm. B. Curtis, pastor of the Baptist church, extended into the neighboring towns. Under date of March 12, 1842, he wrote to Mr. Miller as follows:—

“‘The glorious work soon became general and powerful, and we continued our meetings (including the week you were with us) eight weeks, with only a day or two intermission. I find I have over one hundred names of persons who profess to have obtained hope in the pardoning mercy of God. Including those converted in other meetings originating from this revival, it is probable that from one hundred and fifty to two hundred have been converted to God in this vicinity since your labors here. In justice to yourself and the truth, I must say that the extent and power of this glorious revival was greatly promoted by your lectures. Many converts date their first impressions from hearing you. The work has prevailed principally in the Baptist, Methodist, and Christian societies, while there have been but few conversions among the Presbyterians, who stood aloof from you when here.’

“On the 18th of October he returned to Low Hampton, and presided at a Conference of Second Advent believers, which assembled in the Baptist church there, from the 2d to the 5th of November, 1841.

“On the 10th of November, in compliance with an invitation numerously signed, he commenced a course of lectures in the town-house at Claremont, N. H., and continued to the 18th. A letter signed ‘J. Andrews,’ written soon after, states: ‘Now all the town is aroused to the subject of religion. The Baptist, Methodist, and Congregational societies are all united in this work. Some are converted, and from sixty to seventy-five are anxiously seeking the Lord.’

“On the 14th of November, the First Baptist Church, Mr. Parker, pastor, in Cambridgeport, Mass., voted unanimously to renew an invitation, which they had some time before extended to Mr. Miller, and with which he had been unable to comply, to give a course of lectures there. In compliance with that request, he made arrangements to commence there on Sunday, the 21st of November; but, in consequence of the breaking down of the stage on Saturday, he was detained in Nashua over the Sabbath, and gave three lectures to the citizens of that place. He reached Cambridgeport on the 23d, and continued till the 28th. On the day following, he commenced his sixth course of lectures in Boston, at Boylston Hall, where he addressed large audiences each day and evening till the 9th of December.

“These repeated series of discourses in Boston had a powerful effect on the community. As usual, large numbers went away, unable to gain admittance, and many were hopefully converted from sin to holiness. This last was a common feature in all his labors, and was one great reason why calls from those who did not entertain his views were so frequent and urgent. This reason is given in an invitation extended to him by the Baptist church in New Ipswich, N. H., November 29, 1841. Their pastor, J. M. Willmarth, thus writes: ‘The majority desire you to come, principally because they have understood that your addresses to sinners are plain and pungent, and frequently attended with the divine blessing in the conversion of souls.’

“A course of lectures in Dover, N. H., continuing from the 11th to the 19th of December, terminated his labors for the year 1841.

“From the 8th to the 16th of January, 1842, he lectured at Fonday’s Bush, N. Y.; from the 17th to the 26th of January, in Jamesville, N. Y.; and from the 27th of January to the 3d of February, in the Presbyterian church at Sandy Hill, N. Y. A conference of Advent believers was held in this church, commencing on the 1st of February and closing on the 4th. The services were held the last evening at the court-house. On that occasion about one hundred persons arose for prayer, and a revival commenced which continued for weeks. On this evening an incident occurred which did much to deepen the impressions made by the lecture. H. B. Northop, Esq., a prominent lawyer of that county, arose, at the close of the meeting, and remarked that he had stood at that bar many times and addressed a jury of twelve sensible men, presenting evidence and arguments which he knew were weak and fallacious, and he knew others might have seen it; but he had sat down with the confident expectation that those twelve men would give him their verdict. He had attended these lectures, and had done it with a mind strongly predisposed to reject the doctrine, and exceedingly skeptical. He had attended with a determination, if possible to overthrow the theory, and to exult with a feeling of triumph if he succeeded. He had watched every word and sentence, and made an effort at every point where he thought there was a possibility of making a breach; but had been unable to do it. And now, after making himself acquainted with history, sacred and profane, with prophecies and prophetic periods, so far as his circumstances would permit him to do, he would frankly confess that he had never found any theory that would compare with this for strength of evidence. He would not say he believed the event would come in 1843, or within ten years of that; but he could see no reason why it would not take place then! At any rate, he was satisfied, if there was any truth in the Bible, the event was near; and this is the nearest calculation we can possibly come to respecting the time.

“The effect of such a declaration, from such a source, can be better imagined than described.

“Rev. Seth Ewer, in a letter of the 2d of March following, wrote:—

“‘For about four weeks we continued meetings, day and evening.... We find new cases of conviction daily, and frequent hopeful conversions. Our house of worship is thronged every evening. Last Sabbath evening the question was put, whether they wished to continue the services; and hundreds arose in the affirmative.... Between fifty and sixty profess to have obtained a hope.’

“From the 12th of February, 1842, to the 17th, he lectured in Benson, Vt. At the close of this meeting he took a violent cold, which prevented him from speaking for a few days. He commenced a course of lectures at Nashua, N. H., on the 24th of February; but, after speaking a few times to crowded houses, the state of his lungs and the want of a suitable place to speak in compelled him to relinquish his labors there on the third day.

“From the 6th to the 9th of March, Mr. Miller lectured in Medford, Mass. While here a friend took him to a phrenologist in Boston, with whom he was himself acquainted, but who had no suspicion whose head he was about to examine. The phrenologist commenced by saying that the person under examination had a large, well-developed, and well-balanced head. While examining the moral and intellectual organs, he said to Mr. Miller’s friend:—

“‘I tell you what it is, Mr. Miller could not easily make a convert of this man to his hair-brained theory. He has too much good sense.’

“Thus he proceeded, making comparisons between the head he was examining and the head of Mr. Miller, as he fancied it would be.

“‘Oh, how I should like to examine Mr. Miller’s head!’ said he; ‘I would give it one squeezing.’

“The phrenologist, knowing that the gentleman was a particular friend of Mr. Miller, spared no pains in going out of the way to make remarks upon him. Putting his hand on the organ of marvelousness, he said: ‘There! I’ll bet you anything that old Miller has got a bump on his head there as big as my fist;’ at the same time doubling up his fist as an illustration.

“The others present laughed at the perfection of the joke, and he heartily joined them, supposing they were laughing at his witticisms on Mr. Miller.

“‘He laughed; ’twas well. The tale applied

Soon made him laugh on t’ other side.’

“He pronounced the head of the gentleman under examination, the reverse, in every particular, of what he declared Mr. Miller’s must be. When through, he made out his chart, and politely asked Mr. Miller his name.

“Mr. Miller said it was of no consequence about putting his name upon the chart; but the phrenologist insisted.

“‘Very well,’ said Mr. M.; ‘you may call it Miller, if you choose.’

“‘Miller, Miller,’ said he; ‘what is your first name?’

“‘They call me William Miller.’

“‘What! the gentleman who is lecturing on the prophecies?’

“‘Yes, sir, the same.’

“At this the phrenologist settled back in his chair, the personation of astonishment and dismay, and spoke not a word while the company remained. His feelings may be more easily imagined than described.

“The following description of Mr. Miller’s phrenological developments were furnished by a phrenological friend in 1842, and may be of some interest to those acquainted with that science:—

“Organs very large.—Amativeness, Adhesiveness, Combativeness, Firmness, Conscientiousness, Benevolence, Constructiveness, Ideality, Calculation, Comparison.

“Large.—Philoprogenitiveness, Alimentiveness, Acquisitiveness, Self-Esteem, Imitation, Mirthfulness, Form, Size, Order, Locality, Eventuality, Time, Language, Causality.

“Full.—Inhabitiveness, Concentrativeness, Caution, Approbation, Wonder, Veneration, Weight, Color, Tune.

“Moderate.—Marvelousness, Secretiveness, Hope, Individuality.

“From the 12th to the 20th of March, he lectured in the Town Hall in Worcester, Mass. The meetings were well attended, the hall being crowded during most of the time; two thousand people were judged to have been present. While explaining the 7th chapter of Daniel, Mr. M. very significantly inquired how there could be a millennium, according to the common understanding of it, while the little horn warred with the saints, which he was to do till the coming of the Ancient of Days? A Baptist clergyman arose, and offered to answer that question the following morning. The next morning he came in and requested additional time, and his answer was postponed another day. When that time arrived he came in and presented the common view respecting the millennium, and inquired if there was no way to harmonize that text with it. Mr. M. said, that was what they were waiting for him to do! But he left it there. This caused Mr. M. to be listened to with more than usual interest. A revival attended his labors, and considerable effect was produced on the public mind.

“From the 22d to the 28th, he lectured in the City Hall in Hartford, Ct. From two hundred to three hundred persons in that city became favorable to his views as the result of those lectures. Mr. M. was prevented from giving his whole course of lectures, on this occasion, by a severe attack of catarrh and influenza, which made him unable to proceed. The Hartford Christian Secretary, a Baptist periodical, said of these meetings:—

“‘One fact connected with this conference struck us somewhat forcibly; and that was, the immense crowd which attended the whole course of lectures. We are unable to speak of the attendance during the day, but in the evening the large hall was filled to overflowing with attentive listeners. Probably not less than from fifteen hundred to two thousand persons were in attendance every evening. This large mass of hearers was made up from nearly or quite every congregation in the city. How many of them have become converts to this new doctrine we have no means of judging, but presume the number is not very small. Of one thing we are satisfied, and that is this: unless the clergy, generally, present a better theory than the one offered by Mr. Miller, the doctrine will prevail to a very general extent.’

“It was on this occasion that the writer of this became convinced that the second advent is to be pre-millennial; and the first resurrection, a ‘resurrection out from among the dead.’ At the close of these labors, Mr. M. returned to Low Hampton, for that rest which his overtasked frame now greatly needed.

CHAPTER IX.

LECTURES IN NEW YORK—NEWARK—SARATOGA—NEWBURYPORT—PALMER—THE EAST KINGSTON CAMP-MEETING—BRANDON—BENSON—CHICOPEE—NEW HAVEN, ETC.

“On the 24th of April he commenced a course of lectures in the large hall of the Apollo, 410 Broadway, in the city of New York, as usual to large audiences, closing on the 10th of May.

“On the 7th of May, he visited Newark, N. J., and gave two discourses in the Universalist chapel in that city. In compliance with three very urgent requests from Rev. Joshua Fletcher, pastor, and the unanimous vote of the Baptist church, in Saratoga, N. Y., Mr. M. again visited that place, and lectured from the 14th to the 22d of May. From the 24th to the 28th of May, he gave his seventh course of lectures in Boston; and from the 29th of May to the 3d of June, 1842, he lectured in Newburyport, Mass. At the commencement of his lecture, in the evening of the first day, an egg was thrown into the hall, at him, but fell upon the side of the desk. At the close, stones were thrown through the windows, by a mob outside, who indulged in some characteristic hootings and kindred noises. The congregation dispersed without damage, save the glass of lamps and windows. Under those circumstances, the town authorities closed the hall, and the lectures were adjourned to the chapel in Hale’s Court. They continued till Friday, June 3, a goodly number having received Christ to the joy of their souls.

“From the 4th to the 12th of June, he gave a second course of lectures in the Casco-street church, Portland, Me. They were attended by crowds of anxious hearers, and many Christians were refreshed, while some sinners were converted to God. From the 16th to the 26th of June, he lectured at Three Rivers (in Palmer, Mass.) A member of the Baptist church there afterward wrote, through the Christian Reflector, the organ of that denomination, as follows:—

“‘Dear Brother Graves:—It is with gratitude to God that I am able to turn aside from the joyful scenes around me to inform the friends in Zion what God hath wrought for us. Rev. William Miller, on the 16th of June last, commenced a course of lectures on the second advent of Christ to this world in 1843. The lectures were delivered in our meeting-house, which, however, would hold but a small part of the audience, it being estimated at five thousand; and notwithstanding prepossessions, prejudices, and the slanderous reports circulated about this man of God, the people gave heed to the word spoken, and seemed determined to examine the Scriptures, to see if these things were so; and deep solemnity pervaded the vast assembly. The children of God were soon aroused to a sense of their duty; sinners were seen weeping, and heard to say, “Pray for me!” The number increased, until one hundred in an evening prayer-meeting were seen to arise to be remembered in the prayers of the saints. Soon converts began to tell us what the Lord had done for them. Some deists, some Universalists, and many of the thoughtless, of both the middle-aged and the youthful part of the community, have been brought to submit their hearts to God, and are now waiting for and hasting to the coming of the day of God. As to the character of the work, let me say, I have never seen a more thorough conviction of the total depravity of the heart, and the utter helplessness of the sinner, and that, if saved, it must be by the sovereign grace of God, than has been manifest in all that have given a relation of their experience.’

“On the 29th of June, 1842, Mr. M. commenced a course of lectures on the camp-ground at East Kingston, N. H. This was the first camp-meeting held by believers in the advent near, and was noticed by a writer in the Boston Post as follows:—

“‘The Second Advent camp-meeting, which commenced at East Kingston, N. H., on Tuesday, June 29, and continued from day to day until Tuesday noon, July 5, was attended by an immense concourse of people, variously estimated at from seven to ten thousand....

“‘The meeting was conducted with great regularity and good order from beginning to end. The ladies were seated on one side, and the gentlemen on the other, of the speaker; meals were served uniformly and punctually at the times appointed, and the same punctuality was observed as to the hours appointed for the services.

“‘The preachers were twelve or fifteen. Mr. Miller gave the only regular course of lectures—the others speaking occasionally. Many of the people, without doubt, assembled from motives of curiosity merely; but the great body of them, from their solemn looks and close attention to the subject, were evidently actuated by higher and more important motives. Each tent was under the supervision of a tent-master, who was responsible for the good order within the same, where religious exercises were kept up at the intermissions between the public exercises and meals, and where lights were kept burning through the night....

“‘Some fault was found, or dissatisfaction felt, with that part of the regulations which precluded all controversy, i. e., which prevented people of opposite theological sentiments from occupying the time or distracting the attention of the audience, which would otherwise have introduced confusion and defeated the object of the meeting. Nothing could be more reasonable than this regulation, and no peace-loving person would make any objection.... The meeting broke up with harmony and good feeling.’

“A few years later, a distinguished American writer and poet, J. G. Whittier, who was present at this meeting, made the following reference to it:—

“‘Three or four years ago, on my way eastward, I spent an hour or two at a camp-ground of the Second Advent in East Kingston. The spot was well chosen. A tall growth of pine and hemlock threw its melancholy shadow over the multitude, who were arranged upon rough seats of boards and logs. Several hundred—perhaps a thousand—people were present, and more were rapidly coming. Drawn about in a circle, forming a background of snowy whiteness to the dark masses of men and foliage, were the white tents, and back of them the provision stalls and cook shops. When I reached the ground, a hymn, the words of which I could not distinguish, was pealing through the dim aisles of the forest. I know nothing of music, having neither ear nor taste for it; but I could readily see that it had its effect upon the multitude before me, kindling to higher intensity their already excited enthusiasm. The preachers were placed in a rude pulpit of rough boards, carpeted only by the dead forest leaves and flowers, and tasselled, not with silk and velvet, but with the green boughs of the somber hemlocks around it. One of them followed the music in an earnest exhortation on the duty of preparing for the great event. Occasionally he was really eloquent, and his description of the last day had all the terrible distinctness of Anelli’s painting of the “End of the World.”

“‘Suspended from the front of the rude pulpit were two broad sheets of canvas, upon one of which was the figure of a man—the head of gold, the breast and arms of silver, the belly of brass, the legs of iron, and feet of clay—the dream of Nebuchadnezzar! On the other were depicted the wonders of the Apocalyptic vision—the beasts—the dragon—the scarlet woman seen by the seer of Patmos—oriental types and figures and mystic symbols translated into staring Yankee realities, and exhibited like the beasts of a traveling menagerie. One horrible image, with its hideous heads and scaly caudal extremity, reminded me of the tremendous line of Milton, who, in speaking of the same evil dragon, describes him as

“‘Swinging the scaly horrors of his folded tail.’

“‘To an imaginative mind the scene was full of novel interest. The white circle of tents—the dim wood arches—the upturned, earnest faces—the loud voices of the speakers, burdened with the awful symbolic language of the Bible—the smoke from the fires rising like incense from forest altars—carrying one back to the days of primitive worship, when

“‘The groves were God’s first temples, ere men learned

To hew the shaft, and lay the architrave,

And stretch the roof above it.’

“There were near thirty tents on the ground, and the interest of the meeting continued to the last. Mr. Miller left the ground on the 4th of July, for Northampton, Mass., where he lectured from the 5th to the 7th, and then proceeded to Low Hampton.

“He remained at home till past the middle of August. On the 20th of that month he commenced a course of lectures at Brandon, Vt., which continued till the 28th. On the 25th, a large tent had been pitched at Chicopee, Mass., where Mr. Miller was anxiously expected; but he did not arrive so as to commence his lectures till the 1st of September. He then lectured each day till the 4th, when the meeting closed. That was a very large gathering, and, as was estimated, some four hundred or more found peace in believing.

“From the 7th to the 11th of September, he lectured at Castine, Maine. On returning to Boston, on the 12th, at the request of the passengers, he gave a lecture on the boat. He went to Albany on the 13th, lectured there in the evening, and on the next day took the canal-boat, on which he also lectured, on his way to Granville, N. Y., where he lectured from the 18th to the 23d of September. From the 8th to the 16th of October, he lectured in Whitehall, N. Y., and from the 20th to the 30th, at Benson, Vt., where Mr. Himes held a tent-meeting in connection with his lectures.

“On the 3d of November, Mr. Himes erected the big tent in Newark, N. J. Mr. Miller was not able to be present till the 7th, from which time to the 14th he gave fifteen discourses. Five days before the close of that meeting the weather became so inclement that the meetings could not be continued in the tent, and they were adjourned to the Presbyterian church in Clinton street, which was kindly opened during the week. On Sunday, the 13th, the meeting was held in the morning in Mechanic’s Hall, which was crowded to suffocation, and found to be altogether too strait for them. At 2 P. M., Mr. Miller spoke from the steps of the court house to nearly five thousand people. Notwithstanding the inclemency of the weather, and their being thus driven from pillar to post, the meetings were very interesting, and were productive of much good.

“At the close of the meeting in Newark, he commenced a course of lectures in New York city, which continued till the 18th of November. On the 19th of November, he commenced a course of lectures in New Haven, Ct., in the M. E. church, Rev. Mr. Law, pastor. On Sunday, the 20th, although the house was large, it was crowded; and in the evening many were unable to gain admittance. He continued there till the 26th, the interest continuing during the entire course. The Fountain, a temperance paper published in that city, gave the following account of the meeting:—

“‘Mr. William Miller, the celebrated writer and lecturer on the second advent of our Saviour, and the speedy destruction of the world, has recently visited our city, and delivered a course of lectures to an immense concourse of eager listeners in the First Methodist church. It is estimated that not less than three thousand persons were in attendance at the church, on each evening, for a week; and if the almost breathless silence which reigned throughout the immense throng for two or three hours at a time is any evidence of interest in the subject of the lectures, it cannot be said that our community are devoid of feeling on this momentous question.

“‘Mr. Miller was accompanied and assisted by Rev. J. V. Himes, who is by no means an inefficient coadjutor in this great and important work. We did not attend the whole course, the last three lectures being all we had an opportunity of hearing. We were utterly disappointed. So many extravagant things had been said of the “fanatics” in the public prints, and such distorted statements published in reference to their articles of faith, that we were prepared to witness disgusting, and perhaps blasphemous, exhibitions of “Millerism,” as the doctrine of the second advent is called.

“‘In justice to Mr. Miller we are constrained to say that he is one of the most interesting lecturers we have any recollection of ever having heard. We have not the least doubt that he is fully convinced of the truth of the doctrine he labors so diligently to inculcate, and he certainly evinces great candor and fairness in his manner of proving his points. And he proves them, too, to the satisfaction of every hearer; that is, allowing his premises to be correct, there is no getting away from his conclusions.

“‘There was quite a number of believers in attendance from other places, and a happier company we have never seen. We have no means of ascertaining the precise effect of these meetings on this community, but we know that many minds have been induced to contemplate the Scripture prophecies in a new light, and not a few are studying the Bible with unwonted interest. For our own part, this new view of the world’s destiny is so completely at variance with previous habits of thought and anticipation that we are not prepared to give it entire credence, though we should not dare hazard an attempt to disprove it.

“‘The best part of the story is, that a powerful revival has followed the labors of Messrs. Miller and company. We learn that over fifty persons presented themselves for prayers at the altar of the Methodist church on Sunday evening. On Monday evening the number was about eighty.’

“In the month of May following, Rev. A. A. Stevens (Orthodox Cong.), then a member of Yale College, in a letter to the Midnight Cry, stated that ‘the powerful and glorious revival which then commenced, continued for some two months, with almost unabated interest.’

“At the close of these lectures, Mr. M. returned to New York city, where he gave six discourses, from the 27th to the 29th of November, and then returned to Low Hampton. Arriving home, he wrote as follows:—

“‘Low Hampton, Dec. 7, 1842.

“‘Dear Brother Himes: ... I did not get home till 10 o’clock on Saturday night. On Wednesday, at 6 o’clock, P. M., same day we left New York, we were brought up all standing in a snow-bank, which we kept bunting, with two or three locomotives, until the next evening at 7 o’clock. On Thursday, by the mighty power of three locomotives, we gained twelve miles from Great Barrington, where we were brought up the night before, to the state line, where they left us and we waited for the Boston cars, which had been due thirty hours. That night we slept in the cars, as the night before, and Friday we got as far as Lansingburg. Saturday I came home, cold and weary, worn out and exhausted. On my arrival, I found a messenger after me and my wife, to visit her mother, who was supposed to be dying. My wife went, and soon returned with the news of her death. After attending the funeral, we came home on Monday night, and yesterday I got some rest. This morning I feel some refreshed. But the fatigue of body and mind has almost unnerved this old frame, and unfitted me to endure the burdens which Providence calls upon me to bear. I find that, as I grow old, I grow more peevish, and cannot bear so much contradiction. Therefore I am called uncharitable and severe. No matter; this frail life will soon be over. My Master will soon call me home, and soon the scoffer and I shall be in another world, to render our account before a righteous tribunal. I will therefore appeal to the Supreme Court of the Universe for the redress of grievances, and the rendering of judgment in my favor, by a revocation of the judgment in the court below. The World and Clergy vs. Miller.

“‘I remain, looking for the blessed hope,

“‘William Miller.’

CHAPTER X.

SYNOPSIS OF HIS VIEWS—ADDRESS TO BELIEVERS IN THE NEAR ADVENT—INTERVIEW AT WATERFORD—UTICA—DISTURBANCE AT PHILADELPHIA—THE THIRD OF APRIL—STATEMENT OF HIS AFFAIRS, ETC.

“Mr. Miller had not been sufficiently definite respecting the time of the advent, in the estimation of some who embraced his views. The expression ‘about the year 1843’ they regarded as too general. As he was about to enter on the long-looked-for year, he prepared and published the following

SYNOPSIS OF HIS VIEWS.

“1. I believe Jesus Christ will come again to this earth. Proof. John 14:3; Acts 1:11; 1 Thess. 4:16; Rev. 1:7.

“2. I believe he will come in all the glory of his Father. Matt. 16:27; Mark 8:38.

“3. I believe he will come in the clouds of heaven. Matt. 24:30; Mark 13:26; Dan. 7:13.

“4. I believe he will then receive his kingdom, which will be eternal. Dan. 7:14; Luke 19:12, 15; 2 Tim. 4:1.

“5. I believe the saints will then possess the kingdom forever. Dan. 7:18, 22, 27; Matt. 24:34; Luke 12:22, 29; 1 Cor. 9:25; 2 Tim. 4:8; Jas. 1:12; 1 Pet. 5:4.

“6. I believe at Christ’s second coming the body of every departed saint will be raised, like Christ’s glorious body. 1 Cor. 15:20-29; 1 John 3:2.

“7. I believe that the righteous who are living on the earth when he comes will be changed from mortal to immortal bodies, and, with them who are raised from the dead, will be caught up to meet the Lord in the air, and so be forever with the Lord. 1 Cor. 15:51-53; Phil. 3:20, 21; 1 Thess. 4:14-17.

“8. I believe the saints will then be presented to God blameless, without spot or wrinkle, in love. 1 Cor. 4:14; Eph. 5:27; Col. 1:22; Jude 24; 1 Thess. 3:13; 1 Cor. 1:7, 8.

“9. I believe, when Christ comes the second time, he will come to finish the controversy of Zion, to deliver his children from all bondage, to conquer their last enemy, and to deliver them from the power of the tempter, which is the devil. Deut. 24:1; Isa. 34:8; 40:2, 5; 41:10-12; Rom. 8:21-23; Heb. 2:13-15; 1 Cor. 15:54, 56; Rev. 20:1-6.

“10. I believe that when Christ comes he will destroy the bodies of the living wicked by fire, as those of the old world were destroyed by water, and shut up their souls in the pit of woe, until their resurrection unto damnation. Ps. 50:3; 97:3; Isa. 66:15, 16; Dan. 7:10; Mal. 4:1; Matt. 3:12; 1 Cor. 3:13; 1 Thess. 5:2, 3; 2 Thess. 1:7-9; 1 Pet. 1:7; 2 Pet. 3:7, 10; Isa. 24:21, 22; Jude 6-15; Rev. 20:3-15; John 5:29; Acts 24:15.

“11. I believe, when the earth is cleansed by fire, that Christ and his saints will then take possession of the earth, and dwell therein forever. Then the kingdom will be given to the saints. Ps. 37:9-11, 22-34; Prov. 2:21, 22; 10:30; Isa. 60:21; Matt. 5:5; Rev. 5:10.

“12. I believe the time is appointed of God when these things shall be accomplished. Acts 17:31; Job 7:1; 14:14; Ps. 81:3; Isa. 40:2; Dan. 8:19; 10:1; 11:35; Hab. 2:3; Acts 17:26.

“13. I believe God has revealed the time. Isa. 44:7, 8; 45:20, 21; Dan. 12:10; Amos 3:7; 1 Thess. 5:4.

“14. I believe many who are professors and preachers will never believe or know the time until it comes upon them. Jer. 8:7; Matt. 24:50; Jer. 25:34-37.

“15. I believe the wise, they who are to shine as the brightness of the firmament, Dan. 12:3, will understand the time. Eccl. 8:5; Dan. 12:10; Matt. 24:43-45; 25:6-10; 1 Thess. 5:4; 1 Pet. 1:9-13.

“16. I believe the time can be known by all who desire to understand and to be ready for his coming. And I am fully convinced that some time between March 21, 1843, and March 21, 1844, according to the Jewish mode of computation of time, Christ will come, and bring all his saints with him; and that then he will reward every man as his works shall be. Matt. 16:27; Rev. 22:12.

“With the commencement of the new year, he issued the following

ADDRESS TO BELIEVERS IN THE NEAR ADVENT.

“‘Dear Brethren:—This year, according to our faith, is the last year that Satan will reign in our earth. Jesus Christ will come, and bruise his head. The kingdoms of the earth will be dashed to pieces, which is the same thing. And he, whose right it is to reign, will take the kingdom, and possess it forever and ever. And the God of peace shall tread Satan under your feet shortly. Therefore, we have but a little time more to do as our good brother, Paul, was commanded, Acts 26:18, to open their eyes, and to turn them from darkness to light, and from the power of Satan unto God, that they may receive forgiveness of sins, and inheritance among them which are sanctified by faith that is in me.

“‘Let us then put forth our best energies in this cause; let every one of us try, by persuasion, by the help and grace of God, to get one, at least, of our friends to come to Christ, in this last year of redemption; and, if we succeed, what an army of regenerated souls may we not hail in the new heavens and new earth! I pray God, my brethren, that nothing may deter you from this work. Let scoffers scoff, and liars tell lies; we must not suffer ourselves to be drawn from our work. Yes, the glorious work of salvation, within a few short months, will be finished forever. Then I need not exhort you more on this point; you yourselves know the value of this great salvation.

“‘And another thing it is well for us to remember. The world will watch for our halting. They cannot think we believe what we speak, for they count our faith a strange faith; and now beware, and not give them any vantage-ground over us. They will, perhaps, look for the halting and falling away of many. But I hope none who are looking for the glorious appearing will let their faith waver. Keep cool; let patience have its perfect work; that, after ye have done the will of God, ye may receive the promise. This year will try our faith; we must be tried, purified and made white; and if there should be any among us who do not in heart believe, they will go out from us; but I am persuaded that there cannot be many such; for it is a doctrine so repugnant to the carnal heart, so opposite to the worldly-minded, so far from the cold professor, the bigot and hypocrite, that none of them will, or can, believe in a doctrine so searching as the immediate appearing of Jesus Christ to judge the world. I am, therefore, persuaded better things of you, brethren, although I thus speak. I beseech you, my dear brethren, be careful that Satan get no advantage over you by scattering coals of wild-fire among you; for if he cannot drive you into unbelief and doubt, he will try his wild-fire of fanaticism and speculation to get us from the word of God. Be watchful and sober, and hope to the end for the grace that shall be brought unto you at the revelation of Jesus Christ.

“‘Think not, my brethren, that I stand in doubt of your perseverance. I know your faith, your love, and hope, to be rooted and grounded on the word of the Almighty. You are not dependent on the wisdom or commandments of men. Many, if not all of you, have examined for yourselves. You have studied, and found true, what at first was only reported unto you. You have found the Bible much more precious than you had before conceived; its doctrines to be congenial with the holy and just character of God; its precepts to be wise, benevolent and kind; and its prophecies to be clear and lucid, carrying conviction of the truth and inspiration of the Scriptures, by a harmony of manner and matter from Genesis to Revelation. In one word, you have found a new Bible, and I hope and believe you have read it with new delight. I fear not that you can ever be satisfied with the views of our opponents; their manner of explaining Scripture is too carnal to satisfy the devoted child of God.

“‘Then let me advise to a continual searching for truth, both for faith and practice; and wherever we have wandered from the word of God, let us come back to the primitive simplicity of the gospel once delivered to the saints. Thus we shall be found ready at his coming to give an account of our stewardship, and hear our blessed Master say, “Well done, thou good and faithful servant; enter thou in to the joy of thy Lord.” Every truth we get from the blessed book prepares us better for his coming and kingdom. Every error prevents us, in part, from being ready. Let us, then, stand strong in the faith, with our loins girt about with truth, and our lamps trimmed and burning, and waiting for our Lord, ready to enter the promised land, the true inheritance of the saints. This year the fullness of time will come, the shout of victory will be heard in Heaven, the triumphant return of our great Captain may be expected, the new song will commence before the throne, eternity begin its revolution, and time shall be no more.

“‘This year—O blessed year—the captive will be released, the prison doors will be opened, death will have no more dominion over us, and life, eternal life, be our everlasting reward. This year—O glorious year!—the trump of jubilee will be blown, the exiled children will return, the pilgrims reach their home, from earth and Heaven the scattered remnant come and meet in the middle air,—the fathers before the flood, Noah and his sons, Abraham and his, the Jew and Gentile, all who have died in faith, of every nation, kindred, tongue, and people, will meet to part no more. This year! the long-looked-for year of years! the best! it is come! I shall hope to meet you all through faith in God and the blood of the Lamb. Until then farewell. May God bless you, and sustain you in the faith.

“‘May you be patient in all tribulation, and endure unto the end. May you this year be crowned with immortality and glory. And finally, my brethren, pray God, your whole body, soul, and spirit, be preserved blameless unto the coming of the Lord Jesus Christ.’

“‘William Miller.

“‘Low Hampton, Jan. 1, 1843.’

“In compliance with the wishes of Elder Marvin Eastwood and his congregation, in Waterford, N. Y., Mr. Miller lectured there from the last day of December, 1842, to the 8th of January, 1843.

“On the morning of the third day, the Congregational minister called on him, with a deacon of his church, and wished to ask him a few questions. Five other gentlemen soon came in, and took seats in the room. Mr. Miller told the clergyman that he might ask any question he pleased, and he would answer the best he could. The minister accordingly asked him some twenty questions, each one of which Mr. M. answered by quoting a text of Scripture. He then thanked Mr. M. for his politeness, and acknowledged that he had answered him fairly. ‘But,’ said he, ‘I do not believe your doctrine.’

“‘What doctrine?’ said Mr. M.

“‘I don’t believe God has revealed the time.’”

“Mr. M. asked him if he would answer three questions.[17]

“The minister replied that he did not come there to answer questions. One of the gentlemen present then inquired of the minister why he would not answer. He said he did not come for the purpose of answering questions, and did not choose to. The gentleman then said to him: ‘I have disbelieved the Bible, but have been one of your principal supporters many years; and, when Mr. Miller has answered so many of your questions, if you will not let him ask you three, I can pay you no more of my money.’ He added, ‘I have seen more evidence in proof of the truth of the Bible in the few lectures I have heard from Mr. M. than in all the sermons you have ever preached.’

“‘Why,’ said the minister, ‘how does Mr. Miller prove the truth of the Bible?’

“‘By the fulfillment of prophecy.’

“‘And do not I prove it in the same way? Do not I show how all the prophecies in reference to Christ were fulfilled in him?’

“‘Why, yes, you do that; but you have never shown that those prophecies were written before Christ; and it is very easy to write a history. But Mr. M. has shown us how the prophecies are being fulfilled in our own day; he has shown us how the history of Napoleon is a perfect fulfillment of prophecy; and I know that that prophecy was written before the time of Napoleon.’

“The minister and deacon retired. The gentleman then turned to Mr. Miller, and said that he and his four companions were infidels; that they had attended his lectures; had become quite interested; but had very curious feelings, and wished to know what ailed them.

“Mr. M. inquired whether they would attend any more of his lectures.

“They replied that they should lose none of them.

“‘Well,’ said Mr. M., ‘I think I will not tell you what ails you; but, if you will give close attention during the week, I think you will find out.’

“They attended his lectures, and, before the end of the week, with a number of others who had been infidels, were rejoicing in the goodness and forgiveness of God. At the close of his last lecture, one hundred and twenty persons voluntarily arose for prayers; a goodly number were soon rejoicing in the Saviour, and a glorious result followed.

“On the 10th of January, 1843, Mr. M. began a course of lectures in the Presbyterian church in Utica, N. Y., where an interest was elicited which extended to surrounding places. Invitations were received from many of the neighboring towns, which could not be complied with. The meetings closed on the 17th, when forty or fifty were inquiring what they should do to be saved. A good work had been commenced, which continued for several weeks. The Methodist Reformer, published in that city, announced that ‘many thoughtless sinners and cold professors were stirred up to duty by them;’ and the Baptist Register said, ‘Mr. Miller’s appeals were often very pungent, and made a very deep impression on the audience, and many came forward for prayer.’

“From the 21st to the 29th of January, 1843, Mr. Miller lectured in Bennington, Vt. He then went to Philadelphia, Pa., and lectured in the large hall of the Chinese Museum, which was crowded to excess, from the 3d to the 10th of February. On the evening of the 7th, a gentleman arose and confessed that he had been an infidel, but could now praise God for what he had done for his soul. Many others followed, bearing testimony to God’s pardoning mercy.

“The interest attending the lectures continued to increase from the first till the evening before their close. On that evening the house was filled to overflowing at an early hour. When the lecture commenced, the crowd and confusion were so great as to render it almost impossible to hear the speaker; and it was thought best, after notifying the people what was to be done, and giving an opportunity for all who wished so to do to go out, to close the doors, and thus secure silence. This was done, and the speaker proceeded to his subject. For about half an hour there was profound silence, and deep interest was evinced by the immense audience, with the exception of a few unruly boys. This would have undoubtedly continued had it not been for the circumstance of a lady’s fainting, and it becoming necessary to open the doors for her to go out. When the door was opened, there was a rush of persons who stood outside for admittance. As soon as this was done, and a few had come into the room, an unruly boy raised the cry of ‘fire,’ which threw the whole assembly into confusion, some crying one thing, and some another. There did not appear to be any disposition on the part of the multitude to disturb the meeting; but all came from the rush and cry. The disorder arose more from the excited fears of the people than from any other cause. Order was again restored, and the speaker proceeded for a few moments, when another rush was made, and the excitement became so great within as to render it expedient to dismiss the meeting.

“The police of the city were willing to do what they could, but there was nothing for them to do; for they could not govern the excited nerves of the audience.

“On Friday morning the multitude were again assembled at an early hour for service, and Mr. Miller proceeded to answer numerous questions which had been proposed. A most profound attention was manifested until the meeting was about half through, when a man arose and wished to propose some questions, which interrupted the order of the meeting.

“The owners became alarmed for the safety of the hall, and ordered the meetings to be closed after the afternoon service. Although this fact was unknown except by a few persons, yet the room was literally packed with a mass of living beings, who listened with breathless silence to Mr. Miller’s last lecture.

“There had been no intimation given throughout of what had transpired to close the meetings, until he came to bid them farewell. There were then bitter tears and strong sighs. The announcement of the fact came unexpectedly. The appeal was melting beyond expression. Probably more than a thousand persons arose to testify their faith in the truth of the advent near, and three or four hundred of the unconverted arose to request an interest in his prayers. Mr. Miller closed the services by a most feeling and appropriate prayer and benediction. No blame was attached to the owners of the Museum for their course.

“About this time it was announced, by a correspondent of Bennett’s N. Y. Herald, that Mr. Miller had fixed on the 3d of April for the advent. This being industriously circulated, led Prof. Moses Stuart to say of ‘the men of April 3, 1843,’ “I would respectfully suggest, that in some way or other they have, in all probability, made a small mistake as to the exact day of the month when the grand catastrophe takes place, the 1st of April being evidently much more appropriate to their arrangements than any other day in the year.”—Hints, 2d ed., p. 173. The New York Observer, of February 11, 1843, in commenting on this suggestion of Prof. Stuart, thought it sufficient ‘to quiet every feeling of alarm!’ As remarks like these, and other equally foolish stories which are referred to in the following letter, met the eye of Mr. Miller, he thus denies them through the columns of the Signs of the Times:—

“‘Dear Brother Himes:—At the request of numerous friends, I herein transmit to them, through you, a brief statement of facts, relative to the many stories with which the public are humbugged, concerning the principles I advocate, and the management of my worldly concerns.

“My principles, in brief, are, that Jesus Christ will come again to this earth, cleanse, purify, and take possession of the same, with all his saints, some time between March 21, 1843, and March 21, 1844. I have never, for the space of more than twenty-three years, had any other time preached or published by me; I have never fixed on any month, day, or hour, during that period; I have never found any mistake in reckoning, summing up or miscalculation; I have made no provision for any other time; I am perfectly satisfied that the Bible is true, and is the word of God, and I am confident that I rely wholly on the blessed book for my faith in this matter. I am not a prophet. I am not sent to prophesy, but to read, believe, and publish what God has inspired the ancient prophets to administer to us, in the prophecies of the Old and New Testaments. These have been, and now are, my principles, and I hope I shall never be ashamed of them.

“‘As to worldly cares, I have had but very few for twelve years past. I have a wife and eight children; I have great reason to believe they all are the children of God, and believers in the same doctrine with myself. I own a small farm in Low Hampton, N. Y.; my family support themselves upon it, and I believe they are esteemed frugal, temperate, and industrious. They use hospitality without grudging, and never turn a pilgrim from the house, nor the needy from the door. I bless God that my family are benevolent and kind to all men who need their sympathy or aid; I have no cares to manage, except my own individual wants; I have no funds or debts due me of any amount; “I owe no man anything;” and I have expended more than two thousand dollars of my property in twelve years, besides what God has given me through the dear friends, in this cause.

“‘Yours respectfully,

William Miller.

“‘Philadelphia, Feb. 4, 1844.’

“The almost unparalleled abuse to which Mr. Miller was subject, through most of the secular and some of the religious papers, during this period, called forth the following manly rebuke from the Sandy Hill Herald, a paper published in Mr. Miller’s own county:—

“‘FATHER MILLER.

“‘While we are not prepared to subscribe to the doctrine promulgated by this gentleman, we have been surprised at the means made use of by its opponents to put it down. Certainly all who have ever heard him lecture, or have read his works, must acknowledge that he is a sound reasoner, and, as such, is entitled to fair arguments from those who differ with him. Yet his opponents do not see fit to exert their reasoning powers, but content themselves by denouncing the old gentlemen as a “fanatic,” a “liar,” “deluded old fool,” “speculator,” &c., &c. Mr. Miller is now, and has been for many years, a resident of this county, and as a citizen, a man, and a Christian, stands high in the estimation of all who know him; and we have been pained to hear the gray-headed, trembling old man denounced as a “speculating knave.”

“‘Speculating, forsooth! Why need he speculate? He has enough of the good things of this world to last him through the few days which at longest may be his on earth, without traveling from city to city, from town to village, laboring night and day like a galley-slave, to add to a store which is already abundant. Who that has witnessed his earnestness in the pulpit, and listened to the uncultivated eloquence of nature, which falls in such rich profusion from his lips, dare say that he is an impostor? We answer, without fear of contradiction from any candid mind, None! We are not prepared to say how far the old man may be from correct, but one thing, we doubt not that he is sincere; and we do hope that some one of his many opponents will take the pains to investigate the subject, and, if it be in their power, drive the old man from his position. It is certainly a subject worthy of investigation, and one fraught with momentous consequences; and no matter who the individual is that promulgates the doctrine, if he offers good reasons and sound arguments, drawn from the word of God and from history, we say he is entitled to his position until, by the same means, he is driven from it. Mr. Miller certainly goes to the fountain of knowledge, revelation, and history, for proof, and should not be answered with low, vulgar, and blasphemous witticisms.’

“We like the following remarks, copied from an exchange, in relation to this subject:—

“‘Millerism.—This is the term by which the opinions of those who oppose the idea of a millennium, and maintain that the end of the world will take place in 1843, are distinguished; and they are thus denominated because Mr. Miller first propagated it.

“‘We certainly are not a convert to the theory; but we feel bound in duty to lift our voice in reproof of, and enter our protest against, the infidel scurrility and blasphemous witticisms with which some of our exchanges abound, and from which religious periodicals are not wholly exempt.

“‘If Mr. Miller is in error, it is possible to prove him so, but not by vulgar and blasphemous witticisms and ribaldry; these are not arguments. And to treat a subject of such overwhelming majesty, and fearful consequences—a subject which has been made the theme of prophecy in both Testaments; the truth of which, occur when it will, God has sealed by his own unequivocal averments—we repeat it, to make puns and display vulgar wit upon this subject, is not merely to sport with the feelings of its propagators and advocates, but is to make a jest of the day of Judgment, to scoff at the Deity himself, and contemn the terrors of his judgment bar.’

“The Pittsburg (Pa.) Gazette, also said:—

“‘We do not concur with Mr. Miller in his interpretations of the prophecies; but we can see neither reason nor Christianity in the unmerited reproach which is heaped upon him for propagating an honest opinion. And that he is honest we have no doubt. True, we think him in error, but believe he is honestly so. And suppose he does err in his views of prophecy, does that make him either a knave or a fool? Have not some of the greatest or best men who have lived since the days of the apostles erred in the same way? And who will say that all these, including Whitby, Bishop Newton, and others of equal celebrity, were monomaniacs, and driven by a pitiable or culpable frenzy to the adoption of their opinions? The truth is, as we apprehend, that many of those who are so indecorous and vituperative in their denunciations of Miller, are in fearful trepidation, lest the day being so near at hand, should overtake them unawares, and hence, like cowardly boys in the dark, they make a great noise by way of keeping up their courage, and to frighten away the bugbears.’

“The editor of the Countryman, in giving the synopsis of Mr. Miller’s views, added:—

“‘The abstract of Miller’s views, which we give on our fourth page, so far as we give it in this paper, is and has been, according to what we have been able to ascertain, the professed belief of orthodox Christians, from the day of Christ’s ascension into Heaven until the present hour. Therefore they are not merely Mr. Miller’s views, but the acknowledged views of the Christian church, the received Bible doctrine; and if Bible doctrine, then are they the truth.

“‘One of the apostles, who shared as largely in the confidence and personal instruction of his Master as any, concludes a reference to this subject in these words: “Wherefore, beloved, seeing that ye look for such things, be diligent, that ye may be found of him in peace, without spot and blameless.” 2 Pet. 3:14. If the things here referred to have not taken place—and who will say they have?—they, of course, are yet to transpire. If so, is not the caution of the apostle as important in this our day as it was when he uttered it? And if it was an event to be looked for and hoped for then, should it be an object of less solicitude now? Every intelligent, free moral agent upon earth, whether aware of it or not, has an interest in this issue. He may absorb his mind in other matters, he may drown reflection in the whirl of business or pleasure, he may wrap his soul in projects of wealth or ambition, and fill his aspiring eye with the anticipated glories of some dazzling hight, but his interest still cleaves to the immortality of his nature, and, sooner or later, he must discover that it is the most important interest ever presented to his consideration, or that is attached to his being or his destiny. Is it not, then, the hight of wisdom to give heed to these things, and examine them with all that diligence and dispassionate attention their importance merits?’

CHAPTER XI.

MR. MILLER AND HIS REVIEWERS—DOCTORS DOWLING, CHASE, JARVIS, ETC.—THE FOURTH KINGDOM—THE LITTLE HORN—PROPHETIC NUMBERS—SEVENTY WEEKS—COMING OF CHRIST, ETC.

“As it will be proper to take some notice of the controversy between Mr. Miller and those who entered the lists against him, it may as well be referred to in this connection. As his views gained adherents, various publications of sermons, reviews, &c., were issued from the press—the design of which was to counteract his expositions of prophecy. Some of these were direct attacks on him, and others only indirect, by opposing the long-established principles of Protestant interpretation. The controversy had respect principally to the following points:—

“1. The Fourth Kingdom of Daniel, 7th chapter.

“2. The Little Horn of the same.

“3. The Little Horn of the 8th.

“4. The Length of the Prophetic Periods.

“5. The Commencement of the Seventy Weeks of Dan. 9.

“6. Their Connection with the 2300 days of Dan. 8.

“7. The Rise of the Little Horn of the 7th.

“8. The Nature of Christ’s Second Advent.

“9. The Return of the Jews.

“10. The Epoch of the Resurrection.

“Mr. Miller laid no claim to originality in his position respecting any of the above points; but maintained that they were established opinions of the church, and, being so, that his conclusions from such premises were well sustained by human as well as by divine teachings. While his opponents attacked the view he took of these points, no one of them assailed the whole; but each admitted his correctness on some of the points; and, among them, the whole were admitted.

“1. The Fourth Kingdom of Daniel. This he claimed to be the Roman. In this, he had the support of the ablest and most judicious expositors of every age. William Cunninghame, Esq., of England, an eminent expositor, in speaking of the four parts of the great image of the dream of Nebuchadnezzar, says that they are ‘respectively applied by Daniel himself to four kingdoms, which have, by the unanimous voice of the Jewish and Christian churches, for more than eighteen centuries, been identified with the empires of Babylon, Persia, Greece, and Rome.’ Should this be questioned, the witnesses are abundant. In the Jewish church, we have the Targum of Jonathan Ben Uzziel, Josephus, and the whole modern synagogue, including the names of Abarbanal, Kimchi, David, Levi, and others. In the Christian church, such as Barnabas, Irenæus, Chrysostom, Cyril of Jerusalem in his catechism, Jerome, and according to him, all ecclesiastical writers, Hyppolitus and Lactantius in the early ages; since the Reformation, Luther, Calvin, Mede, T. H. Horne,[18] Sir Isaac Newton, Bishop Newton, Dr. Hales, Scott, Clarke, Brown,[19] Watson,[20] Bishop Lloyd, Daubuz, Brightman, Faber, Noel, Dr. Hopkins, and almost every biblical expositor of any note in the Protestant church. Those who make this application of the four parts of the image have no difficulty in making a like application of the four beasts of Daniel seventh. The remarkable similarity of the two visions requires this.

“This long-established opinion was controverted by Prof. Stuart of Andover, in his ‘Hints,’ before referred to. He said: ‘The fourth beast in Dan. 7:6, &c., is, beyond all reasonable doubt, the divided Grecian dominion, which succeeded the reign of Alexander the Great.’—Hints, p. 86.

“Prof. Irah Chase, D. D., said: ‘The fourth empire was that of the successors of Alexander, among whom Seleucus was pre-eminent.’—Remarks on the Book of Daniel, p. 20.

“Others, of lesser note, copied from these, and took a similar position respecting the fourth kingdom.

“Of those who opposed Mr. Miller on other points, John Dowling, D.D., of New York city, in his ‘Exposition of the Prophecies,’ did not assail this.

“Rev. W. T. Hamilton, D. D., of Mobile, Ala., in his ‘Lecture on Millerism,’ said: ‘I freely admit, that in his general outline of interpretation (excluding his dates), following, as he does, much abler men who have gone before him, Mr. Miller is correct. The several dynasties prefigured in the great metallic image of Nebuchadnezzar—in the vision of the four beasts, and of the ram and he-goat—Daniel himself points out. Mistake there is not easy.”—p. 18.

“Dr. Jarvis, D. D., LL. D., of Middletown, Ct., in his ‘Two Discourses on Prophecy,’ also applies the fourth beast in the same manner.—p. 42.

“J. T. Hinton, A. M., of St. Louis (‘Prophecies Illustrated’), said: ‘The dream of the image, the vision of the four beasts, that of the ram and he-goat, and the “Scriptures of truth,” give us four detailed descriptions of the history of the world, from the time of Daniel to the “time of the end;” and the Apocalyptic visions refer to the same period as the latter portion of the prophecies of Daniel.’—p. 25. ‘The dream of the image is of the greatest importance; it leaves without excuse those who would reduce the remaining prophecies of Daniel to the narrow compass of the little acts of the reign of Antiochus Epiphanes. Nothing can be clearer than that the gold, the silver, the brass, the iron, and the clay, are designed to cover the history of the world in all its successive ages.”—p. 27.

“Again he says: ‘We think our readers will concur with us, and with the great mass of writers on prophecy, that the “ten horns” or Daniel’s “fourth beast,” and “the beast rising out of the sea, having seven heads,” of the Apocalyptic visions, refer to the ten kingdoms into which the Roman Empire was divided. Of the identity of the ten-horned beasts of Daniel and John there can be no reasonable doubt.”—p. 232.

“2. The Little Horn of the seventh chapter of Daniel. This he held to be the papacy. This was no novel view of that symbol, being, as it was, the view of the whole Protestant world. See Dr. Clarke’s Notes on 2 Thess. 2; Croly on the Apoc., pp. 113-117, Horne’s Int., vol. 4, p. 191, Watson’s Theol. Dic., p. 62, G. T. Noel, Prospects of the Church of Christ, p. 100, William Cunninghame, Esq., Political Dest. of the Earth, p. 28, Mede, Newton, Scott, Daubuz, Hurd, Jurieu, Vitringa, Fleming, Lowman, and numerous others of the best standard expositors.

“Prof. Stuart, Prof. Chase, and others who applied the ‘fourth beast’ to the four divisions of Alexander’s successors, applied the little horn of the same chapter to Antiochus Epiphanes.

“Mr. Hinton took the same view that Mr. Miller did of this symbol. He said: ‘If any other events of history can be set forth and made to fill out all the particulars mentioned by Daniel and John, we should be happy to see them stated; till then, we shall believe the little horn rising up amidst the ten horns, and having three of them plucked up before it, to refer to the rise of the papacy in the midst of the kingdoms into which the Roman Empire was divided in the sixth century.”—p. 237.

“Dr. Dowling, Dr. Hamilton, and others, who admitted that the fourth beast symbolized the Roman Empire, also applied its little horn to the papacy.

“3. The Little Horn of the eighth chapter of Daniel, that became exceeding great. This Mr. Miller believed to be a symbol of Rome. In this view he was sustained by Sir Isaac Newton, Bishop Newton, Dr. Hales, Martin Luther, Dr. Prideaux, Dr. Clarke, Dr. Hopkins, Wm. Cunninghame, and others.

“Dr. Horne said of the first three above named: ‘Sir Isaac Newton, Bishop Newton, and Dr. Hales, have clearly shown that the Roman power, and no other, is intended; for, although some of the particulars may agree very well with that king (Antiochus), yet others can by no means be reconciled to him; while all of them agree and correspond exactly with the Romans, and with no other power.”—Intro., vol. 4, p. 191.

“In addition to these, almost all the old writers who applied it to Antiochus Epiphanes did so only as the type of Rome, where they looked for the Antichrist. St. Cyril, Bishop of Jerusalem, in the fourth century, said: ‘This, the predicted Antichrist, will come when the times of the (pagan) Roman Empire shall be fulfilled, and the consummation of the world approach. Ten kings of the Romans shall rise together, in different places indeed, but they shall reign at the same time. Among these, the eleventh is Antichrist, who, by magical and wicked artifices, shall seize the Roman power.’

“Prof. Stuart, Prof. Chase, and even Dr. Dowling, with others, applied this symbol to Antiochus Epiphanes.

“Rev. R. C. Shimeal, of New York (“Prophecy in Course of Fulfillment”), dissented from Mr. Miller, and also from the foregoing, and understood this horn to symbolize the Mahommedan power. Mr. Hinton took the same view.

“Mr. Miller was sustained in his application of this point by Dr. Hamilton and Dr. Jarvis. The latter said: ‘Sir Isaac Newton, with that sagacity which was peculiar to him, was the first, I believe, who showed clearly that this little horn was the Roman power.’—p. 43.

“4. The Length of the Prophetic Numbers. In explaining these, Mr. Miller adopted the Protestant view, that they represent years. There is probably no point respecting which Protestant commentators have been more agreed than this. Faber, Prideaux, Mede, Clarke, Scott, the two Newtons, Wesley, and almost every expositor of note, have considered this a settled question. Indeed, so universal has been this interpretation of these periods that Professor Stuart says: ‘It is a singular fact that the great mass of interpreters in the English and American world have, for many years, been wont to understand the days designated in Daniel and the Apocalypse as the representatives or symbols of years. I found it difficult to trace the origin of this general, I might say almost universal, custom.’—Hints, p. 77.

“He also says: ‘For a long time these principles have been so current among the expositors of the English and American world, that scarcely a serious attempt to vindicate them has of late been made. They have been regarded as so plain and so well fortified against all objections, that most expositors have deemed it quite useless even to attempt to defend them. One might, indeed, almost compare the ready and unwavering assumption of these propositions, to the assumption of the first self-evident axioms in the science of geometry, which not only may dispense with any process of ratiocination in their defense, but which do not even admit of any.’—Hints, p. 8.

“Prof. Stuart, however, dissented from this ‘almost universal custom,’ and claimed that the prophetic days—the 1260, 1290, 1335, and 2300—indicated only days. Of the 1260 he said: ‘The very manner of the expression indicates, of course, that it was not the design of the speaker or writer to be exact to a day or an hour. A little more or a little less than three and a half years would, as every reasonable interpreter must acknowledge, accord perfectly well with the general designation here, where plainly the aim is not statistical exactness, but a mere generalizing of the period in question.’—Hints, p. 73.

“Again he says: ‘A statistical exactness cannot be aimed at in cases of this nature. Any near approximation to the measure of time in question would, of course, be regarded as a sufficient reason for setting it down under the general rubric.’

“‘By the 1260 days,’ he said, ‘no more than three and a half years literally can possibly be meant’ (p. 75); and of the 2300: ‘We must consider these 2300 evening-mornings as an expression of simple time, i. e., of so many days, reckoned in the Hebrew manner.’—p. 100.

“Prof. C. E. Stowe, D. D., of Andover Mass., in his ‘Millennial Arithmetic,’ claimed that ‘day does not mean year in the prophecies any more than elsewhere and that ‘a definite designation of time was not here intended, but only a general expression.’—p. 13.

“Prof. Chase agreed with Prof. Stuart respecting the 1260 days; but said of the 2300: ‘The period predicted is not two thousand and three hundred days but only half that number—1150.’—Remarks, p. 60.

“Dr Dowling agreed with Prof. Chase that the 2300 were half days; but differed both from him and Prof. Stuart respecting the 1260, of which he says: ‘I believe, as Mr. Miller does, and indeed most Protestant commentators, that the 1260 years denote the duration of the dominion of the papal Antichrist. After comparing these passages, and the entire prophecies to which they belong, with the history and character of papacy, I cannot doubt that this is the mystical Babylon, whose name is written in Rev. 17:5; and that, when the 1260 years are accomplished, then shall that great city, Babylon, be thrown down, and shall be found no more at all.’—Reply to Miller, p. 27.

“Prof. Pond, D. D. (of Bangor, Me.), in his ‘Review of Second Advent Publications,’ was in doubt whether the periods of Daniel could be proved to be years; but was willing to cut the matter short by conceding the point that it may be so.—p. 22.

“Dr. Jarvis, Mr. Hinton, Mr. Shimeal, and Prof. Bush, sustained Mr. Miller respecting the significance of the prophetic days.

“In speaking of the application of the 2300 days to the time of the persecution of Antiochus Epiphanes, Dr. Jarvis says: ‘This interpretation would, of course, be fatal to all Mr. Miller’s calculations. It is not surprising, therefore, that it should be eagerly embraced by many of his opponents. But, with all due deference, I think there are insuperable difficulties in the way of this scheme, which makes Antiochus Epiphanes the little horn.’ ‘I make no difficulty, therefore, in admitting the evening-morning to mean a prophetic day.’—Sermons, p. 46. He further says that Daniel was told to shut up the vision, ‘because the fulfillment of it should be so far distant; a strong collateral argument, as I understand it, for the interpretation of 2300 prophetic days.’—Ib., p. 47. And ‘The vision is the whole vision of the ram and he-goat.’—p. 45.

“Prof. Bush, in writing to Mr. Miller, said: ‘I do not conceive your errors on the subject of chronology to be at all of a serious nature, or in fact to be very wide of the truth. In taking a day as the prophetical time for a year, I believe you are sustained by the soundest exegesis, as well as fortified by the high names of Mede, Sir Isaac Newton, Bishop Newton, Faber, Scott, Keith, and a host of others, who have long since come to substantially your conclusions on this head. They all agree that the leading periods mentioned by Daniel and John do actually expire about this age of the world; and it would be strange logic that would convict you of heresy for holding in effect the same views which stand forth so prominently in the notices of these eminent divines.’ ‘Your results in this field of inquiry do not strike me as so far out of the way as to affect any of the great interests of truth or duty.’—Ad. Her., vol. 7, p. 38.

“Writing to Prof. Stuart, Prof. Bush said: ‘I am not inclined precipitately to discard an opinion long prevalent in the church, which has commended itself to those whose judgments are entitled to profound respect. That such is the case in regard to the year-day calculations of prophecy I am abundantly satisfied; and I confess, too, at once to the pleasure that it affords me to find that that which is sustained by age is also sustained by argument.’ Again he says: ‘Mede is very far from being the first who adopted this solution of the symbolic term day. It is the solution naturally arising from the construction put, in all ages, upon the oracle of Daniel respecting the SEVENTY WEEKS, which, by Jews and Christians, have been interpreted weeks of years, on the principle of a day standing for a year. This fact is obvious from the Rabbinical writers en masse, where they touch upon the subject; and Eusebius tells us (Dem. Evangl. 8, p. 258—Ed. Steph.), that this interpretation in his day was generally if not universally admitted.’

“I have, in my own collection, writers on the prophecies, previous to the time of Mede, who interpret the 1260 days as so many years, and who are so far from broaching this as a new interpretation that they do not even pause to give the grounds of it, but proceed onward, as if no risk were run in taking for granted the soundness of the principle which came down to them accredited by the immemorial usage of their predecessors.’—Hierophant, vol. 1, p. 245.

“If the old, established principle of the year-day theory is wrong, then, said Prof. Bush, ‘not only has the whole Christian world been led astray for ages by a mere ignis fatuus of false hermeneutics, but the church is at once cut loose from every chronological mooring, and set adrift in the open sea, without the vestige of a beacon, light-house, or star, by which to determine her bearings or distances from the desired millennial haven to which she had hoped she was tending.’

“5. The Commencement of the Seventy Weeks.—These were believed by Mr. Miller to be the weeks of years—four hundred and ninety years—and commenced with the decree of Artaxerxes Longimanus to restore and build Jerusalem, according to Ezra seventh, B. C. 457. This has also long been considered by commentators to be a settled point; and it probably would not have been disputed were it not for a desire to avoid the conclusion to which Mr. Miller came, on the supposition that it was the beginning of the 2300 days. On so settled a point as this it is only necessary to mention such names as Horne (see Int., vol. 1, p. 336, vol. 4, p. 191), Prideaux (see Connection, pp. 227-256), Clarke (see Notes on 9th of Daniel), Watson (Theol. Dic., p. 96), William Howel, LL. D. (Int. of Gen. His., vol. 1, p. 209), Scott, and Cunninghame.

“This point was not much questioned by any. A Mr. Kindrick, in a ‘New Exposition of the Prophecies of Daniel,’ said: ‘They are seventy years only, and commenced with the birth of Christ and ended with the destruction of the Jewish nation.’—p. 4. Rev. Calvin Newton affirmed, in the Christian Watchman, that they were fulfilled in seventy literal weeks. And Prof. Stuart said: ‘It would require a volume of considerable magnitude even to give a history of the ever-varying and contradictory opinions of critics respecting this locus vexatissimus; and perhaps a still larger, to establish an exegesis which would stand. I am fully of opinion that no interpretation as yet published will stand the test of thorough grammatico-historical criticism.’—Hints, p. 104.

“Mr. Shimeal, while he admitted that they are weeks of years, commenced them four years later than Mr. M.

“Dr. Hamilton sustained Mr. Miller on this point. He said: ‘The interpretation which Mr. Miller gives of Daniel’s seventy weeks, commencing with the decree of Artaxerxes Longimanus, in the seventh year of his reign (B. C. 457), for the rebuilding of Jerusalem, and terminating with the death of Christ, A. D. 33, is, in the main, correct, because here Mr. M. but gives a tolerably faithful report of the result of the labors of the learned Prideaux and others in this field of research.’—p. 18. This interpretation was not denied by Dr. Jarvis, Mr. Hinton, and Mr. Morris. And Dr. Dowling said: ‘Mr. Miller says the four hundred and ninety years begin B. C. 457, which is correct. He says they end A. D. 33, which is also correct.’—p. 49.

“6. The connection between the 70 weeks and 2300 Days.—This was a vital point in the chronology of Mr. M. to bring the end in 1843. The Rev. William Hales, D. D., the most learned modern chronologer, says: ‘This simple and ingenious adjustment of the chronology of the seventy weeks, considered as forming a branch of the 2300 days, was originally due to the sagacity of Hans Wood, Esq., of Rossmead, in the county of Westmeath, Ireland, and published by him in an anonymous commentary on the Revelation of St. John, Lon., 1787.’—New Anal. Chro., vol. 2, p. 564. He elsewhere calls it ‘the most ingenious of its class.’

“The argument which Mr. Miller used in support of this point was based upon the literal meaning of the Hebrew word, which, in our version of Daniel 9:24, is rendered ‘determined’—cut off, or cut out,—and the circumstances in which Gabriel appeared to Daniel, as stated in the ninth chapter, with the instruction given.

“In the 8th chapter of Daniel is recorded a vision which was to extend to the cleansing of the sanctuary, and to continue 2300 days. Daniel had ‘sought for the meaning’ of that vision, and a voice said: “Gabriel, make this man to understand the vision.” Gabriel said to Daniel: ‘I will make thee know what shall be in the last end of the indignation; for, at the time appointed, the end shall be;’ and then proceeded to explain the symbols, but said nothing of their duration. At the close of the explanation Daniel fainted, and was sick certain days; and he says he ‘was astonished at the vision, but none understood it.’

“Three years subsequent to that vision, Daniel—understanding ‘by books the number of years whereof the word of the Lord came to Jeremiah the prophet, that he would accomplish seventy years in the desolations of Jerusalem,’—set his face unto the Lord to seek by prayer and supplications, with fasting, and sackcloth, and ashes. He proceeded to confess his own sins and the sins of his people, and to supplicate the Lord’s favor on the sanctuary that was desolate. While he was thus speaking, Daniel says:—‘Gabriel, whom I had seen in the vision at the beginning, being caused to fly swiftly, touched me about the time of the evening oblation; and he informed me, and talked with me, and said: ‘O Daniel, I am now come forth to give thee skill and understanding. At the beginning of thy supplications the commandment came forth, and I am come to show thee; for thou art greatly beloved; therefore understand the matter and consider the vision. Seventy weeks are determined’ &c. ‘From the going forth of the decree to restore and to build Jerusalem unto Messiah the Prince:’—after which Jerusalem was to be made desolate ‘until the consummation.’—Dan. 9:20-27.

“Dr. Gill, a distinguished divine and scholar, rendered the word ‘determined,’ cut off, and is sustained by good scholars.

“Hengstenberg, who enters into a critical examination of the original text, says: ‘But the very use of the word, which does not elsewhere occur, while others, much more frequently used, were at hand, if Daniel had wished to express the idea of determination, and of which he has elsewhere, and even in this portion, availed himself, seems to argue that the word stands from regard to its original meaning, and represents the seventy weeks, in contrast with a determination of time (en platei), as a period cut off from subsequent duration, and accurately limited.’—Christology of the Old Test., vol. 2, p. 301. Washington, 1839.

“Gesenius, in his Hebrew Lexicon, gives cut off as the definition of the word, and many others of the first standing as to learning and research, and several versions have thus rendered the word.[21]

“Such being the meaning of the word, and such the circumstances under which the prophecy of the seventy weeks was given, Mr. Miller claimed that the vision which Daniel was called on to consider, and respecting which Gabriel was to give him skill and understanding, was the vision of the 8th chapter; of which Daniel sought the meaning, which Gabriel was commanded to make him understand, but which, after Gabriel’s explanation, none understood; and that the seventy weeks of years—i. e., four hundred and ninety that were cut off—were cut off from the 2300 days of that vision; and, consequently, that those two periods must be dated from the same epoch, and the longer extend 1810 years after the termination of the shorter.

“The same view was advocated by several English divines. Rev. M. Habershon says: ‘In this conclusion I am happy in agreeing with Mr. Cunninghame, who says, “I am not aware of any more probable era which can be selected for the commencement of the 2300 years than that which has been chosen by some recent writers, who supposed this period to have begun at the same time with the seventy weeks of Daniel, or in the year B. C. 457, and consequently that it will terminate in the year 1843.”’—Hist. Dis., p. 307.

“The celebrated Joseph Wolf, though dating the seventy weeks and 2300 days from B. C. 453, commenced them at the same epoch.—Missionary Labors, p. 259. And Dr. Wilson, of Cincinnati, who is high authority in the Presbyterian church, in a discourse on ‘Cleansing the Sanctuary,’ says: I undertake to show that Daniel’s ‘seventy weeks’ is the beginning or first part of the ‘two thousand three hundred days’ allotted for the cleansing of the sanctuary; that Daniel’s ‘time, times, and a half’ is the last or concluding part of the 2300 days.’

“Prof. Stuart, Dr. Dowling, Prof. Chase, and others, who denied the year-day calculation when applied to the 2300 days, of course dissented from Mr. Miller on this point. Dr. Dowling went so far as to deny(!) that the Hebrew article hai (the) is in the phrase ‘the vision.’ in the original of Dan. 9:23.

“Of those who admitted the year-day theory, Dr. Hamilton, Dr. Jarvis, Mr. Hinton, and Dr. Pond, denied any connection between the two periods. Dr. Hamilton commenced the 2300 days B. C. 784, and ended them with the era of the Reformation, A. D. 1516. The others did not hazard any opinion respecting the time of their commencement.

“Mr. Miller was supposed to be sustained on this point by Prof. Bush, who did not consider him in any serious error respecting the time. And Mr. Shimeal said, ‘I trust it will not be deemed a violation of that modesty which becomes me, if, for the reasons here given, I withhold my assent from the conclusion of the Rev. Dr. Jarvis on this subject; which is that the seventy weeks form no part of the two thousand three hundred days.’—p. 34.

“7. The rise of the Papacy—the Little Horn of Dan. 7.—Mr. Miller claimed that the one thousand two hundred and sixty years of the papacy were to be reckoned from A. D. 538, by virtue of the decree of Justinian. This decree, though issued A. D. 533, did not go into full effect until 538, when the enemies of the Catholics in Rome were subjugated by Belisarius, a general of Justinian. In this view, as to the rise of papacy, he was sustained by Croly (see his work on Apoc., pp. 113-117); G. T. Noel (see Prospects of Ch., p. 100); Wm. Cunninghame, Esq. (Pol. Destiny of the earth, p. 28); Keith, vol. 1, p. 93; Encyclopedia of Rel. Knowl., art. Antichrist; Edward King, Esq., and others.

“Prof. Stuart and Prof. Chase, in applying this little horn to Antiochus, and the beast of the Apocalypse to Nero, explained these numbers in days, satisfactorily to themselves.

“Dr. Jarvis, who admitted that they symbolize years, denied Mr. Miller’s commencement, without assigning any other. He said: ‘I would rather imitate the caution of the learned Mr. Mede, with regard to the time of the great apostasy, “and curiously inquire not, but leave it unto him who is the Lord of times and seasons.”’

“And of the 1260, 1290, and 1335 days, Mr. Dowling said, ‘If I am asked the question, As you reject the interpretation Mr. Miller gives of these prophetic times, can you furnish a better? I reply, I do not feel myself bound to furnish any’!—Reply to M., p. 25.

“Dr. Hamilton rather agreed with Faber and Scott, in dating from the decree of Phocus, A. D. 606.

“Mr. Shimeal sustained Mr. Miller in dating from the decree of Justinian, but reckoned from the date of its issue, instead of from its going into effect.—p. 45.

“8. The Coming of Christ.—Mr. Miller contended that this was to be literal and personal. This was the view which had been entertained by the church in all ages, and is recognized in the formulas of faith adopted by all evangelical churches. Whether his coming is to be pre or post millennial, is another question; but that Christians, in all ages, have believed that Christ will come again in person to judge the world, will not be questioned.

“That Christ will ever thus return was denied by Prof. Stuart and Prof. Bush. The former said that he had ‘a deeper conviction than ever of the difficulties which attend the supposition of a personal, actual, and visible descent of Christ and the glorified saints to the earth.’—Hints, 2d ed., p. 153. Again: ‘All the prophecies respecting the Messiah are invested with the costume of figurative language.’—Ib., p. 183. And again: ‘Christ himself assumed a visible appearance,’ at his first advent, ‘only that he might take on him our nature and die for sin. When he appears a second time, there is no necessity for assuming such a nature.’—Ib., p. 185.

“Prof. Bush gave as his opinion, that ‘the second advent of the Saviour is not affirmed to be personal, but spiritual and providential; and that the event so denominated is to be considered as having entered upon its incipient fulfillment at a very early period of the Christian dispensation.’—Anastasis, p. 9.

“Mr. Dowling and others, who admitted the personal coming of Christ at the close of the millennium, claimed that the predicted reign of Christ on earth during that period is to be spiritual.

“But Mr. Shimeal sustained Mr. Miller in his belief that the advent will be personal and pre-millennial. And Bishop Hopkins, of Vermont (Two Discourses on the Advent), while he claimed that the time was not revealed, said, nevertheless, ‘we would admonish you, with still greater earnestness, to keep your souls in constant readiness for your Lord’s advent, and in a state of sacred desire to behold him in his glory.’—p. 29.

“9. The Return of the Jews.—Mr. Miller looked for no return of the Jews previous to the resurrection of the just; and the righteous of that nation, who have died in the faith of Abraham, with all Gentile believers of like precious faith, he regarded as the subjects of all unfulfilled promises to Israel—the fulfillment of which will be in the new earth, and in the resurrection out from among the dead.

“That the promise to Abraham has reference to the resurrection state, is no novel or unscriptural view.

“Rabbi Eliezer the Great, supposed to have lived just after the second temple was built, applied Hosea 14:8 to the pious Jews, who seemed likely to die without seeing the glory of Israel, saying: ‘As I live, saith Jehovah, I will raise you up in the resurrection of the dead; and I will gather you with all Israel.’

“The Sadducees are reported to have asked Rabbi Gamaliel, the preceptor of Paul, whence he would prove that God would raise the dead; who quoted Deut. 9:21: ‘Which land the Lord sware that he would give to your fathers.’ He argued, as Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob had it not, and as God cannot lie, that they must be raised from the dead to inherit it.

“Rabbi Simai, though of later date, argues the same from Ex. 6:4, insisting that the law asserts in this place the resurrection from the dead, when it said, ‘And also I have established my covenant with them, to give them the Canaan;’ for, he adds, ‘It is not said to you, but to them.’

“Mennasseh Ben Israel says: ‘It is plain that Abraham and the rest of the patriarchs did not possess that land: it follows, therefore, that they must be raised in order to enjoy the promised good, as, otherwise, the promises of God would be vain and false.”—De Resurrect. Mort., L, i., c. 1, sec. 4.

“Rabbi Saahias Gaion, commenting on Dan. 12:2, says: ‘This is the resuscitation of the dead Israel, whose lot is eternal life, and those who shall not awake are the forsakers of Jehovah.’

“‘In the world to come,’ says the Sahar, fol. 81, ‘the blessed God will vivify the dead and raise them from their dust, so that they shall be no more an earthly structure.’

“Luther, Calvin, and many other divines of the era of the Reformation, apply the promises to Abraham in a like manner; as do many divines of the present time.

“Of those who entered the list against Mr. Miller, Dr. Dowling, Mr. Shimeal, and Dr. Hamilton, strenuously contended for the return of the Jews in the flesh to Palestine.

“Prof. Stuart sustained Mr. Miller so far as the question has respect to the true Israel, applying the promises to all who are of the faith of Abraham.

“10. The Epoch of the Resurrection.—Mr. Miller held that the resurrection of the just will be pre-millennial, and that that of the wicked will be at the close of the millennium. This hinges on the interpretation given to Rev. 20:4-6. It is worthy of note that, during the first two centuries, there was not an individual who believed in any resurrection of the dead, whose name or memory has come down to us, who denied that a literal resurrection is there taught.

“Eusebius admits that Papias was a disciple of John the Evangelist, and that he taught that, ‘after the resurrection of the dead, the kingdom of Christ shall be established corporeally on this earth.’—[Hist. Lib. 3, Sec. 39.] And Jerome quotes Papias [De Script. Eccles.] as saying, that ‘he had the apostles for his authors, and that he considered what Andrew, what Peter said, what Philip, what Thomas said, and other disciples of the Lord.’ Irenæus taught that at the resurrection of the just the meek should inherit the earth; and that then would be fulfilled the promise which God made to Abraham.

“Justyn Martyr, who was born A. D. 89, seven years before the Revelations were written, says that he and many others are of this mind, ‘that Christ shall reign personally on the earth,’ and that ‘all who were accounted orthodox so believed.’ He also says, ‘A certain man among us, whose name is John, being one of the twelve apostles of Christ, in that Revelation which was shown to him, prophesied that those who believe in our Christ shall fulfill a thousand years at Jerusalem.’

“Tertullian, who wrote about A. D. 180, says it was a custom of his times for Christians to pray that they might have part in the first resurrection; and Cyprian, who lived about A. D. 220, says that Christians ‘had a thirst for martyrdom, that they might obtain a better resurrection,’—the martyrs being raised at the commencement of the thousand years.

“The first of whom we have any account that opposed this doctrine was Origen, in the middle of the third century, who styled those who adhered to it ‘the simpler sort of Christians.’ Mosheim assures us that the opinion ‘that Christ was to come and reign a thousand years among men’ had, before the time of Origen, ‘met with no opposition.’—Ch. Hist., vol. 1, p. 284.

“At the era of the Reformation this doctrine was revived, and taught by Luther and Melancthon; it is in the confession of Augsburg (A. D. 1530); was the belief of Latimer, Cranmer, and Ridley; is in the Articles of the Church (Ed. vi., A. D. 1552); is not denied in the more prominent creeds and confessions of faith of the churches, and was believed by Mede, Sir Isaac Newton, Bishop Newton, Milton, Knox, Bunyan, Gill, Cowper, Heber, Pollok, Greswell, and many other distinguished names of modern times.

“This point was vital to Mr. Miller’s theory, for, however correct he might be in his time, without this event he must fail in his application of prophecy.

“Prof. Bush, while he admitted that all ‘the leading periods mentioned by Daniel and John do actually expire about this age of the world’ (Letter to Mr. M., p. 6), claimed that ‘the great event before the world is not its physical conflagration, but its moral regeneration.’—p. 11.

“Mr. Hinton said: ‘It is possible we may have reached the goal of the world’s moral destiny. It is, indeed, our deliberate opinion that we are in the general period of termination of the 23d century alluded to by the prophet ... and that the events alluded to in the phrase “then shall the sanctuary be cleansed” are now actually passing before us.’—p. 121. But he considered the event ‘a resurrection from death in trespasses and sins.’—p. 336.

“Dr. Dowling, Dr. Hamilton, and others, while they did not admit, with Prof. Bush, that the present age ‘is just opening upon the crowning consummation of all prophetic declarations,’ contended that the millennium ‘is to be ushered in, not by a literal resurrection of the bodies of the saints, but by the figurative resurrection of the holy men of all past ages, in the numerous instances of eminent piety that shall appear in every nation under heaven.’—Dr. H., p. 30.

“Prof. Stuart, while he admitted that the resurrection here brought to view was a resurrection of the body, limited it to the martyrs, and denied that there is to be a descent of Christ to the earth, or a visible reign of the martyrs with him.

“Dr. Jarvis did not deny the event for which Mr. Miller looked; and Mr. Shimeal taught, with Mr. Miller, the resurrection of the glorified saints, and their visible reign with Christ on the earth; but he held that they would reign over the converted nations, and denied the conflagration previous to the end of the thousand years.

“And Bishop Hopkins gave as his opinion that the consummation ‘is drawing nigh; how nigh none can tell.’

“There were various other issues between Mr. Miller and his reviewers; but they were more collateral than vital to the question at issue, and are not, therefore, particularly noticed in this connection.

“It is seen, from the foregoing, that Mr. Miller’s points, taken separately, were not new or original with him; and that the peculiarity of his theory consisted in putting them together; and that, while none of his opposers condemned the whole, and each point separately was admitted by some of them, there was no more unanimity between them than between him and them. They had not only to battle with Mr. Miller’s theory, but each had to disprove those of the others.

“It was, therefore, not surprising that the reviewers of Mr. Miller made no impression on those who held his opinions. It was seen that to oppose him they were ready to abandon old established principles of Protestant interpretation. Even the Boston Recorder (Orthodox Cong.) said: ‘It must needs be acknowledged that our faith is greatly shaken in the interpretations on which, in common with most of our own brethren, we have heretofore relied, and which forms the FOUNDATION of the baseless theories of Miller!’ And the Christian Advocate and Journal (Meth. Epis.) said: ‘If his (Prof. Chase’s) views in regard to the prophecies of Daniel be correct, the long-established opinion that the Roman Empire is the fourth kingdom of the prophet, must give way to the more successful researches of Dr. Chase. Some other opinions, which have been thought to be settled beyond a doubt, ARE TERRIBLY SHAKEN.’

“Those who adhered to the established principles of interpretation did not fail to perceive that Prof. Stuart, Dr. Dowling, Prof. Chase, &c., had not fairly met Mr. Miller, and that their expositions would not stand the test of sound criticism.

“Of Professors Stuart and Bush the New York Evangelist said: ‘The tendency of these views is to destroy the Scripture evidence of the doctrine of any real end of the world, any day of final judgment, or general resurrection of the body. The style of interpretation, we assert, tends fearfully to Universalism. This tendency we are prepared to prove.’

“The Hartford Universalist said of Professor Stuart: ‘He puts an uncompromising veto upon the popular interpretations of Daniel and Revelation, and unites with Universalists in contending that most of their contents had special reference to, and their fulfillment in, scenes and events which transpired but a few years after those books were written.’—Oct. 15, 1842.

“Mr. Hinton said of the same: ‘We regret that, in the midst of the great moral conflict with Antichrist, which is now carrying on, those into whose hands the saints were so long given should find so able a coadjutor. We have, however, no fears that Christians of sound common sense, and capable of independent thought, will, after a candid consideration of the scheme which excludes papacy from the page of prophecy, and that which traces in the prophetic symbols a faithful portraiture of its abominations, make a wrong decision. Since we have read the work of the learned Stuart, we have rejoiced the more that our humble abilities have been directed to the defense of the old paths.’—Proph. Illus., p. 231.

“Of Mr. Dowling, Dr. Breckenbridge said: ‘As for this disquisition of Mr. Dowling, we may confidently say that it is hardly to be conceived that anything could be printed by Mr. Miller, or Mr. Any-body-else, more shallow, absurd and worthless. There is hardly a point he touches on which he has not managed to adopt the very idlest conjectures of past writers on the prophecies; and this so entirely without regard to any coherent system, that the only clear conviction a man of sense or reflection could draw from his pamphlet, if such a man could be supposed capable of believing it, would be that the prophecies themselves are a jumble of nonsense. Such answers as his can have no effect, we would suppose, except to bring the whole subject into ridicule, or to promote the cause he attacks.’—Spirit of the 19th Century, March No., 1843.

“Again he says, in speaking of ‘the general ignorance which prevails on this subject,’ that of it ‘no greater evidence need be produced than the fact that this pamphlet of Mr. Dowling has been extensively relied on, yea, preached, as a sufficient answer’ to Mr. Miller.

“On surveying the whole field of controversy, Professor Bush, while he claimed that the spiritualists were nearer the truth, said of them: ‘They have not answered the arguments of their opponents, nor can they do it on the ground which they themselves professedly occupy in respect to a millennium. Assuming that that period is yet future, and its commencement of no distant date, the Literalists, or Adventists, bear down with overwhelming weight of argument upon them, maintaining that the second coming precedes and ushers in that sublime era. The spiritualists say, Nay, but refuse to commit themselves to a defined position. All that they know is, that there is to be a millennium of some kind, occurring at some time, introduced in some way, and brought to an end from some cause; and that immediately thereupon the Lord is to descend from heaven, burn up the earth, raise the dead, and administer the judgment; but as to the what, the when, the how, the why—on these points they rest content in knowing nothing, because of the impression taken up that nothing is to be known.”—N. C. Repos., 1849, p. 248.

“Dr. Jarvis, in his sermons, was particularly severe on Mr. Miller, but afterwards did him ample justice, as in the following. He said: ‘Mr. Miller, in his eagerness to make out his scheme, absolutely falsities the language of the Bible. He makes Jehoram to have reigned five years, where the Scripture positively says he reigned eight; and between Amaziah and Azariah, or Uzziah, he introduces an interregnum of eleven years, for which he has not even the shadow of an authority in the Bible. He quotes, indeed, chapters 14 and 15 of the 2d book of Kings; and this may be sufficient for those who are ready to take his opinions upon trust. But, if you examine the chapters to which he refers, you will be astonished to find that there is not in either of them one word upon the subject.’—Sermons, p. 55.

“In his preface to his sermons Dr. Jarvis makes the following correction of the above. He says:—

“‘It will be seen that in speaking of the curtailment of the reign of Jehoram, the son of Jehoshaphat, from eight to five years, and the introduction of eleven years of interregnum between the reigns of Amaziah and Uzziah, he has censured Mr. Miller in too unmeasured terms. These particulars he is bound to explain.

“‘It would have been easier, and perhaps more advantageous to the author, to have made the alterations silently, and omitted the censure. But would it have been equally honest?

“‘In preparing the introductory volume of his “Ecclesiastical History,” he had carefully avoided reading modern writers on chronology, for fear of being biased by their systems. For this reason he had never read the learned work of Dr. Hales; and though familiar with Petavius, Usher, and Marsham, a good while had elapsed since he had consulted them on the parts of history connected with the prophecies. But these great writers being entirely silent as to any interregnum in the kingdom of Judah, the existence of such an interregnum was entirely a new idea to him. Mr. Miller quoted 2 Kings, 14, 15, without mentioning the verses from which he drew the inference; and it was not till the author had read Dr. Hales’ “Analysis” that he saw the correctness of that inference. If this admission gives Mr. Miller an advantage, he is fairly entitled to it. We cannot, for one moment, suppose that he knew anything about Dr. Hales or his work. As a plain, unlettered man, his perspicuity in reading his Bible, and his Bible only, is much to his credit; and we ought to consider it as giving additional force to the reasons assigned by Dr. Hales, that an ignorant man, as Mr. Miller confessedly is, should, from the mere examination of the Bible, have arrived at the same conclusion. The censure, however, in the sermon, holds good with regard to the reign of Jehoram, the son of Jehoshaphat (2 Kings, 8:17; 2 Chron. 21:5); but, being equally applicable to Archbishop Usher, should not have been laid particularly at Mr. Miller’s door.’

CHAPTER XII.

HIS TREATMENT OF OPPONENTS—SPECIMENS OF HIS PREACHING—COLLOQUIAL, EXPOSTULATORY, EXPOSITORY, ETC.

“Mr. Miller did not consider that his reviewers always treated him and his arguments with the utmost fairness; and, in speaking of them, he sometimes retorted in terms of great severity. Considering his treatment, by the religious and secular press, and the contumely which was incessantly heaped on him, that he should, at times, manifest a degree of impatience, was more an occasion of regret than of surprise. Few men have been called to endure so great an amount of reproach as fell to his lot; and few could have endured it as he did. He was human, and shared in all the weaknesses common to humanity; but, whenever he failed to endure the smart of undeserved wounds with all the sweetness of gospel charity, no one more sincerely regretted it than he did; and his liability to err in this respect was with him a subject of many prayers and tears.

“His severity, however, was often richly merited; and he knew how to be severe, without being uncourteous. Those who used their learning to fritter away the plain meaning of Scripture, and to make it teach something which the common reader would never have perceived in it, merely for the purpose of opposing his conclusions—he had little inclination to spare.

“In speaking of the 8th chapter of Daniel, and the question, ‘How long shall be the vision?’ he says, ‘The answer is, “Unto 2300 days.”

“‘But,’ says the critic, it is ‘evenings-mornings.’

“‘No matter: all men seem to understand it days; for it is so translated in every language with which we are acquainted at the present day. Therefore, this can never be made plainer, if this compound Hebrew word should be criticised upon until the judgment shall set. I am sick of this continual harping upon words. Our learned critics are worse on the waters of truth than a school of sharks on the fishing-banks of the north, and they have made more infidels in our world than all the heathen mythology in existence. What word in revelation has not been turned, twisted, racked, wrested, distorted, demolished, and annihilated by these voracious harpies in human shape, until the public have become so bewildered they know not what to believe? “They have fouled the waters with their feet.” I have always noticed where they tread the religious spirit is at a low ebb. It becomes cold, formal, and doubtful, at least. It is the mind of the Spirit we want, and God’s word then becomes spirit and life unto us.

“‘The words “evenings-mornings” convey to our mind the idea of days; thus this vision is 2300 days long,’ says the reader.

“‘Yes. But how can all this be?” says the inquiring mind. ‘Can three kingdoms rise up and become great; from a small people become a strong nation; conquer all the nations of the earth, and then in its turn, be subdued and conquered by a kingdom still more fortunate; and so on through three successive kingdoms, and do this in little over six years? Impossible.’

“‘But God has said it, and I must believe. Now the only difficulty is in time.’

“‘How can this be?’

“‘Very well,’ says the dear child of God; ‘I remember me: God says I must “dig for the truth as for hid treasure.” I will go to work, and, while I am digging, I will live by begging. Father in Heaven, I believe it is thy word; but I do not understand it; show me thy truth.’

“I had rather have one humble prayer of this kind, with an English Bible in my hand, than all the Hebrew, Greek, and Latin Bro. S. ever knew.

“The child then takes the word day, and compares spiritual things with spiritual, to find what his Heavenly Father means by days in a figurative sense. The first text he lights upon is in Num. 14:34, ‘each day for a year.’

“‘May this not be it?’ says the child.

“He takes hold of it by faith, carries it home, lays it up in his cell of sweets, richer than a lord, and again goes forth in search of more. He now lights upon Eze. 4:6: ‘I have appointed thee each day for a year.’ He is now rich in very deed—two jewels in one cell. He does not stop to criticize, like a Stuart, and query, and reason himself out of common sense and reason too; but, Abraham-like, he believes, and lays up his treasure at home.

“‘I see,’ says the child, ‘this use of days was so ordained by my Father in two cases; and two witnesses are enough. But I am not certain that I have a right to use these jewels in this place. I will go and beg, and dig again.’

“In this excursion he lights on Daniel 9:23-27: ‘Seventy weeks are determined upon thy people.’

“‘Seventy weeks of what?’ says the critic.

“‘I do not care a fig.’ says the believing child, ‘whether you call it days or years: I know how long it was in fulfilling.’

“‘How long?’

“‘Exactly four hundred and ninety years: from the decree given in the seventh year of Artaxerxes, four hundred and fifty-seven years before Christ, unto his death, thirty-three years after the birth of Christ, making exactly four hundred and ninety years, or seventy sevens of years of the vision.’

“Prof. Stuart having applied the days in Daniel 12 to the times of Antiochus, when the context shows that the resurrection will follow their termination, Mr. Miller said: ‘Suppose Prof. Stuart had been a believing Jew, and lived in the time of Antiochus, and had been of the same mind he is now, or says he is, and one of his brother Jews had come along and prophesied or preached that the Jews were to be a scattered and a peeled people, dashed and scattered among all nations, more than two thousand years, then to come; and suppose the professor had been then an expounder of the law and the prophets, and was called upon to explain this text as being then fulfilled, what would he say to his brother Jew, the prophet? He would say, as any man must say by him:—

“‘Sir, you are a false prophet; for God has told us plainly, in this very text, that, when this three and a half years are fulfilled under which we are now groaning, then our scattering or dashing will be accomplished—yes, and finished, too. So says the word. Therefore do you keep away from my flock of Pharisees, for I do not want my people excited by your false, alarming doctrine. Do you not see that, at the end of 1335 days, Daniel will stand in his lot? And do you not see, sir, that his standing in his lot means the resurrection? Read the first three verses of this chapter.’

“‘Ah,’ says the prophet, ‘that does not mean the resurrection, but⸺’

“‘But what?’ says the professor.

“‘Oh! I do not know—difficult to understand,’ says the prophet.

“‘I see,’ says the professor, ‘you are a Sadducee. You do not understand either the Hebrew or the Chaldaic, or the exegesis of the Scriptures. How dare you prophesy evil of this nation, when God hath spoken peace after these days? I say you are a Sadducee. I will have no fellowship with you. You must not come into my synagogue.’

“Would not this be the natural result of such a case? I leave it for the reader to judge.

“Or, suppose that the professor was now in controversy with a Jew,—a Sadducee,—and was under the necessity of proving the doctrine of the resurrection by the Old Testament, would he not put into requisition this very text, and prove by the same a resurrection unto eternal life? And, if he did not believe such plain and positive proofs as these texts would be, would he not consider him a poor, blinded Sadducee? Let us be careful that our own mouths do not condemn us.

“If, then, these days can only end with the resurrection, it is impossible that these Scriptures can apply to Antiochus. And, as the rules which he has given us in his Hints are the same, in substance, which I was forced to adopt more than twenty years ago, I cannot believe that Antiochus Epiphanes is even hinted at from Daniel 11:14 to the end of the 12th chapter. And, if the prophecy does not belong to Antiochus, then he must acknowledge that the little horn can apply only to the papal power; and must agree with nearly all Protestant writers that ‘time, times, and a half,’ are, together with the other numbers in this chapter, to be understood in a symbolical sense.

“In writing, he sometimes indulged in a colloquial style. In the following he hints at an objection often urged against him, that he, being a farmer, should not presume to teach. He says:—

“As it was in the days of Noah, so shall it be in the days of the Son of man. They were eating and drinking, marrying and giving in marriage, until Noah entered into the ark. Methinks I can almost see the scenes of that day. See you not that elegant building yonder, near that ark of gopher-wood? That building was reared at a great expense, by the host, for the purpose of entertaining strangers who might come to visit that ark, and to ridicule and laugh at that old, white-headed man you see yonder pitching the ark. The host, you see, has become rich by the great gain he has made, from the furnishing of the workmen, citizens and strangers, with food and drink of the most costly kind. Look into the dining hall of that establishment. See the table loaded with all the delicate viands of the season. See those bottles filled with the sparkling juice of the grape. See the host at his door, beckoning to each passer-by to enter and regale himself. Hear the conversation between the host and the stranger guest who has just entered his mansion.

“Guest. What great building is that in yonder field, on that eminence?

“Host. That is called Noah’s ark.

“Guest. But what use is he going to put it to? It seems to be built for sailing. Surely the old man does not expect to sail on dry land.

“Host. Yes; you are right. The old man says the world is coming to an end (Gen. 6:13), and he has prepared an ark to save himself and family; for all flesh will be destroyed by water, as he says.

“Guest. But how does he know this?

“Host. He says God told him.

“Guest. What kind of a man is he? He must be a great fanatic, I am thinking.

“Host. Why, yes; we think he is crazy a little; but you cannot discover it in anything else but his building that great ark, and neglecting his farm and other worldly matters. But what he has lost I have gained.

“Guest. A farmer, say you?—a farmer! Why did not God tell some of our ‘mighty men, which are men of renown’? (Gen. 6:4.) A farmer, too! There is no truth in it. But do any believe him?

“Host. Believe him! No. We have other things to attend to, and cannot spend time to hear the old farmer. But we were all very much startled, no longer ago than yesterday; for the old man has been telling some that he had prepared rooms for the beasts of the field, and for the fowls of the air, and every creeping thing; and yesterday they came, two and two of every sort, and entered the ark, apparently of their own accord. (Gen. 7:8, 9.) This, you may be sure, startled us some; but the banquets and feasts of last night have dissipated the fears of all, and to-day things are as they should be.

“Guest. It is rather strange; yet it cannot be true. God will not destroy the world in the midst of this hilarity and glee, and in the hight of all these improvements at the present day. Much, much of the earth remains yet to be cultivated and inhabited. Our western wilderness is yet to be explored and settled. Then the world is yet in its infancy—not two thousand years old yet; and you know we have a tradition that the earth is to wax old like a garment. It cannot be true, what the old man tells you. I will warrant you the earth will stand many thousand years yet.

“Host. Look! look! there goes the old fool and his family now, I dare say, into the ark. I remember me now, the old man told us, four days ago, that, in seven days (Gen. 7:4-10), God would cause it to rain sufficient to destroy every living thing from the face of the earth. I shall have a chance to laugh at the old man four days hence. I told him to his face that, after his seven days were ended, he would be ashamed to preach any more, and we should have some quiet then.

“Guest. But do your priests let him preach in their congregations and societies?

“Host. Oh, no! by no means; that is, none that are called respectable, or of the higher class. Why, sir, they held a meeting last night at my banqueting house. After the cloth was removed, and while the wine was circulating freely, old Noah was the subject of the toast. And it would have done you good to have heard their sharp cuts and squibs; it caused a roar of laughter among the guests. See, yonder come some of them now. Let us go in, and enjoy another treat. (They go in.)

“Ah, said I, were these scenes acted before the flood, and will it be so in the end of the world? And will the generation of the righteous not pass off until they behold these things acted over again? So says our blessed Saviour, and so I believe.

“Then shall ‘heaven and earth pass away.’ The righteous will pass off to meet their Lord, and the wicked be consumed to cleanse the world. Then will the prophecy in this chapter be fulfilled, and ‘the word of God will not pass away.’

“Prepare, ye servants of the Most High, to render up your stewardship. Ye scoffers, take warning; cease your revilings, your newspaper squibs, your bombast, your revelings, and your banquetings. And you, my dear reader, prepare! prepare! for lo!—

‘He comes, he comes, the Judge severe;

The seventh trumpet speaks him near.’

“The foregoing will also serve as a specimen of his mode, at times, of addressing an audience. At other times he was very earnest and solemn. In arguing that we must be beyond the end of the 1260 days of Daniel and John, from the fact that the church is not now in the wilderness, he said:—

“‘Can we be mistaken in the fulfillment of this prophecy? Is the church now in the wilderness? And if you should respond, She is, I ask you, When, then, was she out? Not in the apostolic age; for she was not more free then than now. And then, let me inquire, where are your twelve hundred and sixty years? They can have no meaning. O Christian! I beg of you, believe in the word of God; do not, I pray you, discard time, any more than manner. Is it not selfishness in us to discard the set times which God has fixed, and not man? Where is our faith? Why are we so slow of heart to believe? Three times we have witnessed,—yes, in the lifetime of some of us,—the fulfillment of the “time, times, and a half,” in the accomplishment of the “forty-two months,” in the completion of the “twelve-hundred and three-score days,” and yet, O God, we refuse to believe! Shame on that professor who will not open his eyes!

“‘They tell us we cannot understand prophecy until it is fulfilled.

“‘But here it is three times fulfilled in this day in which we live. What excuse have you now, O ye heralds of the cross? Ah! say you, that is your construction; we are not bound to follow your explanations. No, no! But for ages you and your fathers have been telling us that these prophecies were true; and you have told us that when they come to pass we should know what they meant; and, although ages on ages have rolled their rapid course, yet nothing has transpired, as you will own; and we, if we should search, and find, as we believe, the prophecies fulfilling, and tell our reasons, you then can taunt us with a skeptic argument,—“this is your construction,” and then not dare to tell us what it means! Awake, awake, ye shepherds of the flock! Come, tell us why these things are not fulfilled. Deceive us not. You stand upon the walls, both night and day; then tell us what it means. We have a right to ask, “Watchman, what of the night? Watchman, what of the night?” An answer we must have; or you must leave your towers. It will not do to answer us, “I am under no obligation to tell you.”[22] Has Zion no better watchmen on her walls than this? Alas! alas! then we may sleep, and sleep, until the trumpet’s dreadful blast shall shake our dusty beds, and the last angel raise his hand and swear “that time shall be no longer.” Why are you thus negligent and remiss in duty? If I am not right in my construction of God’s holy word, pray tell us what is truth, and make it look more plain,—and will we not believe? Thus you will cleanse your garments from our blood, and we must bear the shame. What time of night? Come, tell us plainly. There are portentous clouds hanging over our heads; we hear the murmurs of the fitful winds; we see sad omens of a dreadful storm; and where is our watchman’s voice? Your silence gives us fears that we are betrayed. Awake! awake! Ye watchmen, to your post! It is no false alarm. There are judgments, heavy judgments, at the door. “Our God shall come, and shall not keep silence; a fire shall devour before him, and it shall be very tempestuous round about him. He shall call to the heavens from above, and to the earth, that he may judge his people.” How shall the fearful stand in that great day, when heaven and earth shall hear his mighty voice, and they that hear must come to judgment? Where will the unbelieving scoffer then appear? When God makes inquisition for the blood of souls, and when the under-shepherds stand, with their flocks, around the “great white throne,” to have each motive, thought, word, act, and deed, brought out to light, before a gazing world, and tried by that unerring rule, “the word.” I ask you, scorner, jester, scoffer, how will you appear? Stop, stop, and think, before you take a fatal leap, and jest away your soul!’

“In closing a discourse on the text, ‘We shall reign on the earth,’ he thus proceeds:—

“‘We shall reign on the earth, says our text. Not under its present dispensation, but after it is cleansed by fire; after the wicked are destroyed by fire, as the antediluvians were by water; after the resurrection of the saints, and when Christ’s prayer, taught to his disciples, shall be answered, “Thy will be done on earth, even as in Heaven.” When the bride has made herself ready, and is married to the Bridegroom, he will then move her into the New Jerusalem state, prepared as a bride adorned for her husband, where we shall reign with him forever and ever, on the new earth and in the new heavens. “And God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes, and there shall be no more death, neither sorrow nor crying, neither shall there be any more pain; for the former things are passed away.” Then the whole earth “shall be full of his glory;” and then, as says the prophet, Isaiah 54:5, “For thy Maker is thine husband; the Lord of Hosts is his name; and thy Redeemer, the Holy One of Israel; the God of the whole earth shall he be called.”

“‘And then, my dear hearer, if you have had your heart broken off from sin; if you have by faith been united in spirit to the Lamb of God; if you have patiently endured tribulation and persecution for his name,—then you will live and reign with him on the earth, and this earth will be regenerated by fire and the power of God; the curse destroyed; sin, pain, crying, sorrow, and death, banished from the world, and mortality clothed upon by immortality, death swallowed up in victory. You will rise up in that general assembly, and, clapping your hands with joy, cry, “Holy, holy, holy is the Lord God Almighty, which was, and is, and is now come.” Then you will be in a situation to join the grand chorus, and sing the new song, saying, “Thou art worthy, for thou wast slain, and hast redeemed us to God by thy blood, out of every kindred, and tongue, and people, and nation, and hast made us unto our God kings and priests, and we shall reign on the earth.... Saying, with a loud voice, Worthy is the Lamb that was slain to receive power, and riches, and wisdom, and strength, and honor, and glory, and blessing.” And all who meet in that grand assembly will be then heard to shout, “Blessing, and honor, and glory, and power, be unto Him that sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb forever and ever.” And methinks I can now see every one who loves our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ in this assembly rising upon their feet, and in one united prayer of faith, crying, “Come, Lord Jesus, O come quickly!”

“‘But you, O impenitent man or woman! where will you be then? When heaven shall resound with the mighty song, and distant realms shall echo back the sound, where, tell me, where will you be then? In hell! O think! In hell!—a dreadful word! Once more think! In hell! lifting up your eyes, being in torment. Stop, sinner; think! In hell! where shall be weeping, wailing, and gnashing of teeth. Stop, sinner, stop; consider on your latter end. In hell! “where the beast and false prophet are, and shall be tormented day and night forever and ever.” I entreat of you to think—in hell! I know you hate to hear the word. It sounds too harsh. There is no music in it. You say it grates upon the ear. But think, when it grates upon the soul, the conscience, and the ear, and not by sound only, but a dread reality, when there can be no respite, no cessation,[23] no deliverance, no hope! You will then think,—yes, of this warning, of a thousand others, perhaps of this hour, with many more that are lost,—yes, worse than lost,—that have been squandered in earthly, vain, and transitory mirth, have been abused; for there have been many hours the Spirit strove with you, and you prayed to be excused. There was an hour when conscience spake; but you stopped your ears and would not hear. There was a time when judgment and reason whispered; but you soon drowned their cry by calling in some aid against your own soul. To judgment and reason you have opposed will and wit, and said “in hell” was only in the grave. In this vain citadel, in this frail house of sand, you will build until the last seal is broken, the last trump will sound, the last woe be pronounced, and the last vial be poured upon the earth. Then, impenitent man or woman, you will awake in everlasting woe!

“‘Be warned; repent; fly, fly for succor to the ark of God, to Jesus Christ, the Lamb that once was slain, that you might live; for he is worthy to receive all honor, power, and glory. Believe, and you shall live. Obey his word, his Spirit, his calls, his invitations; there is no time for delay; put it not off, I beg of you,—no, not for a moment. Do you want to join that heavenly choir, and sing the new song? Then come in God’s appointed way; repent. Do you want a house not made with hands, eternal in the heavens? Then join in heart and soul this happy people, whose God is the Lord. Do you want an interest in the New Jerusalem, the beloved city? Then set your face as a flint Zionward; become a pilgrim in the good old way. “Seek first the kingdom of Heaven,” says Christ, “and then all these things shall be added unto you.”’

“At other times his discourse was of the most mild and gentle kind. Thus, in speaking of the church of Christ under various circumstances, he says:—

“‘In tracing her history from the patriarch Abraham to the present day, we find her variable as the wind, and changeable as the weather.

“‘To-day, she is coming up out of the wilderness leaning on the arm of her Beloved; to-morrow, “like a young roe leaping upon the mountains, and skipping upon the hills.”

“‘Now she is seen among the trees of the woods; next in a palace of silver inclosed in boards of cedar.

“‘There we saw her in the clefts of the rock; here we behold her in the broad way, in the streets of the great city.

“‘Again we find her among the foxes of the desert; and anon we perceive her seeking Him whom her soul loveth.

“‘She is asleep on her bed by night; and the same night the watch finds her in the city.

“‘Behold her Lord knocking at the door for admittance, while she is too indolent to arise and let him in. The next moment she is opening to her Beloved, but he has withdrawn himself. At one time the voice of her Beloved, sounding over the hills and echoing among the mountains like the roar of distant thunder, has no impression; next, the soft whisper of love gains all her attention.

“‘Here blows the rough north wind and strong south wind upon her spices, yet they put forth no fragrance. And there the lightest breeze makes her roses blossom, and all the air is perfume.

“‘See her countenance to-day black as the tents of Kedar; and to-morrow comely as the daughters of Jerusalem, and fair as the purple curtains of Solomon. To-day she is “a garden barred, a spring shut up, a fountain sealed;” to-morrow, “a garden open, a well of living waters, and streams from Lebanon.” Now she is weak as a babe; a single watchman can “smite, wound, and take away her veil;” and then she is courageous and valiant, “terrible as an army with banners.” To-day she is made to keep another’s vineyard; to-morrow she is realizing a thousand pieces of silver from her own. She is truly a changeable being, carried about by the slightest circumstances.”’

“The following extract from a discourse, is another specimen of this mode of address:—

“‘Come, and let us return unto the Lord; for he hath torn, and he will heal us; he hath smitten, and he will bind us up. After two days will he revive us; in the third day he will raise us up, and we shall live in his sight. Then shall we know, if we follow on to know the Lord; his going forth is prepared as the morning; and he shall come unto us as the rain, as the latter and former rain unto the earth.’ Hosea 6:1-3.

“‘The text to which I have directed your attention, in the above paragraph, is one of the richest and most interesting prophecies that was ever delivered to mortals by any prophet since the world began. Every word speaks, and is full of meaning; every sentence is a volume of instruction. No wisdom of man could communicate as much in as few words. It is a pearl of great price, lying deep in the waters of prophecy; it is a diamond, which will cut the film that covers the visual organ of the readers of God’s word; it is a gem in the mountain of God’s house, shining in the darkness, and the darkness comprehendeth it not. It puzzled the Pharisee, confounded the scribe, and perplexed the Sadducee. It has, and will continue to have, the same influence on similar characters until the end of time. The great men of the earth will not stoop to its light, because it lies too low. The small men of the earth will not pick it up, for fear of ridicule from those above them. And now, dear reader, I am afraid you will go and do likewise,—either treat it with contempt or ridicule. But you will find, if you will examine, that in it is contained,—

“‘1. Our duty to God.

“‘Come, let us return unto the Lord;’ and, ‘If we follow on to know the Lord.’ Here is the whole duty of man, as clearly described as any crystal could make it. Repent, believe, and obey, are clearly inculcated. What better words could an orator make use of, to excite the minds of men to noble deeds of daring than are here used by the prophet? ‘Come’—he invites—‘let us’—he will go with them—‘return.’ Ah! what a word—return! Traveler, have you ever wandered far from home, in a cold, unfeeling world, among strangers, among robbers, enemies, thieves, and hard-hearted worldlings? Have you been sick and weak, wounded and torn, spoiled and robbed, smitten and cheated, hated and reviled, and this, too, for days, months, or years? Have you at last ‘returned’ to your family, your friends, your native land? Do you remember those familiar objects, as you returned—the way, the mountain, the hill, the valley, and the plain; the grove, the turn, the house, and the brook? Do you remember the tree, the rock, the barberry-bush, the gate and the post, the door-way and latch? “Oh, yes,” say you; “I remember, too, my beating and palpitating heart, and the falling tear which I stopped to wipe away from my blanched cheek, while my hand was on the latch. I remember how I listened to hear the loved ones breathe, although it was then in the dark watches of the night.”

“Thus tells the wanderer the tale of his ‘return;’ and in like manner could all the wandering sons of Zion speak of their ‘return.’ You, then, who have experienced these things, can realize the value of the word ‘return.’ And from my soul I pity the wanderer that never has returned ‘unto the Lord;’ to Him that loved us, to Him who died for us; more, vastly more, than mortal friends could ever do—he died. And so, say you, can fathers die for children, and mothers for their sons; children can give their lives, though rare the gift, to save the life of parents; husbands, and wives, and friends have fallen, to save each other from death. All this is true. But here is love greater than these; ‘for while we were enemies Christ died for us.’ Yea, more: he left his Father’s presence, his glory, and that Heaven where angels dwell; where he, the brightest star in all the upper world, stood highest; where seraphim and cherubim in glory cast down their crowns, and worshiped at his feet. ‘He became poor, that we through his poverty might be made rich.’ Again: he bore our shame, and by his stripes we are healed. He was buffeted for our offenses, and despised by mortals, for whom he suffered in the flesh. He rose from death for our justification, and ascended on high, to intercede for sinners, and has sent down his Spirit to bring us wanderers home.

“‘For he hath torn.’ True, he suffers our sins to tear us, and those earthly powers, in whom we trust, to break our proud hearts, and, therefore, tears away our vain supports. He tears our affections from earthly things, that he may place them on a more enduring substance. He tears our hearts from idol gods, that he may place them on God supreme. He tears our soul from the body, that we may no longer live in the flesh to sin, but depart in the spirit, and be with Christ.

“‘And he will heal us.’ Yes, he will heal us from all our backslidings, and love us freely for his own name’s sake. He will heal us from sin, by showing us its deadly nature. He will heal us from worldly affections, by placing our affections in Heaven. He will heal our hearts of idolatry, by the taking possession of them himself. He will heal us from death, by the resurrection from the grave.

“‘He hath smitten.’ God has so ordered, in his providence, that his children cannot have intercourse and association with men of the world, and with the kingdoms of this earth, but that persecution, or loss of Christian character, is sure to follow. The prophet is showing the present state of the church, while the tares and wheat are growing together. The children of God shall be smitten—meaning they shall be chastised, persecuted, ruled over. See the Roman power, from the days of their connection with the Jews until the present time, ruling over, persecuting, and trampling under foot the church of God. Our text is not only showing us our duty to God, but it teaches us the sufferings of the church, the dealings of God with her, and her final redemption; the first and second coming of her Lord; her final deliverance from death and all enemies, and her glorified reign.

“‘And he will bind us up:’ which is a promise of God, that, although the church should be torn and smitten, yet he would heal them, and bind them up. In due time he would gather them into one fold; he would bind up all their wounds, and heal them of all their maladies. He would visit their transgressions with a rod, and their iniquities with stripes; but his loving kindness he would not take from them.

“An extract from his lecture on the parable of the ‘ten virgins,’ will close these specimens. He thus gives his understanding of what is denoted by their ‘trimming’ their lamps:—

“‘The world, for a number of years, have been trimming their lamps, and the wise and foolish have been engaged in translating the word of God into almost every language known to us upon the earth. Mr. Judson tells us that it has been translated into one hundred and fifty languages within thirty years; that is three times the number of all the translations known to us before. Then fourfold light has been shed among the nations, within the short period of the time above specified; and we are informed that a part, if not all, of the word of God is now given to all nations in their own language. This, surely, is setting the word of life in a conspicuous situation, that it may give light to all in the world. This has not been done by the exertions of Christians or professors only, but by the aid of all classes and societies of men. Kings have opened their coffers and favored those engaged in the work; nobles have used their influence, and have cast into the treasury of the Lord of their abundance; rich men have bestowed of their riches; and, in many cases, the miser has forgotten his parsimony, the poor have replenished the funds of the Lord’s house, and the widow has cast in her mite. How easy to work the work of the Lord when the hearts of men are made willing by his power!

“‘But shall we forget those who have forsaken the land of their fathers, the home of their nativity, and have spent lonesome years of toil among strangers,—yes, worse than strangers,—among heathen idolaters, and the savages of the wilderness, in the cold regions of the north, and under the scorching rays of a vertical sun, among the suffocating sands of the desert, or in the pestilential atmosphere of India; who have risked their lives to learn a language, and prepare themselves to trim a lamp for those who sit in darkness and the shadow of death? No, we will not forget them; the prayers of thousands have ascended before the golden altar, morning and evening, on their behalf, and Israel’s God has been their protector. Surely we may hope that these have oil in their lamps, who have sacrificed so much to bestow a lamp upon others. But remember, my brethren, the Lord he is God, and let him have all the glory. This is the time, and the same time that Gabriel informed Daniel, ‘Many should run to and fro, and knowledge should increase.’ This, too, is the same time when the angel flying through the midst of heaven had the everlasting gospel to preach to them who dwelt upon the earth. Here are Christ’s words fulfilled where he says, “And this gospel of the kingdom shall be preached in all the world for a witness unto all nations; and then shall the end come.”

“‘2d. It is plain, to any diligent observer of the signs of the times, that all the societies for moral reform in our world at the present day are parts of the fulfillment of the parable, giving more light. What of our Bible societies? Are not these trimming the lamp for millions of human beings? Thirty years past, more than three-fourths of the families in what we call Christian lands were without the lamp of life, and now nearly all are supplied. Many of those who sat in heathenish darkness then are now rejoicing in the light of God’s book. And much of this has been performed through the instrumentality of Bible societies; and not only through the agency of the church, but political men, men of the world, the great men, merchants of the earth, and those who trade in ships, all who live under the influence of the gospel,—the ‘kingdom of Heaven,’—have engaged in the work. Will not the most skeptical acknowledge that this society has succeeded beyond the most sanguine expectation of its most ardent advocates? And is not this strong circumstantial evidence that the Bridegroom is near, even at the door?

“‘3d. The missionary societies, of all sects and denominations, which have been established within forty years, have as far exceeded all former exertions of this kind as the overflowing Nile does the waters of the brook Kidron. See the missionary spirit extending from east to west, and from north to south, warming the breast of the philanthropist, giving life and vigor to the cold-hearted moralist, and animating and enlivening the social circle of the pious devotee. Every nation from India to Oregon, from Kamtschatka to New Zealand, has been visited by these wise servants (as we hope) of the cross, proclaiming the acceptable year of the Lord, and the day of vengeance of our God, carrying the lamp, the word of God, in their hands, and oil, faith in God, in their hearts. All classes of men are engaged in this cause, from the gray hairs of old age down to the sprightly youth of ten years. Who, then, can doubt but that the virgins, in this sense, have and are trimming their lamps, and the bride is making herself ready? Go ye out to meet him.

“‘4th. The Sabbath-schools and Bible-classes are but a part of the fulfillment of the parable, yet clearly an evidence that the virgins are now trimming their lamps. This system of teaching the young and ignorant took its rise between forty and fifty years since, at the very time that the Christian world were praying, and ardently praying, for the coming of Christ, before that part of the Saviour’s prayer was forgotten, “Thy kingdom come.” From a little fountain this stream of water has become a great river, and encompassed the whole land. Every quarter of the globe is drinking at this fountain or stream of knowledge, and the youth are taught to trim their lamps. And when the Bridegroom shall come, may we not reasonably hope that the thousands of the young men and young women, who have assisted in giving light to others, may be found having oil in their vessels, and their lamps trimmed and burning, and they looking and waiting for the coming of their Master, that when he comes they may rise to meet him in the air, with ten thousand of their pupils, who will sing the new song in the New Jerusalem forever and ever? Search diligently, my young friends, and see to it that ye believe in this word, which is able to make you wise unto salvation.

“‘5th. Tract societies are of much use, and are an efficient means to help to trim the lamps. Like snuffers that take away the preventives to the light, so are tracts. They take away from the mind the prejudice that thousands have against reading the word of God; they remove those rooted and groundless opinions, which many have, that they cannot understand the Bible; they serve to excite the mind to this kind of reading; they enlighten the understanding in some scriptural truths; they are pioneers, in many instances, to conversion; they can be sent where the word of God cannot at first be received; in one word, they are the harbingers of light, the forerunners of the Bible. And in this, too, all men in this probationary state seem to be more or less engaged, from the king on the throne, down to the poor peasant in the cottage, writing, printing, folding, transporting, paying, or reading, those silent little messengers of the virgins’ lamp. ‘Then all those virgins arose and trimmed their lamps.’ Has not God’s hand been seen in all this? And glory be to Him who hath disposed the hearts of men to work the work that God bids them, and to fulfill the blessed word which he hath given them. This institution took its rise about the same time with the Bible society.

“‘6th. Temperance societies. These serve one purpose in trimming the lamps and preparing the way for the virgins to go out and meet the Bridegroom. Our world, twenty years ago, might be called a world of fashionable drunkards; almost all men drank of the intoxicating bowl, and thought it no harm. But when the lamp began to dart its rays around our tabernacles, it was found by woful experience that those who drank of the poisonous cup were totally and wholly unprepared to receive the warning voice, or to hear the midnight cry, “Behold, the Bridegroom cometh!” No, “they that were drunken were drunken in the night,” says the apostle. “Therefore let us watch and be sober.” And Peter tells us, “But the end of all things is at hand; be ye therefore sober, and watch unto prayer.” How foolish would it have been for a drunken man to be set on a watch, or a praying man to be found drunk! Therefore, in order that men might be in a suitable frame of mind to receive instruction at the close of this dispensation, and be in a situation to listen to the midnight cry, God ordered the virgins, and they arose and trimmed their lamps; and in all human probability thousands, who would have met a drunkard’s grave if this society had not arose, are now watching, with their lamps trimmed and burning, ready to meet the Bridegroom at his coming. Perhaps this temperance society is the virgins’ last resort. The Judge stands at the door; go ye out to meet him. This society, like the others before mentioned, is a general thing, and all sects, denominations, and classes of men, are engaged in it, and it has an important influence upon all men who are in this probationary state, and who may be termed, as in our text, “virgins.” This society is of later origin than the others, and seems to be a rear-guard to wake up a few stragglers which the other societies could not reach. And now, drunkards, is your time; Wisdom stands at the door and knocks; let go the intoxicating bowl; be sober, and hear the midnight cry, “Behold, the Bridegroom cometh!” For your souls’ sake drink not another draught, lest he come and find you drunken, “and that day come upon you unawares and find you sleeping.” Oh, be wise, ye intemperate men! for they only went into the marriage who were found ready, “and the door was shut.” “Then came also the other virgins, saying, Lord, Lord, open to us. But he answered and said, Verily, I say unto you, I know you not. Watch, therefore, for ye neither know the day nor the hour when the Son of man cometh.” “But the wise shall understand,” says Daniel, 12:10.

“‘And now, my Christian friends, let me inquire, Are your lamps trimmed and burning? And have you oil in your vessels? And are you prepared for the coming Bridegroom? And are you awake to this important subject? What say you? If this parable, to which I have directed your minds, has reference to the last day and the coming of Christ; if the “virgins” have reference to all men in the probationary state, and dividing them into two classes, wise and foolish; if the “lamp” is the word of God, and “oil” means faith in his word, or grace in the heart, as some say, then my conclusions are just, and the evidence is strong that we live at the end of the gospel kingdom, and upon the threshold of the glorified state of the righteous. Then examine your Bibles, and if you can more fairly prove any other exposition of this parable than I have this, then believe yours, and time must settle the issue; but if you can find nothing in the Scriptures to controvert plainly my explanation, then believe, and prepare to meet the Bridegroom; for, behold, he cometh. Awake! ye fathers and mothers in Zion! ye have long looked and prayed for this day. Behold the signs! He is near, even at the door. And, ye children of God, lift up your heads and rejoice, for your redemption draweth nigh. For these things have begun to come to pass. And, ye little lambs of the flock, remember, Jesus has promised to carry you in his arms, and that he will come and take you to himself, that where he is there ye may be also. But remember, all of you, the wise had oil in their lamps, and they were trimmed and burning. Search deep; examine yourselves closely; be not deceived; and may the Spirit, which searcheth all things, and knoweth what is in the mind of man, assist you.

“‘But, my impenitent friends, what shall I say to you? Shall I say, as the Master in the parable, “Behold, the Bridegroom cometh: go ye out to meet him”? Prepare to meet your Judge. Now he has given you a time for repentance; you have a probationary season, and possibly now the scepter of mercy is held out to you. Repent, or it will soon be said to you, as Jeremiah said to the virgin, the daughter of Egypt, “In vain shalt thou use many medicines; for thou shalt not be cured;” or, as in the parable, “I know you not.” Have you no oil in your lamps? Delay not a moment; believe the gospel, and you will live; believe the word of God; receive the love of the Bridegroom, and make no delay; for while they went to buy, the Bridegroom came; and they that were ready went in with him to the marriage, and the door was shut. Oh, think what must be the exercise of your minds when these things shall be real; when you will stand without and knock, saying, “Lord, Lord, open to us!” Again I ask, Will you repent, believe, and be saved? Are you determined to resist the truth until it is too late? Say, sinner, what think ye?

“‘We will risk the consequence. We do not believe in your day you tell us of. The world is the same it always was,—no change, nor ever will be; but if it should come, it will not this ten thousand years,—not in our day, certainly. You do not believe yourself. If you did, we should call you a fool.’

“‘Are these your arguments, sinner?’

“‘Yes.’

“‘Well, if I had brought no more, no stronger arguments than these, I would not blame you for not believing, for not one of yours can you or have you supported with a particle of proof. They are mere assertions; your believing or not believing will not alter the designs of God. The antediluvians believed not. The citizens of the plain laughed at the folly of Lot. And where are they now? Suffering the vengeance of eternal fire.’

CHAPTER XIII.

HIS SICKNESS—VISIT TO MASSACHUSETTS—FANATICISM—MR. MILLER REPUDIATES IT.

“At the close of his lectures in Philadelphia, Mr. Miller went to Trenton, N. J., to spend the Sabbath (February 12, 1843). By invitation of the mayor of that city, he lectured there three days, and was listened to by crowded houses.

“From Trenton he returned to New York city, but held no public meeting there. He improved the opportunity to visit a brother at Williamsburg, Long Island, where he had an interview with the editor of the Gazette and Advertiser, who thus referred to it:—

“‘Our curiosity was recently gratified by an introduction to this gentleman, who has probably been an object of more abuse, ridicule and blackguardism, than any other man now living. A large number of the veracious editors of the political and religious newspapers have assured us that Mr. Miller was totally insane, and sundry preachers had confirmed this assurance. We were somewhat surprised to hear him converse on religious subjects with a coolness and soundness of judgment which made us whisper to ourselves,

“If this be madness, then there is method in’t.”

“‘When our interview closed, we were left wondering at the cause of that malignant spirit of slander and falsehood with which a man has been assailed, who has spent his time and substance in a course of unceasing toils to persuade men “to flee from the wrath to come.”’

“From New York, Mr. M. went up the Hudson River as far as Lansingburg, N. Y., where he lectured from the 17th to the 21st of February. The day following, in compliance with the urgent request of the Baptist church in Half Moon, N. Y., he visited that place, and commenced a course of lectures, which continued till the 5th of March.

“At the request of Mr. Davis, pastor of the Presbyterian church in Ballston Center, Mr. M. next lectured in his house from the 6th to the 11th of March; and, on the 12th, gave two discourses at the Spa. As usual, a large number were present, and God’s blessing was manifested.

“On the 15th of March, he delivered two discourses at Rock City, in the town of Milton, N. Y., about six miles from Saratoga Springs. He had attempted to go as far as Albany, to fulfill an engagement there; but, after getting within fourteen miles of that city, he was obliged to return to Rock City, where he was taken sick with his old complaint, erysipelas, in his right arm. He remained at the house of Dea. Dubois, where he received the kindest attention, till the 23d of March. On that day he was removed to the house of Herman Thomas, in the same place. He was carefully provided for there till the 30th, when he was so far convalescent as to be removed by his son. By short and easy journeys he reached his home at Low Hampton on the 31st, as comfortably as could have been hoped for.

“On the 6th of April he commenced a letter to Mr. Himes, in which he says: ‘I am now at home; was brought home six days since. I am very weak in body, but, blessed be God! my mind, faith, and hope, are yet strong in the Lord,—no wavering in my belief that I shall see Christ this year,’ &c. This letter not being completed on the 13th of April, his son forwarded it to Mr. Himes, adding, ‘Father is quite low and feeble, and we fear he may be no better.’

“His complaint manifested itself in a multiplicity and succession of carbuncle boils, which were a great drain on his system, and wasted his strength rapidly. On the 3d of May, when their violence had greatly abated, he wrote: ‘My health is on the gain, as my folks would say. I have now only twenty-two boils, from the bigness of a grape to a walnut, on my shoulder, side, back, and arms. I am truly afflicted, like Job, and have about as many comforters, only they do not come to see me, as Job’s did.’ Two weeks later, he was again much more feeble, and his physicians prohibited visitors from seeing him.

“On the 28th of May, his son wrote: ‘Father’s health is no better, on the whole. He continues very weak and low, confined to his bed most of the time.’ In addition to his numerous boils, he had, by a fever, been brought near to death’s door.

“About the 1st of July he was so far recovered as to be able to walk about his house, and his health continued to improve, so that, from the 6th to the 9th of September, he gave a course of lectures in N. Springfield, Vt. He lectured in Claremont, N. H., on the 11th; in Springfield, N. H., on the 12th; in Wilmot, N. H., on the 14th; in Andover, N. H., on the 17th; in Franklin, N. H., on the 18th; in Guilford, N. H., from the 21st to the 24th; in Gilmanton, N. H., on the 25th; and at Concord, N. H., on the 26th and 27th. On the 2d of October he gave two addresses at the camp-meeting in Exeter, N. H., and arrived at Lowell, Mass., on the 3d. He went to Boston on the 6th, gave three discourses, and then returned home to Low Hampton, where he remained till the 9th of November.

“During this tour, Mr. Miller was much pained by witnessing a tendency to fanaticism on the part of some who held to his views. As he had no sympathy for anything of the kind, and has been unjustly identified with it in the minds of the public, it becomes necessary to show its origin, that its responsibility may rest where it rightly belongs.

“The views of Mr. Miller being embraced by persons belonging to various religious denominations, it was impossible, from the nature of the case, for those of any particular faith to teach their own private opinions in connection with the Advent, without exciting the jealousy of those who held opposite sentiments. To avoid any such clashing of opinions, the following platform was adopted by the first conference held by believers in the Advent (October 14, 1840), in their Address unanimously presented to the public, namely:—[24]

“‘Our object in assembling at this time, our object in addressing you, and our object in other efforts, separate and combined, on the subject of the kingdom of Heaven at hand, is to revive and restore this ancient faith, to renew the ancient landmarks, to “stand in the way, and see, and ask for the old paths, where is the good way” in which our fathers walked, and the martyrs “found rest to their souls.” We have no purpose to distract the churches with any new inventions, or to get ourselves a name by starting another sect among the followers of the Lamb. We neither condemn nor rudely assail others of a faith different from our own, nor dictate in matters of conscience for our brethren, nor seek to demolish their organizations, nor build new ones of our own; but simply to express our convictions, like Christians, with the reasons for entertaining them, which have persuaded us to understand the word and promises, the prophecies and the gospel of our Lord, as the first Christians, the primitive ages of the church, and the profoundly learned and intelligent reformers, have unanimously done in the faith and hope that the Lord will come quickly in his glory, to fulfill all his promises in the resurrection of the dead.

“‘We are agreed and harmonize with the published creed of the Episcopal, Dutch Reformed, Presbyterian, and Methodist churches, together with the Cambridge Platform of the Congregational church, and the Lutheran and the Roman Catholic churches, in maintaining that Christ’s second and only coming now will be to judge the world at the last day.

“‘We are not of those who sow discord among brethren, who withdraw from the fellowship of the churches, who rail at the office of the ministry, and triumph in the exposure of the errors of a secular and apostate church, and who count themselves holier than others, or wiser than their fellows. The gracious Lord has opened to us wondrous things in his word, whereof we are glad, and in view of which we rejoice with fear and trembling. We reverently bless his name, and we offer these things, with the right hand of our Christian fellowship and union, to all disciples of our common Lord, of every sect and denomination, praying them, by the love of the crucified Jesus, to regard the promise of his coming, and to cultivate the love of his appearing, and to sanctify themselves in view of his approaching with power and great glory; although they conscientiously differ from us in minor points of faith, or reject some of the peculiarities which exist in individuals of this Conference.

“‘We do not seek to excite the prejudices of our fellow-men, or to join with those who mock at sin, or who scoff at the word or promise of the great Jehovah, or who lightly esteem offices and ordinances of the church, or who empty of their power the threatenings of the holy law, or who count the blood of the atonement a useless thing, or who refuse to worship and honor the Son of God even as they honor the Father; nor do we refuse any of these, or others of divers faith, whether Roman or Protestant, who receive and heartily embrace the doctrine of the Lord’s coming in his kingdom.’

“It was thus unanimously agreed that the sectarian questions which divide Christians should be avoided in the presentation of the advent doctrine, and that ‘minor points of faith,’ and the ‘peculiarities’ in the belief of any, should not be made prominent, to impede their united labors.

“In the autumn of 1842, Mr. Miller’s views were embraced by John Starkweather, a graduate of the Andover Theological Seminary, and a minister of good standing in the Orthodox Congregational denomination. He had been a minister at the Marlboro’ chapel, in Boston, and at other places, and was regarded as a man of peculiar sanctity. He was at that time, unemployed by any people, and Elder Himes being obliged to spend much of his time in preaching in other places than Boston, Mr. Starkweather was called as an assistant pastor of his church, at the chapel in Chardon-street.

“Mr. Starkweather commenced his labors there in October, 1842. He was tall, well formed, and had a voice of great power and not unpleasant tones. His personal appearance was thus prepossessing, which, with his reputation for superior sanctity, enabled him easily to secure the confidence of his hearers, who nightly thronged the chapel.

“His principal theme was the necessity of a preparation for the Saviour’s coming. At such a time no subject seemingly could be more appropriate. But Mr. Starkweather had embraced peculiar views respecting personal sanctification; and, contrary to the understanding which had been had on the subject of sectarian views, he made his own notions not only a test of readiness for the Lord’s coming, but of Christian fellowship,—demanding the largest liberty for himself, and granting none to others. He taught that conversion, however full and thorough, did not fit one for God’s favor without a second work; and that this second work was usually indicated by some bodily sensation.

“During the winter, the losing of strength and other cataleptic and epileptic phenomena became manifested, and were hailed by him as evidences of the great power of God in the sanctification of those who were already devoted Christians. He denominated such ‘the sealing power.’

“Those who were familiar with the history of fanaticism in past ages, who had read with pain the termination of the career of the eloquent Edward Irving in England, who knew the devastation caused by fanaticism in the time of the Reformation, of its effects in the early ages of Christianity, and of the results produced by it even in many portions of our own country during the infancy of some of the sects among us, were at no loss respecting its character.

“It was at first supposed that Mr. Starkweather was an innocent cause of this, and that he was ignorant of his strong mesmeric powers, by which he had obtained a sympathetic influence over some of his hearers. He was reasoned with on the subject, but to no purpose. His mind was bent in a certain direction, and pursue his course he would. His actual spirit was not discovered until leading brethren publicly dissented from such exercises as any necessary part of Christianity. At this the uncaged lion was aroused, and it became evident what manner of spirit he was of.

“Near the close of April, 1843, it was deemed necessary to take a decided stand on the subject. A meeting had been appointed for the afternoon, and Mr. Himes, who had been absent during these occurrences, with judicious brethren determined to endeavor to stem the current of fanaticism which had commenced. In a calm and faithful manner, he gave them the history of various movements which had been destroyed or greatly injured by fanaticism; and, without intimating that evidences of such then existed, he exhorted them to learn from past experience, and see to it that they avoid the rocks on which others had been shipwrecked.

“Mr. Starkweather arose in reply, and was so vehement that Mr. Himes felt justified in again addressing the audience, exposing the nature of the exercises that had appeared among them, and their pernicious tendency.

“This so shocked the sensibilities of those who regarded them as the ‘great power of God,’ that they cried out and stopped their ears. Some jumped upon their feet, and some ran out of the house. ‘You will drive out the Holy Ghost!’ cried one. ‘You are throwing on cold water!’ said another.

“‘Throwing on cold water!’ said Mr. Himes; ‘I would throw on the Atlantic Ocean before I would be identified with such abominations as these, or suffer them in this place unrebuked.’

“Starkweather immediately announced that ‘the saints’ would thenceforth meet at another place than the Chardon-street chapel; and, retiring, his followers withdrew with him.

“From this time he was the leader of a party, held separate meetings, and, by extending his visits to other places, he gained a number of adherents. He was not countenanced by the friends of Mr. Miller; but the public identified him and his movement with Mr. Miller and his.

“This was most unjust to Mr. Miller; but to this day the Romanists identify, in the same manner the fanaticism consequent on the Reformation, with Luther and those who repudiated the doings of Munzer, Storch and others.

“While Starkweather was thus repudiated, he persisted in forcing himself, wherever he could, upon the public, as a religious teacher and lecturer on the Advent.

“On the 9th of August, 1843, a camp-meeting commenced at Plainfield, Ct., at which Starkweather was, and some manifestations were exhibited which were entirely new to those present, and for which they could not account. Another meeting was held at Stepney, near Bridgeport, on the 28th of the same month, where the developments were more marked. A few young men, professing to have the gift of discerning spirits, were hurried into great extravagances. Elder J. Litch published a protest against such exhibitions, in which he said:—

“‘A more disgraceful scene, under the garb of piety, I have rarely witnessed. For the last ten years I have come in contact nearly every year, more or less, with the same spirit, and have marked its developments, its beginning, and its result; and am now prepared to say that it is evil, and only evil, and that continually. I have uniformly opposed it wherever it has made its appearance, and as uniformly have been denounced as being opposed to the power of God, and as resisting the operations of the Spirit. The origin of it, is the idea that the individuals thus exercised are entirely under the influence of the Spirit of God, are his children, and that he will not deceive them and lead them astray; hence every impulse which comes upon them is yielded to as coming from God, and, following it, there is no length of fanaticism to which they will not go.’”—Midnight Cry, Sept. 14, 1843.

“During Mr. Miller’s confinement by his sickness, he had not come in contact with any of these things; but, on his last tour into Massachusetts, he had seen something of it, and took the earliest opportunity to do his duty respecting it, by a prompt disclaimer. Before reaching home, he stopped a day at Castleton, Vt., and wrote the following letter, which was published in the Signs of the Times of November 8, 1843:—

“‘Dear Brother: My heart was deeply pained, during my tour east, to see in some few of my former friends a proneness to wild and foolish extremes and vain delusions, such as working miracles, discerning of spirits, vague and loose views on sanctification, &c.

“‘As it respects the working of miracles, I have no faith in those who pretend beforehand that they can work miracles. See Rev. 13:13, 14: “And he doeth great wonders, so that he maketh fire come down from heaven on the earth in the sight of men, and deceiveth them that dwell on the earth by the means of those miracles which he had power to do in the sight of the beast.” Whenever God has seen fit to work miracles, the instruments have seemingly been unconscious of having the power, until the work was done. They have, in no instance that I recollect, proclaimed as with a trumpet that they could or would work a miracle. Moses and the apostles were more modest than these modern pretenders to this power. You may depend upon it, whosoever claims the power has the spirit of Antichrist. Rev. 16:14: “For they are the spirits of devils, working miracles, which go forth unto the kings of the earth, and of the whole world, to gather them to the battle of that great day of God Almighty.”

“‘I know they pretend to prove that men are to have this power unto the end of the world, by Mark 16:17. But take the whole passage together, and what does it prove? Not that all believers can do these miracles, but that these miracles would follow those who believe; that is, those who believed in the record that God had given would, in the apostolic age, have a confirmation of the truth of that word by those miracles, which would follow them.[25] The word would be thus confirmed by miracles, performed by prophets and apostles, who were inspired to write the Old and New Testaments. I see no reason for the working of miracles in this age; “for if they believe not Moses and the prophets, neither would they believe though one should arise from the dead.” Since the apostles’ day, none have worked miracles but the anti-Christian beast.

“‘The discerning of spirits is, I fear, another fanatical movement to draw off Adventists from the truth, and to lead men to depend on the feeling, exercise, and conceit of their own mind, more than on the word of God. It builds up a spirit of pride and self-righteousness, and thus loses sight of the humbling doctrine, to account others better than ourselves. If all Christians were to possess this gift, how should we live by faith? Each would stand upon the spiritual gifts of his brother, and, if possessed of the true Spirit of God, could never err. Surely the devil has great power over the minds of some at the present day. And how shall we know what manner of spirit they are of? The Bible answers: “By their fruits ye shall know them.” Then it is not by the spirit.

“‘I think those who claim this power will soon manifest, by their fruits, that they have another rule than the Bible. I have observed that those persons who think that they have been baptized by the Holy Ghost, as they term it, become more sensitive of themselves, and very jealous for their own glory; less patient, and full of the denunciatory spirit against others who are not so fortunate as themselves. There are many spirits gone out into the world; and we are commanded to try the spirits. The spirit that does not cause us to live soberly, righteously, and godly, in this present world, is not the spirit of Christ. I am more and more convinced that Satan has much to do in these wild movements. He has come down, having great wrath, knowing he hath but a short time; and he will, if possible, deceive the very elect.

“‘On sanctification I have but little at present to say. Sanctification has two prominent meanings in Scripture: setting apart for holy purposes; and being cleansed from all sin and pollution. Every soul converted to God is sanctified in the first sense. He devotes himself to God, to love, serve, and obey him forever. Every one who obtains complete redemption, body, soul, and spirit, is sanctified in the second sense. The first kind is, or ought to be, now enjoyed by every true believer in Christ. The other will never be accomplished till the resurrection of the just, when these vile bodies shall be changed. We are sanctified, in the first sense, through faith and a knowledge of the truth; and, in my opinion, are not perfect until we are perfect in faith and knowledge of the word of God. Yet many among us, who pretend to be wholly sanctified, are following the traditions of men, and apparently are as ignorant of truth as others who make no such pretensions, and are not half so modest. I must confess that they have to me an appearance of boasting.

“‘I would not judge harshly; but I cannot see any reason to believe them any more holy than many others who make no such claims. I would say nothing to prevent any man or woman from living holy. This is what we are all seeking after, and what I expect to attain, when Christ shall come and blot out my sins, according to his promise. Acts 3:19. I think those with whom I have conversed, who pretend to have obtained this grace, instead of enjoying more than others, labor, in their arguments, to lower down the standard of holiness to their present capacity. Instead of looking for a blessed hope at the appearing of Jesus Christ, who shall change our vile bodies, and raise our capacity to enjoy and adore him forever, in an infinitely higher state of perfection, they think they are actually enjoying all the promises now, and are not in need of any further work of grace to give them a right to the eternal inheritance of the saints.

“‘If this be so, and we are truly perfect, sanctified, and prepared for our possession in Heaven, then every moment we are debarred our right of entering and taking possession of our inheritance would be an illegal withholding of us from our just rights of participating in the enjoyment of the will of our blessed Master. But it is not so. We are minors, and subjects of chastisements. Prov. 3:11, 12: “My son, despise not the chastening of the Lord, neither be weary of his correction; for whom the Lord loveth he correcteth; even as a father the son in whom he delighteth.” Heb. 12:5-9: “And ye have forgotten the exhortation which speaketh unto you as unto children, My son, despise not thou the chastening of the Lord, nor faint when thou art rebuked of him; for whom the Lord loveth he chasteneth, and scourgeth every son whom he receiveth. If ye endure chastening, God dealeth with you as with sons; for what son is he whom the father chasteneth not? But if ye be without chastisement, whereof all are partakers, then are ye bastards, and not sons. Furthermore, we have had fathers of our flesh which corrected us, and we gave them reverence; shall we not much rather be subject to the Father of spirits, and live?”

“‘Therefore, let us all be modest, unassuming, and godlike, pressing on to the mark. Let us not, therefore, judge one another any more. Rom. 14:13: “But judge this rather, that no man put a stumbling-block or an occasion to fall in his brother’s way.” 1 Cor. 8:9-13: “But take heed lest by any means this liberty of yours become a stumbling-block to them that are weak. For if any man see thee, which hast knowledge, sit at meat in the idol’s temple, shall not the conscience of him that is weak be emboldened to eat those things which are offered to idols; and through thy knowledge shall the weak brother perish, for whom Christ died? But when ye sin so against the brethren, and wound their weak conscience, ye sin against Christ. Wherefore, if meat make my brother to offend, I will eat no flesh while the world standeth, lest I make my brother to offend. If my brother is truly perfect in every good work, he will bear with me and my weakness.” Rom. 15:1: “We, then, that are strong ought to bear the infirmities of the weak, and not to please ourselves.” 1 Cor. 9:22: “To the weak became I as weak, that I might gain the weak: I am made all things to all men, that I might by all means save some.”

“‘I have not written this to condemn my “perfect” brother, or to call out a reply. He may call one thing perfect sanctification, and I another. If he is “perfect” and strong, he can bear my weakness. If he wants contention, it will show that he is not perfect, but contentious. I beg of my brother to let me follow on to know the Lord; and God forbid that I should call him back. I hope he will not boastingly exclude me from the path he would tread. May God sanctify and prepare us for his own use, and deliver us from the wrath to come.

“‘Yours, in the blessed hope,

Wm. Miller.

“‘Castleton, Vt., Oct. 12, 1843.’

“Not only Mr. Miller, but all who were in his confidence, took a decided position against all fanatical extravagances. They never gave them any quarter; while those who regarded them with favor soon arrayed themselves against Mr. Miller and his adherents. Their fanaticism increased; and though opposed by Mr. Miller and his friends, the religious and secular press very generally, but unjustly, connected his name with it;—he being no more responsible for it than Luther and Wesley were for similar manifestations in their day.

CHAPTER XIV.

HOME OF MR. MILLER—TOUR INTO WESTERN NEW YORK—HIS PERSONAL APPEARANCE—ADDRESS TO ALL DENOMINATIONS—VISIT TO WASHINGTON, ETC.

“In the interval between Mr. Miller’s return from Boston to his home at Low Hampton and the recommencement of his public labors, he was visited by his dearly beloved friend, the late Elder Nathaniel Southard, who wrote as follows of

“‘THE HOME OF WILLIAM MILLER.

“‘It was Saturday forenoon when we passed over the rough road, and stopped at a one-storied house, where a post-office is kept. It is the residence of William S., oldest son of Bro. Miller, P. M., at the office, which, for distinction, is called Low Hampton. He was not at home; but one of his little daughters told us the residence of her grandfather was in sight on the hill. Without waiting for her to point it out, I easily recognized it—from previous description—among the good-looking farm-houses in sight. It was not the largest or handsomest. The back part of it only, which is painted red, could be seen. It is two stories high. The northern front and ends are painted white. On the way we passed the small, plain meeting-house of the Baptist church to which Bro. M. belongs.

“‘At the gate of his hospitable mansion we met a young man in a wagon, with crutches by his side, whose round, open countenance showed him to be a son of William Miller. He gave us a cordial invitation to enter. Three visitors were already in the house, to whom myself, wife and child, being added, made a number which we feared would be burdensome. We soon found ourselves perfectly at home, though we had never before seen one of the family but its venerable head.

“‘The next day other visitors arrived, one of whom was a lady from Iowa, and three from Vergennes. The day was very stormy. We went to the place of worship, and found a congregation consisting of fewer persons than we left at the house. The preacher, Bro. Increase Jones, gave a plain, practical sermon on the text, “The end of all things is at hand; be ye therefore sober, and watch unto prayer.” In the afternoon we opened the Scriptures, and tried to pursue the apostolic method in speaking of Jesus and the resurrection.

“‘On our way from the meeting, after referring to the number of guests, we asked Robbins if they usually had as much company.

“‘Pretty nigh,’ said he; ‘I wish I had kept count of the number of visitors for the last six months.’

“‘Did they come in such numbers when Bro. Miller was sick?’ we inquired.

“‘It seemed to make but little difference,’ he replied.

“‘We just then passed by the open carriage gate into the spacious inclosure at the west end of the house.

“‘It seemed to be the hardest task,’ he proceeded, ‘to make friends understand that it was not friendly to visit a sick man in such numbers. I have had to stand here and keep people out of the house, and sometimes there were six asking admission at once.’

“‘As it was, I have no doubt company added weeks to his sickness, and dollars to the doctor’s bill. I afterward learned that the expenses of his sickness were one hundred dollars.

“‘Let us try to get a glimpse at his wealth and resources. Twelve years ago he was the owner of about two hundred acres of land, less than half of which was capable of cultivation, yielding a liberal return to hard labor. No one, who knows with what energy, diligence, and firmness, Bro. Miller has prosecuted the labors he seems to have been raised up to perform, will need to be told that he is a man of industrious, temperate, frugal habits. Such a man in such a place, with a help meet for him, could not be poor and thriftless. Twenty-five years ago he built his house. Other buildings were erected as they became necessary, but none within the last dozen years, except a bee-house, and small, plain shed, or boiling-house, where food is prepared for his hogs.

“‘He showed me his home farm, consisting of ninety-six acres, lying wholly on the south side of the road. There is some common wall upon it; but the moss-grown, weather-beaten stones unanimously contradict the foolish and malicious lies which have been told about its recent origin. He also owns a rough tract of fifty acres, north of the road, and twenty acres of interval a little distance to the east. When he let out his farm to his son, he sold him $500 worth of stock, and has since sold seventy acres of land to his son-in-law. What he has thus realized, and $100 yearly for the use of his farm, have enabled him to meet the expenses of traveling, printing, and giving away books, company, sickness, &c.

“‘He has brought up eight children, two others having died in early life. His whole family, like Job’s, originally consisted of seven sons and three daughters. Four of them are now in the house with him, and two sons are at the West. As a specimen of the fertility of his farm, he showed us a potato weighing two pounds and seven ounces.

“‘While contemplating this lovely family, and their plain but comfortable dwelling-place, equally free from the marks of wasteful neglect or extravagant expenditure, I saw, as never I saw before, the folly and malignity of those falsehoods which have been so industriously told about them. Look at them.

“‘A diligent student of the Bible tells us he finds prophetic periods reaching down to the resurrection and the second coming of Christ.

“‘Nonsense!’ cries one, who must stand at the Judgment seat of Christ; ‘Mr. Miller is a man of property, and he holds on to it.’

“‘But won’t you please to look in the Bible, and see the evidence that these periods are just running out?’

“‘Humbug!’ says another, who must give an account for the manner in which he treats that message from Heaven; ‘Mr. Miller is building a solid brick wall round his farm.’

“‘But will you not consider and discern the signs of the times, which show that the kingdom of Heaven is nigh, even at the doors?’

“‘It is all a money-making scheme,’ says a third, who must soon give up his stewardship; ‘Mr. Miller is putting up some large buildings in New Haven, and he has a barrel of jewels in his house, which have been given him where he has preached.’

“‘The amazing stupidity of these fictions almost hides from view the malice which invented them. But when we look at his wife and daughter, to whom a husband and father’s reputation is as the apple of the eye, we begin to feel them as a personal injury, though they are nothing, in this view, in comparison with the public mischief they occasion.

“‘Bro. Miller’s faith remains unwavering. He said he should be happy if he felt as sure of Heaven as he did that he had the truth on the prophecies of Daniel.

“‘His eyesight is improved since his sickness, so that he now uses spectacles which he had laid aside as being too young several years ago. He reads the small Polyglot Bible with the greatest ease. He is a diligent reader of Second Advent papers. After he has received one he seldom lays it aside till he has become acquainted with all its contents. The rest of his reading is nearly confined to the Scriptures. He is able to write freely, and it requires no small share of his time to attend to the numerous letters he receives.

“‘He starts early next week (Providence permitting) on his way to Rochester, Lockport, and Buffalo, N. Y. It will be necessary for one of his sons to accompany him, as he is not strong enough to travel alone.

“‘We were interested in seeing his old family Bible, which cost $18.50, and his quarto copy of Cruden’s Concordance, which was originally purchased, in 1798, for $8. These two books were almost the only ones he looked at while preparing his lectures. A clergyman once called at his house in his absence, and, being disappointed in not seeing him, wished the privilege of looking at his library. His daughter conducted the visitor into the north-east room, where he has sat so many hours at his ancient desk. Those two books, and no others, lay upon the table. “That is his library,” said she. The clergyman was amazed. Her remark was strictly true, as far as theological writings were concerned. He never had a commentary in his house, and did not remember reading any work upon the prophecies, except Newton and Faber, about thirty years ago.

“‘When we spoke to him about the stories in relation to his property in New Haven, he pleasantly remarked that those who believed them could easily satisfy themselves; for he had sold to Bro. McDonald, of Williamsburg, near New York city, all his property, real or personal, out of Low Hampton, for five dollars, and the purchaser had offered to give half of it to any one who would find any.

“‘Monday afternoon we reluctantly took leave of this peaceful spot, which had been our pleasant home for two days, rejoicing that calumny could there find no truthful basis on which to found its reckless and cruel assertions.

“‘N. Southard.

“‘Carleton, Vt., October 23, 1843.’

“In company with his wife and son George, Mr. Miller started for Rochester, N. Y., on the 9th of November. On his passage down the canal from Whitehall, by request of the passengers on the boat, he spoke to an attentive audience from Titus 2:13.

“From the 12th to the 19th of November, he gave his first course of lectures in the city of Rochester, speaking to full houses on the afternoon and evening of each day. The ground had been previously prepared for him by a course of lectures in June, delivered by Mr. Himes and others, in connection with the ‘great tent.’

“Mr. Himes had commenced a paper there called the Glad Tidings, and published thirteen numbers of it, which were extensively circulated; and the late Elder Thomas F. Barry, a devoted brother, had remained in that field during the summer. By those instrumentalities quite an interest had been created, and the labors of Mr. Miller there were abundantly blessed.

“Receiving a pressing invitation from Rev. Elon Galusha, pastor of the Baptist church, and sixty-eight others, in Lockport, N. Y., to visit that place, he lectured there from the 21st to 30th of November. The salvation of some souls and a general expression of interest in the subject of his discourses, were the result of his labors.

“From the 2d to the 10th of December he lectured in Buffalo, N. Y., in the theater, to a house full of attentive hearers. Writing from that place, on the 4th, he says: ‘Yesterday I saw the tears of some in the congregation, who, I am informed, were old, hardened infidels.’

“In compliance with an invitation from Rev. A. Claghorn, pastor of the Baptist church, and twenty-three others, he next lectured in Lewiston, N. Y., from the 11th to the 17th of December. There were many hearers present from Canada, as well as from the American side of the line, who gave him a respectful hearing. Writing respecting this place, Mr. M. says:—

“‘I was here, as at Rochester and Lockport, challenged to a public debate by a Universalist. I will not contend with them. It would be an admission that they might be right, which I cannot for a moment believe. Michael would not contend with the devil. Why? Because he would not admit he could be right. Was he afraid of the devil? No. But he said, “The Lord rebuke thee, Satan!” And so say I to his ministers.’

“Being invited to visit Penfield, N. Y., by Rev. David Bernard and the unanimous vote of his church, he lectured in the Baptist meeting-house there, from the 20th to the 27th of December. Some souls professed conversion, and the pastor and a number of his people avowed their faith in the near coming of Christ.

“Mr. Miller returned to Rochester on the 29th of December, continued there a few days, gave five discourses, and on the 3d of January, 1844, he left for home by the way of Troy. After reaching Low Hampton, he wrote:—

“‘On Saturday, January 6, I arrived home, having been absent about eight weeks, and given eighty-five lectures. I have seen a number of infidels converted to God; and more than one hundred have obtained a hope where I have been.’

“On the 28th of January he again visited Boston, and gave a course of lectures in the Howard-street Tabernacle. This was his ninth visit to Boston, and his seventh regular course of lectures there. On no previous occasion had such crowds been present to hear as were then assembled in that capacious building. On the Sabbath (January 28), all day and evening, the seats and aisles were filled with as many as could find a place to sit or stand. Many of the young with the middle-aged, and even men with gray hairs, stood and listened to the story of the coming One, with the evidences of his near approach. Had the Tabernacle been twice its size, it would hardly have held the multitude who sought admittance. The interest continued during his entire course of lectures, which closed on the 4th of February.

“On the 5th of February, in company with Mr. Himes, he left for New York city; but the weather was inclement, the boat was delayed in the Sound all the next day by ice, and the passage was uncommonly tedious. Mr. Fowler, the phrenologist, being one of the passengers, to while away the time, gave, by request, a lecture on his science. After the lecture he was blindfolded, and in that state examined quite a number of heads. At the request of the company, Mr. Miller’s head was examined. All were eager to hear the opinion of the lecturer. Among other things he said:—

“‘This man has large benevolence. His object is to do his fellow-beings good. He has great firmness—is a modest man, open, frank, no hypocrite, good at figures, a man of great mental power, might make a noise in the world, has no personal enemies; if he has enemies, it is not because they know him, but on account of his opinions.’

“At the close of the examination his blindfold was removed, and he was introduced to Mr. Miller, to the no small amusement of the company.

“They arrived in New York on the evening of the 6th of February, 1844, and found a conference assembled in Franklin Hall. Mr. Miller gave two discourses there on the 7th; when, finding the place too small, they adjourned to the Broadway Tabernacle, where he lectured in the afternoon and evening of the 8th and 9th of February, to crowded assemblies. It was estimated that not less than five thousand persons were present. The audiences were solemn and attentive.

“On the 10th of February they went to Philadelphia, and on the 11th Mr. M. commenced a course of lectures in the saloon of the Chinese Museum, closing on the 18th. That immense hall was filled to overflowing.

“While laboring here, a friend gave the following description of Mr. Miller’s personal appearance:—

“‘There is a kindness of soul, simplicity, and power, peculiarly original, combined in his manner; and he is affable and attentive to all, without any affectation of superiority. He is of about medium stature, a little corpulent, and, in temperament, a mixture of sanguine and nervous. His intellectual developments are unusually full, and we see in his head great benevolence and firmness, united with a lack of self-esteem. He is wanting in marvelousness, and is naturally skeptical. His countenance is full and round, while there is a peculiar expression in his blue eye, of shrewdness and love. Although about sixty-two years of age, his hair is not gray, but of a light, glossy auburn; his voice is full and distinct, and his pronunciation somewhat northern-antique. In his social relations, he is gentle and affectionate, and insures the esteem of all with whom he mingles. In giving this charcoal sketch to the public, I have merely sought to correct numerous misstatements, and gratify the honest desire of many distant believers with a faint outline of the character and appearance of the man.’

“While drawing crowded houses of intelligent and attentive hearers, his name was seldom mentioned in the religious press, except by way of ridicule or denunciation; and many churches, particularly those of his own denomination, were taking disciplinary steps with those who had embraced his views. This called forth from him the following

“‘ADDRESS TO BELIEVERS IN CHRIST OF ALL DENOMINATIONS.

“‘Dear Brethren: We would ask, in the name of our dear Master, Jesus Christ, by all that is holy, by the fellowship of the saints, and the love of the truth, why you cast us off as if we were heretics? What have we believed, that we have not been commanded to believe by the word of God, which you yourselves allow is the rule and only rule of our faith and practice? What have we done that should call down such virulent denunciations against us from pulpit and press, and give you just cause to exclude us (Adventists) from your churches and fellowship? In the name of all that is dear, all that is holy and good, we call upon some of you to come out and tell us wherein our great sin lies. Have we denied the faith once delivered to the saints? Tell us, we pray you, or, wherein is our fault? If there is an honest man among you, of which we cannot doubt, we shall expect to see your reasons publicly and honestly avowed; and if we are guilty of heresy or crime, let the Christian community know it, that we may be shunned by all who know and love the truth.

“‘Is it heterodox to believe that Jesus Christ will come again to this earth, to receive his saints to himself, and to reward all men as their work shall be? If so, then our fathers, and our ministers, our creeds, and our Bibles, have taught us heresy; and from our infancy we have misunderstood our teachers, and misapplied our Bible. Do tell us what mean a class of texts like these? John 14:3: “And if I go and prepare a place for you, I will come again and receive you unto myself; that where I am there ye may be also.” Acts 1:11: “Which also said, Ye men of Galilee, why stand ye gazing up into heaven? This same Jesus which is taken up from you into heaven, shall so come in like manner as ye have seen him go into heaven.” 1 Pet. 1:7 and 13: “That the trial of our faith, being much more precious than of gold that perisheth, though it may be tried with fire, might be found unto praise, and honor, and glory, at the appearing of Jesus Christ. Wherefore, gird up the loins of your mind, be sober, and hope to the end for the grace that is to be brought unto you at the revelation of Jesus Christ.” Rev. 1:7: “Behold, he cometh with clouds; and every eye shall see him, and they also which pierced him; and all kindreds of the earth shall wail because of him.”

“‘Does our crime consist in looking for him and loving his appearing? This, too, we charge upon our fathers and teachers; we have heard, ever since we had consciousness, as our duty explained and enforced, to watch and look, to love and be prepared for his return, that when he comes we may enter into the marriage supper of the Lamb. We also have Christ and the apostles for our example in so doing. Witness Matt. 24:44; 25:13; Mark 13:34-37; Phil. 3:20, 21; 2 Tim. 4:8; Titus 2:13; 2 Pet. 3:12; Rev. 14:15.

“‘Or are we to be severed from our brethren because we believe the prophecies of the Old and New Testaments to be the true prophecies of God; or because that we think we can understand them, and see in the history of our world their fulfillment? Are we to be cut off from our connection with your churches because we believe as your ministers have told us we ought to for ages past? Acts 24:14: “But this I confess unto you, that after the way which they call heresy, so worship I the God of my fathers, believing all things which are written in the law and in the prophets.” 26:22: “Having therefore obtained help of God, I continue unto this day, witnessing both to small and great, saying none other things than those which the prophets and Moses did say should come. King Agrippa, believest thou the prophets?” 1 Tim. 4:14: “That thou keep this commandment without spot, unrebukable, until the appearance of our Lord Jesus Christ.” Rev. 1:4: “Blessed is he that readeth, and they that hear the words of this prophecy, and keep those things which are written therein; for the time is at hand.”

“‘Again, let me inquire: Are we treated as heretics because we believe Christ will come this year? Are we not all commanded to watch? Mark 13:37: “And what I say unto you, I say unto all, Watch.” And I would ask, Is it not our duty to watch this year? If so, will you tell us how a man can watch, and not expect the object for which he watches? If this is the crime, we plead guilty to the charge, and throw ourselves upon the word of God, and the example of our fathers, to justify us in so doing. Eccl. 8:5, 6: “Whoso keepeth the commandments shall feel no evil thing; and a wise man’s heart discerneth both time and judgment; because to every purpose there is time and judgment.” Dan. 12:6, 7: “And one said to the man clothed in linen, which was upon the waters of the river, How long shall it be to the end of these wonders? And I heard the man clothed in linen which was upon the waters of the river, when he held up his right hand and his left hand unto heaven, and sware by him that liveth forever, that it shall be for a time, times and a half; and when he shall have accomplished to scatter the power of the holy people, all these things shall be finished.” 1 Pet. 1:9, 13: “Receiving the end of your faith, even the salvation of your souls. Of which salvation the prophets have inquired and searched diligently, who prophesied of the grace that should come unto you; searching what, or what manner of time, the Spirit of Christ which was in them did signify, when it testified beforehand the sufferings of Christ, and the glory that should follow. Unto whom it was revealed, that not unto themselves, but unto us they did minister the things which are now reported unto you, with the Holy Ghost sent down from Heaven; which things the angels desire to look into. Wherefore, gird up the loins of your mind, be sober, and hope to the end for the grace that is to be brought unto you at the revelation of Jesus Christ.”

“‘Now, if we are wrong, pray show us wherein consists our wrong. Show us from the word of God that we are in error; we have had ridicule enough; that can never convince us that we are in the wrong; the word of God alone can change our views. Our conclusions have been formed deliberately and prayerfully, as we have seen the evidence in the Scriptures; and all reasoning against our views has only served to confirm us in them.

“‘Or, are you ready to say that our crime consists in examining the Bible for ourselves? We have inquired “Watchman, what of the night?” We have besought and entreated them to give us any signs of the coming morning, and have waited patiently for an answer; but have waited in vain; have been turned off with some German or French philosophy, or had the book closed in our face, and been insulted for our deep anxiety. We have, therefore, been obliged to study for ourselves; and if we are to be cut off for honestly believing in the exactness of prophetic time, then Scott and Wesley, and the Newtons, and Mede, Gill, and others, should all be excommunicated for the like offense. We, therefore, once more call upon you to show us our errors; and until this is done, we must continue to believe the Lord will come in this Jewish year.

“‘Wm. Miller.’

“On the 17th of February, Messrs. Miller, Himes, and Elder Josiah Litch, left Philadelphia for Washington city, which they reached on the 20th. On the evening of that day they held their first meeting in the Baptist house, near the Navy-yard. It became so thronged that, on the 26th, they removed to the Apollo Hall, near the President’s mansion, where they continued till the 2d of March.

“During these lectures, on the 28th of February, the ‘Peacemaker,’ on board of the ‘Princeton,’ exploded, killing Colonel Gardiner and Mr. Upshur, the United States Secretary of State, and wounding others. That event added interest and solemnity to the lectures, and caused them to be more fully attended. There were present at the lectures a goodly number of persons belonging to both houses of Congress.

“Writing from Washington on the day of that explosion, but before the occurrence, Mr. Miller said:—

“‘They throng us constantly for papers, books, and tracts, which Bro. Himes is scattering gratuitously by thousands, containing information on this subject. They send in from this vicinity and from “old Virginia” for papers and lecturers; but the one-hundredth part of their requests can never be complied with. Never have I been listened to with so deep a feeling, and with such intense interest, for hours.’

“Mr. Miller gave nineteen lectures in this place, and Messrs. Himes and Litch fifteen.

“Calls for them to extend their tour further south came up from Charleston, S. C., Savannah, Geo., Mobile, Ala., and from many other of the larger places in the Southern States. Some of these were very importunate, but previous arrangements prevented a compliance with those requests.

“They returned north, held meetings in Baltimore from the 3d to the 8th of March, and, on the 9th, returned to Philadelphia. There Mr. Miller gave two more discourses on the 10th; on the 11th he lectured in Newark, N. J., in the Free Presbyterian meeting-house; on the 12th he gave one discourse in New York; on the 13th he spoke in Brooklyn and Williamsburg, N. Y., and on the 14th he returned to Low Hampton.

“He seems to have kept no minute of his subsequent labors, but closes his note-book, at the termination of this tour, with these words: ‘Now I have given, since 1832, three thousand two hundred lectures.’

CHAPTER XV.

THE PASSING OF THE TIME—HIS POSITION—LINES ON HIS DISAPPOINTMENT—CONFESSION—VISIT OF ELD. LITCH—MR. MILLER AND THE METHODIST MINISTERS—TOUR TO OHIO—RETURN, ETC.

“The vernal equinox of 1844 was the furthest point of time to which Mr. Miller’s calculation of the prophetic periods extended. When this time passed, he wrote to Mr. Himes as follows:—

“‘Low Hampton, March 25, 1844.

“‘My Dear Brother Himes:—I am now seated at my old desk in my east room. Having obtained help of God until the present time, I am still looking for the dear Saviour, the Son of God from Heaven, and for the fulfillment of the promise made to my fathers, and confirmed unto us by them that heard him, that he would come again and would receive us to himself, or gather in one body all the family of the first-born in Heaven and earth, even in him. This, Paul has told us, would be in the fullness of times. Eph. 1:9, 10.

“‘The time, as I have calculated it, is now filled up; and I expect every moment to see the Saviour descend from heaven. I have now nothing to look for but this glorious hope. I am full in the faith that all prophetic chronology except the 1000 years in the 20th of Rev. is now about full. Whether God designs for me to warn the people of this earth any more, or not, I am at a loss to know; yet I mean to be governed, if time should continue any longer than I have expected, by the word and providence of Him who will never err, and in whom I think I have trusted, and been supported during my twelve years arduous labors, in trying to awaken the churches of God, and the Christian community, and to warn my fellow-men of the necessity of an immediate preparation to meet our Judge in the day of his appearing.

“‘I hope I have cleansed my garments from the blood of souls. I feel that, as far as it was in my power, I have freed myself from all guilt in their condemnation. It is true, but not wonderful, when we become acquainted with the state and corruption of the present age of the Laodicean church, that I have met with great opposition from the pulpit and professed religious press; and I have been instrumental, through the preaching of the Advent doctrine, of making it quite manifest, that not a few of our theological teachers are infidels in disguise. I cannot for a moment believe that denying the resurrection of the body, or the return of Christ to this earth, or of a judgment day yet future, is any the less infidelity now than it was in the days of infidel France; and yet, who does not know that these things are as common as pulpits and presses are? And which of these questions are not publicly denied in our pulpits and by the writers and editors of the public papers?

“‘Surely, we have fallen on strange times. I expected of course the doctrine of Christ’s speedy coming would be opposed by infidels, blasphemers, drunkards, gamblers and the like; but I did not expect the ministers of the gospel and professors of religion would unite with characters of the above description, at stores and public places, in ridiculing the solemn doctrine of the Second Advent. Many who were not professors of religion have affirmed to me these facts, and say they have seen them, and have felt their blood chilled at the sight.

“‘These are some of the effects which are produced by preaching this solemn and soul-stirring doctrine among our Pharisees of the present day. Is it possible that such ministers and members are obeying God, and watching and praying for his glorious appearing, while they join these scoffers in their unholy and ungodly remarks? If Christ does come, where must they appear? and what a dreadful account they will meet in that tremendous hour? But I feel almost confident that my labors are about done, and I am, with a deep interest of soul, looking for my blessed and glorious Redeemer, who will then be King over all the earth, and God with us forevermore.

“‘This I can truly say is my chief desire. It is my meditation all the day long. It is my song in the night, and my faith and hope amidst the scenes of this sin-cursed earth. It consoles me in sickness, comforts me in tribulation, and gives me patience to endure the scoffs and tauntings of an ungodly, selfish, and unfeeling world. My faith and confidence in God’s word is as strong as ever; although he has not come in the time I expected. I still believe the time is not far off, and that God will soon, yes, too soon for the proud scoffers, justify himself, his word, and the cry of alarm which has been given through your indefatigable labors, with others whom God has raised up to assist in giving the midnight cry.

“‘I am highly gratified with your present position; if you had gone to criticising words in order to find another time, yet future, men would not have thought you honest in your views, would have lost all confidence in you, and the good you have done would have been neutralized, had you shifted or changed your ground.

“‘You have good, honest and sure ground yet to stand upon; for Christ says, “So likewise ye when ye shall see all these things, know that he is near, even at the door.” Now we have lived to see all the signs fulfilled, the time accomplished. “Watch therefore: for ye know not what hour your Lord doth come.”

“‘This is the position I have now to take, and what more work I have to do, will be done in this manner. I will,

“‘1. Prove by Scripture and History that TIME is fulfilled.

“‘2. Show the SIGNS all completed.

“‘3. The duty of WATCHING, for we know not what hour the Lord may come. And if God has anything more for me to do in his vineyard, he will give me strength, open the door, and enable me to do whatever may be his will, for his glory and the best good for man.

“‘To him I leave the event, for him I watch and pray, saying, “Come, Lord Jesus, come quickly. Amen. Even so, come, Lord Jesus.”

“‘William Miller.’

“On the 2d of May he wrote as follows:—

“‘TO SECOND ADVENT BELIEVERS....

“‘Were I to live my life over again, with the same evidence that I then had, to be honest with God and man I should have to do as I have done. Although opposers said it would not come, they produced no weighty arguments. It was evidently guess-work with them; and I then thought, and do now, that their denial was based more on an unwillingness for the Lord to come than on any arguments leading to such a conclusion.

“‘I confess my error and acknowledge my disappointment; yet I still believe that the day of the Lord is near, even at the door; and I exhort you, my brethren, to be watchful, and not let that day come upon you unawares. The wicked, the proud, and the bigot, will exult over us. I will try to be patient. God will deliver the godly out of temptation, and will reserve the unjust to be punished at Christ’s appearing.

“‘I want you, my brethren, not to be drawn away from the truth. Do not, I pray you, neglect the Scriptures. They are able to make you wise unto eternal life. Let us be careful not to be drawn away from the manner and object of Christ’s coming; for the next attack of the adversary will be to induce unbelief respecting these. The manner of Christ’s coming has been well discussed.’

“Shortly after this he wrote the following lines respecting his disappointment:—

“‘How tedious and lonesome the hours,

While Jesus, my Saviour, delays!

I have sought him in solitude’s bowers,

And looked for him all the long days.

“‘Yet he lingers—I pray tell me why

His chariot no sooner returns?

To see him in clouds of the sky,

My soul with intensity burns.

“‘I long to be with him at home,
My heart swallowed up in his love,
On the fields of New Eden to roam,
And to dwell with my Saviour above.’

“During the last week of May, the Annual Conference of Adventists was held in the Tabernacle at Boston. Mr. Miller was present, and, at the close of one of the meetings, in accordance with a previous notice, arose, and frankly confessed his mistake in the definite time at which he supposed the prophetic periods would have terminated. The following notice of this confession, written by a hearer, appeared in the Boston Post on the 1st of June following:—

“‘Father Miller’s Confession.—Many people were desirous of hearing what was termed Father Miller’s Confession, which, according to rumor, was to be delivered at the Tabernacle on Tuesday evening last, when and where a large concourse assembled, myself among the number, to hear the “conclusion of the whole matter;” and I confess I was well paid for my time and trouble. I should judge, also, by the appearance of the audience, and the remarks I heard from one or two gentlemen not of Mr. Miller’s faith, that a general satisfaction was felt. I never heard him when he was more eloquent or animated, or more happy in communicating his feelings and sentiments to others. Want of time and space will not permit me to give even a mere sketch of his remarks, which occupied more than an hour. He confessed that he had been disappointed, but by no means discouraged or shaken in his faith in God’s goodness, or in the entire fulfillment of his word, or in the speedy coming of our Saviour, and the destruction of the world. Although the supposed time had passed, God’s time had not passed. “If the vision tarry, wait for it.” He remained firm in the belief that the end of all things is at hand, even at the door. He spoke with much feeling and effect, and left no doubt of his sincerity.

D.’

“His disappointment in the passing of the time was great; but it did not at all impair his confidence in God, or affect his usual cheerfulness of disposition. Eld. Josiah Litch, who visited him on the 8th of June, at Low Hampton, thus wrote:—

“‘I found both himself and family well and in fine spirits. Indeed, I have never seen him when he seemed to enjoy himself better than at present. If any evidence of his sincerity in preaching the advent of Christ in 1843 were wanting, in addition to his arduous and unrequited toil of twelve years, his present humble submission to his disappointment, and the spirit of meekness with which the confession of disappointment is made, is sufficient to satisfy the most incredulous that nothing but a deep conviction of duty to God and man could have moved such a man to such a work. That he is greatly disappointed in not seeing the Lord within the expected time, must be evident to all who hear him speak; while the tearful eye and subdued voice show from whence flow the words he utters.

“‘Although disappointed as to time, I never saw him more strong than now in the general correctness of his expositions of Scripture and calculation of prophetic times, and in the faith of our Lord’s speedy coming.’

“In company with his son George and Mr. Himes, Mr. Miller left home on the 21st of July, 1844, for a tour as far west as Cincinnati. They reached Rochester, N. Y., on the 23d, and on the 24th commenced a series of meetings in a beautiful grove in Scottsville, near that city. Mr. Miller was listened to with unusual interest.

“From Rochester they visited Buffalo, N. Y., Toronto, C. W., Lockport, N. Y., Cleveland, Akron, Cincinnati, and other places in Ohio. At this last place he lectured, on the evening of August 19, to an audience of about four thousand persons, and continued there one week.

“They had proposed going further west, but freshets in the rivers in those parts prevented. They returned from Cincinnati, up the Ohio and Muskingum rivers, to McConnellsville, which they reached on the 28th of August, and where Mr. M. delivered five lectures.

“On the 2d of September they left this place by steamboat, down the Muskingum river to Marietta, from thence to take a boat to Pittsburg, on their way to Philadelphia. On board the boat for Marietta they found from thirty to forty Methodist ministers, who were on their way to attend the Methodist Episcopal Conference in that city.

“Mr. M. noticed some sly glances from one to another, which seemed to say, ‘We will have some sport with the old gentleman.’ He, however, took no notice of them, but went to a retired part of the deck, and commenced reading. Soon a dandy-looking minister walked past him several times, and finally asked him:—

“‘Is your name Miller?’

“Mr. M. replied in the affirmative, and kept on reading.

“He then asked him if he was the Miller who had prophesied the end of the world.

“Mr. M. said he did not prophesy, but supposed that he was the one to whom he referred.

“The minister said that he did not believe we could know when the world was to end.

“Mr. M., thinking he had a right to his unbelief, made no reply.

“The minister then said he did not believe God had revealed the time.

“Mr. M. replied that he could prove by the Bible that God had revealed it; and that, if he was an honest man, he would make him acknowledge it, by asking him a few questions in reference to the Bible, if he would answer them.

“The man retired, procured his Bible, and returned with about twenty other ministers, who gathered around him. An elderly one, who looked like an honest man, took his seat in front, on the capstan. All were attention. Mr. M. asked the man to read the first three verses of Dan. 12.

“This he did aloud.

“Mr. M. then asked if the resurrection was brought to view in those verses.

“The man looked at them for a while, and said he did not know that it was.

“Mr. M. asked him if he would tell what they did mean.

“He said he did not choose to do so.

“‘Oh! very well,’ said Mr. M.; ‘we have nothing more to say together; for I did not agree to convince you, if you would not answer a few questions.’

“The elderly minister then asked him why he would not answer.

“‘Because I do not choose to do so.’

“‘Why,’ said the old gentleman, ‘I should have no objection to answering that question. It does refer to the resurrection.’

“‘Well, father,’ said Mr. M., ‘I perceive you are an honest man. I will, if you please, ask you a few questions.’

“The old gentleman said he would answer them if he could.

“Mr. M. asked him to read the 6th verse—‘How long shall it be to the end of these wonders?’—and say what wonders were referred to.

“The dandy minister then spoke—‘Don’t answer that question; he will make a Millerite of you.’

“The elderly minister said he was not afraid of the Bible, let it make what it would of him; and replied, that the ‘wonders’ referred to must mean the resurrection, &c.

“‘Well,’ said Mr. M., ‘is the reply of the one clothed in linen, who sware “that it should be for a time, times, and an half,” given in answer to the question, how long it will be to the resurrection?’

“Here the dandy minister again spoke—‘Don’t answer that question; for, if you do, he will make a Millerite of you.’

“The other gave him to understand that he was afraid of no result to which an honest investigation of the Scriptures might lead, and that he should answer any questions he choose to. The admission of the dandy minister, that honest answers could not be given to a few simple questions on a portion of Scripture, without making men ‘Millerites,’ excited the interest of all to the highest point.

“The elderly minister replied that he thought it must be given in answer to that question.

“On hearing the answer, the dandy minister shrunk back, closed his mouth, and interfered no more.

“Mr. M. asked who it was that gave this answer.

“The other readily replied that he was undoubtedly the Lord Jesus Christ.

“‘Well, then,’ said Mr. M., ‘if the Lord Jesus Christ, in answer to the question, How long it should be to the resurrection, has sworn with an oath that it shall be for a time, times, and an half, is not the time revealed?’

“‘But,’ said the other, ‘you can’t tell what that time, times, and an half mean.’

“‘I did not agree,’ said Mr. M., ‘to do that; our understanding of it is another thing. But has not God there revealed the time, and sworn to it with an oath?’

“‘Yes,’ said the other, ‘he has.’

“‘Well, then,’ said Mr. M., ‘I have proved all I agreed to.’

“‘Why,’ said the minister, ‘I never saw this in this light before. Can you tell what is meant by time, times, and an half?’

“Mr. M. ‘I will try. Read, if you please, the 6th verse of Rev. 12.’

“Min. ‘“And the woman fled into the wilderness, where she hath a place prepared of God, that they should feed her there a thousand two hundred and three-score days.”’

“Mr. M. ‘Now read the 14th verse.’

“Min. ‘“And to the woman were given two wings of a great eagle, that she might fly into the wilderness, into her place, where she is nourished for a time, and times, and half a time.”’

“Mr. M. ‘Do not those two denote the same period of time?’

“Min. ‘Yes.’

“Mr. M. ‘Then must not the time given in answer to the question be the same as the 1260 days?’

“The minister acknowledged it must be so.

“Mr. M. pointed him to the various places where the same period is presented under different forms,—forty-two months, 1260 days, time, times, and half a time—and showed him how 30 days to a month, and 12 months to a year, would make 3½ years, equal to 1260 days. He then asked him if we might not know that God had revealed the time to the resurrection in days.

“He said, Yes; but asked if we could know how to reckon them.

“Mr. M. pointed him to Dan. 7:25, the time of the continuance of the saints in the hands of the little horn, a period of the same length, and asked if that could denote simply 1260 days; ‘for’ said he, ‘you know that they persecuted the saints more than so many literal days.’

“This he admitted; but asked, if not literal days, what they were.

“Mr. M. showed him that the language was symbolical; that if it had been given in literal time, it would have had a bad effect on past generations, as they would have seen that the judgment could not come in their day, and they might not have lived in continual readiness for it, as they should do. He then referred to Num. 14: 34, and Eze. 4:6, where God has appointed a day for a year; showed him how the 70 weeks were fulfilled in 490 years—as many years as there were days in 70 weeks—and showed there were just 1260 years from the time the decree of Justinian went into effect, A. D. 538, to 1798, when the papacy was subverted by Napoleon.

“The minister acknowledged the pertinency of these references, and confessed that the time sworn to by Christ must denote 1260 years.

“Mr. M. then showed how the 2300 days and the four great kingdoms, &c., bring us down to the end, and how they must terminate about this time; but confessed that the expected time had gone by. He spoke about an hour, during which the strictest attention was given by those who stood around. Many confessed they never thought that ‘Millerism’ was anything like that.

“On arriving at Marietta, Mr. M. was detained a part of the next day in the boat, and the inhabitants came down with the request that he would stop and lecture, offering him the Methodist house. But he was obliged to hasten on, and could not comply with their invitation.

“They arrived at Harrisburg, Pa., on Sunday, the 8th, and lectured four days in the old Methodist chapel to good audiences. On the 11th Mr. Miller wrote to the Signs of the Times as follows:—

“‘Harrisburg, Sept. 11, 1844.

“‘Dear Bro. Bliss:—We are now in this place laboring to prove to the people that the Bible is the revealed will of God, and that all may and will be known which concerns us, to make us perfect in every good work, by every sincere and candid inquirer, in this age of general expectation of some moral or physical revolution in the earth. And we believe, and we so teach, that the revolution so much expected, and so long desired by every child of God, is the coming of King Jesus, the marriage of the Lamb, and the completion of all the promises given us who believe in God’s word. We are as confident as faith in the blessed word can make us, that Christ is now at the very door, and soon our wondering eyes will be ravished by all the beauty, splendor, pomp and glory of our descending King.

“‘These thoughts make me happy while I write; but, O God! what then will be my feelings, when faith will end in sight, and hope in fruition? I know that my mind is too feeble to imagine, my faculties too weak to comprehend the emotion of my soul, when I shall stand before him; yes, and see him as he is, and be like him; yes, more than that, ten times more grand, more glorious still than all, shall be forever with him. No more a stranger in this giddy world, no more a pilgrim from the dizzy maze of life’s ten thousand cares, no more a wanderer from my Father’s house, no more to meet the scoffs of friends or foes, or meet the upturned lip, or curl of scorn from that black coat, and hear the oft-repeated epithet, in accents of deep derision, “There goes old Miller.” My soul rejoices when I think a few more days, at most, and all these scenes will be forgotten in the eternal sunshine of his glory. Why not begin the song of everlasting gratitude to God for this blessed hope.

“‘I find in every place where Bro. Himes and myself have traveled and labored, the same selfish, Pharisaical bigotry among the sects, and more especially among the several editors of pretended religious newspapers. Many of these misrepresent and falsely accuse their brethren of other sects in their trade—and they only fatten on the destruction of those who do not wear their sectarian badge. This would be a dark picture for the Christian religion, were it not for a few exceptions in the moral heavens; but there is now and then a brilliant star in the galaxy, that shines the brighter in consequence of the surrounding darkness; and in every sect we find a few of their numbers whose faithful hearts and honest lives denote they have not bowed the knee to Baal. Were it not for this, I long ago would have yielded up the point, that wicked men and devils, and the gates of hell, had in this our day prevailed against the church. But thank the Lord, a remnant yet is left; the Bible yet is true, and these men are but the tares which soon will be gathered and burned. I do believe few men will be left.

“‘The organ of the “Church of God,” so called, in this place, has spit his venom out, and I hope his poison will not taint his own body; but if it does, and should he reap the fruits, I hope he will remember his false assertions only go to show the bird was hit, and all his gall falls harmless at the feet of those he meant to wound. I will write you again when I get home.

“‘I remain as ever “looking for the blessed hope,” &c.

“‘William Miller.’

“They then passed on to Middletown, where they remained two days; to Sandersville, where Mr. M. gave one lecture; and to Philadelphia, where they arrived on the 14th of September. On the 16th, Mr. M. commenced his lectures at the Museum Saloon, in Julian street.

“On the 19th, Mr. M. reached New York city, and the next day gave a discourse in Franklin Hall. On Sunday, P. M., he preached in the church in Chrystie street, from these words: ‘But this I confess unto thee, that after the way which they call heresy, so worship I the God of my fathers, believing all things that are written in the law and the prophets; and have hope toward God, which they themselves also allow, that there shall be a resurrection of the dead, both of the just and unjust.’ Acts 24:14, 15. He spoke with great ease and clearness respecting the reasons which had fixed his mind on 1843. He acknowledged that there had been a mistake, but expressed his assurance in the near coming of Christ, for which event he entreated all to be in readiness. In the evening, he spoke in the same place, to a crowded and attentive audience, upon the seven last plagues of Rev. 16:15-17, six of which he believed had been poured out during the last three hundred years.

“His health was at this time suffering considerably from the fatigues of the western tour; and, feeling it his duty to rest for a season, he declined the many urgent invitations which were then pressing upon him for lectures elsewhere, and returned to his family at Low Hampton. From that place he wrote as follows:—

“‘September 30, 1844.

“‘Dear Brother:—I am once more at home, worn down with the fatigue of my journey, my strength so exhausted and my bodily infirmities so great that I am about concluding I shall never be able again to labor in the vineyard as heretofore. I wish now to remember with gratitude all those who have assisted me in my endeavors to awaken the church and arouse the world to a sense of their awful danger.

“‘I pray God, my brethren and sisters, that you may receive a reward in this life of a hundred fold, and, in the world to come, eternal life. Many of you have sacrificed much—your good names, former associations, flattering prospects in life, occupation, and goods; and with me you have received scorn, reproach, and scandal from those whom it was our souls’ desire to benefit. Yet not one of you to whom my confidence has ever been given, has, to my knowledge, murmured or complained. You have cheerfully endured the cross, despised the shame, and with me are looking for and expecting the King in all his glory. This is to me a cause of gratitude to God. May he preserve you unto the end. There have been deceivers among us, but God has preserved me from giving them my confidence to deceive or betray....

“‘William Miller.’

CHAPTER XVI.

THE SEVENTH MONTH MOVEMENT—DISAPPOINTMENT—THE NOBLEMAN AND HIS SERVANTS—NEED OF PATIENCE—CONFERENCE AT LOW HAMPTON—ETC.

“For a few months previous to this time, the attention of some had been directed to the tenth day of the seventh month of the current Jewish year, as the probable termination of several prophetic periods. This was not generally received with favor by those who sympathized with Mr. Miller, till a few weeks previous to the time designated, which, on that year, following the reckoning of the Caraite Jews, fell on the 22d day of October. Mr. Miller had, a year and a half previous, called attention to the seventh month[26] as an important one in the Jewish dispensation; but as late as the date of his last letter (September 30, 1844,) he had discountenanced the positiveness with which some were then regarding it. On the 6th of October he was first led to favor the expectation which pointed to that month, and thus wrote: ‘If Christ does not come within twenty or twenty-five days, I shall feel twice the disappointment I did in the spring.’

“About the same time, also, the belief in the given day was generally received. There were exceptions, but it is the duty of the impartial historian to record the fact that those who had embraced the views of Mr. Miller did, with great unanimity, heartily and honestly believe that on a given day they should behold the coming of the King of glory.

“The world cannot understand how that could be; and many who professed the name of Christ, have spoken contemptuously of such an expectation. But those who in sincerity love the Saviour, can never feel the least emotion of contempt for such a hope. The effect on those entertaining this belief is thus described by Mr. Miller, in a letter dated October 11, 1844:—

“‘I think I have never seen among our brethren such faith as is manifested in the seventh month. “He will come,” is the common expression. “He will not tarry the second time,” is their general reply. There is a forsaking of the world, an unconcern for the wants of life, a general searching of heart, confession of sin, and a deep feeling in prayer for Christ to come. A preparation of heart to meet him seems to be the labor of their agonizing spirits. There is something in this present waking up different from anything I have ever before seen. There is no great expression of joy: that is, as it were, suppressed for a future occasion, when all Heaven and earth will rejoice together with joy unspeakable and full of glory. There is no shouting; that, too, is reserved for the shout from Heaven. The singers are silent: they are waiting to join the angelic hosts, the choir from Heaven. No arguments are used or needed: all seem convinced that they have the truth. There is no clashing of sentiments: all are of one heart and of one mind. Our meetings are all occupied with prayer, and exhortation to love and obedience. The general expression is, “Behold, the Bridegroom cometh; go ye out to meet him.” Amen. Even so come, Lord Jesus.

“‘William Miller.’

“The natural heart would be unable to realize that any emotion, but that of fear and dread, could fill the minds of those thus believing. But when the secrets of the great day shall be made known, it will be seen that the coming of Christ was ardently desired by them, and that their hearts were filled with a holy joy, while they were subdued by awe, as standing in the presence of the Governor of the universe. The state of mind thus produced was a great moral spectacle, upon which those who participated in it will ever look back with pleasure, and without regret.

“The time immediately preceding the 22d of October was one of great calmness of mind and of pleasurable expectation on the part of those who regarded that point of time with interest. There was a nearness of approach to God, and a sweetness of communion with him, to which those who experienced it will ever recur with pleasure. During the last ten days, secular business was, for the most part, suspended; and those who looked for the advent gave themselves to the work of preparation for that event, as they would for death, were they on a bed of sickness expecting soon to close their eyes on earthly scenes forever.

“There were some cases of extravagance, as there have been in all great movements; and it would have been strange had there not been. But the published accounts of these were greatly exaggerated, and hundreds of reports had no foundation in fact. All reports respecting the preparation of ascension robes, &c., and which are still by many believed, were demonstrated over and over again to be false and scandalous. In the investigation of the truth of such, no labor and expense was spared; and it became morally certain that no instance of the kind anywhere occurred.

“The most culpable incident, which had any foundation in fact, was in Philadelphia. In opposition to the earnest expostulations of Mr. Litch and other judicious persons, a company of about one hundred and fifty, responding to the pretended vision of one C. R. Georgas, on the 21st of October went out on the Darby-street road, about four miles from Market-street bridge, and encamped in a field under two large tents, provided with all needed comforts. The next morning, their faith in Georgas’ vision having failed, all but about a dozen returned to the city. A few days later the others returned. That was an act the report of which was greatly exaggerated. It met the emphatic disapproval of Mr. Miller and the Adventists generally, and its folly was promptly confessed by the majority of those who participated in it.

“The day passed, and the expectation of the advent at that time was proved to be premature. The friends were at first quite saddened, but were not disheartened by the passing of the time. This was the only specific day which was regarded by intelligent Adventists with any positiveness. There were other days named by those whose opinions were received with no favor; but their unauthorized declarations should not be imputed to the body.

“The fact that many suspended their business for a few days was censured by opponents; but it was only acting consistently with their faith, opponents being judges. Dr. Dowling, a celebrated Baptist clergyman in New York city, in a review of Mr. Miller, used this strong language:—

“‘Were this doctrine of Mr. Miller established upon evidence satisfactory to my own mind, I would not rest till I had published in the streets, and proclaimed in the ears of my fellow-townsmen, and especially of my beloved flock, “The day of the Lord is at hand! Build no more houses! Plant no more fields and gardens! Forsake your shops and farms, and all secular pursuits, and give every moment to preparation for this great event! for in three short years this earth shall be burnt up, and Christ shall come in the clouds, awake the sleeping dead, and call the living before his dread tribunal.”’

“In the first communication received from Mr. Miller after this time, he wrote from Low Hampton, Nov. 10, 1844:—

“‘Dear Bro. Himes:—I have been waiting and looking for the blessed hope, and in expectation of realizing the glorious things which God has spoken of Zion. Yes, and although I have been twice disappointed, I am not yet cast down or discouraged. God has been with me in Spirit, and has comforted me. I have now much more evidence that I do believe in God’s word; and although surrounded with enemies and scoffers, yet my mind is perfectly calm, and my hope in the coming of Christ is as strong as ever. I have done only what after years of sober consideration I felt it to be my solemn duty to do. If I have erred, it has been on the side of charity, the love of my fellow-man, and my conviction of duty to God. I could not see that I should harm my fellow-men, even supposing the event should not take place at the time specified, for it is a command of our Saviour to look for it, watch, expect it, and be ready. Then if I could by any means, in accordance with God’s word, persuade men to believe in a crucified, risen, and coming Saviour, I felt it would have a bearing on the everlasting welfare and happiness of such. I had not a distant thought of disturbing our churches, ministers, religious editors, or departing from the best biblical commentaries or rules which had been recommended for the study of the Scriptures. And even to this day, my opposers have not been able to show where I have departed from any rule laid down by our old standard writers of the Protestant faith. I have only interpreted Scripture in accordance with their rules, as I honestly believed. And not one honest man, who understands this question, will deny this assertion of mine. But that, over which I could have no control, transpired to produce on the public mind an unhappy effect.

“‘The public excitement commenced some six years ago. Although I had been proclaiming the Second Advent for six years before, there was not one of our churches that I visited but what acknowledged the happy effects of the doctrine; and many were hopefully converted, who united themselves with the several sects as their own judgment dictated. In 1839 and 1840, the opposition to the doctrine began to rage, united with ridicule and misrepresentation. The Universalists commenced the contest, and were followed by every sect in our country. Then the brethren who loved the appearing of our Saviour, found themselves among opposers. And instead of meeting sound argument and light among their former brethren, they were almost universally met with scoffing, ridicule, and misrepresentation. Odious names and cruel epithets were applied to us; and in many cases our motives were impugned, and a war of extermination was commenced against the Advent faith. Many of our brethren caught a measure of this spirit, and began to defend themselves in like manner, against the attacks of the several sects. The name of “Babylon,” and I am sorry to say it, was applied to all of our churches without any discrimination, although in too many instances it was not unjustly applied. We were thus placed at the time we expected our deliverance; and if Christ had come and found us in this condition, who would have been ready, purified, and made white? But the time passed, and the Adventists were humbled; and thus we see that our God was wise and good, in the tarrying of the vision, to humble, purify, and prepare us for an admittance into his blessed kingdom.

“‘I would now beg and pray, my brethren, that we may humble ourselves, avoid disputes, and enter into our chambers, and hide ourselves for a little while until the danger is over. Hold no unnecessary controversy with the despisers of our blessed hope, let us separate ourselves from them in very deed. We have thus far done all we could—and now is the time of their triumph, but it will be short. I am determined by the grace of God to follow this rule. God will fight our battles for us, and in due time we shall see who is the only Potentate. Now let patience have its perfect work. Our duty now is to comfort one another with these words, strengthen those that are weak among us, comfort the feeble, establish the wavering, raise up the bowed down, speak often one to another, and forsake not the assembling of ourselves together; let our conversation be in Heaven from whence we look for the Saviour, for the time has now come for us to live by faith, a faith that is tried like gold seven times purified. Let us hold fast our profession without wrath or doubting, for he is faithful who has promised, and he that shall come will come, and will not tarry. Let us be careful that we become not overcharged with the things of this world, and so that day come upon us unawares; but know, brethren, that the day will not come upon you as a thief; you will see and know the sign of the Son of man.

“‘I would advise you, Bro. Himes, to continue publishing your papers in Boston and New York. We must have a medium of communication with one another, so that amid the moral darkness which has shrouded the people on the prophecies, we may have light in all our dwellings. This cannot be far from the time. I feel confident that God will justify his word, and the time which we have preached; for we cannot have varied far from the truth in our own views of the seven times, the 2300 days, the 1335 days, the trumpets, &c.

“‘Brethren, hold fast; let no man take your crown. I have fixed my mind upon another time, and here I mean to stand until God gives me more light—and that is To-day, To-day, and TO-DAY, until he comes, and I see Him for whom my soul yearns. Permit me to illustrate by parable.

“‘A certain nobleman about taking a long journey, called together his servants, gave instructions to every one respecting their work, and commanded them to be faithful in their several occupations; and at his return, he would reward every one as his work should be. He also informed them how many days he should be absent; but the time of night when he should return, he did not make known; yet, if they would watch, they should know when he was near, even at the door. And he informed them how they might know. They would first see the lights of his carriage in the distance, and they would hear the rumbling of his carriage wheels, and go out to meet him, and open the portal gates for him immediately. Whether he should come in the first, second, third, or fourth watch, he would not then inform them; but commanded them to watch. After he was gone, many of the servants began to neglect their master’s business, and to form plans for their own amusement. Thus engaged, the days appointed for their master’s return were forgotten. The giddy whirl of dissipation had filled their mind, and time passed rapidly along; and the days were nearly run out when some of the servants discovered in the steward’s book the number of days recorded when their master should return. This was immediately read in the hearing of the servants, and created no small excitement among them. Some said the time was not revealed, because the master said the watch was not known. Others said the master would never return, he would send his principal servant, and then they would have a feasting time to their own liking.

“‘Thus they were wrangling and disputing until the days, according to the best reckoning they could make, had run out, and the night came, in which some of them expected him. The porter, and a few others determined to watch, while the remainder of the servants were feasting and drinking. The porter and his companions kept a good lookout; for, at the first watch, they expected their master. They thought they saw the light and heard the rumbling of the wheels. They ran among the servants, and cried, “Behold, the master cometh.” This caused no small stir among them, and many made preparation for their master’s return. But it proved to be a false alarm. Then those servants ridiculed the porter and his friends for their fears as they called it, and returned to their feasting again. But the porter and his friends were still vigilant until the second watch, when they were again disappointed, and the servants were more vexed than ever. They now scoffed, and mocked, and then turned some of them out of doors. Again they waited for the third watch, and again they were disappointed. Now the majority of the servants, being more angry than ever, beat and bruised the porter and his friends, and turned them all out of the house, locked the doors, and laid themselves down to sleep. At the fourth watch the master came, and found the porter and a few of his companions watching. The doors were barred and the remainder of the servants were asleep.

“‘Now let me ask, Will the master condemn the porter and his friends for making three false alarms? Will he punish them for disturbing their carousing brethren? Which of these two classes of servants will have shown the most love for their master? Let every one answer to himself these questions, and decide his own case justly. Our former brethren say they watch, but do not expect him.

“‘Bro. Himes, give us the signification of the word Watch. Yours as ever, looking, &c.

“‘Wm. Miller.’

Again Mr. Miller wrote on the 18th of November from Low Hampton:—

“‘Dear Bro. Himes: Be patient, establish your heart, for the coming of the Lord draweth nigh. For you have need of patience, that, after ye have done the will of God, ye might receive the promise. For yet a little while and he that shall come will come and will not tarry. This is the time for patience, it is the last trial the dear Second Advent brethren are to experience. For this will carry us to the coming of the Lord. “Be patient, therefore, brethren, unto the coming of the Lord.” James 5:7. This is the way God will sanctify his host. Now there will be a great falling away, for the want of this grace, patience. But all that endure this last trial unto the end, the same shall be saved. 2 Pet. 1:4-11. As our father Abraham did, who hoped against hope, and so after he had patiently endured, he obtained the promise. It is evident as the sun at noon that we are in this time of patience. We have done the will of God in this thing. We have written the vision and made it plain, we have run all our published time out, and the world say that “every vision faileth,” and therefore we have now need of patience, to wait unto the coming of the Holy One. Then let us have patience, and exercise it; for we can see, this trial will bring joy and the hope of glory. Rom. 5:2-5. “Blessed is the man that endureth temptation; for when he is tried, he shall receive the crown of life, which the Lord hath promised to them that love him.” James 1:12. Hearken, then, my brother, is not the trial of our faith more precious than gold? and shall we not stand in this last trial of our faith by patience? “For whatsoever things were written aforetime, were written for our learning, that we through patience and comfort of the Scriptures might have hope. Now the God of patience and consolation grant you to be like-minded one toward another according to Christ Jesus.” Rom. 15:4, 5. Then whatever was written, was for our example who live in this our last day; let us then through patience have hope. “Looking for that blessed hope, and the glorious appearing of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ.” Titus 2:13.

“‘We have done our work in warning sinners, and in trying to awake a formal church. God, in his providence, has shut the door;[27] we can only stir one another up to be patient, and be diligent to make our calling and election sure. We are now living in the time specified by Malachi 3:18; also Daniel 12:10; Rev. 22:10-12. In this passage we cannot help but see that, a little while before Christ should come, there would be a separation between the just and unjust, the righteous and wicked, between those who love his appearing and those who hate it. And never since the days of the apostles has there been such a division line drawn as was drawn about the 10th or 23d day of the 7th Jewish month. Since that time, they say, “they have no confidence in us.”

“‘We have need of patience after we have done the will of God, that we may receive the promise; for he says, “Behold, I come quickly, to reward every one as his work shall be.” You may inquire, how long quickly means. The false-hearted professor will tell you it may mean ages upon ages yet to come; but the real lover of Christ will hope it is near. Christ has told us how near. Matt. 24:32, 33. Again, the apostle James has told us that we are to have patience, for it is nigh. He then tells us that the husbandman waiteth for the precious fruit of the earth, and hath long patience for it, until he receive the early and latter rain. How long then does the husbandman wait? The former rains, in Judea, fell after the autumnal equinox, at their seed time, to quicken the grain; and the latter rains, after the vernal equinox, to insure a plentiful crop. [Carpenter’s Introduction, p. 334.] “Be ye also patient; stablish your hearts; for the coming of the Lord draweth nigh.” How nigh? It cannot be seen, by the reading of the passage, that we are to be in this patient waiting for his coming, after we have done the will of God, sown the seed, given the midnight cry, longer; and it may be much less than the husbandman waited. Therefore let us stablish our hearts, be determined to go forward, let us not look back, “Remember Lot’s wife.”

“‘I think the event for which we look cannot be afar off. I know of no rule by which we can fix on any day or hour. But Christ tells us we may know when it is near even at the door. James 5:9, tells us, when this time of patient waiting comes, then, “Behold, the Judge standeth before the door.” I feel as confident as ever that God will justify us in fixing the year. And I believe as firmly that this Jewish year will not terminate before this wicked and corrupted earth’s history will all be told. The amount of scoffing and mocking at the present time is beyond any calculation. We can hardly pass a man, professor or non-professor, but what he scoffingly inquires, “You have not gone up,” or “God cannot burn the world,” &c., ridiculing the Bible itself, and blaspheming the word and power of God. And yet ministers and moral editors wink at it. And some of them are performing the same, to the no small joy of the most depraved characters in the community.

“‘If this is not a sign of the last day, we are sure never to see fulfilled 2 Pet. 3:3, 4, “Knowing this first, that there shall come in the last days scoffers, walking after their own lusts, and saying, Where is the promise of his coming? for since the fathers fell asleep, all things continue as they were from the beginning of the creation;” nor Jude 18, “How that they told you there should be mockers in the last time, who should walk after their own ungodly lusts.” I pity the inhabitants who may live in an age of the world that is worse than this. I cannot believe this earth will ever again be so cursed. Where are our moral judges and rulers? Has virtue fled from the earth? and is there no fear of God in all the land?

“‘Come, Lord Jesus, oh! come quickly, or we shall be as when God overthrew the cities of the plain, like unto Sodom and Gomorrah. Where are the watchmen upon the walls of Zion? Can the sign of Peter and Jude be fulfilled before their eyes, and they not see it? Do they not know that one sign plainly fulfilled is proof enough? for God is not man that he should lie, nor is like unto the sons of men that he should be mistaken. I would beg to know what could be called scoffing and mocking, if the conduct of all classes of men opposing the Second Advent doctrine is not. Paul tells us, 1 Thess. 4:17, “Then we which are alive and remain shall be caught up together with them in the clouds, to meet the Lord in the air; and so shall we ever be with the Lord.” And some are tauntingly inquiring, “Have you not gone up?” Even little children in the streets are shouting continually to passers-by, “Have you a ticket to go up?” The public prints, of the most fashionable and popular kind, in the great Sodoms of our country, are caricaturing in the most shameful manner the “white robes of the saints,” Rev. 6:11, the “going up,” and the great day of “burning.” Even the pulpits are desecrated by the repetition of scandalous and false reports concerning the “ascension robes,” and priests are using their powers and pens to fill the catalogue of scoffing in the most scandalous periodicals of the day. England and France, with their sinks of pollution, London and Paris, cannot, will not, and dare not, compete with our Boston, New York, or Philadelphia, in scoffing. If these will not open the eyes of our good men in these cities, then I shall believe there is none there. And at any rate, the world must and will be burned up, and few men left. Adieu, my brother, I am patiently waiting for my King, &c.

“‘Wm. Miller.’

On the 29th of November he wrote to Eld. I. E. Jones, which appears in the Advent Herald for Dec. 25, 1844:—

“‘Dear Bro. Jones.—Yours of the 23d inst. was received yesterday, and I am now seated to answer it. The disappointment which we have experienced, in my opinion, could never have been foreseen or avoided, and we have been honest men and believed in the truth of the Bible. I have had time a few weeks past to review the whole subject, and with all the aid of Stuart, Chase, Weeks, Bush, and the whole school of modern writers, I cannot see why we are not right. And even by taking the whole together, instead of disproving the position we have taken, as it respects prophecy, they confirm me in my views. But, say you, time has shown we are wrong. I am not so certain of that. Suppose Christ should come before this year of Jewish time should expire. Then every honest man would say we were right. But if the world does stand two, or even three, years more, it would not in the least alter the manner of the prophecy, but would affect the time. One thing I do know, I have preached nothing but what I believed, and God’s hand has been with me, his power has been manifested in the work, and much good has been effected; for people have read the Bible for themselves, and no one can honestly say that they have been deceived by me. My advice has always been for every one to study the evidences of their faith for themselves.

“‘Again, I can see no object that Satan could have in publishing a doctrine which his own subjects would so generally oppose. No one can possibly plead that those who have excited the mobs, or the mobs themselves who have committed violence, were obeying the example or spirit of Christ. This would be blasphemy in the highest sense. Very well; then Satan would be opposing Satan, but on the part of the Adventists, Satan would be a non-resistant. Can this be true? If it is, then I have no rule by which to judge where the Spirit of Christ may be known. To tell us that those who have headed the most violent mobs in our country were performing the will of God, is an insult to common sense. Yet in no case have the nominal churches dealt with their brethren for such an offense.

“‘It cannot be that we are deceived. That Christ will come and justify us yet I will not doubt. Our meetings are like yours, sweet and heavenly refreshings from the presence and Spirit of God, with no wicked to molest us; they have left us entirely. For some time in October they crowded our house night and day; but now “there is room enough.” The trap is laid for them, they appear to know that Christ will never come. They that were crying for mercy a few days since, are now scoffing and mocking us, and ridiculing each others’ fears. Even some old professors are worse than the world. Have not such individuals sinned against the Holy Ghost? And when they say, Peace and safety, will not sudden destruction overtake them? While the wicked were thus expecting him, how could the Scriptures have been all fulfilled if he had come? They could not. But now they are ready for the snare, and out of their own mouths will God judge them; for they well knew they were unprepared, and the way they knew, or why were they so anxious for mercy? But when the danger was past, all of their preparation was over.

“‘I feel confident that we shall see very serious times. We shall need much patience. And this peculiar grace will last us through, “unto the coming of the Lord.” I am almost certain we shall not need patience longer than the farmer waits for the precious fruits of the earth, and hath long patience for it until he receive the early and latter rain. But I will try to be patient. James 5:7-11. To whom did the apostle address himself in his exhortation? To what age of the church? To that age where the coming of the Lord draweth nigh, and the Judge standeth at the door. Why did he caution them to be patient? Because he supposed they would be impatient to have the Lord come. Is there any sign among our nominal churches and sects, that they are impatient for Christ to come? No, evidently it is the reverse; they desire him not to come. Then if the Judge standeth at the door, are they not James’ brethren? No. Will you tell me who are James’ brethren in this age? They are those who are converted from Judaism and scattered. Chap. 1:1-4. They ask wisdom of God, in faith, not wavering. Verses 5 and 6. The poor among them are exalted, and the rich are made low. Verses 9 and 10. They endure temptation without wavering, and after their trial are blessed with a crown of life. Verse 12. They are begotten of God with his work of truth, and doers as well as hearers of the word. Verses 18-22. They have forsaken creeds, and look and continue in the law of liberty. Verse 25. They visit the afflicted and have no fellowship with the world. Verse 27.

“‘They must not countenance nor support war, for that cometh from lust. Chap. 4:1-3. They must not have respect to the rich, and despise the poor; for that is judging unrighteously. Chap. 2:1-10. They must show their faith by their works, and have no boasting where their works are not made manifest. Verses 14-26. They must not strive to be masters or rulers of their brethren, and have but few D. Ds. or A. Ms. among them. James 3:1-12. They must have no envying or striving against the truth, and be possessed of that wisdom which cometh down from above. Verses 13-18. They are to humble themselves and speak no evil of the brethren. Chap. 4:10-17. They are to cry unto the Lord in their afflictions and persecutions and make no resistance. Chap. 5:4-6. They will stablish their hearts in faith by patience, and grieve not the brethren. Verses 7-9. They will take the prophets for their example, and remember that the end of Job’s trials from the Lord was his patience. Verses 10 and 11. They will not swear nor take any oath. Verse 12. If afflicted, they will pray; if merry, sing; if they are sick, call for the elders to pray, and if they sin, confess their faults; and if others sin, restore if possible. Verses 13-20.

“‘And now, my brother, if you can find such a band, they are the apostle’s brethren. Say to such, “Be patient therefore, brethren, unto the coming of the Lord, be ye also patient; stablish your hearts; for the coming of the Lord draweth nigh.” Read this to all the holy brethren; for it is the best and only advice I can give them; and tell them I request their prayers, that I may follow the same advice; for their prayers are better to me than the world’s love, and much more to be desired than a good name from those who hate my King. I ask no favors of Cæsar’s household, but that I may enjoy in peace my blessed hope. I have never courted the smiles of the proud, nor quailed when the world frowned. I shall not now purchase their favor; nor shall I go beyond duty to tempt their hate. I shall never seek my life at their hands; nor shrink, I hope, from losing it, if God in his good providence so orders. I thank God for your steadfastness in the truth, and pray him that you may endure unto the end. I remain as ever looking for, and expecting the King in his glory soon.

Wm. Miller.’

Again Mr. Miller writes for the Herald, Dec. 3, 1844:—

“‘Dear Brn. Himes and Bliss.—I cannot sit down to write without the reflection that this letter may never reach its destination. Yet I believe in occupying until Christ shall come. Therefore, I still feel it to be my duty to occasionally drop you a line, to let you know how my soul prospers, and how my faith holds out. As it respects the soul, I have never enjoyed more calmness of mind, nor more resignation to the holy will of God, and patience of spirit, than I have within a few weeks past. My soul, I think, is stayed on God and I enjoy peace like a river. For years past I have often had a spirit of impatience for Christ to come, and I have felt grieved in soul because I found in my heart so much of what I called a spirit of fretfulness and a mind full of impatience. But I bless God I have had but little of that recently. I have had great reason to thank God for his abundant goodness in this respect. My faith is stronger than ever; and this is somewhat remarkable, when I reflect on the disappointment I have met in my former expectations. But here, too, I see the good hand of God in my strength of faith.

“‘I have read with much interest and great satisfaction your “Address to the Adventists.” And I am perfectly satisfied it is the right ground for you to take. I believe the ground we have formerly stood upon, as it regards the chronology of prophecy, is the only ground we can take; and if the defect is in human chronology, then no human knowledge is sufficient in this age to rectify it, with any degree of certainty; and I see no good that can be accomplished by taking a stand for any future period, with less evidence than we had for 1843-4. For those who would not believe, with the evidence we then produced, we cannot expect will now believe with much less testimony.

“‘Again it is to me almost a demonstration that God’s hand is seen in this thing. Many thousands, to all human appearance, have been made to study the Scriptures by the preaching of the time; and by that means, through faith and the sprinkling of the blood of Christ, have been reconciled to God. And those of us who have been familiar with the fruits and effects of the preaching of this doctrine, must acknowledge that he has been with us in so doing, and his wisdom has in a great measure marked out our path, which he has devised for such good as he will accomplish in his own time and manner; as in the case of Ninevah by the preaching of Jonah. If this should be the real state of the case, and we should go on to set other times in the future, we might possibly be found frustrating, or trying to, at least, the purposes of God, and receive no blessing. I think my brethren will all admit that God has been in the work, and he has tried our faith in the best possible manner. The vision has been made plain on tables. We have had a tarrying time. And now we are having our time of patience unto the coming of the Lord. Then I say, Let patience have its perfect work. I have great hope, and a good confidence. I think I may safely say that the Lord will make his appearance yet before this Jewish year shall terminate. And if so, and we should be looking for years to come, we should not do well. Therefore, the only safe measure for me to pursue, under the best light I can now get, is to keep what light I have burning, and look and expect him every day until he comes. This is my present position, and the greatest danger which those are in who take this position, will be the loss of patience and a neglect of watching and prayer. To remedy this, I would advise that we keep ourselves as much as possible from worldly associations, vain and trifling conversation, wrangling or disputing on any subject; and when we do hold conversation, let it be with those whose conversation is in Heaven, from whence we look for the Saviour. And when we pray, remember God hears every word, and knows every motive which dictates our prayers; and be sure that we be honest before God.

“‘If the experience which we have passed through, from the beginning of the present year,—the tarrying time from April until October and the sanctifying influence of the seventh month, with the humiliation and patience of those who are evidently looking for the redemption of the true Israel,—is not the beginning and preparation of the final cleansing of the sanctuary, then I will acknowledge I am deceived. The great fault with us who have been expounding the time of the fulfillment of prophecy, is, we have crowded all these things into a very unwarrantable short space of time, we have given no time for preparation, we were too impatient. Therefore, we are exhorted to be patient, and James says, “The Judge standeth at the door.” I am fully convinced the work has already begun. Let us then have patience, brethren, from this time until he comes; for the coming of the Lord draweth nigh.

“‘We have erred in many things, and even the second advent brethren were not prepared for the coming of Christ; they had, many of them, left the work of the Lord, and had been doing their own work. The work of the Lord, which he had commanded us to do, was to make the vision plain, to write it on tables, to give the alarm, the midnight cry, and wake up the virgins; and while these things, and these things only were attended to, our work prospered, and God was with us. And now, my dear brethren, permit me to be plain: I hope all who are worth saving are humble enough to bear my reproof, and I mean to give it with the sincerest of motives, and with the kindest affection of my heart.

“‘The causes which required God’s chastising hand upon us, were, in my humble opinion, Pride, Fanaticism, and Sectarianism. Pride worked in many ways. We ascribed our conquest in argument over our opponents to ourselves. We were seeking the honors or applause of men more than of God. We were some of us seeking to be leaders, instead of being servants—boasting too much of our doings. And Fanaticism: I know our enemies accused of this before we were guilty; but this did not excuse us for running into it. A thousand expressions were used, without thought or reflection, and I thought sometimes very irreverently, such as, “Bless God,” &c. I was afraid it was done in very many cases to the appearance of outward piety, rather than as the hidden manna of the heart. Sometimes our meetings were distinguished by noise and confusion, and, forgive me, brethren, if I express myself too strongly, it appeared to me more like Babel than a solemn assembly of penitents bowing in humble reverence before a holy God. I have often obtained more evidence of inward piety from a kindling eye, a wet cheek, and a choked utterance, than from all the noise in Christendom. Sectarianism: this is always produced by some private opinion of man, rather than by the plain declaration of God’s word. For years after I began to proclaim this blessed truth of Christ at the door, I never, if possible to avoid it, even alluded to sectarian principles; and the first objection my Baptist brethren brought against me, was, I mixed with, and preached unto, all denominations, even to Unitarians, &c. But we have recently, my brethren, been guilty of raising up a sect of our own; for, the very things which our fathers did, when they became sects, we have been doing. We have, like them, cried Babylon! Babylon!! Babylon!!! against all but Adventists. We have proclaimed and discussed, “pro et con,” many sectarian dogmas which have nothing to do with our message. May God forgive us. And now, brethren, we have need of patience, that after we have done the will of God, we may receive the promise. Yours as ever,

“‘Wm. Miller.’

On the 28th and 29th of December, 1844, a Conference was held at Low Hampton, where the following address, prepared by Bro. Miller at the request of the brethren, was presented by a committee, and unanimously adopted by the Conference:—

“‘ADDRESS TO ADVENT BELIEVERS.

“To the dear Second Advent brethren, scattered abroad: despised, but not forsaken; poor, yet making many rich; discarded by the proud Pharisees of our day, yet not discouraged; cruelly treated for the doctrine you love, and yet holding firmly to your hope of salvation at the door.

“‘We the undersigned, partakers of the same hope, children of the same faith, looking for the same deliverance, loving the same Lord, feeding on the same word, enjoying the same Spirit, suffering the same trials, subjected to like disappointments, and having the same care and fellowship for your welfare and furtherance in the truth, as ye have one for another and for us, address you by this our epistle, in the way of consolation and advice; knowing that while we may comfort and console your hearts, we are establishing and strengthening our own. For if through many disappointments, temptations and trials, you stand fast in the faith once delivered to the saints, we rejoice in your steadfastness, are comforted together with you, and are strengthened even in the inner and the outer man.

“‘We thank God always on your behalf, when we hear, as we already have heard, that your and our late disappointment has produced in you, and we hope in us also, a deep humiliation and close inspection of our hearts; and although we are humbled, and in some measure pained in our hearts to see and hear the scoffs and jeers of a wicked and perverse generation, yet we are in nowise terrified or cast down by the adversaries of our faith. We pray you, then, brethren, to “let patience have its perfect work,” knowing “that patience worketh experience, and experience hope, and hope maketh not ashamed.” No, we are not ashamed, for we all know why we hope. You can and will, all of you, from the least of you to the greatest, old or young, when inquired of for the reason of your hope, open your Bibles and with meekness and fear show the inquirer why you hope in the glorious appearing of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ. You need not in a single instance refer the inquirer to your minister to give the reason of your faith and hope.

“‘We bless God for you, my brethren, that you are all taught of the Lord. Your creed is the Scriptures; your spelling-book is the Bible; your grammar is the word indited by the Spirit; your geography respects the promised inheritance of the holy land; your astronomy respects the bright starry crown of righteousness; your philosophy is the wisdom which cometh down from God; your bond of union is the love and fellowship of the saints; your teacher is the Holy Ghost; and your professor, the Lord Jesus Christ; your recitation room is your closet; your recitations are heard in your prayers, and your songs fill up your vacations. We speak not of rewards, diplomas, and degrees, for these are reserved in Heaven for us, when these dusty walls of this tabernacle shall be dissolved, and we are called home into the new heavens and new earth, to a full fruition of that hope of which we are not ashamed. Ashamed of this hope? No. Ashamed of looking for this hope? No. Ashamed of expecting Jesus? Why, what a question!! When we look, do we not expect? The ministers of our formal churches, some of them, say “they look, but do not expect.” Yet, brethren, we have expected time and again and have been disappointed, but are not ashamed.

“‘We would not yield a hair’s breadth of our expectations for all the honors of Cæsar’s household, with all the popular applause of a worldly church. We exhort you, then, by all the love and fellowship of the saints, to hold fast to this hope. It is warranted by every promise of the word of God. It is secured to you by the two immutable things, the council and oath of God, in which it is impossible for God to lie. It is ratified and sealed by the death, blood, resurrection and life of Jesus Christ. You have already had a foretaste of the bliss of this hope, in the seventh month, when every moment you looked for the heavens to open and reveal unto your anxious gaze the King of glory. Yes, then your whole soul was ravished with a holy joy, when you expected every moment to hear the shout of the heavenly host descending from the Father’s glory, to welcome you, a weary pilgrim, to your blessed abode of eternal rest. In that eventful period where was the world with all its vain allurements and empty show? It was gone.

“‘If our Saviour then had come as we expected, no tears would have fallen for a receding world, nor sighs have heaved our breasts for a dissolving earth, with all its pomp, its pleasures, or its praises. All this was then no more to us than is a bubble in Niagara’s cataract. God’s goodness gave us then a slight repast, like Elijah’s meat, that lasted forty days. And how can you, or we, give up a hope so full of joy, of holy love and heavenly anticipation, as is this? The world may frown and scoff; the unbelieving church may laugh and sneer and try to call us back. They may and will report their slanderous tales to complete our trials, vainly supposing they can wound our pride, and by this means take away our hope, and make us, like themselves, a whited sepulcher. In all our trials those who have obtained this blessed hope by the study of the Scriptures have remained steadfast and immovable among the scoffs and jeers with which we have been assailed.

“‘This, to us, is a source of great joy; and it shows conclusively where our faith is founded and our hope predicated. It is upon the sure word of prophecy, and no other evidence, that we rely. This is our main support, as even our opposers will, and do, admit; or why do they, in their attacks upon us, first try to show that prophecy is not to be understood, or if it is, that it is couched in such mystical and ambiguous language, that the ignorant and unlearned (as they are pleased to call us poor Bible students, in their mighty elemency) cannot comprehend its true import? Or why do they ridicule us as a set of fanatical, unlearned heretics, in trying to understand the sure word of prophecy, without first coming to our bishops, or themselves, to learn what the original text may mean? Why do they use these and similar arguments in order to overthrow us if they are not sensible of the fact that the prophecies of God’s word are our main pillar? Why do they, without any discrimination, try to make our sure word of prophecy so dark, mysterious, and incomprehensible, and in many instances acknowledge their own ignorance, and then call us heretics because we search and believe what to us looks clear, consistent, and harmonious with every part of God’s holy word? But, say they, “time has proved you in an error; unerring time has favored us, and proved what you say we failed to do.”

“‘True, gentleman, time has failed us in one or two instances, yet you cannot show why? And as you do not show any reason for the failure, permit us to give ours before we take your ground and deny that prophecy can be understood. Every man of common intellect and information knows that we are dependent in some things on what we call human chronology for the conclusion of our premises as it respects time. Again, they well know that our most learned and studious writers and historians disagree in the chronology of the events from which we date, some four or five years. It is true that we who have been most efficient in presenting this subject before the public, have chosen, and we think wisely too, the earliest possible time at which these momentous things might be expected to transpire, believing that it would be infinitely better for the souls of our fellow-beings to come short of the time, rather than to pass over. And indeed, we do not see any good reason now why we should not have done in this matter as we have; for if we had looked only to the very last point of disputed time, and the accomplishment had come before that, or even at that time, how could there have been a tarrying time as the Bible predicts?

“‘How could there have been a time for the trial of our faith and patience, and the purifying and sanctifying of the whole house of the true Israel? If we had not anticipated the time a little, with what propriety could the wicked scoffer and those who professedly belong to the house of Israel say, “The days are prolonged, and every vision faileth”? and what has God said we shall answer this rebellious house of Israel with? With another specified time? No. How then shall we ever silence their caviling and scoffing, if we can fix no future time? We answer, That is not our work to do. God has promised to do that work. Hark! and hear what the Lord saith. “I will make this proverb to cease, and they shall no more use it as a proverb in Israel.” God will perform his engagements in his own time and manner. We have only to believe and be patient.

“‘But we are taunted with, “Oh! you have prolonged your vision again and again; and you have failed every time; now won’t you give it up and come back to us? You are not honest if you will not.” When they thus call us dishonest, have we nothing we can say? If we altogether hold our peace, they will be wise in their own conceits, and go and report that they have shut up our mouths so that we could not say a word for ourselves; and thus the cause would be injured. But never fear, brethren; God has told you what to say; do as he bids you, and he will take care of the consequences. God says, “But say unto them, The days are at hand, and the effect of every vision.” See Eze. 12:21-25. So we see God has been in this thing; he well knew into what a straightened place we should be brought; he knew what the rebellious house of Israel would say, and he has given us the best weapon of defense.

“‘The word of God has a sufficiency of all armor, that the man of God may be perfect, thoroughly furnished to every good work. We therefore hope that none of us will try to change the chronology of the visions; for they must all fail in all our eyes; and if any vision should be so construed as to fix on another definite time in the future, we cannot conceive how the Scripture would be fulfilled, that “every vision faileth.” Let us then be satisfied in patiently waiting for God’s time. But let us be careful that we do not lay off our armor, cease our watching, go to sleep at our post, or be caught in a snare, when the Son of man shall come. It is better to be ready before the time, and wait a while, than not to be ready when the time shall come, and be lost. We exhort you then with the Lord’s advice, “be like men waiting for their Lord, that when he cometh they may open to him immediately.”

“‘Again, we exhort you, brethren, that every one may edify, and be edified, that ye forsake not the assembling of yourselves together, as often as your situation and circumstances shall permit; that we may comfort and console each other in our trials, be established ourselves in the present truth, and our minds be stirred up to remember that our Judge is now standing at the door. How can we who have taken so great delight in the study of the blessed Bible, again return to the beggarly elements of vain philosophy and tradition of the fathers? We cannot sit under preaching where the Bible is discarded from the pulpit, except as a text-book, and the plainest passages of Scripture are mysticised and explained away, our hope in the resurrection of the body taken from us, and the kingdom of Heaven preached as in this state of division, persecution and death, and the promise of being caught up in the air, ridiculed by the oft-repeated slang of ascension robes. These things we cannot fellowship; we will not hear them repeated. We therefore advise you, dear brethren, to hold meetings for prayer, reading of the Scriptures, exhortation and singing, if you may not be able to obtain a lecturer or preacher. And may the Spirit of God bless you with his presence, and preserve you blameless unto his coming.

“‘Again we exhort you, brethren, to be faithful in business. Let every one labor with his hands, in the several callings in which God has placed us, that none of us may be a burden to any, and that we may all of us have wherewith to communicate and do good, for it is more blessed to give than to receive; and that we may none of us give any occasion to our enemies to reproach us with being busybodies in other men’s matters, or as not providing for our own house. In thus doing we may put to silence the reproaches of those who are seeking every occasion to destroy the doctrine that we rejoice to believe. We may, while we are engaged in our several occupations, be fervent in spirit, serving the Lord. If we could not, it would be evidence that we were not engaged in a proper calling; or, that our hearts were not right with God. Paul, the great apostle to the Gentiles, labored with his hands, that he might not be chargeable to the saints; and what was duty then, will be duty as long as the gospel remains to be preached. And we thank God we have never preached any other doctrine, you yourselves being our judges.

“‘We also beseech you, brethren, by the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ, that ye be not led about by every spirit; but try the spirits. For every spirit is not of God; and it is now evident that there are many spirits in the earth,—even the three unclean spirits which are working miracles, and deceiving not only kings, but the whole earth. It therefore becomes us to be very cautious by what spirit we are led. The spirit of error will lead us from the truth; and the Spirit of God will lead us into truth. But, say you, a man may be in error, and think he has the truth. What then? We answer, The spirit and word agree. If a man judges himself by the word of God, and finds a perfect harmony through the whole word, then we must believe we have the truth; but if he finds the spirit by which he is led does not harmonize with the whole tenor of God’s law, or book, then let us walk carefully, lest we be caught in the snare of the devil and fall from our own steadfastness; and so be deceived, and lose the crown for which we are running. Let us follow the teachings of the apostle Paul in Titus 2:12, “That denying ungodliness and worldly lusts, we should live soberly, righteously, and godly, in this present world.” Or, as Peter tells us in his second epistle, chap. 3:11, “Seeing then that all these things shall be dissolved, what manner of persons ought ye to be in all holy conversation and godliness.” In both cases the context teaches us to look for the coming of the day of God; or, which is the same thing, “the glorious appearing of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ.”

“‘There are a few individuals among us who are teaching that Christ has come, and that we were not mistaken in the time, but only in the manner of his coming. Let us be careful lest we cease from our watchfulness and so that day come upon us unawares. Remember that the same Jesus will come in like manner as they saw him ascend; and every eye shall see him, and we shall see him as he is, and be like him, when that day shall come for which we look; and then “the heavens being on fire, shall be dissolved, and the elements melt with fervent heat.” If the one can be spiritualized away, all the rest must of course be spiritualized in like manner; and it would make the whole description of the Judgment but a jumble of nonsense. We hope but few will be carried away by such vain trifling with the Bible.

“‘If God does not mean what he says, to whom shall we go for instruction? Who has been his counselor? and who has set in the council chamber of the Almighty? Man is but grass, and the flower thereof fadeth. He is but of yesterday, and his life but a breath. “Cursed is the man who trusteth in man, and maketh flesh his arm, and whose heart departeth from the Lord.” Hold on then, brethren, to the sure word of prophecy, for you will reap soon the fruits of your faith, if you faint not.’

“January 29, 1845, by the action of an ecclesiastical council, Mr. Miller and the majority of the church in Low Hampton were virtually separated from the Baptist denomination. About this time Mr. Miller wrote the following, which appeared in the Advent Herald for Feb. 12, 1845:—

“‘Dear Bro. Bliss: I have received a number of letters from almost every part of the country, almost all of them propounding the same questions, viz., What I thought of the experience we had in what was denominated the seventh month? And also, What was my opinion concerning the closing of the door of mercy, or probation for sinners? To save a multiplicity of letters, I thought best to answer these queries through the Herald, if you should think proper.

“‘1. The experience of the seventh month. The sympathetic and simultaneous movement on the minds of almost all the Second Advent brethren, and on many others preceding the tenth, the rapidity with which that sentiment was received, the general credence that was given to it, by nearly all of those who were looking for immediate redemption, the humbling effect it produced on the hearts and conduct of those who believed,—in the abandonment of all worldly objects, the sacrifice of earthly goods, and in many cases the total dedication of soul and body to God,—the deep and anxious feelings of heart which many of us felt, all marked its character. Then we expected every moment the heavens would open and reveal to us the dear Saviour with all his shining hosts, and we should see the graves open and the loved forms of our relations rising from their dusty beds in immortal bloom and eternal life; and we ourselves pass the sudden change from mortality to immortality, from time to eternity. Then, as we verily thought, we had bid adieu to this world of sin, of misery and woe, and expected to be ushered into the new heavens and new earth wherein dwelleth righteousness. Oh, blissful day! How solemn, yet how interesting. I hope to see another day like this, and literally realize what I then expected. It was a day long to be remembered, and I cannot account for it on any other principle than to suppose God’s benevolent hand and wisdom was in the movement....

“‘But you ask why I do not show whether the probation of sinners is ended.[28] I answer, It is a close point, and if handled at all, it ought to be done very wisely and with a great deal of humility. I would not grieve, if possible to avoid it, one of Christ’s little ones. There is much sensitiveness on this point among our good brethren, therefore I would much rather keep my views in my own breast, if I could, and do right, than run the risk of hurting the oil and the wine. You will, therefore, permit me to give my views by the Scripture; and first, Dan. 12:10, “Many shall be purified, and made white, and tried; but the wicked shall do wickedly; and none of the wicked shall understand; but the wise shall understand.” It will be readily seen by this text, that before the end, the people of God must be “purified, made white, and tried.” Now if probation goes on until the last moment of time, how can those who are regenerated in this last moment have their faith and patience tried?

“‘Again, Rev. 7:13, 14, “And one of the elders answered, saying unto me, What are these which are arrayed in white robes? and whence came they? And I said unto him, Sir, thou knowest. And he said to me, These are they which came out of great tribulation, and have washed their robes, and made them white in the blood of the Lamb.” How can it be said, that those made white “came out of great tribulation,” if in the next moment after they experience the new birth, they are beyond all tribulation and trial? Also in the first passage, the wicked are to do wickedly; and none of the wicked shall understand. Yet if one of these wicked is converted after the time specified, then the word none could not be true in fact. This must be in time, it cannot mean in eternity.

“‘Zech. 13:9, “And I will bring the third part through the fire, and will refine them as silver is refined, and will try them as gold is tried; they shall call on my name, and I will hear them; I will say, It is my people; and they shall say, The Lord is my God.” Here we learn that they are tried in this state, where they will need to pray.

“‘Mal. 3:18, “Then shall ye return, and discern between the righteous and the wicked, between him that serveth God and him that serveth him not.” When shall that test be given, which shall make us discern between the righteous and the wicked? The answer is plain, before the day cometh that shall burn as an oven. For in that day no doubt could rest on any mind, who is who, or what is the character each individual would appear in.

“‘Rev. 22:11, “He that is unjust, let him be unjust still; and he which is filthy, let him be filthy still; and he that is righteous, let him be righteous still; and he that is holy, let him be holy still.” This text is perfectly plain and needs no comment. The 12th verse, “And behold, I come quickly; and my reward is with me, to give every man according as his work shall be,” shows that a little while before Christ comes, every character will be determined. “He,” that is, any one, or every one who is unjust or filthy, let him be so still; and so on the other hand, he that is righteous or holy, let them be so still. “And behold,” connects the sentence before and what follows after, and is a caution for us to take particular notice of the reason why they are in this peculiar situation or fixed state, as though the idle servants could have no more time to mind their day’s work, which God had given them in their day of probation to perform.

“‘The eleventh hour was passed, and no chance for them to enter the master’s vineyard now, in this last hour. While on the other hand, the good servant might know that the good master was at the door, and he would quickly pay them their wages, and relieve them from their toils. See Matt. 20:1-16.

“‘Then this agrees with St. Paul, Heb. 10:36, 37, “For ye have need of patience, that, after ye have done the will of God, ye might receive the promise. For yet a little while, and he that shall come will come, and will not tarry.” After we have done our work, we have need of patience to wait for the Master, “for yet a little while, and he that shall come will come, and will not tarry.” I did believe, and must honestly confess I do now, that I have done my work in warning sinners, and that in the seventh month. I know my feelings are no rule for others; therefore, let every one who feels he has a duty to do for sinners, let him do it. I will have no hard feelings. But I must be honest; when I am inquired of, I must state my own conviction honestly. I have done it, and given my reasons from the word of God. And now let me say, brethren, we will have no contention on this point, for we be brethren. Let every man be fully persuaded in his own mind, and so let them speak or preach, as God and their own consciences may dictate.

“‘I have a strong expectation that Christ will come before the Jewish year will expire; but let us all see to it that we are ready every day, so that when he comes we shall not be ashamed before him. This letter must suffice for all those friends who have requested my views on the subject. My love to all who love our Lord Jesus Christ and pray for his kingdom.

“‘Wm. Miller.’

“The editors of the Advent Herald replied to Mr. Miller’s arguments, and contended that probation only terminated with the personal coming of Christ. His letter, as published, gave little satisfaction to either party. Both claimed him. To determine his actual position, Prof. N. N. Whiting wrote him, and Mr. Miller replied as follows:—

“‘Low Hampton, March 10, 1845.

“‘My Dear Brother:—Your favor of the 5th was gladly received, and I take this early opportunity to answer your inquiries as far as my memory or knowledge will admit.

“‘As it respects your first question, whether, in my judgment, “the time of probation came to an end on the 22d of October or not,” I answer, My mind was not definite on that day. But the experience and scenes of that month were astounding to me, and my mind was brought to a conclusion that God, by his invisible angels, was separating the two classes of men, the chaff from the wheat. But to say my judgment was fully convinced that it was closed, I must say, No. I know it is true that, in answer to a score of letters, making the same inquiries as yourself, in my letter, published in the Herald, of February 12, I gave several texts, which, to me, were evidence that, before Christ came, there would be a time when men would seek, knock, and cry, and it would not be opened; for, how sinners could or would knock in the eternal state, I have no means of knowing. The editors of the Herald, knowing more about the controversy which had begun in the ranks of the Adventists than I did or could, in order to prevent the mischief or harm which they supposed my letter might do, attached their notes, which gave the brethren on the other side of the question more reason to suppose I had taken the ground that the door was shut in the seventh month....

“‘With our present light, it would be impossible for any man to prove that the door is shut; it can only be a conjecture, founded upon circumstances in the case. There are two cases which I will mention: one would be the cessation of the operation of the Spirit upon the hearts of the truly pious in laboring and praying for sinners; and the other must be the fearful looking for the fiery indignation, which, I think, according to the Scripture, must seize upon the hearts of those who have willfully rejected Christ. The hypocrite is given over to believe a lie, considering himself safe in his profession; and, consequently, the despair of some, and the perfect recklessness of others, and the restraint of the Holy Spirit being withdrawn from the minds of the impenitent, would immediately produce a time of trouble such as Daniel 12:1 speaks of: “And at that time shall Michael stand up, the great Prince which standeth for the children of thy people; and there shall be a time of trouble, such as never was since there was a nation even to that same time; and at that time thy people shall be delivered, every one that shall be found written in the book.” These would at least be evidences to my suspicion, if not to my full assurance. It was a fact, for a few days in the seventh month in the circle of my acquaintance, that the reports I heard from every quarter led me to have strong suspicion that we had approached the time which I cannot but believe we must experience before the end. I think at present the evidence is strong against the idea of the door being shut; but those brethren who have adopted the suspicion at least ought to be treated with a great deal of kindness. I do not like much I have seen published and spoken on both sides of the question. It is one of that kind of questions which is calculated to divide warm friends; for it cannot be settled satisfactorily but by time and experience.

“‘The arguments, in my humble opinion, on both sides, want a great quantity of brotherly love to make them digest easily. I, then, beg and pray, my brethren, that we may let contention alone before it is meddled with.[29] And I now plead with those who have supposed the door to be shut to yield the point to our brethren of the opposite view; for it is evident at present that all the evidence is against its being now shut, if we can believe the reports of our brethren from different parts; and surely my soul will not permit me to doubt their veracity who have been with us as pioneers in the work of calling up the world to this important point of our faith, the second advent of Jesus. Let us be silent at least for two months, if Christ does not come before, and by that time I think we shall obtain more light; and if Christ does come, we shall not wish to be found contending with brethren of a like precious faith on a subject dependent wholly on circumstances in which we may be so likely to err. I do hope my advice will be heeded in this thing, and that we will be patient, and not grieve each other; for the Judge is at the door....

“‘William Miller.’

Writing on the 7th of April, he referred to these things as follows:—

“‘Low Hampton, April 7, 1845.

“‘My Dear Bro. Himes: I should utterly despair of the second advent cause were it not evident, by its past and present history, that God is for us. You know, my dear brother, there was a time when you and I, with a few choice brethren, stood alone.... We acknowledged our weakness, and claimed no superiority over our fellows. We provoked no one to combat, and made no attack on the prevailing or popular institutions of the day; yet they began to be alarmed. Why? Because, as the people began to hear the foolish reports of our enemies, they became more and more anxious to know what these things meant....

“‘Among the many pious who took sides with us were some of those uneasy, ever-changing, unstable, insubordinate, and self-exalted spirits, who stood ready to jump on and ride into notice and power the moment they saw how the case would go. This kind of spirits have always seized the reins of government, are never satisfied with their present position, and will change with every new moon. There are many of this class among us, if not of us, at the present time, who are trying to lead away followers after them.

“‘This is a peculiar time. The greatest variety of fanciful interpretations of Scripture are now being presented by new luminaries, reflecting their rays of light and heat in every direction. Some of these are wandering stars, and some emit only twilight. I am sick of this everlasting changing; but, my dear brother, we must learn to have patience. If Christ comes this spring, we shall not need it long; and if he comes not, we shall need much more. I am prepared for the worst, and hope for the best. God will not forsake us, unless we forsake him....

“‘It is a small thing to be judged of man’s judgment, says the apostle; so that you need not fear man. I have often been consigned to perdition, and yet I have a blessed hope. I often think, when I hear a brother judging and condemning another, what an excellent pope he would make. Therefore, fear them not; for if we judge and condemn our brother, we are making ourselves “judges of the law, rather than doers of the law.” ...

“‘Wm. Miller.’

We find in the Signs of the Times for March 12, 1845, a statement from Mr. Miller relative to himself and the Bible, taken from The Investigator, an infidel paper published in Boston.

“‘TO THE EDITOR OF THE INVESTIGATOR.

“‘Sir,—Your kind offer to publish all the letters from those who have been converted from infidelity to Millerism, prompts me to give you a short account of my own conversion, which may enable you the better to judge what Millerism is.

“‘When I was of age, I settled in a village where all the heads of the families were deists, as they were then called, and they put into my hands all the deistical writings of that age. I soon became one of them, and the consequence was, I denied the Bible being of divine origin, calling it a “book of priestcraft,” and argued that the professors of it themselves must, if honest, concede that it could not be from God; because it professed to be a revelation from God, and yet more than half was a mystery which could not be understood. And some went as far as to say we ought not to try to understand it. This, to my mind, was a plain and palpable contradiction. I therefore rejected the Bible, when I ought to have rejected the expounders of it. Thus, from 1804 to 1816, I was a firm, and, as I then thought, a consistent, opposer of the Christian faith. In 1816, by the grace of God, my eyes were opened to see the weakness and folly of my own faith, founded on nothing but the philosophy, assumptions and fancies of erring mortals. I saw a great want of evidence for a faith in these matters, more substantial and certain than anything I then had. I felt in my inmost soul that eternal consequences might hang upon my faith in these things, for anything to the contrary which I could show. I had often laughed at my Christian friends for having a “blind faith,” believing what they could not understand. I now saw that my faith was as blind as theirs, if not more so, for I could prove nothing hereafter, and of course I had no reasonable hope.

“‘This brought me to examine for myself the evidence of the Christian’s hope. I therefore laid by my former prejudices, prepossessions, commentators, writers, pro and con, and determined in my own mind to examine the Bible for myself. And if the Bible did prove itself to be of divine origin, I would believe it, let the consequences be as they might; but if it did not, then I would reject it and be a deist still. Then I began the Bible, determined in my own mind to know whether God or man was the author. I spent the greater part of two years in reading and comparing scripture with scripture, prophecy with history, and I had not gone half through with the reading of it, before I was perfectly satisfied of its divine origin. No mortal man, or men, could have written with such harmony, wisdom, and truth, without inspiration. The Bible answered all my inquiries, settled all my doubts, established my faith, and gave me hope which has been nearly or quite twenty-seven years an anchor to my soul. I have seen much of it fulfilled, since then, and I can truly say, If there is any one thing on earth which I love above all others, it is the Bible.

“‘And now, sir, let me tell you, Millerism is to believe, try to understand, love, and proclaim to others, the good news contained in the Bible. This is all I have ever done to call down the slander of the several sects which I have received. I can say, honestly, I have never designed to proclaim or publish any sentiment, word, or doctrine, but such as I found clearly taught in that blessed inspired volume. Let God be my judge, I know I believe it. And I pray God that you, my dear sir, may become a Millerite too.

“‘For I believe there is no religion in our world that gives such a blessed hope as the religion of the Bible. All others are dark and incomprehensible concerning a future state. “To be, or not to be,” was a question which the ancient philosophers of Greece and Rome could never settle among themselves. Nor all the wisdom of our modern writers were able to settle this important point for our hope. But you will acknowledge, if the Bible is the word of inspiration, then that point is forever settled, and we have an answer to the question of immortality and eternal life.

“‘I admire your frankness and generosity as an opponent, and believe you are not wishing to bind men to your particular views or creed; but are willing to search yourself, and to let all others search for true light, on so important a subject as I think this matter is,—the truth or falsity of what I call the blessed Bible. I have strong hope, my dear sir, that you will give this subject a thorough investigation. As it respects the statement of Bro. Himes, if you will keep open your columns as fairly as you hitherto have done, you will soon be convinced it was not a very random shot. I am, sir, a lover of an honest man. Yours, &c.,

“‘Wm. Miller.’

CHAPTER XVII.

MUTUAL CONFERENCE AT ALBANY—DECLARATION OF PRINCIPLES—PLAN OF OPERATIONS—ADDRESS TO THE BRETHREN—ACTION OF THE CONFERENCE DEFENDED BY MR. MILLER, ETC.

“On the 23d of April, Mr. Miller, in company with Mr. Himes, visited Albany, and commenced a course of lectures on the prophecies. Mr. M. spoke with his usual clearness and ability, was in good spirits, and was listened to by a large and respectful audience.

“On the 29th, the Conference assembled at 9 A. M., at the ‘House of Prayer,’ in Grand street. After singing, and a prayer by Mr. Miller, it was temporarily organized by the choice of Mr. Miller, Chairman, and Mr. Himes, Secretary, who stated the objects for which the Conference had been called, namely, ‘to consult together respecting the condition and wants of brethren in the several sections of the country; that we may be better enabled to act in concert, and with more efficiency, in the promulgation of gospel truths.’

“After the names and residences of members were ascertained, the Conference was fully organized by the choice of Rev. Elon Galusha, of Lockport, N. Y., President, and S. Bliss and O. R. Fassett, Secretaries.

“A committee of twelve, consisting of William Miller, Josiah Litch, N. N. Whiting, J. V. Himes, Sylvester Bliss, L. D. Fleming, Erastus Parker, H. Caswell, I. R. Gates, I. H. Shipman, Prosper Powell, and Elon Galusha, were appointed to arrange business for the action of the Conference. While they were thus engaged, the others were profitably occupied in listening to statements of the condition of things in different sections of the country. The committee reported, in part, on the second day, and in full on the third and last day of the session as follows:—

“‘REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE TO THE CONFERENCE.

“‘Your committee, appointed for the purpose of taking into consideration the great principles upon which we can unite and act in advancing the cause of truth, for the edification of the body of Christ, the salvation of souls, and the preparation of man for the near advent of the Saviour, submit the following report:—

“‘In view of the many conflicting opinions, unscriptural views, leading to unseemly practices, and the sad divisions which have been thereby caused by some professing to be Adventists, we deem it incumbent on us to declare to the world our belief that the Scriptures teach, among others, the following

“‘IMPORTANT TRUTHS.

“‘1. That the heavens and earth which are now, by the word of God, are kept in store, reserved unto fire against the day of Judgment and perdition of ungodly men. That the day of the Lord will come as a thief in the night, in the which the heavens shall pass away with a great noise, and the elements shall melt with fervent heat; the earth also, and the works that are therein, shall be burned up. That the Lord will create new heavens and a new earth, wherein righteousness—that is, the righteous—will forever dwell.[30] And that the kingdom and the dominion under the whole heaven shall be given to the people of the saints of the Most High, whose kingdom is an everlasting kingdom, and all dominions shall serve and obey him.[31]

“‘2. That there are but two advents or appearings of the Saviour to this earth.[32] That both are personal and visible.[33] That the first took place in the days of Herod,[34] when he was conceived of the Holy Ghost,[35] born of the Virgin Mary,[36] went about doing good,[37] suffered on the cross, the just for the unjust,[38] died,[39] was buried,[40] arose again the third day, the first-fruits of them that slept,[41] and ascended into the heavens,[42] which must receive him until the times of the restitution of all things, spoken of by the mouth of all the holy prophets.[43] That the second coming or appearing will take place when he shall descend from Heaven, at the sounding of the last trump, to give his people rest,[44] being revealed from heaven in flaming fire, taking vengeance on them that know not God, and obey not the gospel.[45] And that he will judge the quick and the dead at his appearing and kingdom.[46]

“‘3. That the second coming or appearing is indicated to be now emphatically nigh, even at the doors,[47] by the chronology of the prophetic periods,[48] the fulfillment of prophecy,[49] and the signs of the times.[50] And that this truth should be preached both to saints and sinners, that the first may rejoice, knowing their redemption draweth nigh,[51] and the last be warned to flee from the wrath to come,[52] before the Master of the house shall rise up and shut to the door.[53]

“‘4. That the condition of salvation is repentance toward God, and faith in our Lord Jesus Christ.[54] And that those who have repentance and faith will live soberly, and righteously, and godly, in this present world, looking for that blessed hope, and the glorious appearing of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ.[55]

“‘5. That there will be a resurrection of the bodies of all the dead,[56] both of the just and the unjust.[57] That those who are Christ’s will be raised at his coming.[58] That the rest of the dead will not live again until after a thousand years.[59] And that the saints shall not all sleep, but shall be changed in the twinkling of an eye at the last trump.[60]

“‘6. That the only millennium taught in the word of God is the thousand years which are to intervene between the first resurrection and that of the rest of the dead, as inculcated in the 20th of Revelation.[61] And that the various portions of scripture which refer to the millennial state are to have their fulfillment after the resurrection of all the saints who sleep in Jesus.[62]

“‘7. That the promise, that Abraham should be the heir of the world, was not to him, or to his seed, through the law, but through the righteousness of faith.[63] That they are not all Israel which are of Israel.[64] That there is no difference, under the gospel dispensation, between Jew and Gentile.[65] That the middle wall of partition that was between them is broken down, no more to be rebuilt.[66] That God will render to every man according to his deeds.[67] That if we are Christ’s, then are we Abraham’s seed, and heirs according to the promise.[68] And that the only restoration of Israel, yet future, is the restoration of the saints to the earth, created anew, when God shall open the graves of those descendants of Abraham who died in faith, without receiving the promise, with the believing Gentiles who have been grafted in with them into the same olive tree; and shall cause them to come up out of their graves, and bring them, with the living, who are changed, into the land of Israel.[69]

“‘8. That there is no promise of this world’s conversion.[70] That the horn of papacy will war with the saints, and prevail against them, until the Ancient of Days shall come, and judgment be given to the saints of the Most High, and the time come that the saints possess the kingdom.[71] That the children of the kingdom, and the children of the wicked one, will continue together until the end of the world, when all things that offend shall be gathered out of the kingdom, and the righteous shall shine forth as the sun in the kingdom of their Father.[72] That the man of sin will only be destroyed by the brightness of Christ’s coming.[73] And that the nations of those which are saved and redeemed to God by the blood of Christ, out of every kindred, and tongue, and people, and nation, will be made kings and priests unto God, to reign forever on the earth.[74]

“‘9. That it is the duty of the ministers of the word to continue in the work of preaching the gospel to every creature, even unto the end,[75] calling upon them to repent, in view of the fact that the kingdom of Heaven is at hand;[76] that their sins may be blotted out when the times of refreshing shall come from the presence of the Lord.[77]

“‘10. That the departed saints do not enter their inheritance, or receive their crowns, at death.[78] That they without us cannot be made perfect.[79] That their inheritance, incorruptible and undefiled, and that fadeth not away, is reserved in Heaven, ready to be revealed in the last time.[80] That there are laid up for them and us crowns of righteousness, which the Lord, the righteous Judge, shall give at the day of Christ to all that love his appearing.[81] That they will only be satisfied when they awake in Christ’s likeness.[82] And that, when the Son of man shall come in his glory, and all the holy angels with him, the King will say to those on his right hand, “Come, ye blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world.”[83] Then they will be equal to the angels, being the children of God and of the resurrection.[84]

“‘ASSOCIATED ACTION.

“‘We are induced, from present circumstances affecting our spiritual interests, to present, for your consideration, a few ideas touching associated action.

“‘Order is Heaven’s first law. All things emanating from God are constituted on principles of perfect order. The New Testament rules for the government of the church we regard as binding on the whole brotherhood of Christ. No circumstances can justify us in departing from the usages established by Christ and his apostles.

“‘We regard any congregation of believers, who habitually assemble for the worship of God and the due observance of gospel ordinances, as a church of Christ. As such, it is an independent body, accountable only to the great Head of the church. To all such we recommend a careful examination of the Scriptures, and the adoption of such principles of association and order as are in accordance therewith, that they may enjoy the advantages of that church relation which Christ has instituted.

“‘PLAN OF OPERATIONS.

“‘In the midst of our disappointed hopes of seeing the King of glory, and being made like him, and still finding ourselves in a world of sin, snares, and death, the question forces itself upon us, What now is our work?

“‘To us it seems clear that our first work is to make straight paths for our feet, lest that which is lame be turned out of the way. We are in duty bound to give the household meat in due season, and to build ourselves up in our most holy faith. While doing this, we are to continue in obedience to the great commission, to preach the gospel to every creature; so long as the love of Christ dwells in us, it will constrain us. We shall not be released, while in our present state, from our obligations to be “workers, together with God,” in saving those for whom the Redeemer died. It is evident that the duty, which of right devolves on every minister of the gospel, of proclaiming the hour of God’s judgment, is, if performed at all, to be done by those who are convinced of its truth....’

“The above, after a full discussion and careful examination, was unanimously adopted; as was also, from the pen of Mr. Miller, the following

“‘ADDRESS TO THE BRETHREN.

“‘The present state of our faith and hope, with the severe trials which many of us experience, call for much brotherly love, forbearance, patience, and prayer. No cause, be it ever so holy, can exist in this present world, without its attendant evils. Therefore, it becomes necessary for all who are connected with this cause to exercise great charity; for charity covers a multitude of sins.

“‘The cause we advocate calls upon all men to read the word of God, and to reason, judge, compare, and digest for themselves. This is certainly right, and is the privilege of all rational members of the community. Yet this very liberty may become a stumbling-block to many, and without charity, be the means of scattering, dividing, and causing contention among brethren. Human nature is such that those who are governed by a desire to rule over others will seize the reins, and think all must bow to their decision; while others will think such unfit for the station they assume. James foresaw the evils under which we labor, and gives us a caution in his third chapter, to which we shall do well to take heed. Our present difficulties arise more from the multiplicity of masters and leaders among us (some of whom are governed by carnal motives) than from any want of light. The word of God affords light enough to guide us in all cases, “that the man of God may be perfect, thoroughly furnished unto every good work.” But among the thousand-and-one expositions of Scripture, which are every day being palmed upon us, some of them, at least, must be wrong. Many of them are so weak and silly that they bring a stigma on the blessed book, confuse the mind of the inquirer after truth, and divide the children of God.

“‘To remedy this evil, we must learn to judge men and principles by their fruits, and not be too hasty in receiving the exposition which may be presented by every pretender to wisdom and sanctity. Any exposition of Scripture which conflicts with other texts must be spurious. Any man whose object is to obtain followers must be avoided. Whatever produces envy and strife, brethren, is of the devil; and we must resist his temptations in their beginning. If God has been with us from the commencement of our illumination respecting the hope of his glorious appearing, shall we abandon the truth wherein our souls have been comforted, and our brotherly love established, for fables? We ought to be careful lest we grieve the Holy Spirit. How did we receive this doctrine at first? Was it not by searching the word of God, and a careful comparison of scripture with scripture? Yes; our faith did not rest on the word of man. We then required chapter and verse, or we would not believe. Why should we leave our former rule of faith, to follow the vain and changing opinions of men? Some are neglecting the lamp, and seeking to walk by sparks of their own kindling. There is a propensity in many to make all prophecy apply to our time and country. Others have split on this rock. Some of the best writers and commentators have thus erred. They have, in many instances, considered themselves, their sect, or their nation, as the peculiar favorites of Heaven; and have therefore often failed to apply prophecy aright. An Englishman, writing on prophecy, will make the English territory the principal place of action—the Frenchman, France—the German, Germany—and an American, the United States. So is it with all sectarians. When minds are contracted by selfishness and bigotry, they lose sight of the glory of God, and his word, and seek only their own glory. On the other hand, they neglect, if they do not actually reject, such parts of the oracles of God as militate against their views, and rush headlong into error. If we are thus liable to be deceived by the cunning craftiness of men, we ought to be cautious how we are led by every fanciful interpretation of Scripture. Let us then be more wary, and, like the noble Bereans, search the Scriptures daily, to see whether these things are so. Then, if we err, we shall have the consolation that we have made a careful examination of the subject, and that the error was one of the head, and not of the heart. Christians should receive no evidence but the testimony of God as a ground of faith.

“‘We are commanded to be sober, and hope to the end for that grace which is to be brought unto us at the revelation of Jesus Christ. Our disappointment, as to the time, should have no effect on our hope. We know that Christ has not yet been revealed, and the object of our hope is yet in the future. Therefore, if we believe in God’s word, as we profess, we ought to be thankful for the trial of our faith.

“‘We shall not have to wait long for the glorious appearing of Christ. Therefore, let us lift up our heads and rejoice, knowing that our redemption draweth nigh. We regret to see any impatience manifested among the friends of Jesus. God is now trying our graces. How solemn the thought that any should lose the crown when near the goal! Let us arise, shake off our dullness, redouble our diligence, let all the world know there is such a grace as Christian perseverance, and let all see that we are truly seeking a better country. Can it be possible, after we have run well for a season, loved the appearing of Jesus, come to a time when we must expect him, and should be ready to cast ourselves into his arms, that we shall go back, or again strike hands with a thoughtless world? May God forbid! Let us then go forward. It is death to go back; to go forward can be no more.

“‘We are pained to see a disposition to murmur against those who have been pioneers in the war—who have sacrificed all earthly considerations to support a truth so unpopular as the second advent and personal reign of Jesus Christ.

“‘Brethren, shun such as cause divisions among very friends. Remember the admonition of James: “Grudge not one against another, brethren, lest ye be condemned; behold, the Judge standeth at the door.” We see, by this rule, that when a brother loses his fellowship for the saints, he is certainly in darkness. We must be careful not to follow what he may term “light.” Love for brethren is a test of our interest in Christ, without which all gifts and works are like sounding brass, and a tinkling cymbal. Let us cultivate, with peculiar care, this loveliest of all Christian graces, and frown on the man who attempts to cause division. “Offenses must needs come, but woe to that man by whom the offense cometh!” What can we say more, to stir up your pure minds by way of remembrance?

“‘We would, therefore, recommend more study of the Scriptures, and less writing, and that we be careful not to submit to public inspection mere speculations until they are closely scrutinized by some judicious friend. Thus we shall avoid many errors. We should always be more jealous of ourselves than of others. Self-love is the strongest, most dangerous, and deceitful foe that we meet in our Christian warfare. We have arrived at a period of deep interest and peril. It is interesting, because the evidence of the Saviour being at the door is plain, so that no sincere student of prophecy can be at a loss to know that that day, for which all other days were made, is near. How interesting to live in expectation of the day which patriarchs, prophets, and apostles, desired to see, but died without the sight! Persecution and death lose their sting, in prospect of the coming Conqueror, who hath all power, and who hath engaged to put all enemies under his feet. We need not murmur; for, in this our day, God will bring to pass this act, this (to the worldly man) strange act, for which all the weary saints, for six thousand years, have lived and prayed. We entreat you to hold fast the confidence which you have had in the word of God unto the end. “Yet a little while, and he that shall come will come, and will not tarry.” “Here is the patience and the faith of the saints.” “Be ye also patient; stablish your hearts, for the coming of the Lord draweth nigh.”

“‘Wm. Miller, Chairman of Committee.’

“The doings of that Conference were unanimously ratified by the annual Conferences subsequently held, in that year in New York and in Boston; and the ‘important truths’ there inculcated were often unanimously re-affirmed, so that they have become the settled principles of those known as Adventists. Others, dissenting from them, but agreeing in unimportant particulars, and yet claiming to be Adventists, are not recognized as such by Adventists.[85]

“Mr. Miller was in Boston, where he arrived on Saturday, May 24, to attend the annual Conference there of the week following. That commenced on Monday, May 26, when Mr. M. discoursed from Rev. 6:17: ‘For the great day of his wrath is come; and who shall be able to stand?’ He made a personal and practical application of this event, and presented the evidence of its probable nearness.

“During the Conference, he spoke feelingly of the passing of the time. He remarked that, ‘Ere this, he had been in hopes of meeting all present in the heavenly kingdom. But, if we love the Lord Jesus Christ, however much we may be disappointed, we shall not forget Christ’s coming. God may see fit to disappoint us, sometimes, for our good. We may not see the wisdom and fullness of the whole of God’s plan; but he never tries us but for our profit. Therefore, we should not be disheartened or cast down.’ Every disappointment only made him more strong in the belief of the certainty of the nearness of Christ’s appearing.

“‘I had,’ he said, ‘denied the Bible for twelve years. I used to read it to see how curiously men would act, and contradict each other. But suddenly I became more solemn; its truth began to dawn upon my mind; and I was in great darkness for six months. I saw that I was a poor sinner; but I was soon enabled to love Jesus Christ, and have continued to love him even till the present time. I saw that, if the Bible was true, Christ was the only Saviour of men. I then began to study the Scriptures more fully—determined to study, text by text, till I was fully satisfied as to their import. In comparing scripture with scripture, such a light broke in upon my mind as I had never before seen. I was about two years in going through with the Bible in this manner; and I found it a perfect piece of order and beauty. And, though I have been greatly disappointed, yet I have never ceased to love and regard the authority of the Scriptures.

“‘Brethren, we must keep humble. I sometimes tremble when I see individuals endeavoring to exalt themselves, and denounce others who do not see just as they do. Be careful not to err in favor of self. Be careful to avoid self-righteousness. I have noticed that those who have left the second advent cause are the very ones for whom I used to tremble, in view of their arrogancy and self-righteousness. We must not look to ourselves, but must look alone to God. We must cling to our Heavenly Father’s arm, that we may hold fast our confidence even unto the end. The word of God teaches us that we are to be guided alone by him. Had our brethren who have apostatized thus looked to him, they would never have fallen into the awful errors into which they have been led. I love those brethren, but I tremble for their errors. Oh! let us depend wholly on God, that we may be preserved also from departing from the rectitude of our faith! And may we all be enabled to live out the prayer, “Not my will, O God, but thine be done.”’

CHAPTER XVIII.

HIS APOLOGY AND DEFENSE—DEFINITENESS OF PROPHETIC TIME—ERRONEOUS VIEWS CONNECTED WITH THE DOCTRINE, ETC.

“After the Boston Conference, Mr. Miller accompanied Mr. Himes to Portland, Me., where he gave discourses in the afternoon and evening of Sunday, June 1, to crowded audiences. Many of those present, doubtless, were drawn to hear him by motives of curiosity, because of the disappointment in time. The necessity of patience and of watchfulness were subjects on which he discoursed.

“He returned to Boston, and from thence went to a camp-meeting at Champlain, N. Y., on the 10th of June. After this, he returned home, in the enjoyment of good general health, but somewhat afflicted by boils.

“As the author of a movement which had resulted in disappointment, and, in some respects, disaster, Mr. Miller deemed it proper that he should make a personal statement to the Christian public, show the motives that had actuated him, and disavow any sympathy with the extremes into which some had gone, contrary to his earnest remonstrances. His growing infirmities made him shrink from the labor of writing, and caused him to desire an amanuensis. For this purpose, the writer of this visited him in the month of July, 1845, and Mr. Miller dictated his ‘Apology and Defense,’ a tract of thirty-six pages, which was published by Mr. Himes, in Boston. It was addressed ‘To all who love the Lord Jesus Christ in sincerity,’ and commenced with:—

“‘As all men are responsible to the community for the sentiments they may promulgate, the public have a right to expect from me a candid statement in reference to my disappointment in not realizing the advent of Christ in A. D. 1843-4, which I had confidently believed. I have, therefore, considered it not presumptuous in me to lay before the Christian public a retrospective view of the whole question, the motives that actuated me, and the reasons by which I was guided.’

“He then proceeded to narrate his early history, and gave an account of his ‘deistical opinions,’ his ‘first religious impressions,’ his ‘connection with the army,’ his ‘removal to Low Hampton,’ his ‘determination to understand the Scriptures,’ his ‘manner of studying the Bible,’ the ‘results arrived at,’ and his subsequent labors; all of which have been noticed at greater length in the foregoing pages. He then summed up his labors as follows:—

“‘From the commencement of that publication, I was overwhelmed with invitations to labor in various places, with which I complied as far as my health and time would allow. I labored extensively in all the New England and Middle States, in Ohio, Michigan, Maryland, the District of Columbia, and in Canada East and West, giving about four thousand lectures in something like five hundred different towns.

“‘I should think that about two hundred ministers embraced my views, in all the different parts of the United States and Canada; and that there have been about five hundred public lecturers. In all the sections of country where I labored,—not only in the towns I visited, but in those in their vicinity,—there were more or less that embraced the doctrine of the advent. In some places only a very few, and in other places there have been a large number.

“‘In nearly a thousand places, Advent congregations have been raised up, numbering, as nearly as I can estimate, some fifty thousand believers. On recalling to mind the several places of my labors, I can reckon up about six thousand instances of conversion from nature’s darkness to God’s marvelous light, the result of my personal labors alone; and I should judge the number to be much greater. Of this number I can recall to mind about seven hundred, who were, previously to their attending my lectures, infidels; and their number may have been twice as great. Happy results have also followed from the labors of my brethren, many of whom I would like to mention here, if my limits would permit.

“‘In all my labors I never had the desire or thought to establish any separate interest from that of existing denominations, or to benefit one at the expense of another. I thought to benefit all. Supposing that all Christians would rejoice in the prospect of Christ’s coming, and that those who could not see as I did would not love any the less those who should embrace this doctrine, I did not conceive there would ever be any necessity for separate meetings. My whole object was a desire to convert souls to God, to notify the world of a coming judgment, and to induce my fellow-men to make that preparation of heart which will enable them to meet their God in peace. The great majority of those who were converted under my labors united with the various existing churches. When individuals came to me to inquire respecting their duty, I always told them to go where they would feel at home; and I never favored any one denomination in my advice to such.

“‘But my brethren began to complain that they were not fed by their ministers, and wanted expository preaching. I told them it was their duty to interest their ministers in the prophecies; but, if they could not receive the teachings under which they sat, they must act in accordance with their own sense of duty. They then began to complain that they had not liberty in the churches to present their views freely, or to exhort their brethren to prepare for the Judgment. Those in the neighborhood of advent preaching felt that, when they could listen to these glorious truths, it was their privilege so to do. For this, many of them were treated coldly. Some came out of their churches, and some were expelled. Where the blame lay it is not necessary here to inquire; there was, doubtless, wrong on both sides. The result was, that a feeling of opposition arose, on the part of many of the ministers and churches that did not embrace these views, against those who were looking for the blessed hope and the glorious appearing of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ.’

“He then spoke of various points as follows:—

“‘DEFINITENESS OF PROPHETIC TIME.

“‘I had never been positive as to any particular day for the Lord’s appearing, believing that no man could know the day and hour. In all my published lectures will be seen, on the title-page, “about the year 1843.” In all my oral lectures I invariably told my audiences that the periods would terminate in 1843 if there were no mistakes in my calculation; but that I could not say the end might not come even before that time, and they should be continually prepared. In 1842, some of my brethren preached, with great positiveness, the exact year, and censured me for putting in an if. The public press had also published that I had fixed upon a definite day, the 23d of April, for the Lord’s advent. Therefore, in December of that year, as I could see no error in my reckoning, I published my belief that some time between March 21, 1843, and March 21, 1844, the Lord would come. Some had their minds fixed on particular days; but I could see no evidence for such, unless the types of the Mosaic law pointed to the feast of tabernacles.

“‘During the year 1843, the most violent denunciations were heaped upon me, and those associated with me, by the press and some pulpits. Our motives were assailed, our principles misrepresented, and our characters traduced. Time passed on, and the 21st of March, 1844, went by without our witnessing the appearing of the Lord. Our disappointment was great, and many walked no more with us.

“‘Previously to this, in the fall of 1843, some of my brethren began to call the churches Babylon, and to urge that it was the duty of Adventists to come out of them. With this I was much grieved, as not only the effect was very bad, but I regarded it as a perversion of the word of God, a wresting of Scripture.[86] But the practice spread extensively; and, from that time, the churches, as might have been expected, were closed against us. It prejudiced many against us, and created a deep feeling of hostility between Adventists and those who did not embrace the doctrine; so that most of the Adventists were separated from their respective churches. This was a result which I never desired nor expected; but it was brought about by unforeseen circumstances. We could, then, only act in accordance with the position in which we were thus placed.

“‘On the passing of my published time, I frankly acknowledged my disappointment in reference to the exact period; but my faith was unchanged in any essential feature. I therefore continued my labors, principally at the West, during the summer of 1844, until “the seventh-month movement,” as it is called. I had no participation in this, only as I wrote a letter, eighteen months previously, presenting the observances under the Mosaic law which pointed to that month as a probable time when the advent might be expected. This was written because some were looking to definite days in the spring. I had, however, no expectation that so unwarranted a use would be made of those types that any should regard a belief in such mere inferential evidence a test of salvation. I therefore had no fellowship with that movement until about two or three weeks previous to the 22d of October, when, seeing it had obtained such prevalence, and considering it was at a probable point of time, I was persuaded that it was a work of God, and felt that, if it should pass by, I should be more disappointed than I was in my first published time.

“‘But that time passed, and I was again disappointed. The movement was of such a character that, for a time, it was very mysterious to me; and the results following it were so unaccountable that I supposed our work might be completed, and that a few weeks only might elapse between that time and the appearing of Christ. However that might be, I regarded my own work completed, and that what was to be done for the extension of these views must be done by younger brethren, except an occasional discourse from myself.

“‘As time has progressed, I have been pained to see many errors which have been embraced, in different sections of the country, by some who have labored in connection with myself; errors which I cannot countenance, and of which I wish to speak freely, although I may lose the fellowship of some for faithfully doing my duty.

“‘I have been pained to see a spirit of sectarianism and bigotry, in some sections, which disfellowships everything that does not square with the narrow prejudices of individual minds. There is a tendency to exalt individual opinions as a standard for all to submit to; a disposition to place the results of individual investigation upon a level with solemn conclusions to which the great body of brethren have arrived. This is very wrong; for, while we are in this world, we are so short-sighted that we should never regard our conclusions as infallible, should bear with the imperfections of others, and receive those that are weak in the faith, but not to doubtful disputations.

“‘Some have an inclination to indulge in harsh and denunciatory remarks against all who do not agree with them. We are all liable to err; but we should avoid thus giving occasion of offense. We should instruct with meekness those who oppose themselves, and avoid foolish and unlearned questions, that gender strifes.

“‘There may be causes operating on the minds of others, of which we know nothing, that influence them contrary to the truth as we have received it. We should, therefore, in all our intercourse with those we deem in error, treat them with kindness and affection, and show them that we would do them good, and not evil, if God, peradventure, will give them repentance to the acknowledging of the truth, and that they may recover themselves out of the snare of the devil, who are taken captive by him at his will.

“‘Some are prone to indulge in a spirit of uneasiness and disorder, and looseness with regard to church government and doctrine. In all the essential doctrines of the Bible, as they have been held by the pious of the church in all ages, were given to the saints, and for which we are commanded earnestly to contend, I have never seen any reason to change my faith. Jesus I regard as my all-sufficient Saviour, by whose merits alone I can be saved. No being but him, “whose goings forth were of old from everlasting,” who should take upon himself our nature, and bear our sins in his own body, could make an atonement, on the efficacy of which I should dare to rely. The Bible speaks as plainly of my Saviour’s divinity as it does of his humanity. He is, therefore, Immanuel, God with us. The Bible tells us plainly what the Saviour is. That should satisfy us, without venturing beyond the Bible to say what he is not.

“‘It is in the use of terms not found in the Scriptures that disputations arise. For instance, the difference between the Calvinist and Armenian I often thus explain: Both are in the same dilemma. They are like a company of men in the lower story of a house when the tide is entering, and from which there is no escape only by a rope by which they may be drawn up. All endeavor to lay hold of the rope. The one is continually afraid he has not hold of the right rope; if he was sure he had the right rope he would have no fears. The other has no fear but he has hold of the right rope; he is continually afraid his rope will break. Now both are equally fearful they may perchance not escape. Their fears arise from different causes. How foolish it is, then, for them to begin to quarrel with each other, because the one supposes the rope may break, and the other that it is the wrong rope!

“‘Now I have found Christians among those who believed that they were born again, but might fall away; and among those that believe that, if they were ever born again, they should certainly persevere. The difference between them I regard as a mere matter of education; both have their fears, and both believe that those only who persevere unto the end will be saved. I, therefore, look on men as bigots who quarrel with others and deny that those are Christians who cannot see just as they do....

“‘I have thus given a plain and simple statement of the manner of my arriving at the views I have inculcated, with a history of my course up to the present time. That I have been mistaken in the time, I freely confess; and I have no desire to defend my course any further than I have been actuated by pure motives, and it has resulted to God’s glory. My mistakes and errors God, I trust, will forgive. I cannot, however, reproach myself for having preached definite time; for, as I believe that whatsoever was written aforetime was written for our learning, the prophetic periods are as much a subject of investigation as any other portion of the word.[87]

“‘I, therefore, still feel that it was my duty to present all the evidence that was apparent to my mind; and were I now in the same circumstances, I should be compelled to act as I have done. I should not, however, have so done, had I seen that the time would pass by; but not knowing that it would, I feel even now more satisfaction in having warned my fellow-men than I should feel, were I conscious that I had believed them in danger and had not raised my voice. How keen would have been my regret, had I refrained to present what in my soul I believed to be truth, and the result had proved that souls must perish through my neglect! I cannot, therefore, censure myself for having conscientiously performed what I believed to be my duty.

“‘But while I frankly acknowledge my disappointment in the exact time, I wish to inquire whether my teachings have been thereby materially affected. My view of exact time depended entirely upon the accuracy of chronology; of this I had no absolute demonstration; but as no evidence was presented to invalidate it, I deemed it my duty to rely on it as certain, until it should be disproved. Besides, I not only rested on received chronology, but I selected the earliest dates in the circle of a few years on which chronologers have relied for the date of the events from which to reckon, because I believed them to be best sustained, and because I wished to have my eye on the earliest time at which the Lord might be expected. Other chronologers had assigned later dates for the events from which I reckoned; and if they are correct we are only brought into the circle of a few years, during which we may rationally look for the Lord’s appearing. As the prophetic periods, counting from the dates from which I have reckoned, have not brought us to the end, and as I cannot tell the exact time that chronology may vary from my calculations, I can only live in continual expectation of the event. I am persuaded that I cannot be far out of the way, and I believe that God will still justify my preaching to the world.[88]

“‘With respect to other features of my views, I can see no reason to change my belief. We are living under the last form of the divided fourth kingdom, which brings us to the end. The prophecies which were to be fulfilled previous to the end have been so far fulfilled that I find nothing in them to delay the Lord’s coming. The signs of the times thicken on every hand; and the prophetic periods must certainly, I think, have brought us into the neighborhood of the event.

“‘There is not a point in my belief in which I am not sustained by some one of the numerous writers who have opposed my views. Prof. Bush, the most gentlemanly of my opponents, admits that I am correct in the time, with the exception of the precise day or year; and this is all for which I contend. That the 70 weeks are 490 years, and the 1260 and 2300 days are so many years, are admitted by Messrs. Bush, Hinton, and Jarvis. That the 2300 days and 70 weeks commence at the same time, Prof. Bush does not deny. And Dr. Jarvis admits that the former carry us to the resurrection and Judgment. Prof. Bush, Dr. Jarvis, Mr. Hinton, and Mr. Morris, admit that the legs of iron and fourth beast are Rome, and that the little horn of Dan. 7 is papacy, while Dr. Jarvis and Mr. Hinton admit that the exceeding great horn of Daniel 8 is Rome. The literal resurrection of the body, the end of the world, and a personal coming of Christ, have not been questioned by several who have written against me.

“‘Thus there is not a point for which I have contended that has not been admitted by some of those who have written to disprove my opinions. I have candidly weighed the objections advanced against these views; but I have seen no arguments that were sustained by the Scriptures that, in my opinion, invalidated my position. I cannot, therefore, conscientiously refrain from looking for my Lord, or from exhorting my fellow-men, as I have opportunity, to be in readiness for that great event. For my indiscretions and errors I ask pardon; and all who have spoken evil of me without cause I freely forgive. My labors are principally ended. I shall leave to my younger brethren the task of contending for the truth. Many years I toiled alone; God has now raised up those who will fill my place. I shall not cease to pray for the spread of truth.

“‘In conclusion, suffer a word of exhortation. You, my brethren, who are called by the name of Christ, will you not examine the Scriptures respecting the nearness of the advent? The great and good of all ages have had their minds directed to about this period of time, and a multitude are impressed with the solemn conviction that these are emphatically the last days. Is not a question of such moment worthy of your consideration? I do not ask you to embrace an opinion of mine; but I ask you to weigh well the evidence contained in the Bible. If I am in any error, I desire to see it, and I should certainly renounce it; but look at the question in the light of the inspired word, and decide for eternity.

“‘What shall I say to my unconverted friends? I have faithfully exhorted you these many years to believe in Christ. You have excused yourselves. What can I say more? Will not all the considerations that are presented in the Scriptures of truth move your hearts to lay down the weapons of your rebellion? You have no lease of your lives, and, if the Lord should not come, your eyes may be soon closed in death. Why will you not improve the present moment, and flee from the wrath to come? Go to Christ, I beseech you; lay hold on the promise of God, trust in his grace, and he will cleanse you by his blood.

“‘I would exhort my Advent brethren to study the word diligently. Let no man spoil you through philosophy and vain deceit. Avoid everything that shall cause offense. Let your lives be models of goodness and propriety. Let the adversary get no advantage over you. We have been disappointed; but disappointments will work for our good, if we make the right use of them. Be faithful. Be vigilant. Exhort with all longsuffering and patience. Let your conversation be in Heaven, from whence you look for the blessed hope. Avoid unnecessary controversy and questions that gender strifes. Be not many masters; all are not competent to advise and direct. God will raise up those to whom he will commit the direction of his cause. Be humble, be watchful, be patient, be persevering. And may the God of peace sanctify you wholly, and preserve you blameless unto the glorious appearing of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ!

William Miller.’

“‘Low Hampton, Aug. 1, 1845.’

CHAPTER XIX.

HIS FAITH IN HIS PAST WORK—VISIT TO NEW YORK CITY—PHILADELPHIA, ETC.—ADDRESS TO THE PUBLIC—VISIT TO CANADA, ETC.

“In the month of September, Mr. Miller attended Conferences in Addison and Bristol, Vt., and lectured in each place. He then took a journey into Connecticut, and visited Hartford, attended a camp-meeting in Newington, near Hartford, and one at Square Pond, in Tolland County. He then visited Middletown. He was much pleased with his journey, and returned home refreshed.

“After this, in connection with Elder A. Hale, he lectured, in November in the State of Vermont, at Waterbury, Morristown, Stowe, Waitesfield and Burlington. Besides at these places, he seems to have labored but little during the remainder of the year. He occasionally communicated articles for the Advent Herald, giving expositions of Scripture, &c.; but the approaching infirmities of age admonished him that his labors were nearly ended.

“‘Low Hampton, January 13, 1846.

“‘Dear Brother Himes:—I am yet in this land of toil, where sin has spoiled all the blessings and enjoyments of earth, which were appointed by our beneficent Creator for the best good of his creatures, and which, had it not been for sin, would have led us to reverence and adore that Being who had produced, by his power, this earth and all its appurtenances, and placed in it man—rational, intelligent, social man—to enjoy this vast and wondrous piece of mechanism.

“‘Perhaps we are unable rightly to appreciate the blessings which were placed within the reach of man at his creation, when “the sons of God shouted for joy.” Yet I think that we do realize some of the evils to which man is heir by reason of “sin, and death by sin,” which have entered the world. How manifest it is, at the present day, that all the influences of the pit are inciting men to crime, bringing in their trail consequences ten-fold more dreadful than those entailed upon us by the sin of our first parents! If there were one spark of philanthropy existing in the world, methinks it must bleed at beholding the rapid increase of evil within the last few years.

“‘I confess that to me it would be but a dismal and appalling prospect in the future, did not a ray of light beam forth from the word of God, that there should be a glorious and final renovation of all things! This “exceeding great and precious promise,” to the man of God, is the only hope that cheers him in his weary pilgrimage. Every means that the wisdom of man could devise for the melioration of the condition of man has failed; ministers of the gospel have been sent into every land; Bibles have been scattered broadcast in the earth, translated into almost every tongue, and placed in the hands of the poor, “without money and without price;” schools of every grade, from the college to the common, have sprung up, in which have been developed the highest mental qualities of man; societies have been multiplied for the moral improvement of our race,—to Christianize the heathen, to reform the inebriate, to break the bonds of the enslaved, to liberate the debtor, to stop the horrid practice of legal murder, to promote peace among nations, to protect the orphan, to clothe the naked, to feed the hungry, to nurse the sick, and even to bury the dead. These, and many other noble and benevolent enterprises, have been formed within the present century. But how much good have they accomplished? That great good has been done, cannot be denied. But it is likewise true that evil has predominated in a far greater ratio than at any former period.

“‘When I look back to the period when we began to publish the news of a coming Saviour, I think it the happiest time of my life. How were our hearts refreshed by the readiness of the dear brethren in Christ to hear, believe, and obey, the simple gospel of the kingdom! With what delight have I, in company with many of the dear, anxious children of God, read and re-read the Scriptures, searched diligently and compared the prophets, Jesus Christ, and his apostles, to see if these things were so! What glorious light I have often seen in that holy book while thus engaged! And with what joy have I taken sweet communion with kindred hearts in the house of God, where our faith was more and more established by the word of his grace; where our prayers were mingled at the same altar, and arose together, as incense, to the mercy-seat of our Redeemer, for a preparation to meet the coming glories, which we then expected shortly to realize; where our hearts burned with love and gratitude to God for the good news of the near approach of the King of kings; where our songs of praise and hallelujahs to the Lamb cheered our drooping spirits, and prepared us more vigorously to pursue our weary pilgrimage to the land of promise, which, from evidence to us conclusive, and which I am not ashamed of, we soon expect to reach!

“‘Then, heart beat in unison with heart, soul mingled with soul, and love, holy, heavenly, divine, united us in that oneness of gospel truth, and prejudice and party were dissipated from our thoughts like midnight darkness, or the morning mists by the rising sun. This was a time of love, a time of faith, working by love and purifying the heart. It was this hope, “the blessed hope,” that made us purify ourselves from our sectarian prejudices and bigotry.

“‘I have often thought that we then enjoyed a foretaste of the love and fellowship of the saints in light. Why is it not so now? The reason is as obvious as the sun at noonday. We have been drawn from our first principles by wicked and designing men, who have crept in among us and drawn us into parties, to follow men instead of God, and to form new tests instead of the Bible. Some of our lecturers first began the confusion by declaring an unholy crusade against the sects, which brought in men of blood instead of men of peace. True, after the manner of men, the sects had provoked us to the course we took by all the wicked arts and misrepresentation of our views and motives that human and satanic agency could invent—by slander, ridicule, and wresting the word of God from the meaning which had long been laid down in their own creeds, and departing from those rules by which their fathers, for centuries, had applied mystic Babylon to the church of Rome. We were not called, in my humble opinion, to engage in so universal a war. I think we have, in this, “left our first principles,” which were to preach the blessed hope, and beseech men to be ready for the “glorious appearing of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ,” without personal or denominational considerations. While we pursued this course, God blessed us in our work. We were commanded by the word to be patient, sober, to judge not, not to be high-minded, but to fear, and, by so doing, manifest the same spirit that was in Christ. What have been the fruits of this departure from the plain line of duty? Surely, they have not been love, peace, and joy, such as we formerly experienced, when we believed in our hearts that Christ was at the door. On the contrary, it has, in many instances, separated those who had been knit together in the closest friendship, fomented jealousies, produced “lo! heres, and lo! theres!” while some have blasphemously arrogated to themselves names and titles which belong to Christ. With such I have no sympathy, no fellowship. I will refer them to Christ’s words, Rev. 3:3: “Remember, therefore, how thou hast received and heard, and hold fast, and repent. If, therefore, thou shalt not watch, I will come on thee as a thief, and thou shalt not know what hour I will come upon thee.”

“‘The glorious appearing of Christ is my only hope; to this I cling—it is my anchor; and all who look for and love his appearing are my brothers and sisters, and with such I have fellowship in the Lord, and exhort them to watch.

“‘William Miller.’

“On the 11th of March, 1846, in company with Messrs. Himes and Apollos Hale, Mr. M. lectured at Glenn’s Falls, N. Y. It does not appear that he visited any other place till about the time of the annual Conference, which met in New York city on the 12th of May.

“His bodily infirmities rendered it unsafe for him to journey without the attendance of some one to render him all needful assistance; therefore he arranged with Elder Henry Buckley, of Hampton, N. Y., to accompany him to New York city.

“They left home on Saturday, the 9th of May, and proceeded as far as Lansingburg, N. Y. On the Sabbath he went to Middletown, N. Y., where he preached twice, returning, after service, to Lansingburg. On Monday, the 11th, they proceeded to New York city. He took part in the debates and preaching of the Conference, and, though feeble, seemed to enjoy the meetings.

“After its adjournment, they visited Philadelphia. On Sunday, the 17th, he preached in the morning and evening to large and attentive congregations. The next day he visited his former acquaintances, and, on the 19th, he left for Providence, R. I. There they attended a meeting of the Friends, which continued four days, and to which Mr. M. preached four discourses, with his usual interest. On the 25th he visited North Scituate, R. I., and gave two discourses. On the 26th he preached twice in North Attleboro’, Mass., and, on the 27th, arrived in Boston. The Annual Conference was adjourned from New York to meet there, and commenced on the day previous. He again took part in its debates, but spent most of his time in visiting friends and acquaintances in the vicinity. They visited Westminster, Mass., where Mr. M. preached on the 3d of June; and, on the 5th, he arrived home, much fatigued with his journey, but in good health and spirits.

“On the 24th of June, in company with Elder Buckley, Mr. M. visited Cranbury Creek, N. Y., where he preached seven discourses in four days. No other place being open for the meetings, they were held in a large barn, owned by Judge Gilbert. It was comfortably furnished with seats, and accommodated very respectable congregations, composed of the more intelligent and pious portion of the community. Mr. M.’s discourses there were spoken of by those present as logical and interesting.

“During the warm months he attempted no public labors; and his pen, even, seems to have lain idle. The next communication received from him was published in the Advent Herald of September 9, 1846, as follows:—

“‘ADDRESS TO THE PUBLIC.

“‘Dear Reader:—Permit me to address you once more by calling your attention to the great events which the word of God declares are soon to come to pass, that I may faithfully perform my duty; and that you may be able to answer, in that way which will be satisfactory to your own soul, in the day when God shall judge the secret thoughts of men by Jesus Christ.

“‘In my former communications to you on this subject—which is near my heart, fills my soul at times with indescribable joy and consolation, and is big with the hope of soon, very soon, coming into possession of immortality and eternal life—I readily confess I was misled in my calculations; not by the word of God, nor by the established principles of interpretation I adopted, but by the authorities which I followed in history and chronology, and which have been generally considered worthy of the fullest confidence. And I fear many of you have been blinded to your own interest, which may be of eternal consequences to you, by hasty expressions of full confidence in these authors, before I had carefully and more extensively examined the subject to which I had, in the simplicity of my heart, called your candid and serious attention.

“‘The testimony of historians, as to the dates of events, cannot affect the testimony of the word of God, that, at certain periods from these events, his promises shall be fulfilled. They may fail, but his word cannot fail. I confess I have been thus mistaken as to the definite time; but what of that? Will you or any man dare to take the ground that, because Mr. Miller or any other man made a mistake, the word of God is not true? No, no. There would be nothing in that worthy of being called an argument.

“‘But, above all things else, I was deceived in the number and character of those who, without study, argument, or reason, rejected the (to me at least) glorious news of the coming Saviour. Neither did I suppose that a man or woman could have been found on the habitable earth, who loved the Lord Jesus Christ and believed the Bible, who would reject the second advent or the redemption of the body; the final salvation of the soul, or the inheritance of eternal life, at the appearing of Jesus Christ. Yet facts warrant me to say I find more than one-half who profess Christianity denying one or more of these fundamental pillars of the Christian hope.

“‘I am thankful to God, although much and sorely disappointed, that I never pretended to be divinely inspired, but always directed you to the same source from which I obtained all the information I then had and now possess on this glorious and heart-cheering subject. Let me, then, exhort you, kind reader, by the value of truth, by the worth of your own soul, and the love of life everlasting, to examine your Bible on the coming of Christ, the redemption of the body, the salvation of your soul, and the everlasting inheritance. Lay by all prejudice, all opinions not founded on the plain and clear declarations of God’s word; keep close to that rule which will thoroughly furnish you, and make you perfect in every good work; examine for yourselves; let no man deceive you in these days of deception, when the devil has come, deceiving, if possible, the very elect. Now is the time for you to exercise the “sober second thought;” a good time for you to come over on the side of truth, to choose the good, and refuse the evil. I beseech you, do not say, “Nay, I will not examine!” Do not say, “I am well enough off, and I have got the truth!” Perhaps you have; if so, it will not hurt you to re-examine, for every re-examination only makes the truth the brighter, our evidence more clear, and our love for the truth more fervent; it helps to establish our faith and hope, and keeps us from wavering.

“‘And now, dear reader, let me propose a few questions, in view of what I have said, for you to answer to God and your own soul; and I pray you not to trifle with them, or one of them, if you can find a plain Scripture text which authorizes the question. And I beg of you delay not to answer every question which may or can be answered; and let your answers be such as you will be willing to meet before the throne of God in the day of Judgment, to which day I appeal in thus addressing you. I append a text to every question, to show you they are scriptural:—

“‘1. Will Christ appear the second time? Heb. 9:28.

“‘2. Will he come himself? 1 Thess. 4:16.

“‘3. Who will see him? 1 John 3:2; Rev. 1:7.

“‘4. Who will not be ashamed before him at his coming? 1 John 2:28; 4:17.

“‘5. What will Christ come to do? 2 Thess. 1:7-10; Heb. 1:10-12; Rev. 21:5.

“‘6. When Christ comes, will there be a resurrection? and of whom? 1 Cor. 15:23; 1 Thess. 4:14-18.

“‘7. Where is Christ now? Acts 1:11; 3:21.

“‘8. At what time will Christ be sent again to earth? Acts 3:20, 21.

“‘9. When may we know he is near, even at the door? Matt. 24:30, 33.

“‘10. Has any one of the signs been seen which are given by our Lord in Matt. 24:29; Mark 13:24, 25, or Luke 21:25, 26; or by Paul in 1 Tim. 4:1-3; also 2 Tim. 3:1-9; or by Peter in 2 Pet. 3:3, 4, by any one living in this generation?

“‘11. When is the day of redemption? Eph. 4:30; Luke 21:28.

“‘12. When shall our bodies be redeemed? Rom. 8:23.

“‘13. When shall our souls be saved? 1 Pet. 1:7-13.

“‘14. When shall the righteous inherit eternal life? Mark 10:17; Matt. 19:29; 25:46.

“‘15. What is the earnest of that inheritance? Eph. 1:13, 14; 2 Cor. 1:22; 5:4, 5.

“‘16. If we are to receive all this when Christ appears, and not until then, can you blame any Christian for loving his appearing? 2 Tim. 4:8.

“‘17. And, if you were commanded to watch for him, and these blessings were promised when he comes, would you not look with intense interest until his coming?

“‘18. And, if you were commanded to watch, would you watch without expecting him? Luke 12:35-40.

“‘19. And, if he did not come when you expected, would you not be disappointed in some proportion to your love for his appearing?

“‘Remember this is the situation of your Advent friends; this is our experience. And may God help you to love, watch, and expect the dear Saviour until he shall come.

“‘William Miller.’

“On the 4th of September, in view of many contradictory opinions afloat, he proffered the following advice:—

“‘When we write to a brother to complain of some of his opinions, let us consider of it three days before we write; pray God nine times to direct us before we take up the pen; read it in the room of our brother three times before we send it; seal it only when we love him for being God-like; send it when we would delight to be the bearer; while it is going, think with what tears of joy he will devour its contents; and remember to pay postage.’

“On the 8th of September, Mr. M. commenced a tour into Canada. He went by way of Lake Champlain to Burlington, Vt., where he preached in the evening of that day. There he met Elder Buckley, who accompanied him on his tour. From this place they went to Essex, Vt., where Mr. M. gave two discourses. On the 12th, they commenced a two-days’ meeting in Cambridge, Vt., where there was a good attendance. On Tuesday, the 15th, they commenced a meeting in Montgomery, Vt., which continued over the following Sabbath, Mr. Miller generally preaching twice a day.

“While at this place he was taken with a severe pain in one of his toes. He was soon relieved of that, when the pain commenced in his left shoulder. He then desired to return home, but was persuaded to continue his journey. On the 22d, he gave two discourses in South Troy, Vt. The meeting was held in a large hall which had formerly been used for a ball-room. While he was preaching in the evening, the windows were pelted with eggs, clubs, and stones, thrown by some ‘rude fellows of the baser sort,’ who were outside of the building. Some of their missiles entered the room. One stone, about the size of a hen’s egg, struck the desk in front of Mr. Miller, where he was speaking. He paused, and, with emphasis, asked, very composedly:—

“‘Is this Vermont, the State which boasts of its freedom, of its republicanism? Shame on Vermont!’

“The audience were somewhat agitated; but he requested them to be quiet, and proceeded with his discourse. No one was injured, and good evidently resulted from the interruption; for it aroused the old gentleman’s energy, and gave additional interest to the remainder of the sermon.

“On Thursday, the 24th of September, they commenced a Conference at Derby Line, Vt., which continued four days. The pain in Mr. M.’s shoulder had increased considerably, and resulted in a tumor of considerable size, which was much inflamed. Yet he preached six times, with a good degree of vigor.

“On Monday, the 28th, a widowed sister of Mr. M., living in Canada, having met him at Derby Line, he left with her for her residence in Hatley. He was there confined about three weeks with the tumor on his shoulder, which was very painful, affecting his neck and head, and discharged freely for many days. In consequence of this indisposition, he was unable to fulfill several appointments, which he had made in that region, much to the disappointment of the inhabitants.

“As soon as they were able to ride, they started for Low Hampton; but the weather and roads made the traveling very tedious. On his way home he spent a Sabbath, and preached a discourse of two hours’ duration, at Rickford, Vt., which left him so weak that it was with difficulty he could walk. On arriving at Fairfield, Vt., they spent a night, and Mr. M. preached in the evening. They arrived at Low Hampton after an absence of about nine weeks, during which he had been treated with great kindness and respect wherever he visited,—with the exception of the incident at Troy.

“‘My tour into Canada,’ he wrote, soon after his return, ‘would have been pleasant and agreeable to me, had it not been for sickness, which confined me to the house.’

“On the 27th of November following, he wrote to Elder Buckley, who accompanied him on the above journey:—

“‘I cannot tell you what I have done since you were here, but I can tell you what I have not done.

“‘1. I have not done with vanity. It is as natural as my breath; and if I ever cease from vain and trifling conversation in this world, you must place me in society which I have no regard for,—either to love or to hate,—where I could be a hypocrite without any drawback. For I have often noticed, when I am alone and with no one to converse with, that I am not tempted to speak words of vanity. This is the reason why I choose to be alone much of my time. In my opinion, this accounts for the ascetic lives of the early Christians. What think you—is it not best for me to become a hermit?

“‘2. I have not done with pain. I have been troubled with head-ache, teeth-ache, bones-ache, and heart-ache, since you left; but much more of the last ache, when I think of so many of my once dearly beloved brethren, who have, since our disappointment, gone into fanaticism of every kind, and left the first principles of the glorious appearing of the great God and our Saviour, Jesus Christ. And now, can you blame me for desiring a hermitage, away from these evil tidings and shameful acts of our friends in this time of severe trial?

“‘3. I have not done with corruption. My swelling discharges a little every day, and I see myself falling to corruption daily. It may be that I am corrupting others who may be brought into contact with me,—for instance, the fanatics. If they never had heard of “Millerism,” they would have been sober, worldly-seeking, church-loving, and sectarian-building men and women to this day; and they would have been respected as much as other church members are by the rich and popular worldlings. Yes, yes; so says the world; and you know that what the world says must be true. This is, in these modern times, the best evidence. If then, I had been a recluse, instead of running at large, it might have saved the world a great deal of trouble, and the church the knowledge of a great deal of corruption.

“‘4. I have done no good thing. I can prove this by every writer, Christian and political, editors, doctors of divinity, professors and ministers of all denominations,—from the Roman Catholic to the Mormon,—save only a few despised Adventists, who, in the eyes of the world, are as much below the Mormons as Christ was below Barabbas in the Jews’ estimation.

“‘But,’ say you, ‘you say you have done no good thing. Was it not a good thing to tell us, who love Christ’s appearing, that he was near to come? Was it not a good thing to read the Bible to us, and show by history its fulfillment and truth? Was it not a good thing to warn sinners of their danger, which might lead them to repentance and a preparation for the Judgment? Was it not a good thing to preach the kingdom of Heaven at hand and the Judgment? Was it not a good thing to preach the resurrection of these bodies, the inheritance of the saints, and the reign of Christ and his people on the earth made new forever? Was it not a good thing to comfort the saints with the words of his coming, and to stir them up to a remembrance of the things which Christ, the prophets, and apostles, have spoken concerning his coming? And have not you done all this?’

“‘No, no.’

“‘Who has then?’

“‘I answer, it was the grace of God which worked in me of his own good pleasure both to will and to do.

“‘Since I have been preaching this hour, I will give you my text, 2 Cor. 12:11, last clause: “Though I be nothing.” And now, lastly, the improvement.

“‘1. You may learn, by my subject, that I am nothing—like the clay in the hands of the potter.

“‘2. You may learn, if any good has been done, that God has done it by his grace; and if any evil, it is a chastisement for disobedience; for “shall there be evil in a city, and the Lord hath not done it?” Amos 3:6.

“‘3. We may learn, by the effect of any work, whether it be of God. If wicked men, and proud, selfish, popular professors join hand in hand to oppose you, you may be sure that God is in the work.

“‘4. You may learn, by my subject, that I am not well of my disease, nor do I expect to be till Christ comes; for which event I look with great interest and desire. Yours,

“‘Wm. Miller.’

“With the exception of an occasional article for the press, Mr. Miller made no public effort during the winter. His health would not permit. As the time approached for the usual Annual Meeting in New York city in May, 1847, he made arrangements to be present; but his health was not sufficient. In writing of his inability to be present, under date of May 6, 1847, he said:—

“‘I cannot charge myself with any corrupt motive in promoting the Second Advent doctrine. If I have any regret, it is because I have done so little, and because I have been so inefficient. I have lacked in zeal more than I have lacked in faith. I believed, and do still, in this glorious and Bible doctrine of the second coming of our dear Redeemer, and of his everlasting kingdom or reign in paradise restored.

“‘I fear that I shall not be able to attend at Boston.’

“His health was, however, so much improved, that, with Elder Buckley, his companion in travel of the previous year, he left home on the 20th of May, and arrived in Boston on the 22d, three days before the Conference commenced.

“The day following was Sunday, and he preached two discourses, in the afternoon and evening, at the saloon, at No. 9 Milk street, where the Adventists then worshiped. On Monday evening he preached, in the same place, on the resurrection of the body. He took part in the discussions of the Conference during the week, preached once on the following Sabbath, and on Monday left for home, where he arrived on Tuesday, June 1. This was his last visit to Massachusetts.

CHAPTER XX.

LOSS OF SIGHT—HEALTH DECLINES—EXPRESSION OF SYMPATHY—HIS REPLY—HIS LAST SICKNESS AND DEATH—FUNERAL—LETTER OF CONDOLENCE TO SURVIVING FRIENDS.

“On the 15th of September, 1847, he was present at a tent-meeting at Basin Harbor, in Ferrisburg, Vt., which continued four days. In a letter written on the 27th of the same month, he makes the following reference to it:—

“‘Dear Brother Himes: I cannot refrain from writing a few words to you, to let you know how my soul and body prosper since our tent-meeting at Basin Harbor.

“‘That was to me a profitable time. It seemed like former times, when the truth cut to the heart all who heard. The preaching was plain, powerful, and convincing. The prayer-meetings were humble, devotional, and penitent, and very properly conducted. No uproar, confusion, or fanaticism, which disturb the mind, and leave a bad savor upon the hearts of the fastidious. The Conferences were perfect love-feasts, and the songs such as the poet describes:—

“‘My willing soul would stay
In such a frame as this;
And sit and sing herself away
To everlasting bliss.’

I never expect to enjoy another such a feast of tabernacles in the flesh. God was with us. Praise his holy name.’ ...

“Toward the last of January, 1848, Mr. Miller was attacked with a dimness of sight, which deprived him of his usual privilege of reading and writing, which, through life, had been to him a source of great enjoyment. His health, otherwise, continued as good as could be expected, in his gradually declining age.

“With the loss of his sight, he had to depend on others to read to him, and to write the letters which he dictated. He desired the continuance of letters from his correspondents, but requested them to excuse him from replying.

“The hope of soon meeting them where the lame man shall leap as an hart, the tongue of the dumb sing, the blind receive their sight, and the deaf hear, and the belief in the nearness of that day, was a great consolation to him under his accumulating infirmities. His loss of sight was communicated by his son, Wm. S. Miller, Esq., in a letter dated February 10, about two weeks after his attack.

“On the 7th of March, a letter, from a daughter-in-law of Mr. Miller, stated that his general health was then better, but that he had been unable to read a word for seven weeks anterior to the preceding Sabbath. On that day, his son Robbins took the glass from the spy-glass, and held it to his eye, so that he read a few words. She added:—

“‘His eyes are not sore: the physician whom he has consulted says the retina is affected. Father bears his affliction well. I have never heard him murmur, nor say that it was hard. I think that he feels somewhat “cast down, but not forsaken.”’

“Appended to the above letter, Mr. Miller wrote, without being able to see a word:—

“‘God bless you, bless you all, and save you, is my prayer.

Wm. Miller.’

“After this, his general health was some improved, so that he was able to be about and to busy himself with light work. He was able to distinguish one object from another, and could often recognize his friends and acquaintances; but, with the best glasses he could get, he could not so distinguish letters as to read words. He sometimes attempted to write without seeing the letters that he traced.

“On the 14th of September, 1848, he wrote to Mr. Himes:—

“‘Permit me to write a few words, although you may not be able to read them. Yet it may fill up a lonesome hour or two of many a wearisome day to think I have indited some of my thoughts to my old brother traveler. It would, indeed, be a sad and melancholy time with me were it not for the “blessed hope,” of soon seeing Jesus. In this I flatter myself that I cannot be mistaken. And although my natural vision is dark, yet my mind’s vision is lit up with a bright and glorious prospect of the future....

“‘Wm. Miller.’

“About the last of April, 1849, his health began to decline more rapidly. This being communicated by Mr. Miller’s son to Mr. Himes, and received by him at New York during the session of the annual Conference there on the 10th of May, 1849, he stated to the Conference the intelligence, and moved that they convey to Mr. M. an expression of sympathy. The following resolution was immediately drawn up by the president, and unanimously adopted by a rising vote:—

“‘Advent Conference, New York, May 10, 1849.

“‘Whereas, Our beloved Brother William Miller has been called to endure a great fight of afflictions; and as God has been pleased, after employing him in advancing the cause of truth, to lay his hand on him, and suspend his labors; therefore,

“‘Resolved, That we deeply sympathize with our brother in his sorrows, and assure him that our love to him is steadfast, and that he has our earnest prayers that “these light afflictions, which are but for a moment, may work out for him a far more exceeding and eternal weight of glory;” and that we hope, ere long, we may meet with him and all the saints in the new heavens and earth, where there will be no more sighing, sorrow, or death.

“‘(Signed,) Nathan N. Whiting, Pres.
“‘Sylvester Bliss, O. R. Fassett, Sec’s.’

“Mr. Miller received the above on the 12th of May, by the hand of his biographer. On entering his room, he was reclining on a lounge. At the mention of his name, he immediately arose, and recognized the messenger. He was much affected with the expression of sympathy sent by the Conference, and returned the following reply, which was received by the Conference at Boston, to which place it had adjourned, where it was entered on its minutes, May 29, 1849.

“‘Low Hampton, May 12, 1849.

“‘To my beloved brethren in Christ, assembled in Conference, and to the saints scattered abroad. Grace be unto you, and peace, from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ:—

“‘I give thanks to God for your kind remembrance of me, as expressed in the resolution of the 10th of May inst., in your late meeting at New York city, and forwarded to me by the hand of Bro. Bliss. I have not ceased to make mention of you alway in my prayers, that you might walk together worthy of your high calling in Christ Jesus, that you may be filled with the knowledge of his will, in all wisdom and spiritual understanding, being fruitful in every good work, and increasing in the knowledge of God. I feel myself greatly revived by your expression of sympathy, and trust that you will never have occasion to feel that it has been misplaced.

“‘My multiplied and increasing infirmities admonish me that the time of my departure is drawing nigh. My earthly labors have ceased, and I now await the Master’s call, to be ready at his appearing, or, if it so please him, for the little while his coming may be delayed, to depart and be with Christ, which is far better than to abide in the flesh. I feel that I have but little choice, whether I shall be continued in life till that event, or my spirit be gathered to the spirits of just men made perfect. However God may be pleased to deal with me, I am sustained by the blessed assurance that, whether I wake or sleep, I shall be present with the Lord.

“‘I daily have you all in grateful remembrance; and rejoice that so many of you continue steadfast in the faith once delivered to the saints, looking for that blessed hope and the glorious appearing of the great God, even our Saviour Jesus Christ. I pray God that your faith may fail not, and that you may continue working together in harmony, building up one another in the most holy faith, and, by your blameless lives and godly conversation, commending this gospel of Christ to the hearts and consciences of dying men.

“‘I have but little hope, in my present weakness and infirmities, of seeing the faces of many of you in the flesh. Permit me, therefore, to exhort you not to be ashamed of the doctrine of the kingdom of Christ, nor of acknowledging on all proper occasions your confidence in the nearness of his coming.

“‘My belief is unshaken in the correctness of the conclusions I have arrived at and maintained during the last twenty years. I see no reason to question the evidence on which rest the fundamental principles of our faith. I cannot avoid the belief that this earth is to be restored to its Eden state, and become the eternal residence of the saints; that Christ is to come personally, to reign on the earth; that he will redeem us from death, and ransom us from the power of the grave; that he will change our vile bodies into the likeness of his glorified body, and destroy those who destroy the earth; and that at his coming will be the restoration of all things, spoken of by the mouth of all the holy prophets since the world began, the establishment of the new heavens and new earth, the resurrection of the righteous, and the change of the living wicked from the earth,—whose resurrection will not transpire till after one thousand years.

“‘The evidences of Christ’s coming are continually thickening; it hasteth greatly; and should this earthly house of my tabernacle be dissolved, my hope is still strong that I shall shortly meet him in the air. The political clouds in the Eastern horizon indicate to me the near approach of the battle of the Lord God Almighty, the destruction of the kingdoms of the earth, and the establishment of the kingdom of God. We may not know the precise time, but I entreat of you all to be prepared for the approaching crisis.

“‘Grudge not one against another, brethren. Be patient, for the coming of the Lord draweth nigh. Be not many masters, but let each one do the work which God has fitted him for. Avoid vain janglings and questions which gender strife. Keep constantly in view the great question of the coming of the Lord,—the hope which purifieth the heart, and tends to the unity of the whole body of believers. If you do this, you will do well, and will each seek the other’s good in preference to his own, and thus become living epistles, known and read of all men.

“‘In unity of effort will be your only strength. Therefore I recommend your meeting often in conference, as you have done, to consult with and encourage each other, in these times of trial and temptation. Be not turned away from your great work by friends or foes; but let each one occupy the talent intrusted to him—each working in his appropriate field of labor. Be charitable to all, and not indulge in harsh and bitter denunciations against those who are not enabled to see with you. Cultivate that spirit of good will toward all men, which shall fit you to be instrumental, in the hands of God, of saving some; and be less interested to advance the prosperity of party or sect than to extend the cause of truth. Above all, keep close to the word of God. And, finally, brethren, farewell. Be perfect, be of good cheer, be of one mind, live in peace; and the God of love and peace shall be with you.

“‘Wm. Miller.’

“He was at this time somewhat disposed to melancholy, but while the writer was with him, which was two days, he partook of his food with the family, and ate with considerable relish—which was, they stated, what he had not done before for several weeks. He never doubted his acceptance through the blood of Jesus, but rather shrank from the expected sufferings attending the dissolution of the body. Still he was willing to endure all that for the sake of the prospect beyond. In a letter written at this date, he said:—

“‘If the meeting of one kindred spirit is so cheering to a sick man here, what must be the joy of our greeting in the other world! The thought of death is a chilling one; but a meeting with the kindred spirits who are with Christ waiting for the consummation of his kingdom reconciles me to the idea of passing through the dark valley.’

“In November, 1849, Elder L. Kimball, who had had the charge of the church in Low Hampton, took his leave of that people. He writes:—

“‘Agreeably to Bro. Miller’s urgent request, we held the evening meeting (of the first Sunday in Nov.) at his house. He said he wanted to hear me preach once more. He also desired the singers to attend. After assembling, he called me to his room, and gave me for a text, “And when they had seen the brethren, they comforted them and departed.” Acts 16:40. He was drawn, in his easy chair, from his room to the kitchen, where he remained till the close of the services. He was unable to take any part, but expressed himself gratified, and wished that he could have said a few words to the brethren and friends present. It was to me a solemn season.’

“About the first of December, Elder D. I. Robinson visited him. He writes:—

“‘Such was the state of the roads that I did not arrive there till sunset. His house stood in sight of the stage-road to Rutland, so that it was a subject for observation to all the passengers in the stage. It was pointed out to me by one of them, who lived in an adjoining village. It was to me a fruitful subject, as I beheld, for the first time, both beauty and sublimity in the cultivated vale and snow-capped, venerable mountains in the vicinity. I thought how appropriate—how like the hills and vales of Judea, where Amos and other shepherds and former servants of the Most High lived, were called, and sent to warn mankind!

“‘As I approached across the farm, I passed the grove where he had meditated, wept, and prayed, and entered the house of the aged, wornout, sick and dying servant of God, who had been so scorned by the world. I felt favored of God. I was welcomed in the simple, hearty, easy style of a Vermont Christian farmer’s family. That pleasant, beaming countenance of his wife, and the hearty shake of the hand, told me I was at home; and the kettle of hominy, just taken from the fire, was at once prophetic of my supper. And all the members of the family, intelligent, modest, and cordial, made me feel how really glad they were of the call, and to hear from those abroad.

“‘I was quickly invited into the “east room,” where “Father Miller” greeted me, though he could not see so as to know me; but, when told, recollected distinctly. He was much changed, and yet so changed as to leave all the good outlines of former acquaintance behind. His sufferings through the summer and fall had been very great. He was much swollen by dropsy. His strength and sight were much diminished. His venerable white locks were few and thin, and his flesh was like that of a child. But his voice was full, his memory good, his intellect strikingly strong and clear, and his patience and resignation were remarkable. He asked of my welfare, and of the friends; and said he was never so strong in his mind that we were right as now. He was sure it could not be long before the coming of the Lord. He wished him to come soon; but, if not, to be taken himself to the Lord.’

“He was drawn to the table in his chair, and ate supper with the family, probably for the last time. Elder R. left the next morning between four and five o’clock; but Mr. Miller was awake, and arose to take an affectionate leave of him.

“For several months he had been confined mostly to his room. During a part of the time he had been confined to his bed, lounge, or easy chair; and he suffered excruciating pain, which he endured with Christian patience. During his greatest sufferings, he solaced himself by quotations of numerous passages of Scripture, and favorite hymns of Watts and others, expressive of the hope and joy of the redeemed.

“He had watched all the occurrences in Europe with great interest; but, giving up the idea of seeing the Saviour before his death, he had arranged all his business, and waited for the summons when he might ‘depart and be with Christ.’[89]

“On the 13th of December he had one of the most severe attacks of pain which he was called to endure. It was then thought he would not survive till the next morning, and Elder Himes was immediately telegraphed for, at the request of Mr. M. Mr. Himes wrote:—

“‘On my arrival, early in the morning of the 17th, he had obtained some relief, and was quite comfortable. On entering his room, he immediately recognized my voice, and, on approaching his bed-side, he was able to distinguish my features, though his eyes were dim.

“‘Then you do know me, Father Miller, do you?’

“‘Oh! yes; I understand,—I know what is passing.’

“‘He was then silent for a few moments, apparently in a deep study. Presently he introduced the subject of my connection with the Advent cause, and spoke of my responsibility; expressed much anxiety about the cause, and alluded to his own departure. I assured him that he had faithfully discharged his duty, was clear from the blood of all men, and could now leave this matter in the hands of God; and, so far as I was concerned, I hoped for grace to enable me to be faithful in the ministry I had received. He seemed to assent, and fell into a doze,—being weak, and unable to converse longer than a few moments at a time.

“‘He then spoke on the subject of the “spirit of adoption,” which we have now, and of the final adoption for which we look at the second coming of the blessed Saviour. Last evening he said to Bro. Bosworth:—

“‘Tell them [the brethren] we are right. The coming of the Lord draweth nigh; but they must be patient, and wait for him.’

“‘His mind is still clear and strong on the subject of the conscious intermediate state. He believes that when he shall be absent from the body he will be present with the Lord. He expects that his flesh will slumber in the ground till Jesus comes and bids it rise, when he will be perfected. He never looked for the crown at death, but at the time when Jesus should come in his glory. The intermediate state is not that for which he longs most (though, with the apostle, he thinks it is “better” than this state of toil and sorrow), but the final, the glorified state, when the body shall be redeemed, and made like unto the glorious body of Christ, is the subject of this hope.

“‘For some weeks past, his mind dwelt much on the subjects of the Judgment, the “adoption,” and the new heavens and earth.

“‘Such views of the future glory tended to mitigate the pains of his body, which, at times, were violent.

“‘Happy the spirit released from its clay.’

was one of the hymns in which he was deeply interested during the last four weeks of his life. It was sung by his children, and those who visited him, repeatedly, at his request. It enraptured his soul during his last hours, when he seemed to be absent, conversing with God and Heaven. He often repeated:—

“‘Victory! victory! shouting in death!’

“‘The closing scene finally came. On the 20th of December, in the morning, it was manifest to all that he must soon depart. During the morning he made no particular conversation, but would break forth in expressions like the following:—

“‘Mighty to save!’ ‘Oh, I long to be there!’ ‘Victory! victory!’ ‘Shouting in death!’ &c.

“‘He finally sunk down into an easy sleeping or dozing state. Occasionally he roused up and opened his eyes, but was not able to speak, though perfectly rational, and knew us all. He continued to breathe shorter, and shorter, till five minutes past three o’clock, P. M., when he calmly and sweetly gave his last breath. The silver cord was loosed, the golden bowl was broken at the fountain, and the wheel broken at the cistern; the dust was left to return to the dust as it was, and the spirit returned to God who gave it. Peacefully and happily he died, with his wife, children, and friends, about his bed! I closed his eyes, while all other eyes were filled with tears. It was a solemn scene. While the wife and children and friends were weeping the loss of a beloved relative, I was there to weep the loss of a father in Israel.

“‘The funeral service was attended on Sunday, December 23. The Advent chapel in Low Hampton being too small to accommodate the family, friends, and citizens, who were desirous of attending, Mr. Shaw, pastor of the Congregational church in Fairhaven, kindly offered the use of his large and commodious house. It had been Mr. Miller’s request that the funeral service should be held in the Advent chapel; but this being found impossible, the family decided to have a short service at their residence, to bury the body, and then to proceed to the Congregational house, for the performance of the more public service.

“‘The relatives of the deceased, and a large number of his neighbors and others, assembled at the house at 10 A. M. I read the following portions of Scripture, namely, 1 Thess. 4:13-18; Phil. 3:20, 21; Col. 3:1-3. The choir from the Fairhaven church then sung the hymn commencing with—

“‘Unveil thy bosom, faithful tomb.’

After a prayer, those present took leave of the corpse, and the procession—formed under the direction of Dr. Smith, of Castleton—proceeded to the old family burying-ground, about half a mile distant. The body being lowered into the tomb, the following hymn was sung by the choir:—

“‘Happy the spirit released from its clay,’ &c.

“‘With a last, lingering look, we turned from the tomb, and proceeded with the numerous friends to the meeting-house, to attend the more public service. About one hundred sleighs followed in the procession.

“‘On arriving at the house, I found it densely filled with people, with the exception of seats reserved for the family, and those who had formed the procession. The service was commenced by singing the hymn in the “Harp,” beginning with—

“‘How blest the righteous when he dies.’

Mr. Shaw, pastor of the church, read the 90th psalm, and addressed the throne of grace; after which the hymn—

“‘Why do we mourn departed friends?’

was sung. I gave a discourse from Acts 26:6-8: “And now I stand and am judged for the hope of the promise made of God unto our fathers; unto which promise our twelve tribes, instantly serving God day and night, hope to come. For which hope’s sake, King Agrippa, I am accused of the Jews. Why should it be thought a thing incredible with you, that God should raise the dead?” With a narration of the prominent events in the history of the deceased, and a brief synopsis of his views, the speaker presented the hope of the promise of God to the fathers, to be consummated at the coming of the Lord. The services lasted three hours, and were concluded with the hymn—

“‘They sleep in Jesus, and are blessed.’

The audience were attentive and interested to the close.

J. V. Himes.’

“Mr. Miller left a wife, six sons, and two daughters.

“At the annual Conference, held in New York, in May following, by a unanimous vote, the following letter of condolence, prepared by a committee appointed for that purpose, was addressed to the relatives of the deceased:—

“‘In Conference, New York, May 8, 1850.

“‘To Mrs. Lucy Miller, her children, and other relatives—

“‘Afflicted Friends: Since our last meeting, you have been called to mourn the death of a beloved husband, a tender parent, and an affectionate friend. In your bereavement we truly sympathize. In your loss we also have lost a friend and brother. But we mourn our loss in view of higher considerations. We regard him as a man called of God to a most important work; and as a man greatly blessed in the successful performance of that work. The unsullied integrity of his life was crowned by a peaceful and hopeful death. The deep sense of gratitude we feel to God for the benefits conferred on us through his instrumentality, we trust will find a response in many Christian hearts. Through the divine blessing on his teaching, our attention has been directed to a more faithful study of the Scriptures, to clearer, more harmonious and correct views of divine truth. We have thus been led to rejoice in hope of the glory to be revealed at the appearing of Christ. We fondly hoped that he might have been spared till our expectations were realized. He has passed away. May we remember that our obligations are increased by the truth which he taught. May we be prepared for a reunion with him and all the redeemed in that day. Our sincere and united prayer is, that the grace which sustained him under his severe trials, and in the closing scene, may support you in your bereavement, and in all the afflictions of the present state, and secure to you the enjoyment of the glorious future. Tendering to your acceptance this expression of our sympathy and condolence, we remain your affectionate brethren in the faith once delivered to the saints.

“‘(Signed,) N. N. Whiting, Pres.
“‘O. R. Fassett, S. Bliss, Sec’s.’

“The death of Mr. Miller was very generally noticed by the religious and secular press, many of whom spoke in just terms of his honesty and ability. Other papers connected with his memory extravagances with which he had no sympathy and never participated in.”

FOOTNOTES

[1] For a full exposition of the subject of the sanctuary and the nature of its cleansing, see Thoughts on Daniel, by U. Smith, and The Sanctuary and Twenty-three Hundred Days, by J. N. Andrews.

[2] See John 14:3; Acts. 1:11; 1 Thess. 4:16; Rev. 1:7; Matt. 16:27; 24:30; Mark. 8:38; 13:26; Dan. 7:13.

[3] Dan. 7:14, 18, 22, 27; Matt. 25:34; Luke 12:32; 19:12, 15; 22:29; 1 Cor. 9:25; 2 Tim. 4:1, 8; James 1:12; 1 Pet. 5:4.

[4] 2 Pet. 3:7-10; Isa. 65:17-19; Rev. 21:22.

[5] 1 Cor. 15:20, 23, 49, 51-53; Phil. 3:20, 21; 1 Thess. 4:14-17; 1 John 3:2.

[6] Isa. 34:8; 40:2, 5; 41:10-12; Rom. 8:21-23; 1 Cor. 1:7, 8; 4:14; 15:54, 56; Eph. 5:27; Col. 1:22; 1 Thess. 3:13; Heb. 2:13-15; Jude 24; Rev. 20:1-6.

[7] It will be seen that Wm. Miller held the doctrine of consciousness in death, which most of the Adventists have renounced.

J. W.

[8] Ps. 50:3; 97:3; Isa. 60:15, 16; 24:21, 22; Dan. 7:10; Mal. 4:1; Matt. 3:12; John 25:29; Acts 24:15; 1 Cor. 3:13; 1 Thess. 5:2, 3; 2 Thess. 1:7-9; 1 Peter 1:7; 2 Peter 3:7, 10; Jude 6, 7, 14, 15; Rev. 20:3, 13-15.

[9] Ps. 37:9-11, 22, 28, 29, 34; Prov. 2:21, 22; 10:30; Isa. 40:21; Matt. 5:5; 6:10.

[10] Rev. 20:2-7.

[11] Matt. 13:37-43; 24:14; Dan. 7:21, 22; 2 Thess. 2:8.

[12] 2 Pet. 3; Isa. 65:17; Rev. 21:22.

[13] Rom. 2:14, 15; 4:13; 9:6; 10:12; 11:17; Gal. 3:29; Eph. 2:14, 15.

[14] The supposition that two of the periods of Daniel extended to the second advent constituted Mr. Miller’s mistake, hence the consequent disappointment.

J. W.

[15] At this place they raised, and placed in his hands, quite a sum of money for his services. He took $1.50 to pay his stage fare to the next place, and directed them to give the balance to some benevolent object.

[16] A son of Mr. M., who was at that time postmaster in Low Hampton.

[17] Mr. M. was in the habit of replying to those who denied that God has revealed the time by asking them: “What ‘wonders’ are referred to in Daniel 12:6?” “Who gave the answer to the inquiry there asked?” and “If those ‘wonders’ include the resurrection,—and the Lord has sworn with an oath that it shall be for a time, times, and a half,—is not the time revealed?” adding. “Whether we understand it correctly or not, is another question.”

[18] See Introduction, vol. 1, p. 333; vol. 4, pp. 189, 191.

[19] See Harmony of Scripture.

[20] Theol. Dic., p. 228.

[21] A Hebrew scholar, of high reputation, makes the following remarks upon the word: “The verb chathak (in the Niphal form, passive, nechtak), is found only in Daniel 9:24. Not another instance of its use can be traced in the entire Hebrew Testament. As Chaldaic and Rabbinical usage must give us the true sense of the word: if we are guided by these, it has the single signification of cutting or cutting off. In the Chaldeo-Rabbinic dictionary of Stockius, the word ‘chathak’ is thus defined:—

“‘Scidit, abscidit, conscidit, inscidit, excidit.’—To cut, to cut away, to cut in pieces, to cut or engrave, to cut off.

“Mercerus, in his ‘Thesaurus,’ furnishes a specimen of Rabbinical usage in the phrase chathikah shelbasar—‘a piece of flesh,’ or ‘a cut of flesh.’ He translates the word as it occurs in Daniel 9:24, by ‘præcisa est’—was cut off.

“In the literal version of Arias Montanus it is translated ‘decisa est’—was cut off; in the marginal reading, which is grammatically correct, it is rendered by the plural ‘decisæ sunt’—were cut off.

“In the Latin version of Junius and Tremellius, nechtak is rendered ‘decisæ sunt.’—were cut off.

“Again: in Theodotion’s Greek version of Daniel (which is the version used in the Vatican copy of the Septuagint as being the most faithful), it is rendered by συνετμἡθησαν—were cut off; and in the Venetian copy by τετμήνται—have been cut. The idea of cutting off is pursued in the Vulgate, where the phrase is ‘abbreviatæ sunt,’ have been shortened.

“Thus Chaldaic and Rabbinical authority, and that of the earliest versions,—the Septuagint and Vulgate,—give the single signification of cutting off to this verb.”

[22] Dowling’s Reply to Miller.

[23] It will be evident to the reader that Mr. Miller held the doctrine of endless misery in a local hell at the time he gave this discourse. In fact, there is no evidence that he changed his views on the immortality question to the time of his death. His writings and his labors give evidence that his mind was not called to the investigation of the subject, it being fully occupied with the great second advent question. The discussion of the immortality theme among the Adventists seems to have been left to younger men at a later period.

J. W.

[24] From personal acquaintance with Mr. Miller, and a thorough knowledge of his teachings, we are happy to state that during his entire public life he had no sympathy whatever with those teachings and influences which lead to fanaticism; and that his broad and liberal feelings of Christian fellowship are expressed in the following address.

J. W.

[25] While it may now appear very evident that the stand taken by Mr. Miller, relative to the character, and the final results, of the fanaticism of which he speaks, was a proper and right one, it is not so clear that he disposed of the question of the gifts and manifestations of the Spirit of God, in harmony with the general scope of Scripture testimony upon the subject. The reader will observe that he does not produce the proof, in his accustomed style of proving his points, that the great commission, with its duties, and its blessings, was given to the ministry for only a limited portion of the Christian age. Mr. Miller, Mr. Himes, and other leading Adventists, failed to show the time when, and by whom, the gifts were removed from the church of God. This gave the fanatics great advantage; and as they maintained the scriptural position upon the perpetuity of spiritual gifts they gained very large numbers to their ranks. The false positions of those who opposed them added fuel to the flame of fanaticism already kindled, and resulted in the breaking up of the once united and happy body of believers.

Seventh-day Adventists have held the scriptural position upon the perpetuity of the gifts from their first existence. They have taken heed to the admonition of Paul to “Despise not prophesyings;” but to “Prove all things;” and “Hold fast that which is good.” 2 Thess. 5:20, 21. They have with their Bibles in their hands applied the rule of John by which to test the spirits. “Believe not every spirit; but try the spirits, whether they are of God.” 1 John 4:1. With this position those who have held it have been prepared to meet every form of fanaticism that has sought a place among us, and now our people are reaping the good fruits of their patient, firm, and energetic efforts upon this point, in the unparalleled union and order throughout the ranks. We would not encourage a disposition to blame those who acted according to the best light they had under the pressure of the trials of the past; but we here express our solemn conviction that very much of the past fanaticism and confusion among the Adventists who could not adopt an unscriptural position, is chargeable to those leaders who took a false position relative to the perpetuity of spiritual gifts.

J. W.

[26] “1. The ark rested on the seventh month, seventeenth day. This has an appearance of a type, the rest of the gospel ark at the judgment. Gen. 8:4.

“2. The sanctuary and worshipers, and all appertaining to it, were cleansed on the seventh month, tenth to seventeenth day. Lev. 16:29-34. Surely this is a type.

“3. The Israelites of God were to afflict their souls, from the evening of the ninth to the evening of the tenth day, seventh month. Lev. 23:27-32, a type of the troubles, Dan. 12:1.

“4. The holy convocation of all Israel, seventh month, 1-15th day, Lev. 23:24; Num. 29:1. Is not this a type of the gathering of the elect? Ps. 81:3, 4; 98:6-9.

“5. The great feast, seventh month, fifteenth day, all Israel appeared before the Lord. Lev. 23:34; 1 Kings 8:2. Type of the marriage supper. Heb. 9:9, 10.

“6. The jubilee trump sounded, seventh month, tenth day, throughout all the land. Lev. 25:9, 10. Type of final redemption. 1 Thess. 4:14-17.

“7. The time of release of all Hebrews in bondage, seventh month, fifteenth day. Deut. 15:1-15; 31:10, 11; Jer. 34:8-14, at the feast of the tabernacles. This evidently is typical of the release of the Israel of God.

“8. The atonement was made on the tenth day of the seventh month, and is certainly typical of the atonement Christ is now making for us. Lev. 16:1-34, antitype. Heb. 9:1-28.

“9. When the high priest came out of the holy of holies after making the atonement, he blessed the people. Lev. 9:22, 23; 2 Sam. 6:18. So will our great High Priest. Heb. 9:28. This was on the seventh month, tenth day.

“10. This was in harvest time, the feast of harvest was kept in the seventh month, from the tenth day to the seventeenth. Lev. 23:10. And the end of the world is compared to the harvest. Matt. 13:30. Christ says plain in “harvest time.”

“11. Also in the feast of tabernacles, in the great day of the feast in the last day. John 7:2, 37. So in the last great day, Jesus’ voice will call forth the righteous dead. John 5:28, 29; 1 Thess. 4:16.”— Wm. Miller in Sings of the Times for May 17, 1843.

[27] Here Mr. Miller expresses the views and feelings of the Adventists generally for a time after the disappointment in October, 1844. Many of the leading men in the movement soon became impatient, and backed out of this position by rashly condemning the time movements of 1843 and 1844 as the result of error, and they took the majority of believers with them. This division left those who took good heed to the godly exhortations of Mr. Miller exposed to great trials and the ravages of fanaticism.

God had the great sanctuary question in reserve for the Adventists, which, in connection with the three messages of Rev. 14, if they had waited patiently in the position where his word and providence had brought them, would have explained the past, given certainty to the then present, and would have opened before them the future work of the third message.

J. W.

[28] From this communication, the reader will be able to gather much relative to the trials of the time when it was written. Mr. Miller had not the true light upon the sanctuary question, consequently held that the 2300 and 1335 days reached to the second coming of Christ. But at the same time, his convictions were so very strong that the hand of God had been in the distinct movements of 1843 and 1844, that leading Adventists could not influence him to reject the work of God in his past deep experience. This communication called out a reply nearly twice its length from the editors of the Herald. He respected and loved these his fellow-laborers; and any statement that he was not influenced by them to a greater or less extent would be unreasonable. And although at a later period he did enter the lecturing field, he held firmly, to the day of his death, that he was fully justified in preaching the time.

J. W.

[29] The leading object in giving matter of this kind from the pen of Mr. Miller is to let the Christian character and tender spirit of the man appear, whom God had raised up to do a great work. He had been a brave soldier in the service of his country, and had fearlessly stood in defense of unpopular truth, and had dared to meet opposition, scoffs, and even scandal, from the popular churches. But now, under the most trying circumstances, we see the aged Christian warrior, clothed with humility as with a garment, and his spirit all softened and sweetened by divine grace, tenderly entreating his brethren to be patient, gentle, true, and kind.

J. W.

[30] 2 Pet. 3:7, 10, 13.

[31] Dan. 7:27.

[32] Heb. 9:28.

[33] Acts 1:9, 11.

[34] Matt. 2:1.

[35] Matt. 1:18.

[36] Matt. 1:25.

[37] Matt. 11:5.

[38] 1 Pet. 3:18.

[39] Luke 23:46.

[40] Luke 23:53.

[41] 1 Cor. 15:4.

[42] Luke 24:51.

[43] Acts 3:21.

[44] 1 Thess. 4:16, 17; 1 Cor. 15:52.

[45] 2 Thess. 1:7, 8.

[46] 2 Tim. 4:1.

[47] Matt. 24:33.

[48] Dan. 7:25; 8:14; 9:24; 12:7, 11, 12; Rev. 9:10, 15; 11:2, 3; 12:6, 14; 13:5.

[49] Dan. 2d, 7th, 8th, 9th, 11th, and 12th chaps.; Rev. 9th, 11th, 12th, 13th, 14th and 17th chaps.

[50] Matt. 24:29; Luke 21:25, 26.

[51] Luke 21:28; 1 Thess. 4:18.

[52] 2 Cor. 5:11.

[53] Luke 13:24, 25.

[54] Acts 20:21; Mark 1:15.

[55] Titus 2:11-13.

[56] John 5:28, 29.

[57] Acts 24:15.

[58] 1 Cor. 15:23.

[59] Rev. 20:5.

[60] 1 Cor. 15:51, 52.

[61] Rev. 20:2-7.

[62] Isa. 11; 35:1, 2, 5-10; 65:17-25.

[63] Rom. 4:13.

[64] Rom. 9:6.

[65] Rom. 10:12.

[66] Eph. 2:14, 15.

[67] Rom. 2:6.

[68] Gal. 3:29.

[69] Eze. 37:12; Heb. 11:12, 13; Rom. 11:17; John 5:28, 29.

[70] Matt. 24:14.

[71] Dan. 7:21, 22.

[72] Matt. 13:37-43.

[73] 2 Thess. 2:8.

[74] Rev. 5:9, 10; 21:24.

[75] Matt. 28:19, 20.

[76] Rev. 14:7.

[77] Acts 3:19, 20.

[78] Dan. 12:13; Rev. 6:9-11; Rom. 8:22, 23.

[79] Heb. 11:40.

[80] 1 Pet. 1:4, 5.

[81] 2 Tim. 4:8.

[82] Ps. 17:15.

[83] Matt. 25:34.

[84] Luke 20:36.

[85] The great sin of this time evidently was the disposition of the leading men in the cause to draw back from the clear position, powerful work, and deep experience, of the time movement. They were disappointed and greatly embarrassed. And, instead of patiently waiting for God to open to their minds the great sanctuary question in his own good time, they impatiently and rashly cast away their confidence in the work of God, and abandoned themselves to the fearful work described in the following prophetic exhortation of Paul: “Cast not away therefore your confidence, which hath great recompense of reward. For ye have need of patience, that, after ye have done the will of God, ye might receive the promise. For yet a little while, and he that shall come will come, and will not tarry. Now the just shall live by faith; but if any man draw back, my soul shall have no pleasure in him. But we are not of them who draw back unto perdition; but of them that believe to the saving of the soul.” Heb. 10:35-39.

The application of this exhortation is so very natural and forcible that it will hardly be called in question. It was a fearful time. Satan was in a most powerful manner attaching the fancies and extravagances of fanaticism to the only true and correct position. This made the gulf between the two parties still wider. Both in their extreme positions hurt each other. The course of those who were drawing back filled the other with terror, while their extremes in turn confirmed the more prudent that to draw back was the only safe position.

In such a position, with God’s frown upon them, he could not bless their associated efforts at the Albany Conference to rise above existing elements of confusion, and shake off the reproach that was being brought upon the second advent cause. Associated action, upon proper ground, has been right in all periods of the Christian church; but that work at the Albany Conference proved itself not of God, in that it has, in the main, come to nought. The present condition of the surviving leaders in that compact to facilitate a grand march into Egypt, and who drew Mr. Miller in a degree into their confederacy, is indeed deplorable. But that faithful man of God, with the weight of years, and the feebleness of the terrible strain of labors upon him, could not be induced to deny the hand of God in the advent movement, to which he had confidingly devoted all.

J. W.

[86] With Mr. Miller, there were very many who deplored the spirit in which the Babylon question was handled by rash spirits, and a very few, including Mr. Miller, never accepted the view that the term applied to all corrupted Christianity, Protestant as well as Papal. But we do not regard the error of these a tithe as injurious to the cause of truth and religion as the conduct of selfish and rash ones who held the truth in unrighteousness.

J. W.

[87] The reader may now understand the real position of the man whom God had led in the great movement which occurred in fulfillment of the first message of Rev. 14. We believe that the third message, now being proclaimed, and the preparatory work for the coming of the Son of man now in progress with those who embrace it, is by the direct providence of God, in fulfillment of certain portions of his word. And this position makes the conclusions that the first and second messages of the same series were given under the same providence, and that God raised up William Miller to bring out the great truths of the first message, appear very reasonable. Hence we are the more willing to let him speak for himself, that the candid reader may correctly view this representative and providential servant of Jesus Christ, whose name is associated in the public mind with Adventism everywhere.

But few public men “grow old gracefully.” Mr. Miller entered upon his public labors as a lecturer upon the prophecies in the strength of manhood, after acquiring habits of self-reliance, firmness, and undaunted courage, as an army and civil officer. And this stamp of character, sanctified by the grace of God, constituted one of the important qualifications necessary to meet the different forms of determined opposition and persecution which he met. And then, after nerving himself to the battle for thirteen years, forming the strongest combative habits at that period of his life when he was about sixty years of age, when strong men’s habits generally become very strongly established, to see him calmly and gently laying off the armor, and under his bitter disappointment, to witness his resignation to the will of God, and his affectionate appeals and warnings to his younger brethren to be holy men of God, ready for the coming of the Son of man, carries the strongest conviction to candid minds that God had raised him up to do the very work which he did do. As he thus laid his armor off, he said to his brethren that his work was done. In this we can see the hand of God. He had spent the strength of his ripe manhood in giving the first message. His burden fell off, which he interpreted, for a short time, to mean that the work of warning sinners was done. But the great work of the third message was then in the future, and had God designed to use him in giving it, he would have given him a new lease of life, and opened the subject to his mind. But he did not see this work nor feel its importance; and why should he? He had done his work faithfully and well, and was soon to sleep in Jesus.

It is proper here to state that Mr. Miller did not view the second message as we do. Neither did he change his views upon the immortality and Sabbath questions. Having finished his mission in giving the first message, and having reached the point in respect to age and debility, from his extremely arduous labors as a lecturer for thirteen years, with no periods of cessation, only when compelled by sickness, the candid reader can see the love and wisdom of God in not impressing his mind with those subjects which he could not investigate and vindicate before the people.

Having done, and well done, the great work given him to do, the probation of public labor with him successfully past according to the will of God, he could say in the language of Paul, “I have fought a good fight, I have finished my course, I have kept the faith; henceforth there is laid up for me a crown of righteousness, which the Lord, the righteous judge, shall give me at that day; and not to me only, but unto all them also that love his appearing.” 2 Tim. 4:7, 8.

It is just what might be expected, that those who understandingly embrace the principles of the third message, would first inquire relative to the second and first messages, and would feel the deepest interest in the man whom God raised up to lead off in the opening work of giving the great threefold warning to the world.

Those who have been continually publishing a new time upon the heels of a failure, have been, not only disgusting the public, but, at each effort, have been virtually condemning the position of Mr. Miller on the time question, and losing regard for his valuable labors. These can have but little, if any, interest in his life and views.

And on the other hand, those who stood with him on the time question in 1844, and have confessed to the world that they were in error, and have given up their past second-advent experience, virtually condemn his position and work, and can take, comparatively, but little interest in the history of his life, views, and labors. Both of these classes have departed from the position of Mr. Miller, and have denied, or, at least, hold very lightly their past second-advent experience, and have left the field to Seventh-day Adventists, who stand upon the “original advent faith.” And while occupying the position we do relative to the past movement, the public have reason to expect that, while we hold that Mr. Miller moved in the providence of God in his work, we should publish the facts as they existed in his life, views, and labors, in explanation and defense, so far as such facts constitute a defense, of our position.

We still love the advent name, and hold it very dear. And while we hold the name, consistency would lead us to cherish and also hold dear the very means that made us Adventists. To still hold the advent name, and turn round and curse, or deny, or even hold lightly, the means God employed to make us what we are, seems the very climax of inconsistency. When Seventh-day Adventists can no longer honor the great second-advent movement, but feel called upon to confess to the world that the pioneers of the cause were mistaken on the very calculation that shook the world, and which resulted in making Adventists a separate people, then they will drop “Adventists” from their denominational name, and pass for simply Sabbatarian Christians.

J. W.

[88] God in his providence is justifying the preaching of time by the light of the heavenly sanctuary, in connection with the third angel’s message.

J. W.

[89] Mr. Bliss, Mr. Miller’s biographer, served a party who held the popular views of consciousness in death. This is also true of Eld. Himes, who professed faith in the same views of man in death at that time. This accounts for the decided efforts of both these friends of Mr. Miller to use his last experience on the side of natural immortality. It is proper, however, here to state that Eld. Himes, when differently related to the Advent people, was suddenly and unexpectedly found on the other side of the immortality question, and has since given his pen and voice in support of unconsciousness in death and immortality alone through Christ. The effort to use the honest convictions of this aged and wornout pilgrim before and at his last sickness on the side of popular error shows a want of plain Bible testimony to sustain a sinking cause.

The state between the cessation of the mortal life and the resurrection to immortal life being unconsciousness, hence no apparent lapse of time do those who sleep in Jesus, it seems most reasonable that the Holy Spirit should impress the dying Christian with the scenes of glory which he is next to witness at the resurrection of the just, whether the time of that resurrection to consciousness be near or distant. And how very natural for those who die in the faith of consciousness in death to suppose that they immediately enter upon the glories of the heavenly world.

J. W.

INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

Articles of belief, pp. 59-64

Address to believers in the advent near, 173-176

Admissions of a lawyer, 155

Address to Christians of all denominations, 272-277

Address concerning the disappointment, 282

An illustration of the Advent message, 304

Address to believers, after the passing of the time, 320-334

Answer to letter of N. N. Whiting on the subject of the “shut door”, 335-338

Albany Conference—Declaration of principles, 344-350

Albany Conference—Miller’s address, 350-355
Associated action, 347
Apology and defense, 359-362
Address to the public, 381-385
Boston Investigator, letter in, 101
Boston Post, letter in, 162
Conversion, 43, 357
Conviction of duty to preach, 65, 72
Correspondence on his views, 68
Calls for labor in many places, 102
Christian Secretary, 159
Christian Reflector, account of labor in, 191
Camp-meeting, East Kingston, N. H., 162
Exeter, N. H., 248
Plainfield, Ct., 254
Conference address, 249
Counsel to believers, 315-319
Conference at Albany, 343
Conference letter to his family, 407-408
Deistical Sentiments, 25-32
Difficulties in his study, 66, 67
Death of his mother—his impression, 105-107

Dr. Dowling, 190, 195, 200, 204, 205, 206, 211, 213

Dr. Chase, 190, 192, 193, 195
Dr. Jarvis, 190, 193, 196, 199, 205, 211, 215
Dr. Hamilton, 190, 193, 204, 205
Disappointment of seventh month movement, 300
Definiteness of prophetic time, 362
Death and funeral, 405-407
Early life, 13-18
Early Christian life, 64-66

Eld. Hendryx’ first acquaintance with Miller, 73

Eld. T. Cole, Lowell, his disappointment, &c., 122

Eld. Himes’ first acquaintance, 127
Extension of labors, 128
Eld. David Millard, testimony of, 131
Eld. D. I. Robinson, letter of, 133

Eld. L. D. Fleming, Portland, Me., his account of labor, 139

Four fundamental points, 7
First public lecture, 80
Fanaticism, its commencement, 249
False reports of Mr. Miller’s property, 267
Faith in his experience in the work, 369-374

Gazette and Advertiser, Long Island, testimony of, 245

Home of Mr. Miller, 262

How to deal with those in error, 385, 386

His last sickness—described by Eld. Himes, 403-405

Interview on a Hudson River steamer, 91
Interesting conversation with ministers, 177
Illustration by time of Noah, 222

Interview with Methodist ministers on a steamer, 286-289

Interesting letter from Harrisburg, 291

John Starkweather, leader in fanaticism in Boston, 251

Low Hampton, settlement there, 39

Labor in a revival, 71

License to preach, Baptist churches in Hampton and Whitehall, 93

Letter to Eld. Hendryx, 75, 82, 88, 91, 96, 98, 101, 102, 106, 108

Letter from Charles Fitch, 113

Letter from pastor in West Troy, 115

Letter from pastor of Baptist church in Rome, N. Y., 117

Letter to his son, from Burlington, Vt., 118
Letter from Boston, 121
Lynn Record, notice in the, 124

Letter of S. Hawley, Cong. minister, Groton, Mass., 126

Lectured on steamboat, 166

Letter from home, 169

Letter from Mr. Miller on false reports of time, 182

Letter of Miller on the fanaticism, 255
Letter to I. E. Jones in Advent Herald, 311
Letter to the Boston Investigator, 339-342
Loss of sight, 392
Letter written when he was blind, 394
Military life, 33-38

“Monomaniac:” interview with a physician, 76-78

Memoranda of preaching, 98

Ministers of various denominations approve his labors, 104

Maine Wesleyan Journal, testimony of, 141

“Midnight Cry,” letter from a member of Yale College, 168

Miller and his reviewers, 188

Mr. Shimeal, 193, 199, 205, 206

Miller’s views sustained by the great body of expositors, 189-216

Newark, N. J., meeting in the “big tent”, 166

N. Y. Herald’s false report of the time set, 181

N. Y. Observer on same, 181
Notes on points of doctrine, 52-54
on prophetic periods, 56
on money received, 110
on replying to questions, 177
on Hebrew word hhatak, determined, cut off, Dan. 9:24, 202
on the fanaticism, 249
on Miller’s views of spiritual gifts, 256, 257
from Signs of Times on the types, 295, 296
on the disappointment, 307
on Mr. Miller’s humility and kindness of spirit, 337
on Scripture citations on points of doctrine, 345-349
on drawing back from Advent faith, 355, 356
on the subject of Babylon, 363, 364
on the “shut door”, 368-370
on the sanctuary and time, 8, 372
on the intermediate state, 402
Patriotic sentiments, 21-24
Prophecies, his first views of the, 51-59
Public labors, commencement of, 79
Publication of lectures, 130
Pittsburgh Gazette, testimony of, 186
Prof. Stuart, 190, 192, 193, 194, 197, 199
Prof. Hinton, 191, 192
Prof. Bush, 196, 197, 198
his letter to Wm. Miller, 8, 9
Prof. Pond, 196
Phrenological Examination in Boston, 156-158
Passing of the time, 278
Patience under disappointment, 306
Religious Impressions, 41-43
Rules of Interpretation, 48-51
Results of early labors, 83-101
Reverend, repudiates the title of, 97
Reproof of various errors, 364-367

Resolution of sympathy in his blindness, of N. Y. Conf., 395

Response to resolutions of N. Y. Conf., 396-399

Study of the Scriptures, 46
Signs of The Times, publication of, 134
Synopsis of his views, 170-173
Sandy Hill Herald, remarks of, 183-185
Seventy weeks and 2300 days, 217-221, 372
Specimens of his preaching, 228-245
Sickness of Mr. Miller, 247

Seventh month movement—his view of it, 375-379

Sickness in Canada, 386-388

The Scriptures, his love of, 92, 93

The Fountain, temperance paper, testimony of, 167

The Countryman, testimony of, 186
Treatment of opponents, 217
The seventh-month movement, 295
Universalism, letter on, 87
Universalist exhorted, 95
Visit of Lafayette, 70
Visits to Massachusetts, 121
Visit to his house, by D. I. Robinson, 400
Way opens for public labors, 102

Watertown, Mass., account of Mr. Medbury, Baptist minister, 136

Whittier, the poet, letter of, 163

Washington City, labors in, 277

“What I have not done”—an interesting letter, 388-390

CATALOGUE
Of Books, Pamphlets, Tracts, &c., Issued by the Seventh-Day Adventist Publishing Association.

The Advent Review & Herald of the Sabbath, weekly. Terms, $2.00 a year, in advance.

The Youth’s Instructor, monthly, devoted to moral and religious instruction. Terms, 50 cts. a year, in advance.

The Health Reformer, monthly, devoted to an exposition of the laws of life, etc. Terms, $1.00 a year, in advance.

The Advent Tidende, a religious monthly in the Danish language. Terms, $1.00 a year, in advance.

The Svensk Advent Hàrold, a religious monthly in the Swedish tongue. Terms, $1.00 a year, in advance.

The History of the Sabbath and the First Day of The Week. By J. N. Andrews. $1.25.

Thoughts on the Book of Daniel, critical and practical. By U. Smith. Bound, $1.00; condensed edition, paper, 35 cts.

Thoughts on the Revelation, critical and practical. By U. Smith. 328 pp., $1.00.

The Nature and Destiny of Man. By U. Smith. 384 pp., bound, $1.00, paper, 40 cts.

The Constitutional Amendment: or a Discussion between W. H. Littlejohn and the editor of the Christian Statesman on the Sabbath question. $1.00.

The Spirit of Prophecy, Vols. 1 & 2. By Ellen G. White. Each $1.00.

The Christian Life and Public Labors of Wm. Miller, the noted Lecturer and Writer upon the Prophecies. $1.00.

Autobiography of Eld. Joseph Bates, with portrait of the author. 318 pp., $1.00.

Sabbath Readings; or Moral and Religious Reading for Youth and Children. 400 pp., 60 cts.; in five pamphlets, 50 cts.

The Game of Life, with notes. Three illustrations, 5×6 inches each, representing Satan playing with man for his soul. In board, 50 cts., in paper, 30 cts.

Hymns and Spiritual Songs for Camp-meetings and other Religious Gatherings. Compiled by Eld. James White. 196 pp. Bound, 50 cts., paper, 25 cts.

The United States in Prophecy. By U. Smith. Bound, 40 cts.; paper, 20 cts.

The Advent Keepsake; a daily text of Scripture on the Second Advent, etc. Plain muslin, 25 cts.; gilt, 40 cts.

Sermons on the Sabbath and Law; embracing an Outline of the Biblical and Secular History of the Sabbath for 6000 years. By J. N. Andrews. 25 cts.

The State of the Dead. By U. Smith. 224 pp., 25 cts.

History of the Doctrine of the Immortality of the Soul. By D. M. Canright. 25 cts.

Our Faith and Hope, Nos. 1 & 2.—Sermons on the Advent, &c. By James White. Each 20 cts.

Refutation of the Age To Come. By J. H. Waggoner. Price, 20 cts.

The Atonement; an Examination of a Remedial System in the light of Nature and Revelation. By J. H. Waggoner. 20 cts.

The Nature and Tendency of Modern Spiritualism. By J. H. Waggoner. 20 cts.

The Bible From Heaven; a Dissertation. 20 cts.

Miraculous Powers. 20 cts.

The Ministration of Angels; and the Origin, History, and Destiny of Satan. By D. M. Canright. 20 cts.

The Destiny of the Wicked. By U. Smith. 15 cts.

Complete Testimony of the Fathers, concerning the Sabbath and First Day of the Week. By J. N. Andrews. 15 cts.

The Messages of Rev. 14, particularly the Third Angel’s Message and Two-Horned Beast. By J. N. Andrews. 15 cts.

The Resurrection of the Unjust; a Vindication of the Doctrine. By J. H. Waggoner. 15 cts.

The Saints’ Inheritance; or, The Earth Made New. By J. N. Loughborough. 10 cts.

The Sanctuary and Twenty-three Hundred Days. By J. N. Andrews. 10 cts.

Sunday Seventh-day Examined. A Refutation of Mede, Jennings, Akers, and Fuller. By J. N. Andrews. 10 cts.

The Truth Found; the Nature and Obligation of the Sabbath of the Fourth Commandment. By J. H. Waggoner. 10 cts.

Review of Gilfillan, and other authors, on the Sabbath. By T. B. Brown. 10 cts.

Vindication of the True Sabbath. By J. W. Morton. 10 cts.

Date of the Seventy Weeks. By J. N. Andrews. 10 cts.

The Seven Trumpets; an Exposition of Rev. 8 and 9. 10 cts.

Matthew Twenty-Four. By James White. 10 cts.

The Position and Work of the True People of God under the Third Angel’s Message. By W. H. Littlejohn. 10 cts.

The Hope of the Gospel. By J. N. Loughborough. 10 cts.

Sermon on the Two Covenants. 10 cts.

An Appeal to the Baptists, from the Seventh-day Baptists, for the Restoration of the Bible Sabbath. 10 cts.

Milton on the State of the Dead. 5 cts.

FOUR-CENT TRACTS: The Two Covenants—The Law and the Gospel—The Seventh Part of Time—Celestial Railroad—Samuel and the Witch of Endor—The Ten Commandments not Abolished—Address to the Baptists—The Present Truth—The Second Advent—The Sufferings of Christ—The Two Thrones, Representing the Kingdoms of Grace and Glory.

THREE-CENT TRACTS: Much in Little—The Lost-Time Question—Spiritualism a Satanic Delusion—Infidel Cavils Considered—The End of the Wicked—Scripture References—Who Changed the Sabbath?

TWO-CENT TRACTS: Definite Seventh Day—Seven Reasons for Sunday-Keeping Examined—Sabbath by Elihu—The Rich Man and Lazarus—Argument on Sabbaton—The Millennium—Departing and Being with Christ—Fundamental Principles of S. D. Adventists—The Sanctuary of the Bible—The Judgment, or the Waymarks of Daniel to the Holy City.

ONE-CENT TRACTS: Appeal on Immortality—Brief Thoughts on Immortality—Thoughts for the Candid—Sign of the Day of God—The two Laws—Geology and the Bible—The Perfection of the Ten Commandments—The Coming of the Lord—Without Excuse—Which Day, and God’s Answers.

THE WAY OF LIFE: a beautiful Allegorical Picture, illustrating the plan of salvation. Size, 19×24 inches. $1.00.

Works in Other Languages.

The Association also publishes works on some of the above-named subjects in the German, French, Danish, Swedish, and Holland languages.

☞ Any of the foregoing works will be sent by mail to any part of the United States, post-paid, on receipt of the prices above stated. Full Catalogues sent gratis, on application.

⁂ Address

Review & Herald,
Battle Creek, Mich.

*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SKETCHES OF THE CHRISTIAN LIFE AND PUBLIC LABORS OF WILLIAM MILLER ***

Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE

PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any country other than the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook.

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:

- • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”

- • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.

- • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of receipt of the work.

- • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg work, and (c) any Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg

Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.

Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws.

The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516, Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg electronic works

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.

Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility: www.gutenberg.org.

This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.

Table of Contents

- LIFE OF WILLIAM MILLER.

- INTRODUCTION.

- WILLIAM MILLER.

- CHAPTER I.

- CHAPTER II.

- CHAPTER III.

- CHAPTER IV.

- CHAPTER V.

- CHAPTER VI.

- CHAPTER VII.

- CHAPTER VIII.

- CHAPTER IX.

- CHAPTER X.

- CHAPTER XI.

- CHAPTER XII.

- CHAPTER XIII.

- CHAPTER XIV.

- CHAPTER XV.

- CHAPTER XVI.

- CHAPTER XVII.

- CHAPTER XVIII.

- CHAPTER XIX.

- CHAPTER XX.

- FOOTNOTES

- INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

- CATALOGUE Of Books, Pamphlets, Tracts, &c., Issued by the Seventh-Day Adventist Publishing Association.

- THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE